The PDF version pdf file
Display Related Directives to this directive.
Display Reference Documents to this directive.


						      		         	MANUAL
								   	DOE M 440.1-1A

								             Approved:  1-9-06
								    	 Review:  1-9-08

				DOE EXPLOSIVES SAFETY MANUAL

				    U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY
			        Office of Environment, Safety and Health

1.	PURPOSE.  Department of Energy (DOE) policy requires that all DOE activities be 
	conducted in a manner that protects the safety of the public and provides a safe and 
	healthful workplace for employees.  DOE has also prescribed that--

	a.	All personnel shall be protected in any explosives operation undertaken.  

	b.	The level of safety provided shall be at least equivalent to that of the best 
		industrial or government practice, but in no case shall the level of safety be less 
		than that developed through a DOE practice. 

	c.	The risk of death or serious injury shall be limited to the lowest practicable 
		minimum, and

	d.	DOE and National Nuclear Security Administration (NNSA) and their contractors 
		shall continually review their explosives operation with the aim of achieving 
		further refinements and improvement in safety practices and protective features.  

	e.	This Manual describes the Department’s explosive safety requirements 
		applicable to operations involving the development, testing, handling, and 
		processing of explosives or assemblies containing explosives.  It is intended to 
		reflect the state-of-the-art in explosives safety.  In addition, it is essential that 
		applicable criteria and requirements for implementing this policy be readily 
		available and known to those responsible for conducting DOE programs.  This 
		document shall be periodically reviewed and updated to establish new 
		requirements as appropriate.  

2.	CANCELLATION.  DOE M 440.1-1, Explosives Safety Manual, dated 3-29-96.  
	Cancellation of a directive does not modify or otherwise affect any contractual obligation 
	to comply with the directive.  Canceled directives incorporated by reference in a contract 
	remain in effect until the contract is modified to delete the references to the requirements 
	in the canceled directives.  

3.	APPLICABILITY.  

	a.	DOE Elements.  

		(1)	Except for the exclusions in paragraph 3c, this Manual applies to all DOE 
			elements with responsibility for DOE-owned or -leased facilities.  (See 
			Attachment 1 for a complete list of DOE elements as of the date of this 
			Manual.  This Manual automatically applies to DOE elements created 
			after that date.)  Except for the exclusions in paragraph 3c, the 
			requirements in this Manual apply to all DOE elements that engage in 
			developing, manufacturing, handling, storing, transporting, processing, or 
			testing explosives, pyrotechnics and propellants, or assemblies containing 
			these materials.  With the notable exception of onsite explosives storage 
			and transportation, this description is not meant to include routine 
			construction or routine tunnel blasting which are covered by OSHA safety 
			requirements.  

		(2)	The NNSA Administrator will ensure that NNSA employees and 
			contractors comply with their respective responsibilities under this 
			Manual.  

	b.	DOE Contractors.  

		(1)	The CRD (Attachment 2) sets forth requirements that are to be applied 
			to contractors involved with developing, manufacturing, handling, 
			storing, transporting, processing, or testing explosives, pyrotechnics and 
			propellants, or assemblies containing these materials.  

		(2)	Once notified, the contracting officer is responsible for incorporating 
			the applicable requirements of the CRD into the laws, regulations, and 
			DOE directives clause of each contract of contractors that perform work 
			at or for any DOE facility affected by the facility safety hazards 
			described in and requirements established by this Manual.  

		(3)	Regardless of the performer of the work, the contractor is responsible 
			for compliance with the requirements of the CRD that are incorporated 
			in its contract.  The prime contractor is responsible for flowing down 
			the requirements of the CRD to subcontractors at any tier to the extent 
			necessary to ensure the contractor’s compliance with the requirements 
			and the safe performance of work.  

	c.	Exclusions.  

		(1)	With the notable exception of onsite explosives storage and 
			transportation of explosives or explosive assemblies, this Manual is not 
			meant to govern routine construction or routine tunnel blasting which 
			are covered by OSHA safety requirements.  

		(2)	Pursuant to Executive Order (E.O.) 12344, Naval Nuclear Propulsion 
			Program, the Director, Naval Nuclear Propulsion Program, will 
			implement and oversee requirements of this Order for programs under 
			the Director’s cognizance as set forth in the Defense Procurement 
			Reform Act of 1984 (P.L. 98-525) and the Military Lands Withdrawal 
			Act of 1999 (P.L. 106-65).  

		(3)	Requirements of this Manual do not apply to the Bonneville Power 
			Administration.  

4.	CONTACT.  Questions, comments, and suggestions concerning this Manual should be 
	referred to the Office of Nuclear and Facility Safety Policy at 301-903-3190.  

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF ENERGY:  
							CLAY SELL
							Deputy Secretary

ACRONYMS

ACGIH	American Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists
AHJ	Authority Having Jurisdiction
ASTM	American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTI	American National Standards Institute
BOE	Bureau of Explosives
DBA	Design Basis Accident
DDESB	Department of Defense Explosives Safety Board
DoD	Department of Defense
DOE	Department of Energy
DOT	Department of Transportation
DSC	Differential Scanning Calorimetry
DTA	Differential Thermal Analysis
EBW	Exploding Bridge Wire
EDC	Explosives Development Committee
EED	Electroexplosive Device
EIDS	Extremely Insensitive Detonating Substance
EOD	Explosive Ordnance Disposal
FMECA	Failure Modes, Effects, and Criticality Analysis
HAZOP	Hazard and Operability Study
HE	High Explosive
HMX	Cyclotetramethylene Tetranitramine
IHE	Insensitive High Explosive
LEL	Lower Explosive Limit
LFL	Lower Flammable Limit
LPS	Lightning Protection System
MCE	Maximum Credible Event
MSDS	Material Safety Data Sheet
NE	Nuclear Explosive
NEC	National Electric Code
NEO	Nuclear Explosive Operation
NEW	Net Explosive Weight
NEQ	Net Explosive Quantity
NFPA	National Fire Protection Association
NNSA	National Nuclear Security Administration
OSHA	Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PBX	Plastic Bonded Explosive
PEL	Permissible Explosive Limit
PETN	Pentaerythritol Tetranitrate
RDX	Cyclotrimethylene Trinitramine
SOP	Standard Operating Procedure
SPMS	Safety Performance Measurement System
SSR	Safe Secure Railcar
SST	Safe Secure Trailer
TATB	Triamino Trinitrobenzene
TMAC	Toxic Materials Advisory Committee
TNT	Trinitrotoluene
UL	Underwriters Laboratory
UN	United Nations
UXO	Unexploded Ordnance


       				  CHAPTER I—INTRODUCTION

1.0	SCOPE, PURPOSE, AND JUSTIFICATION

	a.	This Manual prescribes the Department of Energy (DOE) safety standards and 
		procedures used to implement the DOE safety policy contained in 
		DOE O 440.1A, Worker Protection Management for DOE Federal and 
		Contractor Employees (current version) for operations involving explosives, 
		pyrotechnics, and propellants, or assemblies containing these materials.  

	b.	DOE explosives handling and processing operations are an integral part of DOE 
		weapons and weapons-related development, manufacturing, and dismantlement 
		activities.  Safety in all operations associated with weapons development is an 
		ongoing, prime concern and must continually be given high priority in all 
		program direction and management.  This Manual provides uniform guidance for 
		all DOE and National Nuclear Security Administration (NNSA) facilities and 
		installations involved in explosives handling or processing.  DOE will update the 
		Manual periodically to incorporate lessons learned, new technology, and 
		suggestions for improvements.  The Assistant Secretary for Environment, Safety 
		and Health is responsible for this task.  

	c.	Maintaining explosives safety in all operations within DOE is an ongoing process 
		that, to be truly effective, must be given high priority in all program direction, 
		management, and line activities.  Due to the unique nature of DOE’s active role in 
		research and development in new explosives formulations, explosives synthesis, 
		charge geometry, and explosives assemblies, as well as the proximity of 
		explosives to weapon components, it is necessary to maintain the level of 
		explosives safety standards commensurate with the risks.  

	d.	This Manual establishes safety controls and standards not addressed in other 
		existing DOE or non-DOE regulations to close the considerable safety gap created 
		by DOE’s unique activities to govern the DOE explosives safety process and 
		ensure that explosives safety is commensurate with the actual risk.  However, the 
		Department of Defense (DoD), Occupational Safety and Health Administration 
		(OSHA), and other nationally recognized standards, such as the National Fire 
		Protection Association (NFPA) codes, provide the basic framework.  Specific 
		requirements from these documents are applicable and pertinent as determined by 
		the “Authority Having Jurisdiction.”  Since the conception of the first DOE 
		Explosives Safety Manual in 1978, and the formation of the expert DOE 
		Explosives Safety Committee, no explosives-related fatalities have occurred in 
		DOE and explosives safety practices have significantly improved.  Continued 
		maintenance of this Manual, combined with field adherence, will maintain the 
		high level of explosives safety evidenced within DOE over the past two decades.  

2.0	APPLICABILITY

	a.	This Manual applies to all DOE facilities engaged in developing, manufacturing, 
		handling, storing, transporting, processing, or testing explosives, pyrotechnics, 
		and propellants, or assemblies containing these materials, and to the safe 
		management of such operations.  With the exception of explosives storage and 
		transportation, this Manual does not apply to commercial activities such as routine 
		construction or routine tunnel blasting.  

	b.	The design of all new explosives facilities shall conform to the requirements 
		established in this Manual and implemented in the current version of 
		DOE O 420.1B, Facility Safety.  It is not intended that existing physical facilities 
		be changed arbitrarily to comply with these provisions, except as required by law.  
		Existing facilities that do not comply with these standards may continue to be 
		used for the balance of their functional lives if the following two conditions are 
		met:  

		(1)	The current operation presents no significantly greater risk than that 
			assumed when the facility was originally designed.  

		(2)	It can be demonstrated clearly that a modification to bring the facility into 
			compliance is not feasible.  

	c.	However, in the case of a major renovation, the facility must be brought into 
		compliance with current standards.  

	d.	The requirements are presented as either mandatory or advisory.  Mandatory 
		requirements, denoted by the words “shall,” “must,” or “will,” must be followed 
		unless the DOE Operations Officer or NNSA Site Manager grants an exemption.  
		Advisory requirements denoted by “should” or “may,” may be deviated from with 
		a written waiver granted by facility management.  

3.0	EXEMPTIONS

	a.	An exemption is a written release from a mandatory safety requirement.  
		Competent, knowledgeable, and experienced explosives safety engineers shall 
		review all exemption requests.  Approved exemption requests should feature 
		methodologies to mitigate to the highest practical level the additional safety risks 
		through additional engineering or administrative controls.  

3.1	Each such request shall contain the following information:  

	a.	Description of the condition.  

	b.	Safety requirement necessitating deviation. 
 
	c.	Reason why compliance cannot be achieved. 

	d.	Steps taken to provide protection and to ameliorate the additional risk.  

	e.	Statement of whether equivalent safety is provided and, if not, assessment of the 
		residual risk.  
	f.	Any proposed corrective action and schedule.  

	g.	Duration of the exemption.  

3.2	Exemptions Achieving Equivalent Safety

	a.	The DOE Operations Officer or NNSA Site Manager is permitted to grant 
		exemptions from the mandatory requirements of this Manual provided 
		compliance is impracticable and the facility operator has demonstrated that the 
		conditions, practices, means, methods, or processes to be used are equivalent.  
		Requests for exemptions shall be submitted to the DOE Operations Officer or 
		NNSA Site Manager for action.  

3.3	Exemptions Not Achieving Equivalent Safety

	a.	The DOE Operations Officer or NNSA Site Manager shall submit to the Program 
		Secretarial Officer (PSO) all requests for exemptions from mandatory 
		requirements for which equivalent protection of operating personnel, the public, 
		and property cannot be achieved.  The PSO, with the advice and recommendation 
		from the Assistant Secretary for Environment, Safety and Health, shall make a 
		final determination on the request for exemption.  The DOE Operations Office or 
		NNSA Site Manager may grant a temporary exemption while the PSO is 
		processing an exemption request.  The temporary exemption is limited to the 
		shorter of 180 days from its granting or until the exemption is approved or denied.  
		Exemptions will be reviewed for applicability and currency at intervals not to 
		exceed 5 years.  

4.0	WAIVERS

	a.	If an activity, operation, or process is determined to be out of compliance with the 
		Manual’s advisory requirements, but the activity, operation, or process is 
		determined to be safe and necessary, facility management may grant written 
		approval in the form of a waiver for an alternate solution.  Waivers will be 
		granted for the minimum time necessary; ongoing waivers shall be updated every 
		three years.  Facility management shall maintain a central file of active waivers 
		and provide a copy of each waiver to the local DOE contracting officer.  

4.1	Each waiver shall contain, as a minimum, the following information:  

	a.	Description of the condition.  

	b.	Safety standard requiring alternate solution.  

	c.	Reason why compliance is not achieved.  

	d.	Steps taken to provide alternate protection.  

	e.	Any proposed corrective actions and schedule.  

	f.	Waiver duration or expiration date.  

5.0	MANUAL ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT

	a.	This Manual shall be kept current.  The Office of Facility Safety shall ensure that 
		this Manual is kept up-to-date and that the DOE Directives System maintains a 
		current version online at http://www.directives.doe.gov.  

	b.	The DOE Explosives Safety Committee, through the Office of Facility Safety, 
		shall administer and manage this Manual.  

5.1	DOE Explosives Safety Committee Organization

	a.	The DOE Explosives Safety Committee is composed of a member from each of 
		the following:  [The membership listing has been updated by the Chairman of the 
		DOE Explosives Safety Committee to reflect reorganizations in DOE/NNSA.  
		Current membership is available upon request from the site representative to the 
		Committee, or from the Committee Chairman].  

		(1)	DOE Office of Facility Safety

		(2)	NNSA Office of Military Application and Stockpile Support

		(3)	NNSA Service Center, Albuquerque

		(4)	NNSA Service Center

		(5)	NNSA Livermore Site Office

		(6)	NNSA Nevada Site Office

		(7)	NNSA Sandia Site Office

		(8)	NNSA Pantex Site Office

		(9)	DOE Idaho Field Office

		(10)	DOE Savannah River Office

		(11)	Los Alamos National Laboratory

		(12)	Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory

		(13)	Pantex Plant

		(14)	Kansas City Plant

		(15)	Idaho National Engineering and Environmental Laboratory

		(16)	Nevada Test Site

		(17)	Sandia National Laboratories

		(18)	Wackenhut Services, Savannah River Site

	b.	A representative of the DOE Office of Facility Safety shall chair the committee 
		and will report directly to the DOE Director, Office of Facility Safety.  

5.2	DOE Explosives Safety Committee Functions

	a.	The DOE Explosives Safety Committee shall perform the following 
		functions:  

		(1)	Review, evaluate, and act under authority delegated from the DOE 
			Director, Office of Facility Safety, on proposed changes or revisions to 
			this Manual.  

		(2)	Evaluate and respond to requests for interpretations of the Manual.  

		(3)	Meet periodically, as appropriate, to review and evaluate Manual 
			adequacy and existing exemptions, and to initiate Manual changes as 
			needed.  

	b.	The DOE Explosive Safety Committee (at the local level its individual voting 
		members) is (are) the “Authority Having Jurisdiction” over DOE explosives 
		safety matters.  

	c.	Changes to this Manual become effective once they have been approved by the 
		DOE Explosives Safety Committee and the approval is published in the official 
		minutes of committee meetings.  

6.0	DEFINITIONS

For purposes of this Manual, the following terms are defined.  

AIR TERMINAL.  (1) A component of a Lightning Protection System (LPS) designed to accept 
direct attachment of the lightning flash and transfer the current to the down conductor.  (See 
STRIKE TERMINATION DEVICE).  (2) A strike termination device that is a receptor for 
attachment of flashes to the LPS and is listed for the purpose.  

APPROVED.  Complying with the provision(s) of this Manual and with instructions and details 
issued by the authority having jurisdiction or with those of other approving agencies specified 
herein.  

ARM.  A general term that implies the energizing of electronic and electrical circuitry, which in 
turn controls power sources or other components used to initiate explosives.  The arming 
operation completes all steps preparatory to electrical initiation of explosives except the actual 
fire signal.  

BARRICADE.  An intervening approved barrier, natural or artificial, of such type, size, and 
construction as to limit in a prescribed manner the effect of an explosion on nearby buildings or 
personnel.  

BAY.  A location (e.g., room, cubicle, cell, or work area, etc.) containing a single type of 
explosives activity, which affords the required protection specified for appropriate hazard 
classification of the activity involved.  

BLENDING.  The mixing of solid materials (usually dry) by gravity flow, usually induced by 
vessel rotation.  

BOND.  An interconnection of metal objects, generally to the LPS.  (See BONDING).  

BONDED.  The joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path that will ensure 
electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed.  

BONDING.  (1) An electrical connection between a metal object and an LPS component.  This 
produces electrical continuity between the LPS and the object and minimizes electro-magnetic 
potential differences.  Bonding is done to prevent sideflash.  (2) An electrical connection 
between an electrically conductive object and an LPS component that is intended to significantly 
reduce potential differences created by lightning currents.  

BOOSTER.  Explosives used in an explosive train to amplify the shock output of the initiating 
device and cause detonation of the main explosive charge.  

CASUAL.  A person other than an operator who intermittently visits an explosives operation for 
the purpose of supervision, inspection, maintenance, etc.  Casuals do not perform hands-on work 
with explosives but are otherwise involved with the explosives operation being performed.  
Casuals are accounted for in the established personnel limits for the area and are provided a level 
of protection consistent with the explosion hazard of operations in adjacent areas.  

CATENARY SYSTEM.  An LPS consisting of overhead wire suspended from poles connected 
to a grounding system via down conductors.  Its purpose is to intercept lightning flashes from the 
protected area.  

CLEAR ZONE.  The required maximum quantity-distance for the protection of personnel and 
facilities from the Potential Explosion Site (PES).  

COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL.  Any material that, when ignited, will sustain burning.  

COMPATIBILITY.  The chemical property of materials to coexist without adverse reaction for 
an acceptable period of time.  Compatibility in storage exists when storing materials together 
does not increase the probability of an accident or, for a given quantity, the magnitude of the 
effects of such an accident.  Storage compatibility groups are assigned to provide for segregated 
storage.  

CONCURRENT OPERATIONS.  Operations performed simultaneously and in close enough 
proximity that an incident with one operation could adversely influence the other.  

CONDUCTOR.  Usually a cable intended to be used to carry lightning currents between strike 
termination devices and ground terminals.  The conductor also serves as a strike termination 
device for a catenary LPS.  Conductors are usually heavy metallic cables but metallic building 
structural members, (e.g., steel I-beams) can also function as down conductors.  

CONTACT OPERATIONS.  An operation in which an operator and an explosive item are both 
present with no operational shield.  

CONTROL POINT.  The location used for personnel control and operation coordination in an 
explosives operating or test area.  

CORING.  A machining operation that removes material in the form of a cylinder by cutting at 
the circumference to create a hole or recover the material from the center of the cut.  

COUNTERPOISE.  A type of an earth electrode system consisting of conductor cables buried 
around the structure to be protected.  Generally, a counterpoise will have more surface area 
contacting the earth than ground rod systems.  Commonly called a ground ring electrode.  (See 
EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM).  

CRITICAL TEMPERATURE.  Temperature above which the self-heating of an explosive causes 
a runaway reaction.  It is dependent on mass, geometry, and thermal boundary conditions.  

DANGER ZONE.  That area around a test site where personnel could be in physical jeopardy 
due to overpressure, fragments, or firebrands released during an explosive test.  

DEFLAGRATION.  A rapid chemical reaction in which the output of heat is sufficient to enable 
the reaction to proceed and be accelerated without input of heat from another source.  
Deflagration is a surface phenomenon with the reaction products flowing away from the 
unreacted material along the surface at subsonic velocity.  The effect of a true deflagration under 
confinement is an explosion.  Confinement of the reaction increases pressure, rate of reaction, 
and temperature and may cause transition into a detonation.  

DETONATION.  A violent chemical reaction within a chemical compound or mechanical 
mixture evolving heat and pressure.  A detonation is a reaction that proceeds through the reacted 
material toward the unreacted material at a supersonic velocity.  The result of the chemical 
reaction is exertion of extremely high pressure on the surrounding medium, forming a 
propagating shock wave that is originally of supersonic velocity.  When the material is located 
on or near the surface of the ground, a detonation is normally characterized by a crater.  

DIFFERENTIAL SCANNING CALORIMETRY (DSC).  A technique in which the difference in 
energy inputs into a substance and a reference material is measured as a function of temperature 
or time while the substance and the reference material are subjected to a controlled temperature 
program, or are held isothermally.  The record is the differential scanning calorimetry or DSC 
curve.  The energy input is substituted for ?T and is plotted in the same manner as a normal 
DTA curve.  

DIFFERENTIAL THERMAL ANALYSIS (DTA).  A technique in which the temperature 
difference between a substance and a reference material is measured as a function of temperature 
or time while the substance and the reference material are subjected to a controlled temperature 
program or are held isothermally.  The record is the DTA curve.  The energy input is substituted 
for ?T and is plotted in the same manner as a normal differential thermal analysis (DTA) curve.  

DIRECT CONTACT WITH EXPLOSIVES.  Physical contact between an electrical instrument 
or equipment to bare explosives, the metallic casing of an explosive, or the firing leads of an 
explosive device.  

DOWN CONDUCTOR.  A form of a main conductor designed to conduct the current of a 
lightning flash vertically down to the earth electrode system.  

DRYING.  The removal of volatiles from ingredients or mixtures.  

DSC.  See DIFFERENTIAL SCANNING CALORIMETRY.  

DTA.  See DIFFERENTIAL THERMAL ANALYSIS.  

EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM.  Sometimes called a ground terminal.  (1) A component of an 
LPS that transfers the current of a lightning flash to the earth.  The earth electrode system is 
connected to the down conductor and is in direct contact with the earth.  Examples of earth 
electrode systems include ground rods, a counterpoise, buried metal plates, Ufer grounds, or 
other similar devices.  The matrix of a Faraday-like shield acts as the earth (ground) electrode for 
an LPS.  (2) The portion of an LPS, such as a ground rod, ground plate, or ground conductor, that 
is installed to provide electrical contact with earth.  

EBW.  See EXPLODING BRIDGEWIRE.  

EED.  See ELECTROEXPLOSIVE DEVICE.  

ELECTRICAL BONDING.  Electrical connection between two conductive objects intended to 
prevent development of an electrical potential between them.  

ELECTROEXPLOSIVE DEVICE (EED).  An EED is a device containing some reaction 
mixture (explosive or pyrotechnic) that is electrically initiated.  The output of the initiation is 
heat, shock, or mechanical action.  See also LOW-ENERGY EED.  

EXPERIMENTAL OPERATING PROCEDURE.  A procedure prepared for conducting a 
specific experiment a limited number of times under close technical supervision.  

EXPLODING BRIDGEWIRE (EBW).  An EED that is initiated by the discharge of a high 
current through the device bridgewire, causing the wire to explode and produce a shockwave.  
An EBW as defined herein is a device containing no primary explosive.  

EXPLOSIVE.  Any chemical compound or mechanical mixture which is designed to function as 
an explosive, or chemical compound which functions through self-reaction as an explosive, and 
which, when subjected to heat, impact, friction, shock, or other suitable initiation stimulus, 
undergoes a very rapid chemical change with the evolution of large volumes of highly heated 
gases that exert pressures in the surrounding medium.  The term applies to materials that either 
detonate or deflagrate.  DOE explosives may be dyed various colors except pink, which is 
reserved for mock explosive.  

EXPLOSIVE DECONTAMINATION.  The removal of hazardous explosive material.  

EXPLOSIVES FACILITY.  A structure or defined area used for explosives storage or 
operations.  Excluded are explosives presenting only localized, minimal hazards as determined 
by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.  Examples of excluded items may include user quantities 
of small arms ammunition, commercial distress signals, or cartridges for cartridge actuated tools, 
etc.  

EXTRUDING.  Forcing a plastic-type material, under pressure, into a confined space or through 
a confined opening to produce a desired configuration.  

FACILITY.  A group of buildings or equipment used for explosive operations at one geographic 
location, generally owned by DOE.  

FACILITY MANAGEMENT.  Management staff of the facility operator (the contractor).  

FACILITY OPERATOR.  The organization having responsibility for conducting operations at a 
DOE facility.  

FARADAY CAGE or FARADAY-LIKE SHIELD.  An LPS where the area to be protected is 
enclosed by a heavy metal screen (like a birdcage) or continuous metallic structure with no 
unbonded metallic penetrations.  On such a system, the lightning current flows on the exterior of 
the structure, not through the interior.  

FIREBRAND.  A projected burning or hot fragment whose thermal energy is transferred to a 
receptor.  

FIRING PAD.  The prepared site where explosive items are fired for test data acquisition.  

FIRING SITE.  Controlled access area where test firing of explosives is conducted.  

FLAMMABLE LIQUID.  Any liquid having a flash point below 60°C and a vapor pressure not 
exceeding 280 kPa (41 psia) at 37.8°C.  This is the definition as applied in this Manual; it 
includes some materials defined as combustible liquids by the Department of Transportation 
(DOT) and/or NFPA 70, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.  

FLASH.  The total lightning event.  A flash may involve several lightning strokes, generally 
using the same path through the air as the initial event.  

FLASH POINT.  The temperature at which a liquid or volatile solid gives off a vapor sufficient 
to form an ignitable mixture with air near the surface of the material or within the test vessel.  

FORMULATION.  (1) The operation of combining ingredients to produce a mixture of a final 
desired composition possessing specific physical and explosive properties.  (2) An explosives 
composition.  

GROUND RESISTANCE.  The value (in ohms) of the resistance between an earth electrode 
system and earth.  

GROUND RING ELECTRODE (GRE).  An earth electrode system that encircles the structure, 
either on or buried in the earth.  (See COUNTERPOISE and EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM).  

GROUND ROD.  A component of one type of earth electrode system, generally a cylindrical 
device of approximately 3/4-in. diameter by approximately 10-ft long driven into the soil.  The 
ground rod is attached to the down conductor and dissipates a lightning flash’s current into the 
earth.  

GROUND TERMINAL.  See EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM.  

GROUNDED.  (1) Connected to earth or some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.  
(2) Connected to earth or some conducting body that is connected to earth.  
GROUNDING.  Providing an electrical path to the earth, generally to the earth electrode system.  

HEATING LIMITS.  The conditions established for safely heating an explosive system 
(maximum temperature, heating time, heating rate, etc.).  These limits are based on the estimated 
critical temperature of the explosive system with a suitable margin of safety.  

HIGH-ENERGY INITIATOR.  Exploding bridge wire systems, slapper detonators, and EEDs 
with similar energy requirements for initiation.  

HIGH PRESSURE.  Gas pressure greater than 3,000 psig (21 MPa gauge); liquid pressure 
greater than 5,000 psig (35 MPa gauge).  

HOLE.  (as applied to machine explosives).  Any cavity that is more than one-half diameter 
deep, being cut by any tool with the direction of feed along the axis of rotation.  

HOT WORK (thermal).  Any operation requiring the use of a flame-producing device, an 
electrically heated tool producing a temperature higher than 109°C, or a mechanical tool that can 
produce sparks or heat explosives or explosives contamination to provide an initiation stimulus.  

HYDROSTATIC PRESSING.  The operation of compacting a material that is confined in a 
press by a diaphragm by hydraulically applying pressure to the diaphragm.  

IHE.  See INSENSITIVE HIGH EXPLOSIVES.  

IHE SUBASSEMBLIES.  IHE hemispheres or spheres with booster charges, with or without 
detonators that pass the DOE qualification tests listed in Table IX-3.  

IHE WEAPONS.  Weapons listed in DOE-DNA TP 20-7, Nuclear Safety Criteria (for Warhead 
Storage), as being exempt from storage and transportation limits are classified as IHE weapons 
when stored or transported alone or in combination with each other.  This classification is valid 
only if the spacing between individual units is that provided by storage or shipping containers or, 
if not in containers, by the spacing specified in TP 20-7.  

IMPEDANCE.  The resistance and reactance to an electrical current.  

INDIRECT CONTACT WITH EXPLOSIVES.  When bare explosives, the metallic casing of an 
explosive, or the firing leads of an explosive device make contact with electrical instrument or 
equipment through electrically conductive equipment or surfaces other than the equipment leads.  

INDUCTANCE.  (1) The property of a conductor that makes it oppose any current change 
through it.  (2) A process where an object having electrical or magnetic energy can produce 
similar properties in a nearby object without direct contact.  

INERT MATERIALS.  Materials that show no exothermic decomposition when tested by DSC 
or DTA.  Moreover, when tested by recognized compatibility tests, the inert material shall not 
show any incompatibility with energetic material with which it may be combined.  Inert material 
shall neither alter the onset of exotherm of the DSC or DTA trace of the energetic material nor 
increase the rate of decomposition or gas evolution of the energetic material.  

IN-PROCESS STORAGE MAGAZINE (facility, vault, rest house, etc.).  See SERVICE 
MAGAZINE.  

INHABITED BUILDING.  A building or structure other than operating buildings, magazines, 
and auxiliary buildings occupied in whole or in part as a habitation for people or where people 
are accustomed to assemble, both within and outside DOE facilities.  Land outside DOE facilities 
shall be considered as sites for inhabited buildings.  

INHABITED BUILDING DISTANCE.  The minimum distance permitted between explosives 
locations and inhabited buildings, administrative areas, site boundaries, main power stations, and 
other facilities of vital or strategic nature.  

INITIATION STIMULUS.  Energy input to an explosive in a form potentially capable of 
initiating a rapid decomposition reaction.  Typical initiation stimuli are heat, friction, impact, 
electrical discharge, and shock.  

INITIATION, WITH ITS OWN MEANS.  Explosives or ammunition having their normal 
initiating device (e.g., detonators or squibs) assembled to them so that this device is considered 
to present a significant risk of activation during storage.  

INITIATION, WITHOUT ITS OWN MEANS.  Explosives or ammunition that (1) are not stored 
with an initiating device assembled to them; or (2) have the initiating device assembled to them, 
but (a) safety features preclude initiation of the explosives filler of the end item in the event of 
accidental functioning of the initiating device, or (b) the initiating device does not contain any 
primary explosives and has a high threshold of initiation (e.g., EBW or slapper detonators).  The 
power source for the initiator should not be present within the assembly or system.  If the 
initiator’s power source is present, two or more management-certified safety devices connected 
in series shall be present to interrupt any flow of energy from the power source to the initiator.  

INSENSITIVE HIGH EXPLOSIVES (IHE).  Explosive substances that, although mass 
detonating, are so insensitive that the probability of accidental initiation or transition from 
burning to detonation is negligible.  The materials passing the DOE qualification tests in 
Table IX-1 are classified as IHE, and are listed in 

INTEGRAL SYSTEM.  An LPS that has strike termination devices mounted on the structure to 
be protected.  These strike termination devices are connected to the earth electrode system via 
down conductors.  Metallic structure members can serve as parts of the LPS.  

INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE.  Gas pressure from 150 to 3,000 psig (1 to 21 MPa gauge); 
liquid pressure from 1,500 to 5,000 psig (10 to 35 MPa gauge).  

INTRALINE DISTANCE.  The minimum distance permitted between any two operating 
buildings or sites within an operating line, at least one of which contains, or is designed to 
contain, explosives.  

INTRINSICALLY SAFE.  An apparatus or system whose circuits are incapable of producing 
any spark or thermal effect capable of causing ignition of a mixture of flammable or combustible 
material under test conditions described in ANSI/UL 913.  

ISOSTATIC PRESSING.  The operation of compacting a material in a sealed flexible container.  
The container is submerged in a pressure vessel, and the vessel is pressurized with liquid.  

LABORATORY OPERATIONS.  Experimental study, testing, and analysis of small quantities 
of energetic materials.  Manufacturing processes with small quantities of materials are not 
included.  

LEL.  See LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT.  

LFL.  See LOWER FLAMMABLE LIMIT.  

LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM, (LDS).  A device or system to detect the presence of 
lightning activity in the general area.  

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (LPS).  A lightning protection system is a complete 
system of strike termination devices, conductors, ground terminals, interconnecting conductors, 
surge suppression devices, and other connectors or fittings required to complete the system.  

LIGHTNING WARNING SYSTEM.  A system that detects the presence and range of lightning 
activity and thereby issues an alert or warning advisory.  

LOW-ENERGY EED.  All EEDs except EBW detonators and slapper detonators.  

LOW PRESSURE.  Gas less than 150 psig (1 MPa gauge); liquid less than 1,500 psig (10 MPa 
gauge).  

LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (LEL).  The concentration of vapor or dust in air below which an 
explosion cannot occur.  

LOWER FLAMMABLE LIMIT (LFL).  The concentration of a vapor or dust in air below which 
a burning reaction cannot be sustained.  

MACHINING.  A forming operation accomplished by removing material with a mechanically 
operated cutting tool.  

MACHINING OVERTEST.  A test to evaluate the susceptibility of an explosive material to 
initiation during machining.  

MAGAZINE.  See SERVICE MAGAZINE or STORAGE MAGAZINE.  

MAGAZINE DISTANCE.  The minimum distance permitted between any two storage 
magazines.  The distance required is determined by the type(s) of magazine and also the type and 
quantity of explosives stored therein.  

MAST SYSTEM.  An LPS system that consists of one or more poles with a strike termination 
device connected to an earth electrode system by down conductors.  In the case of a metallic 
pole, the pole could serve as the strike termination device and down conductor.  Its purpose is to 
intercept lightning flashes from the protected area.  

MAXIMUM CREDIBLE EVENT (MCE).  The MCE from a hypothesized accidental explosion 
or fire is the worst single event that is likely to occur from a given quantity and disposition of 
explosives or explosives devices.  The event must be realistic with a reasonable probability of 
occurrence considering the explosive propagation, burning rate characteristics, and physical 
protection given to the items involved.  

MELTING.  Operations involving change in the physical state of explosives from solid to liquid.  

MILLING.  (1) Operations that either reduce solid material particle size by attrition or apply high 
shear mixing to incorporate solid materials into plastic binders.  (2) A surface machining 
operation performed on a mill.  

MIXING.  A mechanical operation that combines dissimilar materials.  

MOCK EXPLOSIVE.  Substances bearing similar physical properties (texture, density, 
cohesion, etc.) to an explosive material.  They are non-detonable. However, some are exothermic 
materials that will burn.  Mock explosives are used to represent explosives for purposes such as 
dry run testing of equipment.  DOE mock explosives are normally pink in color.  

NET EXPLOSIVE WEIGHT (NEW).  Net explosive weight expressed in pounds.  

NEW (OR EXPERIMENTAL) EXPLOSIVES.  Explosive, explosive mixture or explosive and 
binder mixture that the Explosives Development Committee (EDC) has not characterized.  

NON-FACILITY PERSONNEL.  Construction or maintenance personnel who do not have a 
continuing contract with DOE or NNSA or their agents at the facility concerned.  

NON-OCCUPIED or UNOCCUPIED AREA.  A location where occupancy is of a transitory 
nature such as building corridors, access ramps, and facility roads.  Other examples are locations 
such as mechanical equipment rooms, equipment/parts staging/storage areas, decontamination 
areas and janitors closets, which typically have a low personnel density and an intermittent and 
relatively short-term duration of occupancy for assigned work but in which personnel are not 
normally permanently assigned.  

NUCLEAR EXPLOSIVE (NE).  An assembly containing fissionable and/or fusionable materials 
and main charge high-explosive parts or propellants capable of producing a nuclear detonation 
(e.g., a nuclear weapon or test device).  

NUCLEAR EXPLOSIVE OPERATION (NEO).  Any activity involving a nuclear explosive, 
including activities in which main charge high-explosive parts and pit are collocated.  

OCCUPIED AREA.  Any work area that can be reasonably considered integral to an explosives 
operating area to which personnel are assigned or in which work is performed, however 
intermittently.  Examples of areas to be considered as occupied are assembly/disassembly cells 
or bays, explosives operating bays, radiography control and film processing rooms, offices, break 
areas and rest rooms.  

OPERATIONAL SHIELD.  A barricade constructed to protect personnel, material, or equipment 
from the effects of a possible fire or explosion occurring at a particular operation.  

PENETRATION.  A conductive object that passes through the zone of protection or exterior 
surface of an LPS.  

PERSONNEL BARRIER.  A device designed to limit or prevent personnel access to a building 
or an area during hazardous operations.  

POTENTIAL EXPLOSION SITE (PES).  The location of a quantity of ammunition and 
explosives that will create a blast, fragment, thermal, or debris hazard in the event of an 
accidental explosion of its contents.  

PRESSING.  The operation of increasing the density of explosive material by applying pressure.  

PRIMARY EXPLOSIVE.  A sensitive explosive which nearly always detonates by simple 
ignition from such means as a spark, flame, impact and other primary heat sources of appropriate 
magnitude.  Examples are mercury fulminate, lead azide, and lead styphnate, and other materials 
of similar sensitivities.  

PROGRAM SECRETARIAL OFFICER.  A senior program official, which includes the 
Assistant Secretaries or Office Directors at the Assistant Secretary level for DOE or the Deputy 
or Associate Administrators for NNSA.  

PROPELLANT.  Explosive composition used to propel projectiles and rockets and to generate 
gases for powering auxiliary devices.  

PUBLIC TRAFFIC ROUTE DISTANCE.  The minimum separation distance required between a 
potential explosion site and any public street, road, highway, passenger railroad, or navigable 
waterway (including roads on DOE-controlled land open to public travel).  

PUNCH AND DIE PRESSING.  The operation of compacting a material confined by a die by 
forcing a punch or punches into the die and against the material.  

PYROTECHNIC MATERIAL.  Physical mixtures of finely divided fuels and oxidizer powders; 
may include various organic binders and color intensifiers.  The material is intended to produce 
an effect by heat, light, sound, gas or smoke, or a combination of these as the result of non-
detonative, self-sustaining exothermic chemical reactions.  

RATED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES, INSTRUMENTATION AND 
MATERIALS.  As used in the DOE Explosives Safety Manual, “rated” refers to those items used 
in explosives locations that meet identified standards or have been tested and found suitable for 
use in Class I or Class II hazardous atmosphere.  For an item to be considered “rated,” a 
nationally recognized testing laboratory shall have approved its use (for example, Factory 
Mutual) or listed it for use (for example, Underwriters Laboratory) in the appropriate Class I or 
Class II hazardous atmosphere.  “Rated” items are used to provide protection in explosives 
locations where the National Electrical Code Article 500 does not normally apply.  

REMOTE OPERATION.  An operation performed in a manner that will protect personnel in the 
event of an accidental explosion.  This can be accomplished by distance, shielding, barricades, or 
a combination thereof.  

RESISTANCE.  The property of a conductor to oppose the flow of an electric current and 
change electric energy into heat.  For lightning protection purposes low resistance values are 
desired.  Resistance is measured in ohms.  

RETURN STROKE.  That part of a lightning flash where high electric currents are developed as 
the negatively charged leader encounters the positively charged return stroke.  The phase of 
lightning that produces electric current, heat, a light flash and thunder.  

RISK.  A measure of the combination of the probability and consequences of the hazards of an 
operation, expressed in qualitative or quantitative terms.  

ROLLING SPHERE ZONE OF PROTECTION MODEL.  A theoretical concept describing the 
area protected by an LPS where an imaginary sphere (100-ft radius for explosive facilities) 
approaches an LPS from all angles and directions.  The protected area is the area of the curve 
between where the curve is tangent to the ground, and the curve touches the LPS.  For example, 
with the rolling sphere method the area protected by a mast system looks like a teepee.  

SAFETY ANALYSIS.  A document prepared to systematically identify the hazards of a DOE 
operation; describe and analyze the adequacy of measures taken to eliminate, control, or mitigate 
identified hazards; and analyze and evaluate potential accidents and their associated risks.  

SCREENING.  An operation using screens to separate particles of differing sizes.  

SECONDARY EXPLOSIVES.  An explosive substance which is relatively insensitive (when 
compared to primary explosives), which is usually initiated by primary explosives with or 
without the aid of boosters or supplementary charges.  Such explosives may react as a 
deflagrating or as a detonating explosive.  Examples are TNT, plastic bonded formulations, and 
other materials of similar sensitivity.  

SERVICE MAGAZINE, REST HOUSE, ETC.  An auxiliary building or suitable designated 
room (vault) used for the intermediate storage of explosives materials not exceeding the 
minimum amount necessary for safe and efficient operation.  

SHUNT.  An electrical interconnection of various portions of EED circuitry to prevent the 
development of an electrical charge differential between the parts.  

SIDEFLASH.  (1) The phenomena where lightning current will jump through a non-conductive 
medium to attach to improperly bonded metallic objects.  (2) An electrical spark, caused by 
differences of potential, which occurs between conductive metal bodies or between conductive 
metal bodies and a component of an LPS or ground.  

SITE PLAN.  A formal explosives facility and operations safety document to be prepared by 
Facility Management for DOE/NNSA approval of explosives facilities siting and operations 
before the operation starts.  This document becomes the authorization basis for explosives 
facility operations.  

SITE PLANNING.  The process of performing and documenting an analysis of planned and 
existing facilities and missions involving ammunition and explosives, or occurring within the 
hazard zones created by explosives.  It may include evaluations of blast hazards; fragment 
hazards; protective construction; grounding, bonding, and lightning protection systems; electrical 
installations; natural or man-made terrain features; or other mission or local requirements.  
Effective site planning relies heavily on explosives safety standards, but it also incorporates 
survivability and operational considerations, and economic, security, environmental, and legal 
criteria to meet the goals and needs of the DOE community.  

SLAPPER DETONATOR.  An EED initiated by a rapid discharge of a high current through a 
metal foil.  The expansion of the metal vapor causes a plastic or metal covering to be propelled 
across an air gap and detonate a high-density explosive pellet.  

SMALL ARMS AMMUNITION.  (1) Ammunition designed to be fired from a pistol, revolver, 
rifle, or shotgun held by the hand or to the shoulder; (2) Ammunition of caliber less than 20 mm 
with incendiary, solid, inert, or empty projectiles (with or without tracers) designed to be fired 
from machine guns or cannons; (3) Blank cartridges.  

SOP.  See STANDARD (STANDING) OPERATING PROCEDURE.  

SPECIAL OPERATING PROCEDURE.  A procedure prepared for performance of a specific 
task on a one-time basis, or for situations not encountered in normal operation.  

STANDARD (STANDING) OPERATING PROCEDURE (SOP).  A procedure prepared for 
operation of a facility or performance of a task on a routine basis.  

STORAGE MAGAZINE.  A structure designed or specifically designated for the long-term 
storage of explosives or ammunition.  

STRIKE TERMINATION DEVICE.  (1) A component or feature of an LPS that is intended to 
accept the direct attachment of a lightning flash or strike.  Strike termination devices include 
overhead wires or grids, air terminals, or a building’s (grounded) steel structural elements.  (2) A 
component of an LPS that intercepts lightning flashes and connects them to a path to ground.  
Strike termination devices include air terminals, metal masts, permanent metal parts of 
structures, and overhead ground wires installed in catenary LPSs.  

STROKE.  The high electric current phase of a lightning strike.  The term is better defined as the 
return stroke.  

SUBSTANTIAL DIVIDING WALL.  An interior wall designed to prevent the propagation of an 
accidental detonation on one side of a wall to explosives on the other side.  

SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICE.  Also called a surge protector.  (1) A device used on power 
and communication lines to attenuate, suppress or divert lightning induced electrical energy to 
ground.  (2) A protective device used to limiting surge voltages by discharging or bypassing 
surge current.  It can also prevent continued flow of follow current while remaining capable of 
discharging or bypassing surge current.  

SYNTHESIS.  The chemical operation or operations required to produce a desired chemical 
compound.  

TARGET.  The area, structure, or material into which a projectile is fired.  

TNT EQUIVALENT.  A measure of the blast effects from explosion of a given quantity of 
material expressed in terms of the weight of TNT that would produce the same blast effects when 
detonated.  

TRANSFER IMPEDANCE.  (1) A transmittance expressed as the ratio of the voltage at a pair of 
terminals divided by the driving current, with all other terminals terminated in a specified way.  
(2) A transmittance expressed as the ratio of the electric field on the interior of a shielded 
enclosure divided by the current density on the exterior of the shield.  

TRANSIENT.  Any person within inhabited building distance but not inside an explosives bay or 
other occupied areas (offices, break areas, shops, etc.).  A transient’s presence within IBD of an 
explosives operation is transitory in nature, or to complete a relatively short-term, nonexplosives 
related work assignment in an area in which personnel are not permanently assigned, such as a 
building corridor, access ramp, or roadway.  Transients are not accounted for in established 
personnel limits for any explosives operating area and are afforded a level of protection only 
from Class I explosion hazard activities.  

UFER GROUND.  An LPS ground produced by electrodes encased in concrete.  This can be a 
coil of cable encased in concrete or even the reinforcing steel in the footers or floor of buildings.  
(See EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM).  

UNEXPLODED ORDNANCE (UXO).  Explosive ordnance which has been primed, fuzed, 
armed, or otherwise prepared for action, and which has been fired, dropped, launched, projected, 
or placed in such a manner as to constitute a hazard to operations, installations, personnel, or 
material and remains unexploded either by malfunction, design, or for any other cause.  

UNITED NATIONS (UN) CLASS 1 EXPLOSIVES.  (1) Explosive substances (a substance that 
is not itself an explosive but that can form an explosive atmosphere of gas, vapor, or dust is not 
included in Class 1), except those that are too dangerous to transport or those where the 
predominant hazard is appropriate to another class; (2) Explosive articles, except devices 
containing explosive substances in such quantity or of such a character that their inadvertent or 
accidental ignition or initiation during transport shall not cause any effect external to the device 
either by projection, fire, smoke, heat, or loud noise; and (3) Substances and articles not 
mentioned under (1) and (2) that are manufactured with a view of producing a practical, 
explosive or pyrotechnic effect.  

ZONE OF PROTECTION.  (1) The area considered statistically safe from the direct attachment 
of a lightning strike as defined by the rolling sphere zone of protection model.  (2) The space 
adjacent to an LPS that is substantially immune to direct lightning flashes.


     			    CHAPTER II—OPERATIONAL SAFETY

1.0	GENERAL OPERATIONS SAFETY GUIDELINES 

1.1	Protection of Explosives

	a.	Explosives are energetic materials that can react violently and should be protected 
		from abnormal stimuli or environments, including:  

		(1)	Friction forces.  

		(2)	Excessive pressures and temperatures.  

		(3)	Impact, shock, and pinching.  

		(4)	Deformation.  

		(5)	Electrical sparks, abrasive or welding sparks, and open flame.  

		(6)	Contamination.

		(7)	Contact with incompatible materials.  

1.2	Equipment Checks

	a.	Before being used in the explosives process, and at established intervals, 
		processing and test equipment shall be checked for 

		(1)	Proper design.  

		(2)	Proper function.  

		(3)	Specified clearances between parts in relative motion.  

		(4)	Abnormal metal-to-metal rubbing of moving parts potentially contacting 
			explosive materials.  

		(5)	Cracks, voids, or screw threads where explosives may accumulate.  

		(6)	Contamination that is incompatible with the materials to be introduced.  

	b.	This checkout may require the use of mock explosives in process or test 
		conditions.  

	c.	Explosive materials must not be pinched or confined between equipment lids or 
		covers and their mating surfaces.  These surfaces shall be cleaned before cover 
		placement.  This includes pressing operations.  

1.3	Inspection Frequency

	a.	When this Manual calls for an inspection, but the inspection interval is not 
		specified, local facility management shall establish the inspection interval.  
		Inspection intervals shall be modified when experience dictates a need.  

1.4	Laboratory Operations

	a.	The special safety guidelines applicable to general laboratory operations 
		involving explosive materials are contained in section 21.0 of this chapter.  

1.5	Toxicity Hazards

	a.	Explosives materials, explosives components (additives or adhesives), and 
		materials such as organic solvents used in explosives processing can be toxic 
		when inhaled, ingested or absorbed through the skin.  The most frequently 
		reported effect from working with explosives is a skin rash resulting from skin 
		contact with explosives materials, or with solvents and adhesives used with 
		explosives operations.  This is the most frequently reported effect from working 
		with these materials.  The following general precautions should be used to prevent 
		overexposure to these materials during explosives processing and handling:  

		(1)	Know the health hazard and controls before beginning operations.  

		(2)	Evaluate the operation during startup to assure that occupational exposure 
			limits are not exceeded; routine operations should be monitored 
			periodically.  

		(3)	Handle materials in a well ventilated area; local exhaust ventilation is 
			preferred.  

		(4)	Avoid skin contact; use appropriate protective clothing.  

		(5)	Practice good personal cleanliness; wash before eating, smoking, or using 
			toilet facilities; end-of-shift showers may be required for some operators.  

1.6	Hazard Identification and Communication 

	a.	Before beginning explosives operations, managers shall ensure the following:  

		(1)	Identify and maintain a current list of explosives and other hazardous 
			materials used in conjunction with their operations.  

		(2)	Determine the hazardous properties and toxicity of these materials through 
			the use of the manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) or 
			other information sources and through consultation with the facility 
			Industrial Hygiene staff.  For explosives without published toxicological 
			data, guidance can be obtained through the DOE Toxic Materials 
			Advisory Committee (TMAC).  Health hazard information must be 
			available and communicated to employees who work with or generate 
			hazardous materials.  

		(3)	Educate and train employees in the hazards and precautions required for 
			handling explosives and materials used in conjunction with explosives 
			operation.  This training should be a part of the employee training and 
			qualification program specified in Chapter V.  

1.7	Process Hazard Analysis 

	a.	Before beginning any explosives synthesis, formulation, manufacturing, testing, 
		or disposal operation, a process hazard analysis shall be performed.  A single 
		process hazard analysis may be performed for similar processes performed in a 
		single facility, provided that the “worst-case” process is the basis for the hazard 
		analysis.  If required, a shield or other protective measure shall be employed.  
		Selection criteria for the worst-case process are:  

		(1)	Sensitivity of materials.  

		(2)	Quantity of materials.  

		(3)	Number of personnel potentially affected.  

		(4)	Impact on other operations/activities.  

	b.	The process hazard analysis shall be performed as a team effort.  The team 
		shall consist of a minimum of three personnel, and preferably no more than 
		seven personnel.   The team shall include at least one engineer and one 
		operator, and should have the following makeup:  

		(1)	Team Leader, who is familiar with the analysis methodology used.  

		(2)	Technical Member(s), who is familiar with the process being analyzed.  

		(3)	Scribe, who writes notes of meetings and interviews and drafts reports.  

	c.	The facility manager or team leader may select the analysis methodology 
		used, which should be one of the following:  

		(1)	Preliminary Hazard Analysis.  

		(2)	Checklist (usually for similar batch operations).  

		(3)	What-if Analysis.  

		(4)	Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP).  

		(5)	Failure Modes, Effects, and Criticality Analysis (FMECA).  

		(6)	Fault Tree Analysis.  

		(7)	Event Tree Analysis.  

	d.	The process hazard analysis shall be formally documented.  

	e.	Employees and employee representatives shall be consulted on the process 
		hazard analysis.  The result of the process hazard analysis shall be provided to 
		employees involved in or affected by the operation.  

	f.	The process hazard analysis shall be updated and revalidated at least every 
		five years by a team meeting the criteria in section 1.7b.  

	g.	The facility manager shall be responsible for establishing a system to address 
		the team’s findings and recommendations promptly.  Corrective actions, 
		schedules for corrective actions, and completion of corrective actions shall be 
		formally documented.  Such documentation shall be filed with the process 
		hazard analysis.  

	h.	Files containing process hazard analyses, updates, and corrective actions 
		status shall be maintained for the life of the process.  

2.0	WORK ENVIRONMENT

2.1	General Requirements

	a.	Workspace shall be adequate to perform operations safely and efficiently.  

	b.	Work shall be organized to eliminate clutter in the area while operations are 
		being performed.  

	c.	Walkways should be kept clear.  

	d.	In work environments where solid, bare explosive pieces are handled, the 
		floor should be cushioned, and all hard objects that explosives could strike in 
		a handling incident should be cushioned where practical.  Physical safety 
		systems demonstrated to preclude the explosives from being dropped or struck 
		could meet these requirements.  

	e.	A procedure should be established to account for hand tools that may be 
		inadvertently dropped into an explosives processing operation, thus creating a 
		hazard.  

	f.	Personnel shall be assigned in such a manner that each worker’s presence is 
		monitored frequently and assistance can be provided or aid summoned in the 
		event of an emergency.  

	g.	Safety analyses of explosives facilities and operations shall be performed.  
		The safety analysis shall be performed during the design of new explosives 
		facilities or the redesign of existing facilities.  Facility management shall 
		prepare and obtain DOE/NNSA approval of the Site Plan.  The Site Plan shall 
		include the result of this analysis.  

	h.	Noisy environments caused by explosives testing operations or process and 
		handling equipment shall be evaluated.  Areas with noise above the allowable 
		occupational exposure limits must be posted and appropriate control measures 
		instituted (e.g., engineering controls, protective equipment, and a hearing 
		conservation program).  

2.2	Emergency Exit Requirements for Explosives Operations 

	a.	Exit requirements for any building or structure containing explosives shall 
		comply with the intent of the Life Safety Code, NFPA 101, except as 
		otherwise permitted in this section.  

2.2.1	Building or Structure Occupancy

	a.	In determining occupancies:  

		(1)	Explosives operating buildings shall be classified as industrial 
			occupancies (NFPA 101, Chapter 40).  

		(2)	Explosives storage or staging buildings or structures shall be 
			classified as storage occupancies (NFPA 101, Chapter 42).  

2.2.2	Hazard of Contents Classification

	a.	The hazard of contents classification of any explosives occupancy 
		shall be determined using the guidelines given in NFPA 101 and the 
		following requirements:  

		(1)	High-hazard explosives contents are those which, because of 
			form, character, or volume, are likely to burn with extreme 
			rapidity can release poisonous fumes or explosions in a fire.  
			The expectation of poisonous fumes or explosions is to be 
			determined on a case-by-case basis.  Operating buildings 
			containing propellant, pyrotechnic, or explosive powders shall 
			be classified as high-hazard occupancies unless a reduced 
			hazard classification can be justified.  

		(2)	Reduced-hazard explosives contents are those that burn with 
			rapidity that is moderate or less and will not produce poisonous 
			vapors.  This criterion shall be documented by a hazard 
			analysis.  

2.2.3	Personnel Protective Restrictions and Requirements

	a.	DOE occupancies containing high explosives dictate that personnel be 
		protected from blast overpressures and fragments (and spread of 
		plutonium in some occupancies) from an accidental detonation.  
		Accidental detonation of explosives is usually the result of stimuli 
		other than a fire.
  
	b.	Non-compliance with some NFPA 101 provisions (such as those 
		covering exit doors, exit travel distance, number and location of exits, 
		and common path of travel to exits), is authorized where required to 
		provide protection from blast overpressure and fragments.  When 
		NFPA 101 requirements are not met the following additional 
		personnel-protective restrictions or requirements should be imposed:  

		(1)	The building and means of egress should be protected by 
			supervised automatic sprinkler systems connected to sound 
			evacuation alarms.  This requirement is not applicable to 
			explosives storage magazines, firing chambers, or rooms used 
			as firing chambers, within explosives operating buildings.  

		(2)	Explosives operating buildings and their means of egress 
			should have automatic, early warning fire detection systems 
			connected to sound evacuation alarms where such early 
			warning might reasonably aid in prevention or mitigation of 
			personnel injury.  This requirement is not applicable to 
			explosives storage magazines, firing chambers, or rooms used 
			as firing chambers within explosives operating buildings.  

		(3)	Personnel limits within the explosives work area (bay, cell, 
			etc.) shall be established and controlled.  These should not 
			exceed 20 for reduced-hazard occupancies or 6 for high-hazard 
			occupancies.  The need for personnel in numbers greater than 
			these limits shall be documented in a hazards analysis based on 
			the criteria of section 2.2.5 of this chapter.  

2.2.4	Requirements for Existing Facilities

	a.	Existing facilities may deviate from current NFPA 101 requirements in 
		the following situations:  

		(1)	Current code requirements were not in effect when the building 
			was constructed.  The building, however, is still required to 
			meet the code of record.  

		(2)	Deviations were made to meet the level-of-protection and 
			design criteria in Chapter VI, section 6, of this Manual.  

		(3)	Building construction predates both current and 
			level-of-protection criteria, but a hazards analysis has shown 
			the risk of operations to be at an acceptable risk.  

		(4)	The risk from deviation has been analyzed and accepted by 
			current hazards analysis.  

			NOTE:  Those facilities requiring hazards analysis to determine whether a 
			deviation from the Life Safety Code is acceptable shall follow the 
			considerations and criteria described in section 2.2.5 of this chapter.  

2.2.5	Requirements for New Facilities 

	a.	New facilities shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 101, 
		except when deviation is necessary to provide personnel protection 
		from blast overpressure and fragments per Chapter VI of this Manual.  

2.2.5.1	If deviations from NFPA 101 requirements are made, the Fire Hazards 
	Analysis required by Chapter VI of this Manual shall document the following 
	aspects related to each explosives operation, bay, and/or workroom where a 
	deviation exists.  

	a.	Clear pathways to exit in explosives bay or workroom.  

	b.	Potential for sustained fire from the presence of combustible and 
		flammable materials and the presence of ignition sources in work 
		environments.  

	c.	Total time required to exit the bay or workroom.  

2.2.5.2	The criteria considered acceptable for the components of the analysis in 
	section 2.2.5.1 of this chapter are, respectively:  

	a.	No obstruction shall limit the width of the pathway to less than 36 in.  

	b.	Combustible and flammable material quantities shall be minimized, 
		justified, documented, and reviewed by site fire protection personnel 
		and approved by line management.  Ignition sources shall be identified 
		and eliminated where possible.  

	c.	The total time for six people to exit the workroom or bay, including 
		the opening of doors where necessary, is 30 seconds or less.  The total 
		time for twenty people to exit the workroom or bay is 90 seconds or 
		less.  Noncompliance with this criterion shall be evaluated and 
		justified during the conceptual design review.  

2.2.6	Single Exits

	a.	Where NFPA 101 requires at least two exits, but provisions for 
		personnel protection from a blast will not permit at least two exits 
		from a room or structure, a single exit is acceptable, provided the 
		requirements of sections 2.2.3 and 2.2.4 of this chapter and the 
		following are met:  

		(1)	The path of exit travel shall be arranged so it is not through or 
			toward a hazardous operation.  

		(2)	A room containing a high-hazard explosive occupancy shall 
			not exceed 500 ft2, and the occupant load of the room shall be 
			restricted to two operators and two transients.  

		(3)	A room containing a reduced-hazard explosive occupancy shall 
			not exceed 1,000 ft2.  

	b.	Explosives storage magazines may have only single exits for the 
		purpose of maintaining integrity of design.  The conditions of this 
		section do not apply to these magazines.  

2.2.7	Blast-Resistant Doors

	a.	Blast-resistant doors required to protect personnel from the effects of 
		an accidental detonation may be located in the means of egress, 
		provided the requirements of sections 2.2.3 through 2.2.5 of this 
		chapter and the following are met:  

		(1)	Where power-operated doors are required to accomplish 
			unlatching and opening, they shall have redundant features or 
			be capable of being opened manually (to permit exit travel) or 
			closed where necessary to safeguard exits.  

		(2)	The time required to fully open or close a door shall be as short 
			as reasonably possible. 
 
		(3)	A revolving door is acceptable if a secondary means of escape 
			(with swinging doors) is provided at the same location.  The 
			revolving door must also be prevented from rotating at too 
			rapid a rate to permit orderly exit of personnel.  

		(4)	The following exceptions to NFPA 101 may be allowed when 
			justified and documented.  

			(a)	Swinging doors may exceed 48 in. wide.  

			(b)	The NFPA-required swinging doors adjacent to a 
				revolving blast door can be omitted.  

			(c)	Revolving blast doors need to be designed to collapse 
				into book-fold position.  

			(d)	Where fire-rated doors are required, blast doors are 
				considered to have the required fire rating.  

			(e)	An airlock with two or more doors that is intended 
				during routine operations to prevent continuous and 
				unobstructed passage by allowing the release of only one 
				door at a time shall be permitted in a means of egress.  In 
				such cases, there shall be provisions to allow for 
				continuous and unobstructed travel during an emergency 
				egress condition.  

			(f)	Panic hardware is not required on blast doors. 
 
2.2.8	Slide Escapes

	a.	Slide escapes should be provided for elevated explosives operating 
		locations from which rapid exit may be vital and cannot be obtained by 
		other means.  Slide escapes should be located on opposite sides of the 
		explosives operation to reduce the likelihood of personnel being trapped 
		by fire between them and a single slide.  

	b.	Exits to slide escapes must open onto platforms that are not less than 3 ft, 
		and the platforms must be equipped with guardrails.  The slides shall 
		begin at the outside edge of the platform, not at the edge of the buildings.  
		Slide escape landings shall be located at selected places leading directly to 
		escape routes that are free from tripping hazards, low guy lines, drains, 
		ditches, or other obstructions.  Manually or automatically controlled 
		devices (trips) that sound an alarm in the operating building shall be 
		installed at or near the entrances to slide escapes.  These devices may also 
		actuate deluge valves and water curtains in the building or room affected.  
		Recommended slide escape specifications:  

		(1)	Angle, 40 to 50 degrees horizontal.  

		(2)	Slide depth, 24 in.  

		(3)	Radius at bottom of slide, 12 in.  

		(4)	Height at lower end of slide, not over 24 in. above the landing.  

	c.	If necessary, the end of the slide shall have a horizontal run sufficient to 
		prevent employee injury from exit speed without the use of landing 
		cushions, which are unsatisfactory in cold weather.  One foot of horizontal 
		run is required for a 15-ft-long slide.  One additional foot of horizontal run 
		will be provided for each additional 5 ft of slide length.  The juncture of 
		the two sections must be well rounded.  Metal sheets constructing the slide 
		must overlap in the direction of travel.  

3.0	BUILDING AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE

3.1	Cleaning

	a.	Structures containing explosives shall be kept clean and orderly.  

	b.	Explosives and explosives dust shall not be allowed to accumulate on 
		structural members, radiators, heating coils, utility lines, equipment, or 
		electrical fixtures.  

	c.	To maintain safe conditions, there shall be a regular cleaning program for 
		building interiors to prevent the accumulation of explosives dust and waste.  
		This program should not be conducted in any bay where a hazardous 
		operation is being conducted.  

	d.	In buildings containing explosives, floors should be cleaned with hot water or 
		a water-steam mix wherever practical.  Non-abrasive sweeping compounds 
		that are compatible with the explosives involved may be used when a 
		water-steam mix or hot water is not practical.  Such sweeping compounds 
		may be combustible but must not be volatile (closed-cup flash point must not 
		be lower than 110?C).  Sweeping compounds containing wax shall not be used 
		on conductive flooring.  Where nitrated organic explosives (which may form 
		sensitive explosive compounds with some alkalis) are involved, the use of 
		cleaning agents containing those alkalis is prohibited.  

	e.	Before beginning explosives decontamination activities involving large 
		amounts of organic solvents (generally over 1L), provisions must be made for 
		adequate ventilation or respiratory protection, fire protection, and adequate 
		protective clothing.  

3.2	Maintenance and Repair

	a.	Records shall be maintained for inspection, repair, and servicing of process 
		and handling equipment and fire protection systems.  

	b.	Maintenance operations involving major repairs, changes, or the use of 
		hazardous equipment should not be performed within bays (rooms) while 
		explosives are present.  Before beginning such maintenance, explosives 
		should be removed and the area prepared.  An approval procedure shall be 
		established to ensure that the area has been inspected and is safe for these 
		operations.  

	c.	Non-facility personnel performing maintenance or construction operations 
		shall be at least intraline distance from any explosives operation and should be 
		at least intraline distance from any building containing explosives.  This 
		requirement does not apply to personnel making job site inspections or 
		equipment repairs requiring less than eight hours (e.g., technical 
		representatives, architect-engineering surveyors, etc.).  Providing equivalent 
		protection may satisfy the intraline distance separation requirement.  
		Transportation of explosives is permitted on roadways at less than intraline 
		distance. 
 
	d.	Facility management shall determine the minimum practical distance by 
		which non-facility personnel (e.g., technical representatives, service 
		representatives, architect-engineering surveyors, etc.) shall be separated from 
		explosives operations while making job site inspections or equipment repairs 
		requiring less than eight hours.  Facility management shall control explosives 
		operations so that the chance of an explosion shall be kept to a minimum.  The 
		rationale for establishing the minimum practicable distance and additional 
		control measures taken shall be documented and maintained until operations 
		have been completed and personnel have permanently vacated the work site.  
		All such personnel shall be informed of the risk of working at less than 
		intraline distance and shall agree to accept such risk.  

	e.	New equipment or equipment subjected to major repair or modification 
		shall be test-operated, and handling equipment shall be tested before being 
		returned to operations.  The DOE Hoisting and Rigging Standard 
		(DOE-STD-1090-current version) may be used as a guide.  

	f.	Only authorized personnel shall perform maintenance work.  

	g.	Before resuming operations following maintenance, the area shall be cleaned 
		and approved by the operations supervisor.  

3.3	Hot Work Permits

	a.	Where explosives are involved, a written permit shall be required for the 
		temporary use of portable, heat-producing equipment that generates 
		temperatures higher than 228°F (109°C).  Explosives decontamination of the 
		immediately affected work areas and explosives removal shall be required 
		before beginning hot work operations.  The permit should state the location, 
		time, duration, purpose of use, details of safety, and fire-fighting equipment 
		required.  The permit shall be available at the named location for checkout by 
		supervisory personnel.  

		(1)	Permits shall be authorized by signature of personnel designated by 
			local facility management.  Designated personnel should be qualified 
			by experience in explosives work, fire prevention, and general safety 
			precautions, in particular, the purging of equipment, presence of 
			flammable mixtures, and the avoidance of electrical and mechanical 
			hazards that could be incident to repair work.  

		(2)	Personnel designated to sign the hot work permit should represent 
			supervision of the work location, supervision of personnel performing 
			the hot work, and a third group independent of the first two (usually 
			the safety and fire protection group).  

		(3)	An individual should remain at the site of a cutting or welding job for 
			approximately 30 minutes after the job has been completed to 
			extinguish or report any fires that develop.  Designated supervision 
			should inspect the job site before, during, and after completion of the 
			job.  

4.0	REMOTE OPERATIONS

4.1	Personnel Protection

	a.	Explosives operations judged to present a significant level of risk to be 
		performed remotely shall be conducted in facilities where the construction of 
		the operating bay or the control room affords sufficient protection to 
		personnel to prevent serious injuries.  Chapter VI, section 4.2.1d specifies 
		criteria for the prevention of serious injuries.  

	b.	Prevention of serious injury from a remote operation applies to both transient 
		personnel and personnel involved in the operations.  

4.2	Access and Equipment Controls

	a.	Procedures and equipment shall be used to prevent entry into a hazardous bay 
		or area in which a remote operation is occurring or to prevent the operation 
		from proceeding when personnel enter, as follows:  

		(1)	Roads shall be blocked at a minimum of the public traffic route 
			distance from buildings where hazardous (remote) operations are being 
			performed.  Public traffic route separation may be satisfied by 
			providing equivalent protection.  

		(2)	Corridors leading to bays in which hazardous (remote) operations are 
			being performed shall be marked to warn of the danger.  Barriers shall 
			also be set up.  

		(3)	Visual methods such as closed circuit television should be used to 
			monitor remote operations and to enable viewing of the operating area 
			conditions before entering.  Remote audio monitoring and video 
			recording should also be considered.  

		(4)	Interlocking of remote operating equipment to access doors should be 
			required for each remote operation.  

		(5)	Lights or similar warning devices shall conspicuously identify 
			buildings or bays in which remote operations are performed to indicate 
			when remote operations are under way.  

5.0	GENERAL EXPLOSIVES AREA CONTROLS

5.1	Smoking, Matches, Lighters, Metal Articles

	a.	There shall be no smoking in explosives storage, processing, or test areas, 
		except in designated locations.  

	b.	No matches, lighters, or other fire-, flame-, or spark-producing devices shall 
		be taken into an explosives control area except with written authorization.  If 
		authorized to be carried, matches shall be contained in a metal carrying device 
		too large to fit into pockets.  Kitchen “strike anywhere” matches shall not be 
		used.  

	c.	Operating personnel should not carry metal articles (e.g., keys, jewelry, 
		knives, coins, etc.) in explosives processing areas where such items could 
		constitute a hazard if dropped into the process operation.  

5.2	Cooking and Eating

	a.	Food or beverages shall not be consumed in explosives buildings, except in 
		designated areas.  

	b.	There shall be no personal dishes or utensils in an explosives building, except 
		in designated eating areas. 
 
	c.	Coffee pots, hot plates, ovens (including microwaves), and portable electric 
		heaters shall not be permitted in rooms where:  

		(1)	Explosives may be present.  

		(2)	Combustible vapors or dust may be present.
  
		(3)	Smoking or drinking is prohibited because toxic materials are present.  

		(4)	Electrical classification of appliances is not compatible with the area.  

5.3	Access to Explosives Areas

	a.	Access control procedures shall be established for entry to all explosives 
		areas.  

6.0	PROTECTION OF ELECTROEXPLOSIVE DEVICES (EED) FROM 
	ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION

	a.	EEDs are vulnerable to initiation from a variety of sources.  One potential hazard 
		associated with EEDs is the accidental initiation by stray electromagnetic energy.  
		This hazard exists when an electromagnetic field of sufficient intensity is 
		generated to induce or otherwise couple currents and/or voltages of magnitudes 
		large enough to initiate electroexplosive devices or other sensitive explosive 
		components of weapon systems, or other explosive devices.  This unintended 
		actuation could have safety (premature firing) or reliability (duding) 
		consequences.  

	b.	A large number of these devices are initiated by low levels of electrical energy 
		and are susceptible to unintentional initiation by many forms of direct or induced 
		stray electrical energy, such as from lightning discharges, static electricity, or 
		tribo-electric (friction generated) effects, and radio frequency (RF) energy.  
		Hazards from lightning discharges are covered in Chapter X.  Lightning 
		protection systems and requirements normally preclude the inadvertent initiation 
		of EEDs by direct lightning strikes.  Precautions for static electricity discharges 
		are addressed in section 7 of this chapter.  Stray energy, such as transients and 
		other forms of induced energy, can be imposed on circuits affecting EEDs from 
		other subsystems by various methods.  Examples are inductive or capacitive 
		coupling; sneak ground circuits; defective components or wiring; errors in design, 
		modification, or maintenance.  

	c.	The degree to which EEDs are susceptible to unintentional initiation by exposure 
		to the radiated fields of RF emitters depends on many variables.  These variables 
		include the ability of the leads, circuit, or installation to capture RF energy; the 
		type and characteristics of RF energy; and methods of coupling which can 
		introduce this energy into the EED.  

	d.	Emitter operating frequencies, power levels, modulation, and illumination angles 
		are some of the factors that affect the vulnerability of EEDs to RF energy. 
 
	e.	As a precautionary measure, EEDs should normally be left inside their containers 
		until ready for use.  Shorting clips or other safety devices should not be removed 
		until the EED is actually ready for use.
  
	f.	For precautionary separation distances, see Chapter II, section 13, Tables II-1, 
		II-2, and II-3.  

7.0	STATIC ELECTRICITY

7.1	General

	a.	Positive steps must be taken to control or eliminate static electricity in areas 
		where materials that are ignitable by static spark discharge are processed or 
		handled.  This includes spark-sensitive explosives, propellants, and 
		pyrotechnics as well as solvent vapors, and flammable gases.  

7.2	Bonding and Grounding of Equipment

	a.	Bonding straps can be used to bridge locations where electrical continuity 
		may be broken by the presence of oil on bearings, paint, or rust at any 
		contact point.  Pressure contact alone is not adequate grounding for 
		permanent equipment in contact with conductive floors or tabletops. Static 
		grounds shall not be made to gas, steam, or air lines; dry pipe sprinkler 
		systems; or air terminals of lightning protection systems.  Static grounds 
		can be made to water pipes, ground cones, buried copper plates, or driven 
		ground rods of lightning protection systems.  If a structure is equipped with 
		a lightning protection system, all grounds shall be interconnected.  Wires 
		used as static ground conductors should be at least No. 10 AWG or 
		equivalent.  

7.3	Testing Bonded Equipment Grounds 

	a.	Grounding systems shall be tested for electrical resistance and continuity 
		after installation has been completed and, in the case of active equipment, at 
		intervals to be locally determined.  If the equipment has been inactive for 
		more than one month, the ground system shall be visually inspected for 
		continuity before reactivation of the system.  All exposed explosives or 
		hazardous materials shall be removed before testing.  When testing for 
		resistance-to-ground, equipment should be considered as a unit except in 
		the case of an electrically isolated device or a belt-driven machine.  In 
		measuring the total resistance-to-ground for belt-driven machinery (to 
		assure compliance with the section below), resistance of the belting is to be 
		excluded.  The maximum resistance-to-ground permitted for different types 
		of equipment is as follows in section 7.3b.  

	b.	Hazardous locations (operations where a static spark discharge may be 
		dangerous).  All conductive parts of equipment shall be bonded; in the case 
		of grounded equipment, bonding shall be such that resistance to ground 
		does not exceed 25 ohms, unless resistance is not to exceed 10 ohms 
		because of a lightning protection installation.  For existing equipment, the 
		rate of static generation should be considered before making changes in 
		grounding systems.  The resistance of conductive rubber hose should not 
		exceed 250,000 ohms.  

7.4	Conductive Floors, Shoes, Mats and Wristbands

	a.	Conductive floors and shoes should be used for grounding personnel in 
		operations involving explosives (propellants, pyrotechnics, lead azide, lead 
		styphnate, mercury fulminate, CP, etc.) that are sensitive to initiation by the 
		electrostatic spark discharge from a person.  Static discharge from a person 
		may ignite many flammable liquids and air mixtures.  In areas where personnel 
		come into the proximity of (i.e., possible contact with) static-sensitive 
		explosives or vapors, conductive floors shall be installed except where 
		adequate housekeeping, dust collection, ventilation, or solvent recovery 
		methods eliminate the hazards of dust-air or flammable vapor-air mixtures.  
		Conductive floors may also be required in areas where operations involve 
		EEDs that contain a static-sensitive explosive.  

	b.	Conductive floors are not required throughout an entire building or room if the 
		hazard is localized.  In such cases, conductive mats or runners may be used where 
		required.  These mats or runners shall meet all specifications and test 
		requirements that apply to conductive floors.  Conductive wristbands may be 
		substituted for conductive mats and footwear at fixed, grounded or bonded 
		workstations or outdoor locations.  

7.5	Conductive Floor, Work Surface, and Wristband Specifications

	a.	Conductive floors must be made of non-sparking material such as conductive 
		rubber or conductive flooring composition and shall meet the following 
		requirements:  

		(1)	The flooring and its grounding system must provide for electrical 
			resistance not to exceed 1,000,000 ohms (measured as specified in 
			section 7.6 of this chapter).  

		(2)	The surface of the installed floor must be free from cracks and reasonably 
			smooth.  The material must not slough off, wrinkle, or buckle under 
			operating conditions.  Conductive tiles are not recommended for use in 
			areas where explosives dust can cause contamination.  The large number 
			of joints and the tendency of tiles to loosen provide areas in which 
			explosive dust can become lodged, making normal cleanup procedures 
			difficult. 
 
		(3)	Where conductive floors and shoes are required, resistance between the 
			ground and the wearer shall not exceed 1,000,000 ohms, (i.e., total 
			resistance of conductive shoes on a person, plus the resistance of floor to 
			ground).  (See Figure II-1 for testing method.)  Where conductive floors 
			and shoes are required, tabletops on which exposed explosives or dusts are 
			encountered should be covered with a properly grounded or bonded 
			conductive material that meets the same requirements as those for 
			flooring.  

		(4)	Conductive floors must be compatible with the explosive materials to be 
			processed.  

		(5)	Conductive wristbands shall not exceed a resistance between the wearer 
			and ground or bonding point of 1,200,000 ohms.  This resistance shall be 
			measured with a suitably calibrated ohmmeter.  Wristbands shall be of a 
			design that maintains electrical contact with the wearer when used.  

		(6)	Table-top work surface mats that are not part of a total conductive system 
			(section 7.5a(3) shall have a resistance not to exceed 1,200,000 ohms.  
			This resistance shall be measured by a method similar to that outlined in 
			section 7.6 and records shall be maintained.  

				Figure II-1.  Testing Shoes on Wearer

7.6	Conductive Floor Tests

	a.	Initial tests shall be made of all conductive floors, and subsequent tests shall be 
		made at least semi-annually.  Test results shall be permanently recorded and a copy 
		filed in a central location.  Instruments used in making tests shall be used only 
		when the room is free from exposed explosives and flammable gas mixtures.  

	b.	Maximum floor resistance shall be measured with a suitably calibrated ohmmeter 
		that operates on a normal open circuit output voltage of 500 volts DC and a short 
		circuit current of 2.5 milliamperes with an effective internal resistance of 
		approximately 200,000 ohms.  Minimum floor resistance will be measured with 
		an ohmmeter suitably calibrated for the task.  

	c.	Each electrode shall weigh 2.3 kg and shall have a dry, flat, circular contact area 
		6.5 cm in diameter, which shall comprise a surface of aluminum or tinfoil 1.3- to 
		2.5-mm thick, backed by a layer of rubber 0.6- to 0.65-cm thick and measuring 
		between 40 and 60 durometer hardness as determined with a Shore Type A 
		durometer (ASTM D-2240-68).  

	d.	The floor shall be clean and dry.  “Electrode jelly” such as brushless shaving soap 
		or saline solution shall not be used.  

	e.	The resistance of the floor shall be more than 5,000 ohms in areas with 110 volt 
		service and 10,000 ohms in areas with 220 volt service, and less than 
		1,000,000 ohms in all areas, as measured between a permanent ground connection 
		and an electrode placed at any point on the floor and also as measured between two 
		electrodes placed 3 ft apart at any points on the floor.  Measurements shall be made 
		at five or more locations in each room.  If the resistance changes appreciably with 
		time during a measurement, the value observed after the voltage has been applied 
		for about five seconds shall be considered as the measured value.  

7.7	Humidification

	a.	Humidification to prevent static electricity accumulations and subsequent 
		discharges is usually effective if the relative humidity is above 60 percent.  
		However, due to the possibility of spontaneous ignition, certain materials such as 
		metallic powders and some pyrotechnic mixtures cannot be exposed to air with 
		60 percent relative humidity.  Where this technique is used to prevent static 
		electricity accumulations, a daily preoperational check of the humidity levels will 
		be accomplished before work starts.  

7.8	Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter

	a.	Ground fault circuit interrupter protection shall be provided in static grounded 
		areas where personnel may come in contact with AC-powered electrical 
		equipment.  

8.0	ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING

8.1	Location/Operation Electrical Hazard Classification

	a.	The National Electrical Code (NEC) shall be followed in all situations where 
		the code normally applies.  Although the NEC does not specifically address 
		explosives, Article 500, Hazardous (Classified) Locations, requirements for the 
		design and installation of electrical equipment and wiring in “classified” 
		locations shall be used as guidance for the installation of rated equipment and 
		fixtures where required by this section.  The use of rated wiring, fixtures, 
		equipment, and instrumentation where the code normally does not apply, 
		provides additional safety for work with explosives materials by (1) restricting 
		electrical ignition sources, such as sparks, electrical faults (shorts, power 
		surges, etc.), (2) controlling surface temperatures of electrical items, and 
		(3) reducing the potential for electrically initiated fires.  Rated wiring, fixtures, 
		equipment, and instrumentation shall be used for the operations specified below 
		unless demonstrated unnecessary through analysis for a specific operation and 
		location.  The analysis shall be performed and documented per sections 8.4 and 
		8.6 of this chapter.  

	b.	Explosives do not normally fit the NEC definitions for groupings, classes, 
		divisions, and area classifications.  In order to apply Article 500 as a guide, 
		vapors containing explosives shall be treated as Group D (unless NEC requires 
		a higher classification because of other components of the vapor) and dusts of 
		explosives or solid explosives shall be treated as Group G.  Class, division, and 
		area classification determinations shall be based on the explosives operation 
		being performed, as specified below, and not on the location or surrounding 
		atmosphere, nor its potential for producing an ignitable or explosive mixture.  
		Maximum temperature limits shall be based on the thermal analysis of the 
		explosives used in the operation.  Division 1 items can be substituted for 
		Division 2 items, but never Division 2 for Division 1 items.  Where there is a 
		conflict between the requirements of the code and requirements of this Manual, 
		the more stringent of the two applies.  

	c.	Rated wiring, equipment and instruments shall be approved for use by a 
		nationally recognized testing laboratory.  Rated items shall have labels and/or 
		clearly identifiable markings to show Class, Division, Group, and Temperature 
		Range for which they are approved.  Equipment approved for one Hazard 
		Class is not interchangeable with another Hazard Class.  

	d.	The operations discussed below shall comply with the recommended 
		class/division unless it is determined unnecessary through documented analysis 
		for a specific operation and location.  

		(1)	Class I, Division 1 wiring, fixtures, process equipment, and 
			instrumentation are recommended for operations involving flammable 
			gases or chemicals/materials expected to produce flammable vapors 
			with explosives present.  

		(2)	Class I, Division 1 and Class II, Division 1 (dual rated) wiring, fixtures, 
			process equipment, and instrumentation are recommended for synthesis, 
			formulation, mixing, wet blending, and casting explosives, 
			heating/drying of uncased explosives, plus any explosives processing 
			that is expected to produce sublimation.  

		(3)	Class II, Division 1 wiring, fixtures, process equipment, and 
			instrumentation are recommended for screening, grinding, blending, 
			pressing, dry machining explosives, and weighing of explosives 
			powders, the use of explosive or ignitable dust mixtures with explosives 
			present, plus any explosives process that is expected to produce dust 
			from explosives that is suspended in the air.  

		(4)	Class II, Division 2 wiring, fixtures, process equipment, and 
			instrumentation are recommended for storage, inspection, assembly, and 
			wet machining of explosives, heating of fully encased explosives, plus, 
			any explosives operation capable of producing dust of explosives that 
			can accumulate on electrical equipment or apparatus.  Class II, Division 
			1 or dual-rated equipment and wiring can be substituted.  

		(5)	General Purpose wiring, fixtures, process equipment, and 
			instrumentation are allowed for shipping and receiving operations with 
			fully encased explosives or explosives packaged in DOT/DoD approved 
			shipping containers and areas in explosives facilities where no 
			explosives are present.  Examples are offices, control rooms, halls, rest 
			rooms, and mechanical equipment rooms.  General Purpose Areas may 
			be established in explosives locations if facility management can 
			determine, based on documented analysis of the processes involved and 
			the separation between explosives operations requiring Class I or 
			Class II rated electrical wiring, fixtures, process equipment, and 
			instrumentation and the General Purpose Area is established and 
			maintained such that:  

			(a)	Migration of explosive or ignitable gases, vapors or dust 
				mixtures into the General Purpose Area from the rated area (not 
				to be confused with the NEC Classified locations) will not occur 
				under normal operating conditions.  

			(b)	Ignition energy that may be developed in the General Purpose 
				Area will not be transferred to the rated area (not to be confused 
				with the NEC Classified locations), even under electrical fault 
				conditions.  

		(6)	Due to the potential for unacceptable consequences concerning 
			operations with nuclear explosives, subassemblies, or components, they 
			shall be evaluated in accordance with section 8.0 of this chapter to 
			determine the appropriate electrical hazard classification.  

		(7)	Facility management shall evaluate, by using the principles given 
			above, all explosives operations not specified elsewhere in this 
			section to determine the appropriate electrical classification.  The 
			analysis shall be documented.  

8.2	Electrical Supply System

	a.	Mutual hazards may exist where explosives facilities are located near electrical 
		supply lines and stepping equipment.  To protect against these hazards, the NEC 
		(NFPA 70) and the following requirements apply to all new construction or 
		major modifications, and should be considered for existing facilities.  Quantity 
		distance requirements are based on air blast overpressure only, and fragment 
		distances are not considered.  Electric supply lines that can be interrupted 
		without loss of power, i.e., power is rerouted through existing lines and/or 
		networks, can be separated from explosives sites in accordance with 
		section 8.2a(1)(c) below.  

		(1)	Electric transmission lines (those carrying 69 kV or more) and the tower 
			or poles supporting them shall be located no closer to explosives 
			facilities than:  

			(a)	Inhabited-building distance if the line in question is part of a 
				grid/system serving a large, offsite area.  

			(b)	Public traffic route distance if loss of the line will not create 
				serious social or economic hardships to offsite areas.  

			(c)	Electric distribution lines (those carrying less than 69 kV) and the 
				tower or poles supporting them shall be located no closer to 
				explosives facilities than public traffic route distance.  

		(3)	Aboveground, DOE-controlled electric service lines required to be in 
			close proximity to a combustible constructed or uncovered explosives 
			facility shall be no closer to that facility than the length of the lines 
			between the poles or towers supporting the lines, unless an effective 
			means is provided to ensure that broken, energized lines cannot come 
			into contact with the facility or its appurtenances.  Acceptable controls 
			include, but are not limited to, geographic terrain features, instantaneous 
			circuit interrupters, cable trays, and linking lines together.  Equivalent 
			underground service lines shall be located as specified in Chapter VI, 
			section 3.2.4 and Table VI-2.  

		(4)	Electric lines serving explosives facilities shall be installed underground 
			from a point not less than 50 ft away from such facilities.  

		(5)	Unmanned privately owned or contractor-owned electrical substations 
			(not to include building transformers and associated switch gear) shall be 
			no closer to explosives facilities than public traffic route distances.  

		(6)	Certain types of auxiliary power facilities, transformer stations, etc., 
			present fire hazards to explosives facilities.  Transformers and associated 
			electrical switching apparatus serving one explosives facility or complex 
			that do not present a fire hazard to the facility (i.e., dry-type, “less 
			flammable” oil-insulated, etc.) shall be located as specified by NFPA 70 
			and Factory Mutual Data Sheet 5-4/14-18.  Normal oil-insulated 
			transformers shall be located at least 50 ft from an explosives facility or 
			as specified in DoD 6055.9-STD.  

		(7)	Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) should be provided if electrical 
			power is critical to an explosives operation during a power shut down or 
			interruption.  

8.3	Building Electrical Service Entrance

	a.	Each electrical service entrance for explosives facilities should be provided with 
		the following protection.  

		(1)	Arrestors

			(a)	Lightning arrestors shall be the appropriate size and class for the 
				application and system voltages and shall be provided on the 
				primary side of the transformer located in, on, or near the 
				facility.  See Chapter X for additional lightning protection 
				guidance.  

			(b)	Surge arrestors and surge capacitors shall be provided on the 
				supply side of the main service disconnect.  

		(2)	Grounding

	b.	The lightning arrestor, surge arrestor, surge capacitors, service entrance ground, 
		and building ground shall be interconnected.  This interconnection shall be made 
		outside the building.  

8.4	Permanent Wiring, Fixtures and Equipment

	a.	Permanent facility wiring includes installed electrical wiring, communications 
		wiring, security systems wiring, and fire protection systems alarm and response 
		wiring.  Permanent equipment includes the installed electrical fixtures and 
		equipment associated with permanent wiring.  Permanent equipment also 
		includes equipment such as HVAC, hoods, vacuum pumps, hydraulic pumps, 
		etc.  

	b.	New Facilities and Renovations

		(1)	All permanent equipment and wiring of a room shall conform to 
			section 8.1 of this chapter for the operations for which the room is 
			designed.  

		(2)	To maintain maximum, long-term flexibility of use of facilities, facility 
			management is encouraged to consider installing dual-rated (i.e., Class I, 
			Division 1 and Class II, Division 1) permanent wiring and equipment in 
			explosives operating rooms.  As a minimum, installation should allow for 
			easy conversion to dual-rated wiring and equipment.  

		(3)	Rated electrical fixtures shall not be painted. 
 
		(4)	Where equipment cannot meet the above requirements, the equipment 
			should be located outside the hazardous environment.  Otherwise, the 
			equipment shall be analyzed and controlled as specified for electrical 
			equipment and instrumentation in section 8.6 of this chapter.  

	c.	Existing Facilities

		(1)	Permanent wiring and equipment shall meet the requirements in effect at 
			the time the facility was built.  The wiring and equipment shall be 
			brought into conformance with section 8.4b of this chapter  If remodeling 
			or renovation would affect the wiring or equipment.  

		(2)	As a minimum, the permanent wiring and equipment shall meet the 
			requirements of section 8.1 of this chapter for the explosives operations 
			performed.  

		(3)	Where equipment cannot meet the above requirements, the equipment 
			should be located outside the hazardous environment.  Otherwise, the 
			equipment shall be analyzed and controlled as specified for electrical 
			equipment and instrumentation in section 8.6 of this chapter.  

8.5	Flexible Cords/Wiring

	a.	Wiring from the permanent premises wiring to process equipment or process 
		instrumentation should be rated for actual explosives operation being performed, 
		per section 8.1 of this chapter.  As a minimum, flexible cords shall be hard usage 
		service cord.  Splices are not allowed.  In addition, all flexible cords, receptacles, 
		and attachment plugs must be equipped with three prongs so that the third prong 
		(green wire) acts as ground.  The cord shall be supported so that there is no 
		tension on the terminal connections.  Seals shall be provided where the cord 
		enters explosion-proof enclosures.  For Hazard Class I or Class II, Division I or 
		dual-rated operations, the cord shall also be equipped with explosion-proof 
		attachment plugs.  Flexible cords shall not be used where fixed installed 
		electrical wiring is required by equipment design.  

8.6	Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation

	a.	Non-permanent electrical equipment and instrumentation shall comply with the 
		following:  

		(1)	Process instrumentation and process equipment should be rated for 
			the actual environment based on the explosives operation being 
			performed as defined in section 8.1 of this chapter.  

		(2)	If the thermal properties of an explosive are such that Group G or Group D 
			equipment provides inadequate surface temperature limits, special 
			protection shall be provided, or the equipment shall be excluded from the 
			hazardous location.  This equipment shall not have a surface temperature 
			exceeding the lowest onset of the exotherm of the explosive, as 
			determined by the differential thermal analysis (DTA) test or the 
			differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) test in section 12.1.1c of this 
			chapter and Chapter VIII, section 2.2d.  Approved instrumentation and 
			equipment shall be administratively controlled and marked accordingly.  

		(3)	When Hazard Class I or II, as applicable, equipment or instrumentation is 
			required but not available, the substitute equipment should be purged or 
			pressurized in accordance with NFPA 496, or be determined intrinsically 
			safe (without regard to voltage) in accordance with NEC Article 
			504/ANSI 913/NFPA 493 by facility management, or in Hazard Class II 
			locations, sealed to prevent explosives contamination.  When the 
			equipment is purged or sealed, the surface temperature shall not exceed 
			120°C for normal operations, or 165?C for overload conditions. 

		(4)	All electrical equipment or instrumentation in hazardous locations that do 
			not meet the requirements of section 8.6a(3) above shall be evaluated and 
			documented as to their suitability for use in the specific area and 
			operation.  The following are suggested areas for evaluation:  

			(a)	Malfunction of electrical equipment or process instrumentation.  

				1	Consequences of electrical initiated fire. 
 
				2	Initiation of explosives by electrical current. 
 
			(b)	Initiation of explosives by electrical fault. 
 
			(c)	Breach of containment resulting in exposed explosives or spillage 
				of explosives.  

			(d)	Ignition sources arising from physical damage to the wiring 
				method used (e.g., crushing by forklift or other material handling 
				equipment, frayed cords, etc.).  

			(e)	Exposed electrical conductors or connectors that could make 
				contact with leg wires or cables of explosive devices during routine 
				handling.  

			(f)	Exposed electrical conductors or connectors on which explosives 
				dust or vapors could collect.  

			(g)	Collection of explosives dust on or in the equipment.  

			(h)	Sensitivity to heat and spark, and thermal stability of explosives 
				involved.  

		(5)	If the equipment is purged, the airflow shall be monitored per 
			NFPA 496 and interlocked to the equipment, or alarmed, if operator 
			shutdown of the machine can be reliably performed immediately 
			upon receipt of that alarm.  

		(6)	A waiver is not required when the wiring, equipment or 
			instrumentation meets the requirements of either section 8.6a(3) or 
			8.6a(4) of this chapter.  If the wiring, equipment or instrumentation 
			cannot meet these criteria or has not been evaluated by facility 
			management, it shall meet the appropriate electrical hazard class 
			requirements.  

	b.	Watertight equipment (that would pass a NEMA 4 hose test) should be 
		provided in those locations where water-explosives mixtures may come in 
		contact with the electrical equipment and wiring.  

8.7	Electrical Requirements for Outdoor Test Areas

	a.	Requirements for outdoor test areas shall be contained in the specific test 
		procedures.  

8.8	Hand-held, Battery-Powered Lights and Instruments

	a.	Flashlights and hand lanterns, powered by low-voltage dry cell batteries and 
		“miners cap lamps” approved as “permissible” by the U.S. Bureau of Mines 
		and by UL for NEC Class I hazardous locations, are authorized for use in 
		both Class I and Class II locations.  Devices that provide “cold light” through 
		chemical action are acceptable for use in any location.  

	b.	Hand-held instruments, watches, calculators, hearing aids, cameras, 
		self-contained flashes, and communication devices powered by low-voltage 
		dry cell batteries are authorized for use in the vicinity of Hazard Class II, 
		Division 2 rated hazardous operations and during setup of Hazard Class I or 
		Class II, Division 1 hazardous operations.  They shall be evaluated as to their 
		intrinsic safety and approved by facility management prior to use during 
		Hazard Class I or Class II, Division 1 hazardous operations. 
 
	c.	Hand-held, battery-operated equipment shall not come in direct or indirect 
		contact with bare explosives.  Batteries shall not be removed or replaced in 
		hazard rated areas (section 8.1 of this chapter).  

8.9	Non-Rated Extension Lighting

	a.	When it is necessary to use extension lights within 10 ft of exposed 
		explosives, where no airborne dust exists, the following requirements shall 
		apply:  

		(1)	Lights shall be mounted on heavy tripod stands. 
 
		(2)	The lights shall be fitted with exterior globes to prevent the falling of 
			hot sparks or particles that might ignite the explosives.  

		(3)	The lights shall be fitted with adequate guards to protect the globes 
			from physical damage. 
 
		(4)	The wire providing power to the lights shall be positioned so as to 
			prevent vehicles and personnel damaging the cord.  

		(5)	The flexible cord shall comply with section 8.5 of this chapter.  

		(6)	The light stand shall be secured to prevent tipping.  


		(7)	Neither the light nor the power cord shall be allowed to come in 
			direct or indirect contact with the explosives. 
 
		(8)	Lights shall be positioned outside the fall-down distance to the 
			explosives.  

8.10	Laboratories

	a.	Permanent wiring and equipment for existing laboratory areas are not 
		required to meet the requirements of section 8.4 of this chapter, except as 
		noted in section 8.4c(1).  

	b.	Process equipment used for synthesis, heating, drying, mechanical mixing, 
		and blending shall be dual-rated.  Weighing equipment shall be Class II, 
		Division 1 or mechanical.  These operations shall be isolated from non-rated 
		wiring, electrical equipment, and instrumentation in a manner that prevents 
		dust or vapors reaching an ignition source.  

	c.	When laboratory equipment cannot meet the requirements of section 8.10b 
		of this chapter, apply section 8.6a(3) or 8.6a(4) of this chapter.  

8.11	Modifications

	a.	Operating buildings and magazines are constructed to perform a specific 
		function that dictates the requirements for electrical installation.  Procedures 
		shall be established by each DOE facility to control the use and modification 
		of electrical equipment in explosives areas and ensure that uniform standards 
		are adhered to throughout the facility.  

9.0	VACUUM EQUIPMENT

9.1	General

	a.	Precautions shall be taken to prevent explosives from entering any vacuum 
		system not specifically designed to collect explosives.  

9.2	Labeling

	a.	All vacuum lines used for explosives operations should be labeled to warn 
		maintenance personnel that explosive residue may be present in these lines.  One 
		suggested label is:  

				DANGER, MAY CONTAIN EXPLOSIVES

9.3	Disassembly

	a.	All vacuum lines that are potentially contaminated with explosives shall be 
		disassembled according to approved operating procedures.  Disassembly should 
		be accomplished at flanged connections or elastomeric tubing whenever practical.  
		No attempt should be made to disassemble a vacuum line at a threaded 
		connection.  The design or installation of any new vacuum lines shall not employ 
		demountable, internal screwed, or threaded fittings or connections unless welded 
		or fixed permanently in place.  

9.4	Traps or Filters

	a.	Vacuum pumps used to evacuate processes for explosives operations shall be 
		equipped with primary and secondary intake line traps or filters to prevent 
		explosives from contaminating the pump.  

10.0	EXPLOSIVES DUST EXHAUST VENTILATION AND COLLECTION SYSTEMS

10.1	General

	a.	Exhaust ventilation should be used to control explosives dust (or other hazardous 
		materials used in or resulting from explosives operations) that could be 
		hazardous to operating personnel or contaminate the operating area.  Exhaust 
		ventilation used to remove explosives dust requires an approved dust collection 
		system to prevent the release of the dust outside the building.  

10.2	Exhaust Ventilation

	a.	Exhaust ventilation and collection systems that control explosives dust and 
		materials associated with explosives production shall be designed to meet 
		minimum requirements established in the ACGIH Ventilation Manual (most 
		current edition) and this Manual.  The exhaust ventilation system should 
		have sufficient capture and adequate makeup air to reduce exposure to 
		explosives dusts, or materials used in conjunction with explosives, to as low 
		as reasonably achievable.  This is particularly important when toxicity 
		information and occupational exposure limits are not available for the 
		explosives in use.  

10.3	Dust Collection Systems

	a.	A “wet collector” that moistens the dust close to the point of origin and keeps 
		it wet until the dust is removed for disposal is preferred.  A “dry type 
		collector” is permitted when authorized by a Standard Operating Procedure 
		(SOP).  

	b.	Dust collectors shall be designed to prevent explosives dust from reaching any 
		mechanical power source of the collection system.  

	c.	All conductive portions of the collection system shall be grounded and 
		bonded.  

	d.	A dust collection system shall not have screw threads, recesses, or cracks that 
		may be exposed to explosives contamination.  

	e.	Dust collection lines should be equipped with flanged connectors and inspection 
		ports. 
 
	f.	Pipes or ducts through which explosives are conveyed shall have long radius 
		bends with a centerline radius at least four times the diameter of the ducts or 
		pipes.  

	g.	Dust collectors shall be emptied and cleaned on a regular basis as system use 
		warrants and must be inspected periodically.  

10.4	Dust Collection Location

	a.	Wherever practical, dry-type explosives dust collection chambers should be 
		located outside operating buildings, in the open, or in buildings exclusively set 
		aside for the purpose.  

	b.	Stationary and portable wet-type collectors may be placed in the explosives 
		operating bays or cubicles, provided the quantity of explosives in the collectors 
		does not exceed 2 kg.  

11.0	DRAINS AND SUMPS

11.1	Collection

	a.	All drain lines handling explosive wastes shall be provided with sumps, 
		clarifiers, weirs or basins of adequate design and capacity for removal of 
		explosives by settling.  The drains shall be of adequate capacity, free of pockets, 
		and have sufficient slope (at least 1/4 in./ft) to prevent the settling out of 
		explosives in the line until it reaches the sump, clarifier, weir or other settling 
		basin.  

	b.	Drain gutters within buildings may be constructed with a slope of 1/8 in./ft.  
		However, a satisfactory program of cleaning must be developed to assure 
		removal of all hazardous material from drain gutters.  

	c.	Sumps must be designed to prevent suspended and settleable solid explosive 
		material from being carried in the wash waters beyond the sumps.  The design 
		shall allow sufficient settling time on the basis of the settling rate of the material 
		and the usual flow rate.  Sumps shall be constructed so that the overflow will not 
		disturb any floating solids.  The design must also permit easy removal of 
		collected explosives and retention of those explosives that float on water (until 
		they can be skimmed off).  When using settling basins to supplement sumps, 
		they will be cleaned periodically and a log will be maintained.  

	d.	Explosives collection trays for sumps will be constructed of nonferrous metal.  
		Hoisting equipment used to lift trays will be designed to prevent the trays from 
		binding on the sides of the sump.  Bolted sump tanks or other types of 
		construction that permit the explosives to settle in obscure or hidden spaces are 
		prohibited.  

	e.	Drains between the source of explosive and the sump shall be troughs with 
		rounded bottoms and removable ventilated covers to facilitate inspection for 
		accumulation of explosives.  This requirement applies to all new construction 
		and major modifications and should be considered for existing facilities.  Short 
		sections of closed pipe or trough are permitted if they can be visually inspected 
		for blockage or explosives buildup.  Explosives or explosives-contaminated 
		waste liquids shall not be released into closed drains and sewers.  

	f.	Drains shall be inspected periodically and necessary steps taken to prevent the 
		buildup of explosive deposits.  

11.2	Effluent

	a.	Drains containing explosive waste materials must not be connected in a manner 
		that allows such wastes to empty into the normal sewage systems carrying inert or 
		sanitary wastes.  

	b.	Care must be taken to avoid the possibility of deposition of explosives from sump 
		effluent due to drying, temperature changes, or interaction with other industrial 
		contaminations.  When handling explosives that are appreciably soluble in water, 
		sweeping and other dry collecting measures shall be used to keep such out of the 
		drainage system.  

	c.	The combination of sumps, settling ponds, and other systems must remove 
		explosives so that outflows meet environmental standards.  

12.0	PROCESSING

12.1	Heating, Drying, and Thermal Conditioning

12.1.1	General

	a.	Heating explosives is potentially dangerous for several reasons:  

		(1)	Elevated temperature can increase an explosive’s sensitivity to other 
			stimuli such as impact, shock, friction and static electricity.  
		(2)	At or above the explosive’s critical temperature (see definition in 
			Chapter I, section 6.0) a runaway chemical reaction may occur that 
			can produce an explosion or fire.  

		(3)	Elevated temperature of an explosive in a sealed container can cause 
			gas generation and pressure rupture of the containment even at 
			temperatures below the critical temperature.  

		(4)	Chemically incompatible or reactive materials, which may be 
			present as accidental contaminants, as components of the 
			formulation, or in external contact with the explosive, can intensify 
			the preceding dangers or cause them to occur at lower temperatures.  

		(5)	Nonuniform heating can cause excessively hot regions in the 
			explosives.  Causes may include inadequate agitation of fluid 
			explosives, nonuniform heaters, and nonuniform heat conduction.  

	b.	Critical temperature is a system property that depends on a combination of 
		the explosive’s chemical decomposition reactions, its mass and shape, heat 
		transfer and other thermal characteristics of the system, and the 
		confinement or pressure of decomposition products, especially gases.  
		Several different methods of thermal analysis can be used to determine or 
		estimate the critical temperature.  The process is typically quite complex 
		because of the complexity of normally occurring chemical reactions.  For 
		operational safety, a conservative estimate (i.e., lower limit) of the critical 
		temperature for a heating operation shall be made (uncertainties of 10 to 
		25°C being common).  Analogy of one explosive or system to another 
		similar system with a reliable thermal analysis may be used to determine 
		safe heating temperatures and heating times (heating limits).  

	c.	The DTA, DSC (differential scanning calorimetry), or other comparable 
		techniques can be used to measure the temperature of the onset of an 
		exothermic reaction in an explosive.  The test results can be used to rank 
		the thermal stability of explosives and as part of a thermal analysis.  
		Because of the complexity of chemical decomposition, however, the 
		DTA/DSC exotherm has no systematic relationship to the critical 
		temperature and is unreliable for estimating safe heating limits.  Exotherm 
		temperature is always considerably above critical temperature and usually 
		increases with the heating rate of the test.  Where the DTA/DSC exotherm 
		is specified as a standard for temperature control, the test heating rate shall 
		not exceed 10°C per minute.  DTA/DSC shall not be used as a sole means 
		for establishing heating limits (except as specified in section 8.6a(4) of this 
		chapter).  

	d.	Each facility shall conduct or obtain thermal analysis of any explosives 
		system before the explosive is heated in a contact operation or in 
		association with hazardous radioactive materials as described in 
		section 13.6.2 of this chapter.  From this analysis, a heating limit for the 
		explosives system shall be established which the EDC shall approve.  All 
		factors in sections a and b, above, shall be considered.  Any significant 
		change in the geometry or an increase in mass should be considered a new 
		explosives system.  For a contact operation, the maximum temperature 
		should be set at least 10°C below the critical temperature.  For heating 
		explosives in association with hazardous radioactive materials, the 
		maximum temperature should be set at least 20°C below the critical 
		temperature.  Facility management may approve heating to a temperature 
		greater than the above specifications if a documented analysis of the 
		explosive’s thermal characteristics indicates that an acceptable time or 
		temperature safety factor is still present for a specific operation.  These 
		operations shall be conducted remotely.  

	e.	Heating controls for each operation shall be established and specified in 
		written operating procedures.  Specified conditions should be set at the 
		lowest temperatures and heating times to do the job efficiently and should 
		not exceed the heating limit for the explosives system.  Factors to consider 
		when establishing heating controls include the heating limit and accuracy of 
		the estimated critical temperature, accuracy of the temperature control 
		equipment, and the likelihood of incompatible chemical contamination and 
		other operational parameters.  

12.1.2	Heating and Drying Equipment

	a.	Heat should be done by steam, hot water, friction air, or electrically heated 
		transfer fluid.  Redundant, automatic heat controls shall limit temperatures.  

	b.	In systems heated by steam only, the requirements for redundant, automatic 
		heat controls shall be satisfied if a pressure-reducing valve, pressure relief 
		valve, and thermostatic valve on the system control the steam pressure. 
 
	c.	In electricity heated systems, a manual reset secondary overtemperature 
		system consisting of a controller, failsafe sensor, and an interrupting device 
		shall be provided to interrupt the heat supply source if the primary system 
		fails.  The secondary interrupter shall be separate from the primary 
		interrupter.  The upper limit of the primary controller is determined by the 
		desired operating temperature limit.  The secondary (override) controller is 
		set at a higher temperature but should not exceed the maximum temperature 
		determined by the heating limit specified for the explosives system as 
		determined in section 12.1.1d of this chapter.  

	d.	Visual and/or audible alarms should be provided to alert operating 
		personnel to abnormal temperature conditions.  The heating of explosives 
		should be monitored at all times.  

	e.	The air or gas used to condition exposed explosives shall not be recirculated 
		if directly heated by electrical resistance elements.  

	f.	Drying or heating ovens should be vented to a safe location outdoors.  
		Water wash or filtration of the exhaust may be required.  If exhaust fans are 
		used, they shall be interlocked with the heat source.  

12.1.3	Heating and Drying Operations

	a.	Heating and drying shall be performed under the mildest set of conditions 
		that will accomplish the task safely and efficiently.  A thermal analysis 
		shall be made and a written procedure prepared consistent with 
		section 12.1.1.  The procedure shall include controls on the mass and 
		geometry (thickness of the layer, etc.) of the material that may be heated. 
 
	b.	Except as described in section 12.1.3c, below, drying shall be achieved by 
		circulating a warm, dry gas—either air or inert—over or through the 
		material. 
 
	c.	Small samples may be dried by placement in desiccators or by subjecting 
		them to vacuum.  Vacuum drying of larger items should be preceded by 
		drying at atmospheric pressure to remove quantities of moisture or solvent 
		before vacuum is applied to remove the final traces of moisture or solvent.  
		Explosives having a vapor pressure exceeding 1 x 10-4 mm Hg at the 
		drying temperature shall not be subjected to vacuum drying.  A cold trap 
		shall be used for vacuum drying where the vapor pressure of the explosives 
		is unknown.
  
	d.	A vapor-air mixture within explosive concentration limits shall be avoided.  
		Such a vapor-air mixture can be controlled by providing sufficient airflow 
		to maintain a vapor concentration well below the lower flammability limit 
		or by using an inert atmosphere.  For inert atmosphere, positive purge shall 
		be used to preclude oxygen leakage into the unit.  If vapor concentrations 
		approaching a flammable level are anticipated, they shall be monitored.  
		Airflow shall be controlled to prevent dusting.  

	e.	When heating explosives whose vapor pressure may cause undesired 
		condensation of explosives on equipment parts, heating shall be conducted 
		in a manner to control condensation of the explosive material.  This control 
		should be accomplished by heating the exhaust system or by circulating the 
		air at a rate that will keep the explosives concentration below the level at 
		which condensation could occur.  

	f.	The proper operation of heater controls shall be verified on a regular 
		schedule established by site management.  

12.2	Pressing

	a.	Explosives pressing operations subject explosives to high pressures to achieve a 
		physical change.  Pressing of explosives formulations is done routinely to 
		consolidate explosive materials into configurations required for test assemblies or 
		weapon systems.  Two common types of pressing operations commonly performed 
		are isostatic/hydrostatic and punch and die.  The following safety guidelines apply 
		to these types of pressing operations.  

12.2.1	General

	a.	Explosives pressing operations shall be conducted as remote operations.  

	b.	The correct functioning of press interlock systems shall be verified at 
		regular intervals.  

	c.	Pressing mandrels, punches and dies used in explosives operations shall be 
		examined regularly during periods of use for evidence of structural failure.  
		Suitable nondestructive test methods shall be used to perform the 
		examination.  Site management shall establish intervals between 
		inspections for each tooling design before committing the tooling to use.  
		The inspection interval and updating should be based on experience with 
		similar tooling designs and configurations.  All new or modified mandrels, 
		punches, and dies shall be inspected before their first use.  At least one 
		pressing cycle should be completed with mock explosives before 
		proceeding to explosives.  

	d.	Pressure controllers and indicators shall be calibrated periodically to ensure 
		accurate control and monitoring of pressing operations.  

	e.	Press parts that contact explosive materials shall be cleaned thoroughly to 
		remove residual explosives before use with a different explosive 
		formulation. 

	f.	Temperature control for heated presses and dies shall comply with the 
		requirements of sections 12.1.2a and 12.1.2b of this chapter.  

	g.	All pressing assemblies shall be designed or procedural controls established 
		to minimize or eliminate the extrusion of explosives between two mating 
		metal surfaces during the pressing operation.  

	h.	Operations with explosive powders should be performed in a manner that 
		reduces the release of explosives dust and thereby reduces operator 
		exposure and general room contamination.  For operations involving large 
		amounts of powders, local exhaust ventilation with a dust collection 
		system should be provided.  Respiratory protection to prevent inhalation 
		of explosives dust may be required when adequate ventilation is not 
		available.  

12.2.2	Isostatic/Hydrostatic Pressing

	a.	Before an elastomeric container or mandrel constructed of a new material 
		is introduced into a pressing operation (where it will contact explosives), 
		the material shall be evaluated for compatibility with the explosives.  

	b.	All pressing vessels shall be examined for evidence of cracking or other 
		signs of incipient structural failure at regular use intervals by suitable 
		nondestructive test methods.  Local management shall establish 
		examination intervals.  

	c.	Before large-scale pressings of new explosives or explosives 
		formulations, the materials shall be evaluated for thermal stability (see 
		scaleup procedures, Chapter VIII).  “New explosives or explosives 
		formulations” refer to those that are “new” to large-scale pressing.  
		Stability test results shall be used to assist in establishing safe pressing 
		conditions for the specific pressing size.  

	d.	For isostatic pressing, procedural controls shall be established to ensure 
		that:  

		(1)	An acceptable vacuum can be obtained on the mandrel assembly 
			to prevent adiabatic heating during pressing; and

		(2)	Air is bled out of the press before pressurization.  

	e.	Consideration should be given to the use of fire-resistant hydraulic fluids.  
		New fluids must be checked to ensure compatibility with the explosives 
		used.  

12.2.3	Punch and Die Pressing

	a.	All pressing punches and dies shall be inspected visually for damage, 
		deformation, and cleanliness before installation on a press.  Any 
		questionable condition shall be resolved before the pressing proceeds to 
		ensure that the operation’s safety is not compromised.  

	b.	All punches, dies, and press attachment fixtures shall be designed to 
		minimize the possibility of the punch being misaligned with the die 
		(resulting in gouging of a die surface during pressing).  Press setup 
		procedures shall provide for operator verification of proper alignment 
		before pressing.  

	c.	The responsible user of a gauging section capable of performing the 
		necessary measurements shall control punches and dies, which should be 
		maintained in matched sets.  A group other than the user should check 
		critical punch and die dimensions before initial use and at suitable 
		intervals thereafter.  Suitable check intervals for each punch and die 
		design should be determined as in section 12.2.1c of this chapter.  

12.3	Extruding

	a.	Extrusion operations involve the flow of plastic explosives material under 
		pressure into a cavity in a component of an assembly.  The following general 
		safety guidelines apply to this type of extrusion operation.  

		(1)	Extrusion operations shall be conducted remotely.  Contact extrusion may 
			be performed only when extruding nonexplosive or mock materials or 
			when hand-extruding small quantities with no metal-to-metal contact.  
			Precautions shall be taken to prevent personnel from being injured by the 
			rupture of pressurized equipment.  

		(2)	The explosive shall be protected against extrusion beyond the tooling 
			cavity.  Precautions shall be taken to prevent foreign material from 
			entering the explosives. 
 
		(3)	New designs and significant design changes in equipment, tooling or 
			components shall be tested by mock explosives extrusion before actual 
			explosives extrusion.  

		(4)	Pressure controllers and indicators shall be calibrated periodically to 
			ensure that proper sealing and extrusion pressures are maintained.  

		(5)	Extrusion press parts shall be cleaned thoroughly of residual explosives 
			remaining from the previous operation before the press is loaded with a 
			different explosive formulation.  

		(6)	Hand-loading of extrudable explosives is covered in section 12.8.2 of this 
			section.  

12.4	Machining

	a.	Explosives machining is a class of operation that involves cutting of the explosive 
		material, often in conjunction with harder inert materials.  Heat buildup from 
		friction at the cutting surface can result in thermal initiation of the explosive 
		substance.  Precautions must be taken to limit this buildup and to facilitate the 
		dissipation of thermal energy.  

12.4.1	Equipment Requirements

	a.	Interlocks shall be provided for wet machining operations to ensure 
		coolant flow before machine operation.  The coolant flow shall be 
		monitored and the equipment automatically and safely shut down if 
		loss-of-coolant flow is detected.  The interlocks shall be protected from 
		tampering and unauthorized disabling by physical means, or supervisory 
		control.  

	b.	The vacuum on vacuum chuck holding fixtures shall be monitored and 
		interlocked with the equipment for automatic shutdown of machining in 
		the event of vacuum loss.  

	c.	Tool path controls (stops, limits, design patterns, etc.) shall be provided to 
		prevent the unplanned travel path of a tool or work piece.  Positive means 
		or secondary verification shall control and limit equipment speed and feed 
		rates.  

	d.	Pressure-relief devices should be installed on pneumatically or 
		hydraulically powered equipment to ensure safe operation.  

	e.	Metal chip waste from machining operations should be kept separate from 
		explosives waste.  When this is not possible, mixed explosives and metal 
		waste should be completely segregated from unmixed waste and held for 
		separate disposal.  

	f.	Dull or damaged tools shall not be used.  A cutting tool inspection and 
		control program shall be established for explosives machining operations.  

	g.	Consideration will be given to additional safety control devices (i.e., 
		design patterns, safety templates, chip thickness sensors, tool pressure 
		sensors, etc.), depending on the type of machining operations, size of 
		explosives pieces, types of explosives, and other factors.  

	h.	The “machining overtest” shall be considered a testing operation (see 
		section 12.4.4e of this section) and shall be exempt from equipment 
		requirements.  

12.4.2	Contact or Remote Operations

	a.	The following explosives may be contact machined if a compatible, 
		nontoxic, noncombustible coolant is used.  Explosives not listed below 
		shall be machined remotely.  

		(1)	Amatol

		(2)	Baratol

		(3)	Boracitol

		(4)	Explosive D

		(5)	Octol with no more than 75 percent HMX

		(6)	Pentolite with no more than 50 percent PETN

		(7)	RDX/TNT compositions with no more than 75 percent RDX.  
			These compositions include Composition B, Composition B-3, and 
			75/25 Cyclotol.  

		(8)	TATB and TATB compositions with an inert plastic binder

		(9)	TNT

	b.	Explosive assemblies composed of any combination of explosives listed 
		in the above section and the following nonexplosive materials may be 
		contact machined if a compatible, nontoxic, noncombustible coolant is 
		used.  If an assembly contains an explosive not listed in the above 
		section or a nonexplosive material not listed below, the assembly shall be 
		machined remotely: 
 
		(1)	Foamed plastics.  

		(2)	Solid plastics.  

		(3)	Adhesives.  

		(4)	Amorphous graphite.  

		(5)	Calcium sulfate casting powder.  

		(6)	Explosives mockup.  

	c.	On any explosive, with certain exceptions for IHE and explosives 
		machined by fluid jet (see section 12.4.2e of this section), the following 
		operations shall be performed remotely:  

		(1)	Drilling of holes smaller than 5 cm in diameter, except for IHE, 
			where drilling of holes smaller than 5 mm shall be done remotely.  

		(2)	Coring operations (except contact operations on those explosives 
			listed in section 12.4.2a of this chapter, when the requirements of 
			section 12.4.5b of this chapter are met and a coolant is used).  

		(3)	Machining of any metal/explosives interface.  

		(4)	Machining IHE subassemblies with Hazard Class/Division 1.1 
			boosters installed.  

		(5)	Dry machining, except that IHE booster pellets may be contact 
			machined provided a dust collection system (see section 10.0 of 
			this chapter) is used.  

		(6)	Machining of explosives in Phase II or earlier stage of scaleup 
			(see Chapter VIII).  

	d.	Machining of primary explosives shall be avoided.  Alternative 
		methods, such as forming or pressing to final dimensions, should be 
		used to achieve the desired shape.  

	e.	IHE, PBX 9404, and LX-10 may be contact-machined by high-pressure 
		fluid jet.  The fluid-jet system pressure shall not exceed 20,000 psig.  
		The velocity of the fluid jet shall not exceed 520 m per second 
		(theoretical).  The jet nozzle orifice diameter shall not exceed 0.010 in.  
		The system machining fluid shall be water and shall not contain any 
		abrasives.  See section 12.15 of this section for use of low-pressure 
		fluids.  

	f.	Concurrent contact machining operations in the same bay should not be 
		permitted.  However, concurrent IHE contact machining is permitted 
		when other explosives are not present.  

	g.	Provisions shall be made to monitor remote machining operations 
		visually.  Consideration should be given to video recording and audio 
		monitoring.  

12.4.3	Setup and Preparation

	a.	The following precautions are provided for preparation and setup before 
		beginning the machining operation.  

		(1)	Before setting up the explosive work piece, the equipment shall 
			be checked for proper function and the absence of interference 
			between stationary and moving parts.  

		(2)	A mock explosive should be used to test the equipment function 
			of any operation using new tooling or new part programs.  

		(3)	The explosive component to be machined shall be inspected by 
			radiography or other suitable nondestructive test methods for 
			cracks, voids, and high-density foreign objects.  The component 
			shall also be checked for proper size.  

		(4)	Caution shall be exercised during setup and adjustment to avoid 
			pinching, dropping, crushing, or otherwise applying abnormal 
			forces to explosives present.  Special care must be given to 
			mounting and centering a part on a vacuum chuck.  Special 
			attention must be given to the proper functioning of the vacuum 
			system and its surface holding area.  

		(5)	Limits on machine speed, depth of cut, and feed rate shall be set 
			before the machine is activated.  

		(6)	Interlocks shall be functional before the machine is used to 
			machine explosives.  They should be tested once per shift.  

12.4.4	Operations Guidelines

	a.	The minimum tool speed necessary for safe and efficient operation 
		should be maintained.  The following maximums shall apply:  

		(1)	The relative velocity between the explosives surface and the 
			cutting tool shall not exceed 65 m per minute; 

		(2)	Work pieces or cutting tools shall not be rotated at speeds 
			exceeding 525 rpm; and

		(3)	The feed rate of the cutting tool or work piece shall not exceed 
			1 mm per revolution.  

	b.	The work piece, fixture, cutting tools, equipment, floor, troughs, drains, 
		etc., should be cleaned frequently to prevent accumulation of explosive 
		wastes.  

		(1)	Approved measures should be taken to prevent rust and 
			minimize deterioration of precision surfaces.  

		(2)	All tools, equipment, fixtures, and parts should be cleaned 
			before removal from the work area for storage.  

	c.	For contact machining operations, coolant shall be used to aid in 
		removing heat and cutting waste.  Coolant should be used for remote 
		operations when practical.  

		(1)	Coolant should be used on explosives/inert assemblies.  When 
			the explosives portion is included in the cut, coolant shall be 
			used for contact machining.  Coolant is not required if the 
			explosives portion of the assembly is contained (no bare 
			explosives) and is not included in the cut, or the machining is 
			conducted remotely.  

		(2)	Spray mist coolant may be used during machining of the 
			explosive-containing assemblies if the explosives portion is not 
			included in the cut.  

	d.	All visible explosives shall be removed from the machine before 
		maintenance or repairs.  No safeguards or interlocks shall be removed 
		or made inoperative, except by authorized personnel.  

	e.	Before submitting an explosive for contact machining approval, a 
		machining overtest program shall be conducted to identify the 
		machinability and associated hazards.  These HE qualification tests 
		should be performed in facilities set aside for these purposes.  

		(1)	Machining overtest shall be conducted remotely. 
 
		(2)	Operations performed during sample preparation may include 
			gaging and assembly, but shall not include any contact cutting, 
			scraping, or other material-removing operations on explosives 
			specimens.  

12.4.5	Specific Machining Operations

	a.	Drilling

		(1)	Drilling operations should be set up to maximize the ease of 
			achieving and maintaining proper alignment and to facilitate 
			removal of explosives chips, fines, and powder. 
 
		(2)	The fluting length on the drill bit shall exceed the depth of the 
			hole to be drilled by a minimum of 1.3 cm or one hole diameter, 
			whichever is greater.  

		(3)	The depth of a hole shall not be extended more than 1.5 times 
			the hole diameter (up to a maximum of 2 cm) during a single 
			insertion of the drill into the material.  After each insertion, it 
			may be advisable to withdraw the drill completely and remove 
			loose explosives from the cavity and drill bit before reinserting.  

		(4)	Coolant flow (when used) shall be directed to the 
			explosives/cutting edge interface.  Drill bits with coolant 
			channels to the tip of the drill should be used.  Pulsating 
			pressure types of coolant supplies are recommended for drills of 
			6-mm diameter or less to remove drill fines.  

	b.	Coring

		(1)	Coolant flow (when used) shall be directed at the 
			explosives/cutting edge interface.  

		(2)	If the hole is not positioned to provide continuous breakout, the 
			coring shall be accomplished incrementally.  When done in 
			increments, no more than 1.5 times the diameter of the hole shall 
			be cored at one time.  Before the maximum distance has been 
			cored, the tool shall be totally retracted from the hole and 
			cleaned.  The hole shall be flushed with coolant.  

	c.	Sawing

		(1)	The feed rate of the saw blade or work piece shall not exceed 
			7.5 cm per minute.  

		(2)	For band saws, coolant flow should be directed onto the saw 
			blade at the cutting interface, guide rollers, and the drive 
			wheel/saw blade interface.  For circular saws, the coolant flow 
			should be directed at the explosives/cutting edge interface.  

12.5	Dry Screening

	a.	Dry explosives often require screening for size classification or to remove 
		extraneous objects.  Magnetic separators are often advisable to remove ferrous 
		materials that may have passed through the screens.  The following guidelines 
		shall be observed for screening operations and equipment:  

		(1)	Operations using mechanical screens shall be performed remotely.  
			Equipment shall be designed and operations performed to avoid 
			subjecting explosive materials to pinching, friction, or impact.  

		(2)	Screening small samples may be performed as a contact operation if 
			approved by written procedures.
  
		(3)	Equipment shall be electrically bonded and grounded.  
			Resistance-to-ground shall be 10 ohms or less and shall be inspected on 
			a regular basis.  Equipment used to transfer electrostatic-sensitive 
			explosives to or from screens shall be conductive and electrically 
			bonded to the screen during transfer.  

		(4)	Operations and equipment shall be set up to minimize and control dust 
			generation.  

		(5)	Operating areas and equipment therein shall be cleaned frequently to 
			avoid accumulation of explosives dust.  

		(6)	Precautions shall be taken to prevent metals from rubbing together 
			when the screens vibrate.  Vibrating equipment shall be inspected 
			frequently for developing cracks subject to contamination by 
			explosives.  

12.6	Blending

	a.	Dry blending of explosives shall be performed remotely.  However, dry, hand 
		blending of small samples may be performed as a contact operation when 
		approved by facility management.  

	b.	Equipment should be designed and operations performed to minimize generation 
		and dispersion of explosives dust.  

	c.	Equipment shall be electrically bonded to provide a continuous path-to-ground.  
		Resistance-to-ground shall be 10 ohms or less and shall be inspected regularly.  
		Equipment used to transfer electrostatic-sensitive explosives to or from blenders 
		shall be conductive and electrically bonded to the blender during transfer.  

12.7	Melting

	a.	The heat for melting explosives shall be supplied by saturated steam, hot water, or 
		another temperature-controlled medium.  The steam pressure shall be controlled 
		in accordance with section 12.1.2b of this section.  

	b.	Temperatures for contact melting of TNT-based explosives (except those 
		containing PETN, e.g., pentolite) and keeping them molten shall not exceed 
		121°C.  The temperature limit for TNT explosives containing PETN shall be 
		109°C.  

	c.	Feeding of the melt kettle and the melting operation shall be controlled or 
		regulated to prevent the formation of large chunks of explosives.  

	d.	Alarms shall be provided on the melt temperature and on melt kettle agitation 
		when the operation will be left unattended.  Alarms shall sound if the temperature 
		exceeds the specifications of section 12.7b above, or if agitation ceases.  

	e.	Wherever possible, valves, piping, and threaded bolts and fasteners should be 
		eliminated from melted explosives handling systems.  

	f.	Provisions should be made for emergency emptying of melt kettles in the event of 
		temperature control problems or power failures.  

	g.	Melt kettles shall be constructed with corrosion-resistant materials.  Construction 
		shall not contain blind holes, threads, or cracks in areas exposed to melted 
		explosives.  Welds shall be inspected and found free of cracks and porosity.  

12.8	Assembly and Disassembly

	a.	Hand tools and electrical and pneumatic tools that may subject the explosives to 
		abnormal frictional forces, pinching, or excessive pressure, or cause significant 
		deformation, shall not be used during assembly or disassembly.  However, they 
		may be used on nonexplosive components.  

12.8.1	Assembly Operations

	a.	During assembly operations, the operator should be alert for mismated 
		parts and misaligned components.  Hard surfaces that will contact 
		explosives shall be precisely machined to mate with the explosives, lined 
		with cushioning material, or otherwise configured to keep sharp corners or 
		projections from being forced into explosives.  

12.8.2	Loading Assemblies with Plastic or Extrudable Explosives

	a.	The workability and plasticity of plastic and extrudable explosives 
		improves with increased temperature.  Plastic explosive Compositions C-3 
		and C-4 may be softened by warming to between 21°C and 38°C before 
		working.  Extrudable explosives LX-13 and extex should be kept as cool 
		as practical to prevent premature curing.  

	b.	Contamination of these explosives with abrasive or foreign substances 
		shall be avoided.  

	c.	The assembly shall be loaded with small increments of explosives and 
		may be tamped with suitable nonmetallic tools to eliminate air voids.  

12.8.3	Disassembly Operations

	a.	Before beginning disassembly, the device’s condition shall be assessed to 
		determine if it can be safely handled.  

	b.	Disassembly operations shall be planned before actual disassembly.  
		Possible problem areas caused by method of construction or physical 
		condition shall be considered.  A safety procedure for each unique 
		disassembly shall be written and reviewed.  

	c.	If disassembly would normally cause release of the pressure or if there is a 
		credible hazard of the pressure causing components to fly apart, before 
		beginning disassembly, pressurized units shall be thoroughly 
		depressurized.  

	d.	If approved for use, compressed air shall be applied cautiously during 
		disassembly to avoid causing to fly apart.  This may require remote 
		operation.  Use hydraulic pressure if possible.  

12.8.4	Personnel Protection for Disassembly Operations

	a.	Operators and all other personnel shall be provided complete 
		protection from disassembly operations involving conditions known or 
		expected to require the use of abnormal force.  Such operations require 
		either remote operation or the use of an operational shield.  The 
		shielding shall be designed to protect personnel at other operations or 
		locations from blast and missiles arising from a possible explosion.  

	b.	When disassembly requires that the operator be protected by an 
		operational shield, disassembly shall be defined as complete separation 
		(threads or other connections) of component parts.  For example, parts 
		shall not be loosened while the operator is properly protected and then 
		separated without the same protection.
  
12.9	Inspection

	a.	This section deals with the following types of explosives inspection 
		operations:  

		(1)	Inspecting incoming explosives raw materials and pressed explosive 
			billets for foreign bodies or cracks that could cause operating or safety 
			problems in processing operations; and

		(2) 	Measuring physical parameters of explosive pieces and assemblies.  

	b.	To enhance the safety of process operations, positive steps shall be taken to 
		assure the proper identification of explosives used and to prevent foreign 
		material from entering the operation via the explosives raw materials or via 
		materials in process (i.e., pressed explosive billets).  Some of the means by 
		which this can be accomplished include:  

		(1)	Screening.  

		(2)	Visual inspection.  

		(3)	Magnetic separation.  

		(4)	Radiographic inspection.  

		(5)	Chemical analysis.  

	c.	The following principles shall be followed in the design and operation of 
		explosives inspection equipment.  

		(1)	Pinch points shall be eliminated or steps taken to preclude explosives 
			contamination of pinch points.  

		(2)	Threaded fasteners or threads of measuring equipment shall be protected 
			from explosives contamination.  Care shall be taken to prevent parts of the 
			measuring or handling equipment from becoming loose and getting into 
			the explosives.  

		(3)	Inspection fixtures shall be designed to secure the explosives piece or 
			assembly securely to prevent toppling, rolling, or dropping during 
			measurement operations.  This is especially critical if the explosives 
			assembly is in motion (i.e., spinning, vibrating, etc.) during measurement.  

12.10	Synthesis

	a.	Synthesis and other chemical processing of new explosives compounds are 
		ongoing activities at DOE weapons facilities.  Synthesis operations are conducted 
		both on laboratory and pilot scales.  The Explosives Development Committee 
		(EDC, Chapter VIII) will approve new operations and materials.  In the 
		laboratory, the new material will initially be prepared on a small scale and 
		characterized as to sensitivity, physical, and explosive properties.  Also, the 
		laboratory will develop processing techniques for the material.  If laboratory 
		studies determine that the explosive is of continuing interest, it may be advanced 
		to the Pilot Plant where processing techniques will be refined and scaled up.  The 
		Pilot Plant will produce sufficient material for larger-scale physical, explosive, 
		and sensitivity characterizations.  

12.10.1	Laboratory-Scale Synthesis

	a.	Before initiation of work, the professional staff member who is directing 
		or conducting the synthesis shall analyze each explosives or potential 
		explosives experiment for the type and magnitude of hazards.  This staff 
		member shall be responsible for planning the proper selection of 
		conditions, quantity of explosives, and safety devices to be employed.  

	b.	Experiments should be designed to minimize the amount of explosives 
		involved and to use the mildest conditions that will yield the desired 
		information.  

	c.	New explosives materials shall be afforded extra protection against 
		impact, pinching, friction, pressure, sparks, contamination, and 
		deterioration.  If it is necessary to subject explosives to any of these 
		conditions, the operation shall be conducted remotely or adequate 
		personnel shielding shall be provided.  

12.10.2	Pilot- or Processing-Scale Synthesis

	a.	When operations are conducted using flammable or toxic liquids or gases, 
		local ventilation shall be provided to prevent hazardous vapor 
		concentrations from forming in the work area.  

	b.	Alarms should be provided for coolant flow to the reactor, for reaction 
		vessel agitation, and for reactor temperature.  These alarms should be 
		energized whenever coolant supply or agitation is critical to prevent a 
		runaway reaction.  When agitation is critical, the reactor should be 
		equipped with at least two sources of power to maintain agitation in the 
		event of failure.  For example, a reactor might employ an air or inert gas 
		bubble tube as a backup for a mechanical agitator.
  
	c.	The reaction vessel should be equipped with an emergency system.  Upon 
		activation, the emergency system will automatically cool the vessel or will 
		open or close a vessel dump valve as required by the process.  Contact 
		operations should be conducted with a means to activate the emergency 
		system manually.  

	d.	The building exhaust ventilation system shall be operating during all 
		synthesis operations involving flammable liquids.  

	e.	An alarm or monitor should be provided for the critical exhaust ventilation 
		system to warn operating personnel if airflow rates drop below a 
		predetermined level.  

	f.	Emergency plans shall be established for the synthesis area, specifying 
		action to be taken in the event an alarm sounds.  

	g.	Before operations begin, all equipment shall be set up and checked for 
		proper function.  Now or infrequently used equipment shall be tested in a 
		“dry run” before being used with any hazardous material.  

	h.	All explosives synthesis process equipment shall be maintained routinely.  
		Equipment with defects that could affect safe operations shall be tagged to 
		prevent its use until repairs are completed.  

	i.	Before starting any process operation, the transfer lines to be used should 
		be properly labeled and their function specified in the operating procedure.  

	j.	Transfer hoses and portable equipment not involved in the process shall be 
		removed from the work area and stored in their proper places.  

	k.	All control valves shall be correctly identified according to function.  

	l.	Safety equipment and clothing shall be worn as defined in operating 
		procedures.  

	m.	Agitator blades on reactors and mixers shall be inspected regularly for 
		proper clearance to ensure that there is no pinch point or metal-to-metal 
		contact.  Local facility management shall set up and approve the 
		inspection schedule.  

	n.	Explosives warning signs shall be conspicuously displayed on any 
		processing vessel in which explosive materials are to be left overnight.  

	o.	Any vessel that can be sealed and that can operate above atmospheric 
		pressure shall be equipped with overpressure protection. 
 
	p.	All closed vessels should be purged with inert gas before flammable 
		liquids are introduced.  

	q.	Inert gas pressure should be used to transfer flammable liquids when 
		gravity flow or pumping is not practical.  

12.11	Formulation

	a.	Formulation operations considered in this section involve combining compounds 
		or mixtures when one or more of the ingredients are explosive.  Combining 
		ingredients is commonly accomplished at DOE explosives handling facilities to 
		obtain some desired physical property, combination of properties, or reaction 
		parameters.  

12.11.1	General

	a.	Explosives may be loaded into mixers, mills, and deaerators as an 
		operator-attended, contact operation.  However, the starting, operating, 
		and stopping of such equipment with explosives present shall be 
		accomplished remotely.  As an exception, mixing-type operations 
		involving a low energy transfer may be allowed as a contact operation 
		(e.g., slurry coating and melt agitation).  

	b.	Equipment used for explosives formulation shall be checked for proper 
		operation before adding explosives.  Equipment shall be examined for 
		proper clearances and for metal-to-metal rubbing of moving parts with the 
		potential to contact explosives.  Bearings should be sealed to preclude 
		explosives contamination.  

	c.	Fast-action deluge systems shall be considered for equipment (e.g., 
		mixers, mills, and deaerators) used for easily ignitable explosives 
		formulations.  

	d.	Hot water, cold water, or steam, can be applied to mixers and mills.  
		Heating fluid temperatures shall not exceed known safe operating 
		temperatures for the explosives involved.  When roll milling, allowance 
		shall also be made for viscous shear heating of the explosives in process.  
		Heated systems shall comply with the requirements of sections 12.1.2a 
		and 12.1.2b of this section.  

12.11.2	Mixing

	a.	Mixer seals and gaskets shall be checked on a regular schedule and 
		cleaned or replaced as required.  

	b.	Checks should be made to ensure that maximum particle sizes of 
		ingredients or hard agglomerates of proposed mixes are less than the 
		blade-to-blade or blade-to-bowl clearances.  

	c.	Initial cleaning with solvents used for dissolving or suspending the 
		explosives residues shall be done remotely (except for melt-mix or slurry 
		coating vessels).  

	d.	Explosive powders and plastic-bonded explosives formulations may be 
		mixed wet in a contact operation.  This can be accomplished if the wet 
		mixture cannot be initiated with energy sources available and the viscosity 
		is kept low and the possibility of isolated portions of the mix becoming 
		dry is precluded.  

12.11.3	Ball or Jar Milling

	a.	Balls that are porous or contain cavities shall not be permitted in mills for 
		grinding explosives.  

	b.	Grinding media contaminated with explosives slurry shall be protected 
		from excessive impact when emptying of the mill.  

	c.	After grinding, a careful inspection shall be made to ensure that the 
		explosive is free of grinding media.  Dispose of any explosives 
		contaminated with broken media.  

	d.	After separating the explosive, the grinding media shall be thoroughly 
		cleaned and inspected before reuse or disposal.  

12.11.4	Roll Milling

	a.	Positive stops should be installed on roll mills to prevent rolls from 
		rubbing against each other.  

	b.	Before starting a milling operation on a roll mill, the contact of the scraper 
		blade with the roll should be adjusted to the minimum pressure necessary 
		to perform the operation.  

	c.	Roll gaps should be set as wide as possible while still allowing adequate 
		working of the material.  The minimum gap setting shall be 0.1 mm.  

	d.	Roll rpm should be held at the minimum required to process the material 
		adequately. 
 
	e.	All roll mills that may be contact operated (e.g., with nonexplosive 
		materials) shall be equipped with emergency stop devices (breaker bar, or 
		chain) within easy reach of the operator.  

12.12	Concurrent Contact Operations

	a.	The preferred setup for explosives operations is to perform each operation in a 
		separate location to preclude any adverse operation interaction.  Because such an 
		arrangement is frequently impractical, concurrent operations may be permitted if 
		the following conditions exist:  

		(1)	Potential equipment-operator interactions between the two operations have 
			been analyzed and the risk is not appreciably greater than that for both 
			operations considered separately.  

		(2)	Explosive materials in either operation are not exposed to stress conditions 
			such as elevated temperature (melting or heat conditioning), elevated 
			pressures (pressing or extruding), or deformation/shear (machining or 
			cutting).  

		(3)	Mixing of materials in the concurrent operations will not create 
			compatibility problems.  

		(4)	Each operator is aware at all times of concurrent operations in his or 
			her area.  

12.13	Contamination Prevention

	a.	Precautions shall be taken to avoid mutual contamination when two or more 
		incompatible explosives or materials are handled on a single line or within one 
		building or room.  This includes vacuum systems and explosives scrap collection.  
		Inadvertent mixing of incompatible explosives materials can be hazardous not 
		only to manufacturing facilities and personnel but also to the user if such 
		materials are loaded into explosives devices.  

	b.	When two or more explosives are used in a line or within a building and mixing is 
		not intended, the materials shall be segregated in separate locations.  Containers 
		shall be clearly marked with the weight and contents identified.  Care shall be 
		exercised to properly segregate material in service magazines and in operating 
		buildings.  

	c.	When a different explosive is to be used in process equipment, the equipment 
		shall be thoroughly cleaned, and excess explosive from the previous job should 
		be removed from the bay.  This eliminates the hazards caused by mixing 
		materials.  

	d.	In any explosives operation, permanent service lines shall be labeled as to their 
		contents.  Valves and switches on service lines whose operation can result in a 
		hazardous situation shall be labeled as to their function.  

12.14	Hand-Cutting and Finishing Operations

	a.	Hand-cutting finishing, which may include cutting, trimming, coring, and lapping 
		(surface polishing) explosive materials shall be performed using the mildest 
		energy input that will accomplish the task safely and efficiently.  The facility 
		EDC shall review and approve the safety of hand-cutting and finishing operations, 
		which shall then be incorporated into an operating procedure before starting the 
		operation.  

12.15	Use of Low-Pressure Fluids

	a.	Low-pressure fluids (liquid pressure less than 1,500 psig) may be handled as in 
		contact operations to aid explosives dissolution, rinsing, system flushing and 
		similar operations under the following conditions:  

		(1)	The fluid system shall have a pressure relief device installed to prevent 
			system overpressurization.  

		(2)	Low-pressure fluid operations may be used with those explosives 
			whose impact sensitivity is less than PETN.  Such operations may 
			be used on other explosives only after analyzing the energies 
			involved.  

		(3)	Solvents shall be compatible with the explosive material.  Controls for 
			their use shall be specified in operating procedures.  

		(4)	For use of pressures above 1,500 psig, see section 12.4.2e of this 
			chapter.  

13.0	TESTING

13.1	General

	a.	This section covers the following types of testing operations.  

		(1)	Explosives test shots, gun firings (both small arms and large caliber), 
			and environmental, physical-property, and sensitivity testing of 
			explosives specimens. 

		(2)	Explosives-related experiments or tests for which the explosive 
			material is used to provide desired results such as a seismic yield, 
			overpressure effects, pulse energy, or other special applications.  
13.2	Test Planning

13.2.1	Hazards Analysis

	a.	Proposed testing programs shall be examined for all foreseeable 
		hazards involved in the test.  This shall be done with knowledge of the 
		construction and operation of all standard and nonstandard equipment 
		to be used, as well as the type of explosives involved.  

	b.	Tests that are unique in their application or pose obvious hazards shall 
		adhere to the requirements contained in Chapter VII, section 2.1.  

	c.	Large-scale tests with the potential to propel missiles off Government 
		land shall receive a formal risk analysis of the worst-case conditions 
		for each test type.  Such analysis shall address the probability and 
		potential severity of hazards with respect to injury and property 
		damage.  

13.2.2	Firing Areas

	a.	A secured firing area (danger zone) shall be established for each test to 
		protect personnel from hazardous blast overpressure, firebrands, 
		fragments, or projectiles from an explosives shot or gun firing.  The 
		danger zone can be determined by the application of the principles 
		outlined in DoD 6055.9-STD.  

	b.	Selected firing areas shall minimize the potential for secondary fires 
		and adverse effects to the environment.  

13.3	Test Firing

13.3.1	General Range Standards

	a.	Each DOE explosives test site shall establish procedures to ensure that 
		site personnel and transients are not exposed to firebrands, fragments, 
		or excessive blast overpressure from a test shot.  In establishing these 
		procedures, the following guidelines shall be considered.  

	b.	During testing operations, personnel access to each test site shall be 
		controlled.  Unattended roadblocks, gates or doors used to prevent 
		personnel from entering the danger zone during a test should be 
		interlocked or locked with specially controlled keys.  

	c.	Before test firing, all firing site personnel and visitors shall be 
		accounted for and in a safe place.  

	d.	A visual inspection of the danger zone shall be performed immediately 
		before each test shot or series of shots as applicable, to ensure that no 
		transients are present.  

	e.	The danger zone shall be free of service personnel (e.g., telephone 
		repairmen, surveyors, or road maintenance crews, etc.) during test 
		operations.  The control point shall notify service personnel of the 
		specific requirements under which they may safely work in the area 
		when testing is not in progress.  In addition, the control point shall 
		notify firing site personnel of the presence and location of service 
		personnel in their areas.  

	f.	Clearance for a test or test series shall be coordinated with all test sites 
		and other areas that could be affected.  A warning shall be provided to 
		every affected area immediately before each firing.  

	g.	Detonation of very large explosive shots, numerous smaller shots, or 
		gun firings may result in hearing damage and may exceed the DOE 
		allowable limits for impulse noise.  Perform a noise evaluation of these 
		activities to ensure that adequate hearing protection is provided to 
		those involved.  

	h.	During test operations, all personnel assigned to the test area shall be 
		continuously alert for movement of personnel, vehicles, and aircraft.  

	i.	Test firings often create hazardous conditions for aircraft operating in 
		the airspace near the danger zone.  If this airspace is subject to air 
		traffic, precautions shall be taken to ensure that the airspace is clear of 
		traffic at the time of firing.
  
	j.	Each firing site shall establish personnel limits based on the number of 
		people actually needed to conduct an operation and the number of 
		casuals that should be present.  The responsible person at the firing site 
		shall enforce these personnel limits.  

	k.	Testing of explosives can result in personnel exposure to toxic 
		decomposition products such as carbon monoxide, hydrogen chloride, 
		hydrogen fluoride, hydrogen cyanide, and nitrogen oxides.  It is good 
		practice to allow the detonation cloud to disperse before leaving 
		protective bunkers.  Fragment-danger-zone distances are normally 
		adequate to allow cloud dispersal and protect outside personnel from 
		excessive exposure.  

	l.	For testing that can result in abnormally long hazardous conditions 
		following the test, the procedure shall require a suitable waiting period 
		before personnel leave their shelter or safe haven area. 

13.3.2	Test Setup

	a.	When and where possible, test setup work should be done before 
		receipt of explosives.   Such work includes the following:  

		(1)	Firing site safety devices (at both the bunker and remote from 
			the firing bunker) shall be checked at regular intervals.  Such 
			safety devices include warning lights, door and gate firing 
			circuit interlocks, emergency firing circuit cutoff switches, and 
			grounding.  

		(2)	All firing pad and shot stand setup work that requires power 
			tools or other potential spark-producing devices should be 
			completed.  The firing pad shall be cleared of all unnecessary 
			gear.  Special precautions and procedures will be developed 
			and implemented if power tools or other spark-producing 
			devices are needed after explosives are delivered to the firing 
			pad.  

		(3)	If a special structure is required, as much work as possible 
			should be accomplished on the structure, including assembly of 
			all materials. 
 
		(4)	When possible, all diagnostic equipment shall be set up, 
			checked, and tested in a dry run.  

13.3.3	Pin Switches and Other Non-initiating Circuits

	a.	Whenever pin switches and other non-initiating circuits are checked 
		(such as for charging current or leakage) and are in contact with or in 
		close proximity to explosives, the check should be performed 
		remotely.  Other non-initiating electrical circuits include strain gauges, 
		pressure transducers, thermocouples, etc., that may be affixed to or 
		close to the explosives within an assembly.  A continuity-only 
		(resistance) check may be accomplished as a contact operation with an 
		electrical instrument approved for use with the particular explosive 
		device.  When low-firing-current actuators are involved, it may be 
		advisable to conduct these tests remotely (see section 13.8 of this 
		section).  

13.3.4	Lightning Storms

	a.	All operations at open, test-firing areas shall be discontinued during 
		lightning storms when explosives are present.  Completion of a test 
		after receiving a lightning alert may be allowed only if test preparation 
		has progressed to the point that discontinuing testing represents a 
		greater personnel exposure than completing testing.  

13.3.5	Low-Energy Electroexplosive Devices

	a.	When using hot-wire or low-energy EEDs for a test firing, the 
		following apply: 
 
		(1)	Procedures shall be established to ensure that RF, FM, and 
			television transmitters with sufficient output energy to 
			initiate an EED at the test site are either restricted to a safe 
			distance from the site or not operated.  Table II-2, and 
			Table II-3 specify minimum safe distances for several types 
			of transmitters at several output power levels. 
 
		(2)	Blasting caps and other low-firing-current igniters or 
			detonators shall be kept separate from explosives at all 
			times, except during actual test charge assembly and setup. 

		(3)	At all times wiring systems for the explosive charge and 
			any low-firing-current initiators shall be kept insulated 
			from all sources of extraneous current unless the weapon 
			components have an exposed electrical ground by design.  
			Connections made using weapon wiring connectors or 
			cables are acceptable without further modification.  Shunts 
			shall be left on low-energy initiators or lead wires until 
			connections are made.  Connections shall be taped or 
			otherwise insulated. 
 
		(4)	Test units containing low-firing-current actuators or 
			detonators shall be clearly marked.  No contact operations 
			involving electrical testing shall be permitted on this type 
			of unit unless an electrical meter for the specific application 
			is used.  

 Table II-1.  	Minimum Safe Distances Between RF Transmitters  

 Table II-2.	Minimum Safe Distances between TV and FM Broadcasting  
		Transmitters and Electric Blasting Options

 Table II-3.	Minimum Safe Distances Between Mobile RF Transmitters 
		and Electric Blasting Operations 

 13.3.6	Explosives Storage in Firing Areas

	a.	Explosives or ammunition storage at a firing area shall be located such 
		that ignition, explosion, or detonation is improbable if a fire, unplanned 
		explosion, or detonation occurs in the area.  

	b.	Tests that require storage of explosives or ammunition at the firing site 
		beyond a day’s event shall conform to the requirements of section 17.0 of 
		this chapter.  

13.3.7	Warning Signals

	a.	Each DOE explosives testing facility shall use standard audible signals to 
		warn personnel of any impending firing in a test area.  Each facility shall 
		establish signals, which facility management shall approve.  

13.3.8	Grass Fires

	a.	Before conducting a test shot at an outside firing pad, an evaluation shall 
		be made to determine the need to control grass fires that the test may 
		initiate.  

13.3.9	Firing Leads

	a.	All detonator lead wires shall be electrically insulated.  During setup on 
		the firing point, firing leads or cables of low-energy detonators for 
		explosive assemblies shall be kept properly shorted.  

13.3.10	Unattended Test Assemblies

	a.	When necessary, a test assembly may be left unattended on the firing pad 
		during off-shift hours under the following minimum conditions:  

		(1)	If explosives are present, appropriate safety warning signs shall be 
			displayed at all entrances to the firing pad.  

		(2)	Protective services and fire department personnel shall be notified 
			of the explosives location.  This location must be in a 
			controlled-access or secured area.  

		(3)	If low-energy detonators are present on the assembly, their leads or 
			cables shall be shorted.  

13.3.11	Post-firing Controls

	a.	If the firing appears to be normal, test personnel shall remain in the 
		protective shelter for a suitable waiting period.  The test procedure shall 
		specify the waiting period, which shall be sufficient to assure adequate 
		dissipation of smoke and dust.  In some cases, developing and analyzing 
		the diagnostic film for misfires may be helpful.  

	b.	During the waiting period, all power to the firing units shall be turned off 
		or disconnected.  Whenever possible, detonator cables should be 
		disconnected from the firing units and shunted and grounded, and the 
		firing unit capacitor grounded.  

	c.	After the waiting period, one qualified person shall inspect the firing pad 
		in person or by remote TV to determine the results of the shot before other 
		personnel leave the shelter.  

	d.	If the inspection confirms that safe conditions exist, the lead person shall 
		signal “all clear.”

	e.	When a partial detonation or a test misfire occurs or is suspected, the 
		firing area shall be inspected for unreacted explosives after the minimum 
		waiting period (see section 13.7 of this chapter).  

	f.	Recovered explosives from a destructive test shall be placed in an 
		explosives storage magazine as Storage Compatibility Group L unless a 
		documented analysis determines that the explosives do not present a 
		special risk.  

13.3.12	Contamination of Firing Areas

	a.	Test firing areas are subject to explosives contamination from incomplete 
		or failed detonations when the explosives are subjected to varying forms 
		of energy input.  Although most of this contamination will be cleaned up 
		in the post-shot inspection, the following steps shall be taken to reduce the 
		hazards from residual explosives contamination:  

		(1)	A contamination zone for each firing area shall be established and 
			permanently annotated on facility site plans.  

		(2)	Personnel access to explosives-contaminated areas shall be 
			controlled.  

		(3)	Service personnel shall not work in the area without the permission 
			of testing-area management and only when supervised by a 
			management-approved person. 
 
13.3.13	Test Range Firing Circuit Criteria

	a.	The following criteria are guidelines for the design of electrical circuits 
		used to arm and initiate squibs, igniters, detonators and similar EEDs 
		during test firing:  

		(1)	Fire control circuits shall include both an ARM switch and a FIRE 
			switch.  For low-firing-current initiators, the safe mode of the 
			arming circuit should interrupt the firing circuit and short-circuit 
			and ground the EED terminals.  Manual shorting and grounding is 
			permitted.  

		(2)	Each electrical ARM and FIRE circuit shall include an interlock 
			device consisting of a safety plug or a key-operated switch to 
			prevent inadvertent energization.  

		(3)	The safety plug design and configuration shall be unique for its 
			application and used to prevent unauthorized or accidental 
			activation of a firing circuit.  Key-operated switches for ARM and 
			FIRE circuits shall be designed to lock in the safe (OFF) position 
			when the control key is removed.  Duplicate keys or safety plugs 
			shall not be permitted in any one test area.  

		(4)	During shot-preparation the key or safety plug for a firing site shall 
			be in the control of the lead operator at all times.  

		(5)	FIRE control circuits in test areas shall be documented for 
			operational control purposes.  Documentation shall include 
			complete wiring diagrams, electrical schematics, and cable 
			function lists.  All changes or modifications to FIRE control 
			circuits shall be reviewed for safety and approved by other 
			appropriate departments before being incorporated into the circuits.  

		(6)	Each FIRE control circuit shall be isolated from all other circuits.  
			A shielded, twisted pair of wires with an outer insulating jacket or 
			coaxial cable should be employed for each circuit.  

		(7)	All sequential timers used in firing circuits shall be “failsafe.”  
			Failure of a component or circuit must not energize the firing 
			circuit. 

		(8)	Test current from the electrical instruments used to perform 
			resistance checks shall not exceed 10 percent of the no-fire rating 
			of the EED in the circuit.  

		(9)	Firing circuits shall be marked clearly or otherwise distinctively 
			identified, and shall be installed so as to prevent inadvertent 
			energization by other circuits.  

13.4	Test Firing in Tanks or Chambers

	a.	Small quantities of explosives may be detonated in cubicles or in pressure vessels.  
		 The following requirements apply to such vessels.  

		(1)	The firing vessel and flanges shall be capable of withstanding and 
			confining the effects of the explosion and properly safeguarding 
			personnel.  When new firing chambers are designed and put into service, a 
			safety factor to their operational weight limit must be included during 
			certification testing.  This overtest load should be based on a percentage of 
			the operational explosives weight limit.  For example, a certification test 
			should be performed with an appropriate explosive material weighing 
			125 percent TNT equivalency of the intended operating limit.  

		(2)	The firing circuit should be interlocked with the vessel access door latch 
			so that the door must be closed and latched before the explosive can be 
			fired.  

		(3)	Qualified engineering personnel shall periodically inspect the vessel to 
			ensure that its structural integrity is maintained after repeated detonations.  

		(4)	Test firing is often conducted inside large containment vessels that allow 
			personnel entry but provide a confined working space and limited egress.  
			The SOP must include requirements for ventilating and evaluating the tank 
			or chamber’s atmosphere before personnel entry.  

13.5	Gun Firings

	a.	Work, adjustment, or observation shall not be permitted on a gun while a live 
		round is in the firing chamber.  The only exception is to check azimuth and 
		elevation.  

	b.	Precautions shall be taken to protect personnel or equipment against hazards 
		resulting from errors in assembly or preparation of equipment and ammunition.  
		In particular, the following areas shall be checked.  

		(1)	Adequate filling of hydraulic recoil mechanisms.  

		(2)	Safe function of the firing mechanisms.  (Firing mechanisms, particularly 
			electric firing mechanisms, shall be tested before use to ensure that merely 
			inserting a round or closing of the breech will not result in firing).  

		(3)	Absence of obstructions in the bore.  

	c.		Test weapons other than manually-fired small arms should be equipped for 
			remote control of the safety and for remote cocking.  The safety shall not be 
			advanced to the fire position and the weapon shall not be cocked until all 
			personnel are in a safe location. 
 
	d.	Guns used to fire projectiles at explosives targets shall meet the following criteria.  

		(1)	The gun shall be rigidly mounted so that that the impact area is defined 
			and controlled.  

		(2)	The target shall have an adequate backstop. 

		(3)	Provision should be made to remotely move the gun, remotely remove the 
			propellant charge, or remove the explosives from the line of fire if the gun 
			misfires, unless the hazardous effects of an accidental detonation of the 
			explosive target is contained or effectively shielded from personnel.  

		(4)	Provisions shall be made to collect and remove undetonated explosives 
			from the chamber or area.  

	e.	When using hydrogen gas to fire a light gas gun, the operation shall be remote 
		while hydrogen is present in the gun pressure tanks or in the gun barrel and catch 
		tank after firing.  The hydrogen shall be purged from the entire system with inert 
		gas and the atmosphere checked before personnel are allowed to reenter the gun 
		bay.  

13.6	Ballistic, Environmental, Physical Property and Sensitivity Testing

13.6.1	Checkout of Dynamic Engineering Test Equipment for Explosive Assemblies

	a.	To minimize the possibility of an incident during dynamic testing of 
		explosive assemblies, load-bearing members of the test equipment or 
		explosive assembly should be proof-tested and examined if:  

		(1)	The test equipment is new or has undergone a design modification;

		(2)	Existing test equipment is to be used under unusually severe test 
			conditions (i.e., conditions of velocity, vibration, pressure, load, 
			etc.); or

		(3)	A new or modified explosive assembly is to be tested that affects 
			the loading characteristics of the equipment.  

	b.	Proof-testing of the explosive assembly or test equipment should be 
		conducted before running tests involving systems with explosives.  

	c.	At a minimum, proof-testing should consist of the following sequence of 
		checkouts:  

		(1)	Check out load-bearing members (lifting devices, hold-down 
			mechanisms, fixtures, vehicle cases) to at least 125 percent of rated 
			load using simulated loads (see section 14.4 of this chapter).  

		(2)	“Dry run” tests of actual systems with mock materials in place of 
			explosives and hazardous radioactive materials.  

	d.	If a part failure occurs in either of the checkout tests in sections 13.6.1c(1) 
		and (2), tests involving explosives or radioactive material shall be run until 
		additional checkout tests have demonstrated that the cause of failure has 
		been eliminated.  

13.6.2	Testing of Explosives and Hazardous Radioactive Materials

	a.	Explosives and hazardous radioactive materials (i.e., plutonium, enriched 
		uranium, etc.) shall not be included in the same test or operation if the test 
		or operation is not contained and involves the following:  

		NOTE 1:  Depleted uranium and natural thorium are not considered hazardous 
		radioactive materials for this purpose.  

		NOTE 2:  Nuclear Explosive Operations, covered by DOE 452.2 Series Orders, 
		current version, are exempted from this requirement.  

		(1)	Application of high-energy stimuli (i.e., high shock, impact, or 
			friction levels) to the explosive.  

		(2)	Heating the explosive to within 10°C of the heating limit 
			determined for the explosive system without hazardous radioactive 
			materials consistent with section 12.1.1d of this chapter.  

		(3)	Intimate contact of incompatible material with the explosive as 
			determined by compatibility testing.  

		(4)	Unacceptably high risk of accidental application of stimuli listed in 
			section (1), (2), or (3) above.  

13.6.3	Heating of Explosives Test Specimens

	a.	Before heating an explosive, a thermal analysis shall be conducted and a 
		written procedure prepared consistent with section 12.1.1 of this 
		chapter.  See section 12.1.2 of this chapter for requirements on heating 
		equipment.  

	b.	Contact operations on explosives specimens undergoing thermal 
		conditioning may be permitted if:  

		(1)	The specimen will not be subjected to excessive friction, impact, or 
			spark stimuli during normal operations or during a credible 
			accident scenario.  

		(2)	The explosive involved has satisfied appropriate scaleup 
			sensitivity and stability criteria (see Chapter VIII) and has 
			sufficient handling history to reveal any special characteristics 
			affecting safe use.  

	c.	If an explosives test specimen in a contact operation is discovered to have 
		exceeded the established heating limit for the explosive system, the test 
		shall be terminated and the specimen cooled to ambient temperature.  A 
		procedure should be prepared and approved for the required corrective 
		action (i.e., disassembly or disposal).  

13.6.4	Instrumentation

	a.	Instrumentation directly applied to explosives in a test specimen shall 
		be physically disconnected, isolated, or grounded before personnel may 
		enter the test cell.  Only instrumentation channels that contain devices 
		that limit the current below the level capable of initiating the explosive 
		are exempt.  

	b.	Environmental control transducer leads, not attached to the test specimen 
		and permanently installed in an approved control system, do not need to 
		be grounded or disconnected.  

13.6.5	Explosives Limits

	a.	Explosives specimens shall not be permitted to accumulate in a test 
		cell beyond the quantity required to sustain the test.  For short-term 
		testing (less than one day), specimens present shall not exceed a 
		4-hour supply.  

13.6.6	Drop Testing

	a.	After an explosives drop test, personnel shall wait a minimum of 
		5 minutes before leaving the control bunker to inspect the test pad.  If 
		smoke or flame is observed at the drop test area, entry shall not be 
		permitted until at least 30 minutes after all visual signs have 
		disappeared.  

13.7	Test Failures and Misfires

13.7.1	Explosives Misfire

	a.	If no audible detonation is heard after once pulsing the firing circuit, the 
		firing circuitry and detonators may be checked for continuity.  This 
		checking shall be accomplished from within the control bunker or from a 
		protected location.  If the firing circuits and detonators appear operative, 
		one or more attempts to fire may be made.  

	b.	If the shot still does not fire, the following precautions shall be taken:  

		(1)	Disconnect and de-energize all electrical power sources connected 
			to the shot.  

		(2)	Ensure that all personnel in the danger zone are aware of the 
			misfire and that they must remain under cover until released.  

		(3)	Before personnel are permitted to leave the cover of the bunker, a 
			pre-established waiting period shall be observed.  A minimum 
			30-minute waiting period is advised.  

		(4)	A carefully prepared review of the situation should be initiated in 
			consultation with another knowledgeable person.  

		(5)	After an agreement has been reached and before other personnel 
			are permitted to leave the cover of the bunker, one qualified person 
			should carefully approach and examine the setup to verify that it is 
			safe.  

13.7.2	Misfire of a Remotely Fired Gun

	a.	When a misfire occurs, several more attempts to fire the gun may be 
		made.  If subsequent attempts are also unsuccessful, the following 
		precautions should be taken.  

		(1)	Disconnect all electrical circuitry to the gun to ensure that the 
			firing system cannot be energized.  

		(2)	Before approaching a light-gas driven gun, ensure that it is in a 
			safe condition by venting all pressure in the gun breech.  To reduce 
			the risk of a gas explosion if the driving gas is flammable, the gun 
			breech shall be purged with inert gas after venting. 
 
		(3)	An appropriate waiting period shall be observed before permitting 
			personnel to approach to the gun.  The waiting period shall be at 
			least 10 minutes. 
 
		(4)	When approaching the gun, if there is any indication that powder is 
			burning, personnel shall return to a safe area and observe an 
			additional waiting period of at least 20 minutes. 

		(5)	The gun shall not be approached within the known recoil distance 
			behind the breech or from the front.  Approach to and work on the 
			gun shall be from the sides.  

		(6)	For separate loading guns (i.e., propellant charge is loaded separate 
			from projectiles), the propellant igniter shall be disconnected from 
			the firing mechanism and removed from the gun before any other 
			gun operations.  

		(7)	If possible, the powder chamber of the gun shall be checked for the 
			presence of pressure and vented to the atmosphere before opening 
			the chamber. 
 
	b.	If an unforeseen failure situation arises (e.g., the explosive projectile is 
		stuck in the bore), an emergency procedure shall be prepared and followed 
		to resolve the situation.  

13.8	Electrical Instruments for Use with Explosives Systems

	a.	(Except those covered by DOE O 452.2B, current version, Safety of Nuclear 
		Explosive Operations)

13.8.1	Classification

	a.	Test instruments shall be categorized based on electrical characteristics 
		that affect safe use with explosives systems.  Specifically, the 
		instrument categories shall be established so that each category can be 
		safely applied to one or more of the following classes of explosives 
		systems:  

		(1)	low-energy or hot-wire initiators (blasting caps, actuators, squibs, 
			etc.); 

		(2)	high-energy initiators (EBWs, slappers, etc.); and 

		(3)	non-initiating electrical circuits.  

	b.	Test instruments not meeting the safety criteria may be used on an 
		explosive system only if the activity is considered a remote operation and 
		adequate personnel shielding or separation distance is provided.  

13.8.2	Certification

	a.	Each DOE facility where electrical test instruments are used on explosives 
		systems shall establish a formal system for reviewing and certifying these 
		instruments.  Procedures should also be established for marking 
		instruments to show approved uses and restrictions.  

	b.	Each individual test instrument designated for use on explosives systems 
		shall be certified and prominently labeled with its approved use and with a 
		warning if its use is restricted.  

	c.	Certified instruments shall be inspected and calibrated at prescribed 
		intervals or whenever the instrument is opened for servicing or repair.  
		Access to internal circuitry of certified instruments shall be controlled to 
		prevent unauthorized repairs, maintenance, or alteration.  

	d.	Each DOE facility using electrical instruments to test explosives systems 
		shall maintain records of all instrument types certified.  These records 
		should include type, manufacturer, model, electrical specifications, wiring 
		diagrams, and failure mode analyses.  DOE facilities management shall 
		notify the Explosives Safety Committee chairperson in writing when new 
		electrical instruments have been approved for use with initiating systems.  
		The chairperson shall disseminate this information to all committee 
		members.  

13.8.3	Electrical Instruments for Use with Initiating Electrical Circuits

	a.	Instruments in this category are used with electrical initiation circuits 
		connected to EEDs and may be further categorized for use with either 
		low-energy initiators or high-energy initiators.  Test instruments used for 
		this purpose shall be current-limited.  Before being used on initiating 
		circuits, each instrument wiring diagram and internal circuitry design shall 
		be analyzed, examined, and certified for the following:  

		(1)	The output current through resistance equivalent to that of the 
			class’s minimum resistance initiator should not exceed 1 percent 
			and shall not exceed 10 percent of the no-fire rating for the class’s 
			most sensitive initiator.  The current-limiting features of test 
			instruments shall be internal to the instrument and shall not depend 
			on test circuit load characteristics.  

		(2)	The internal circuitry shall ensure isolation features that require a 
			minimum of two independent failure modes before the specified 
			output current can be exceeded.  

		(3)	A comprehensive (point-to-point, if possible) wiring check should 
			be made to ensure that the wiring corresponds to the diagram and 
			that all components are functioning properly and within 
			specifications.  

13.8.4	Electrical Instruments for Use with Non-initiating Electrical Circuits

	a.	Instruments in this category are used with electrical circuits connected to 
		strain gauges, pin switches, pressure transducers, thermocouples, electrical 
		components, etc., that are affixed to or within an assembly with 
		explosives.  These instruments shall meet the following requirements:  

		(1)	Each specific use of the instrument shall be analyzed to ensure no 
			credible scenario exists whereby the normal test energy from the 
			instrument can ignite explosives charges or initiators in the test.  
			Guidance on operational requirements is contained in sections 
			13.3.3 and 13.6.4 of this section. 
 
		(2)	Where an instrument is used to make measurements on sensors 
			directly applied to explosives, (e.g., bonded strain gauges or pin 
			switches) the instrument shall be certified and have met the 
			requirements of section 13.8.3 of this section.  

		(3)	Instruments used with non-initiating electrical circuits shall be 
			marked prominently with restrictions on use.  Many of these 
			instruments do not meet the requirements for use with initiating 
			systems and must be marked to prevent their use on this type of 
			circuit.  

14.0	MATERIALS HANDLING

14.1	General

	a.	The distance that explosive materials can fall, if accidentally dropped during 
		handling, shall be maintained at a minimum.  

	b.	Hard surfaces and edges of equipment that could be struck by accidentally 
		dropped, consolidated explosives, should be padded with cushioning mats or 
		coverings whenever possible and needed.  (Protective padding includes both sheet 
		material on work surfaces and on equipment and approved floor coverings).  

	c.	Explosives handling shall be permitted only in areas free of obstructions and 
		where the walkway surfaces provide positive footing with no slipping or tripping 
		hazards (e.g., explosives shall not be handled on snowy or icy walkways).  
	d.	Incompatible explosives and materials shall not be handled together. 
 
	e.	Detonators, actuators, EEDs, and other items normally shipped as Hazard 
		Class/Division 1.4 explosives, should be kept in non-propagating trays or 
		containers unless handled individually.  

	f.	Dry explosive materials that generate dust shall be transported in closed 
		containers. 
 
	g.	Containers of explosives or explosive assemblies shall be labeled to identify 
		contents during handling, storage, and transportation.  

	h.	Explosives items that cannot be identified and labeled shall be stored as Hazard 
		Class/Division, Storage Compatibility Group 1.1L.  A material analysis shall be 
		performed to identify the material before it is returned to inventory or disposed of 
		in accordance with regulatory requirements.  

	i.	Components or devices that contain explosives should not be labeled or marked 
		“inert” or “dummy.”  Nonconforming items shall be labeled/tagged indicating that 
		they contain explosives.  New components or devices containing explosives shall 
		not be labeled or marked “inert” or “dummy.”  

14.2	Manual Handling of Bare Consolidated Explosives

	a.	Manual handling shall be minimized as follows:  

		(1)	One person may lift or carry up to 25 kg of explosive only if it can be 
			securely gripped.  

		(2)	Two people may lift or carry 50 kg of explosive only if manual lifting and 
			handling tooling is provided.  

		(3)	Explosive items weighing over 50 kg or that cannot be securely gripped 
			should not be manually handled.  

	b.	Explosives should not be carried up or down stairs except when in protective 
		containers.  

	c.	Operations shall be arranged to minimize the handling distance in all manual 
		explosives handling situations.  

14.3	Carts or Hand Trucks

	a.	Explosives that cannot be handled manually shall be moved only on suitable carts 
		or hand trucks.  Carts used to handle bare explosives shall be provided with a 
		padded surface to support the explosives.  These carts shall be equipped with 
		either a lip, sides of sufficient height, or tiedown straps to prevent the explosives 
		from sliding or rolling off the cart.  The cart-explosive load combination shall 
		have a center of gravity low enough to prevent tipping if the cart suddenly stops.  

	b.	Explosives handling carts or hand trucks should be equipped with brakes.  Carts 
		containing explosives shall be positively secured (e.g., setting wheel brakes or 
		chocking) when the cart is stationary.  

14.4	Mechanical Handling Equipment

	a.	All mechanical handling equipment (i.e., cranes, hoists, slings, etc.) used to lift 
		and move explosives or assemblies containing explosives shall be initially 
		proof-tested, periodically inspected, and maintained in first-class working 
		condition.  The DOE Hoisting and Rigging Standard (DOE-STD-1090-current 
		version) may be used as a guide for testing, inspection, and maintenance.  
	b.	Equipment for vacuum lifting of consolidated explosives must comply with the 
		following requirements:  

		(1)	The lifting equipment shall be designed so that the explosives cannot be 
			dislodged from the vacuum head by jerks or other irregular motions in the 
			hoisting apparatus or bumping of other equipment.  

		(2)	Equipment shall be designed to monitor the available vacuum and to 
			control loss of vacuum if the power or vacuum source fails.  

		(3)	Any handling where a loss of vacuum would allow the explosive to drop 
			an excessive distance shall incorporate some safety device (i.e., collar, net, 
			or strap) to prevent dropping.  “Excessive distance” shall be defined as a 
			distance greater than the minimum drop height giving drop-skid initiation 
			for the explosive being handled.  “Initiation” in the drop-skid test refers to 
			any indication of sample decomposition.  An alternative method of 
			protection can be a cushioning surface under and over all items that may 
			be struck by the falling explosives.  

15.0	MATERIALS RECEIPT

	a.	The following guidelines shall apply to the inspection, receipt, and unloading 
		of explosives materials.  

15.1	Motor Vehicles


	a.	A competent person using an approved checklist at a designated inspection 
		station shall carefully inspect incoming motor vehicles loaded with explosives.  

		(1)	When an inspection reveals that an incoming tractor is in unsatisfactory 
			condition, the tractor should be disconnected from the trailer at the 
			inspection station and moved to a position where it will not endanger 
			any other explosives.  

		(2)	When inspection reveals that a trailer or its load is in an unsatisfactory 
			condition, the trailer shall be moved to a location that, for the particular 
			material involved, is at least inhabited-building distance for the 
			particular material involved from inert and administration areas, 
			hazardous locations, and the facility boundary.  At this location, the 
			unsatisfactory condition shall be corrected before the vehicle is moved 
			to its destination within the facility.  When moving from the inspection 
			station to the isolated location, the route should be as far as possible 
			from built-up areas and areas with high personnel concentrations.  

		(3)	Vehicles that cannot be immediately dispatched to points where they are 
			to be unloaded may be moved to a holding yard that shall be sited in 
			accordance with Chapter VI, section 3.2.3.  

		(4)	Incoming or outgoing explosives loaded trailers that cannot be exchanged 
			directly between the carrier and DOE facilities may be moved to an 
			interchange yard.  Quantity-distance provisions do not apply if the trailers 
			are moved expeditiously.  

	b.	Vehicles shall not be backed up to a dock on which explosives are resting and 
		could be damaged. 
 
	c.	The receiving facility’s doors should be closed while the motor vehicle is in 
		motion or the engine is running.  This requirement does not apply to vehicles 
		equipped with spark arrestors or when no exposed explosives are present.
  
	d.	Once the vehicle is in position, the engine shall be shut off, the brakes set, and the 
		wheels chocked.  

	e.	After unloading, the vehicle shall be inspected for loose explosives materials.  
		Any spilled material shall be cleaned up after the inspection.  Spills involving 
		liquid explosives or explosives in solution shall be reported immediately to the 
		building supervisor.  Appropriate cleanup procedures shall be used.  

15.2	Railcars

	a.	Railcars containing explosives and ammunition entering a DOE facility must be 
		inspected.  This inspection comprises the examination of the outside and 
		underside of each car for damage such as defective brakes, couplings, wheel 
		flanges, etc.; for unauthorized and suspicious articles; and to confirm the 
		individual car numbers and seal numbers against bills of lading.  

		(1)	Cars of ammunition or explosives showing a defect that could affect the 
			facility or contents of the car should be removed to the suspect car spur for 
			additional inspection [see Chapter VI, section 3.2.3a(2)].  

		(2)	Cars that satisfactorily pass inspection may be considered reasonably safe, 
			but care must be exercised in breaking car seals and opening car doors 
			because of possible damage or shifted cargo, leaking containers, etc.  
			Interior inspection should be conducted at the unloading point.  

15.3	Damaged Shipments

	a.	Explosives shipments shall be inspected for damage before storage.  

	b.	Contents of a damaged or broken container shall be removed to another container.  
		Spilled materials shall be cleaned up before continuing with loading or unloading.  

	c.	Any shipment received in damaged condition as a result of inadequate or 
		improper blocking and bracing or as a result of not being loaded in accordance 
		with DOT requirements shall not be reshipped until the damage is corrected.  

16.0	TRANSPORTATION

16.1	Equipment and Operations

16.1.1	General

	a.	Qualified explosives handlers shall load and unload explosives (see 
		Chapter V, section 3.0)

	b.	Explosives shipped on common carriers shall be packaged and 
		shipped in accordance with DOT regulations.  

	c.	Explosives containing items transported by special agents in DOE 
		approved secure transporters are governed by DOE Orders 452.2A 
		Safety of Nuclear Explosives Operations and 460.1A Packaging and 
		Transportation Safety.  

	d.	Section 161.K of The Atomic Energy Act of 1954 as amended and 
		Title 18 USC, Chapter 40, section 845 govern security and 
		emergency vehicles carrying explosives in support of approved 
		contingency plans. 
 
	e.	When transferring explosives within facilities, open body vehicles 
		(other than flat bed types) shall have sides and tailgates or rear doors 
		that are strong and securely fastened to safely retain the explosives.  

	f.	The cargo on partly or completely loaded vehicles (including flat bed 
		types) shall be blocked, braced, chocked, tied down, or otherwise 
		secured to prevent shifting during transit.  

	g.	Precautions shall be taken to prevent the exhausts of motor vehicles 
		from igniting explosive material.  When a motor vehicle approaches 
		within 25 ft of the doors of a structure through which a shipment is to 
		be moved, the doors shall be kept closed until the motor has been 
		turned off, unless the vehicle is equipped with an exhaust spark 
		arrestor or there are no explosives exposed.  Explosives packaged in 
		DOT or onsite containers are not considered exposed.  

	h.	No explosives shall be loaded or unloaded from a motor vehicle while 
		the motor is running unless the motor is required to provide power to 
		vehicle accessories used in loading and unloading operations and is 
		equipped with an exhaust spark arrestor. 
 
	i.	Onsite movements of explosives shall be in accordance with this 
		Manual and local onsite packaging and transportation procedures.  
		Where there is a conflict, this Manual shall take precedence.  

16.1.2	Motor Vehicles

	a.	Offsite shipments

		(1)	DOT regulations govern commercial motor vehicle shipments 
			on public highways.  Motor vehicle shipments from a DOE 
			installation that meet the DOT definition of “in commerce” 
			comply in full with the applicable portions of DOT 
			regulations, and with state and municipal regulations, except 
			as provided for in these regulations.  A qualified inspector 
			shall inspect and approve for compliance with an approved 
			checklist any motor vehicle that may be loaded with 
			explosives (Hazard Class/Division 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3) and is 
			designated for movement over public highways.  After 
			loading, the cargo shall be inspected and approved.  

		(2)	Before motor vehicles loaded with explosive materials leave a 
			DOE facility, drivers shall be informed of the nature of their 
			cargo and appropriate measures to take if the vehicle or load 
			becomes involved in a fire.  

		(3)	Drivers of explosive laden vehicles shall meet the pertinent 
			requirements of 49 CFR Parts 390-397.  

	b.	Onsite shipments

		(1)	All DOE vehicles used to transport explosives onsite should 
			be equipped with the following:  

			(a)	Appropriate Hazard/Class placards plainly visible 
				from all directions.  Placards are required for 
				Class/Division 1.4, 1.5, 1.6 explosives when the gross 
				weight exceeds 1000 lbs.  

			(b)	Adequate tie-down bolts, rings, and straps to secure 
				the explosives load.  

			(c)	The cargo area where the explosives are loaded shall 
				be void of any sharp projections.  (Non-sparking lining 
				is desirable when hauling explosives in transfer 
				containers that are not DOT approved.)

			(d)	A quick-disconnect switch on the battery, if explosives 
				are left loaded on the vehicle overnight.  

			(e)	Two fully charged and serviceable fire extinguishers 
				with a minimum rating of 2A:10BC, with one 
				extinguisher mounted on the outside of the vehicle.  
				Only one extinguisher is required for the transport of 
				Hazard Class/Division 1.4 explosives.  

			(f)	Rear view mirrors on both sides of the vehicle.  

			(g)	One set of chock blocks.  

		(2)	Normal shipments of explosive materials on site shall be 
			packaged in DOT approved containers/packages or in 
			approved onsite containers (refer to Chapter II, section 17.5 
			for specifics).  

		(3)	Onsite shipments of explosive-designed systems related to 
			experiments or tests that by their nature are not conducive to 
			the requirements of 16.1.2b(2) shall be governed by 
			Chapter II, section 13.2.1 of this Manual and the following:  

			(a)	For shipping purposes, placards and labels shall reflect 
				the appropriate Hazard Classification/Division as 
				assigned by the designated onsite classification 
				authority.  

			(b)	The appropriate authority shall review and approve the 
				designed method of transport for the system.  

			(c)	Drivers shall be knowledgeable of the unique aspects 
				of the system being transported or shall be 
				accompanied by an explosives handler qualified by 
				training and experience to handle the system.  

		(4)	After the EDC has determined that new or developmental 
			explosives meet the necessary testing to establish that they are 
			not forbidden explosives and are at the proper phase of 
			development for the quantity of material being requested, 
			onsite transport shall conform to section 16.1.2b(2) or 
			16.1.2b(3) of this section.  

		(5)	Security patrol and response vehicles are authorized to 
			transport only the minimum quantity of munitions needed to 
			support approved contingency plans and to execute their 
			security duties.  Whenever possible, support munitions 
			required for defense against hostile forces should be pre-
			positioned in readily accessible magazines.  

		(6)	Security vehicles armed with a combination of up to 25 lbs net 
			explosives weight of Hazard Class/Division 1.1 and 1.2 
			munitions shall be exempt from explosives quantity-distance 
			requirements when executing approved contingency plans or 
			security duties.  Vehicles so armed will not be used for 
			administrative purposes and will be separated from inhabited 
			facilities and property lines by a minimum of 125 ft when 
			temporarily out of security service.  The vehicle shall be 
			downloaded into properly sited magazines or approved 
			facilities when parked for periods in excess of 4 hours.  
			Operation of vehicles loaded with explosives will be restricted 
			to onsite locations and transported explosives must be secured 
			within the vehicle.  Smoking in explosives loaded vehicles is 
			prohibited.  These vehicles shall be downloaded into properly 
			sited magazines or approved facilities prior to repair or 
			maintenance, except under emergency response conditions.  

		(7)	Security force personnel shall be allowed to transport on their 
			person Hazard Class/Division 1.1 and 1.2 munitions issued to 
			them for personal use in the execution of approved 
			contingency plans and security duties without regard to 
			explosives quantity-distance requirements.  Appropriate safety 
			precautions for the ammunition handling shall be observed.  
			Munitions shall be placed in an approved location if 
			temporarily removed from the uniform/load bearing 
			equipment worn to carry such items.  

16.1.3	Railcars

	a.	A railcar must not be loaded with any Hazard Class/Division 1.1 and 
		1.2 explosives unless it has been thoroughly inspected by a carrier 
		employee qualified to certify that the railcar conforms to DOT 
		regulations.  After the carrier has furnished a certified car, the shipper 
		or an authorized employee of the shipper must inspect the interior 
		before starting to load any such car and after loading to certify that 
		the vehicle is in proper condition.  A certificate will be completed and 
		signed where applicable.  Shipments of Hazard Class/Division 1.3 
		explosives may be loaded in a closed car or container car in good 
		condition (i.e., sparks cannot enter the car and the roof does not have 
		unprotected decayed wood that constitutes a fire hazard).  
		Wooden-floored cars must be equipped with spark shields.  Such cars 
		do not require a car certificate, but must display a placard in 
		accordance with DOT regulations.  

	b.	The railcar certificate, printed on strong tag board measuring 7 by 
		7 in. or 6 by 8 in., must be executed in triplicate.  The carrier must 
		file the original in a separate file at the forwarding station, and the 
		other two must be attached to the car, one to each outer side on a 
		fixed placard board or as otherwise provided.  

16.1.4	Materials Handling Equipment

	a.	Gasoline-powered materials-handling equipment (e.g., forklifts, etc.) 
		may be used only in areas where all explosives are properly packaged 
		and only if equipped in the following manner.  

		(1)	Backfire deflectors shall be the oil-bath or screen type (certain 
			types of air cleaners will serve the purpose) and shall be 
			attached securely on the throat of the carburetor.  

		(2)	A tight-fitting, properly vented cap, shall be in place on the 
			gasoline fill pipe at all times (except during refueling).  

		(3)	A flame arrestor shall be installed in the fill pipe.  

		(4)	If necessary, a deflector plate shall be installed to prevent any 
			gasoline tank overflow from reaching the motor or the exhaust 
			pipe.  

		(5)	On gravity feed systems or on pump systems where siphoning 
			might occur, a shutoff valve shall be installed at the fuel tank 
			or in the feed line to permit shutting off the flow of gasoline in 
			an emergency or a break in the fuel line or carburetor.  

		(6)	Provisions shall be made to prevent fuel lines from rupturing 
			due to vibration. 
 
	b.	Diesel-powered equipment may be used if all the precautions for 
		gasoline-powered equipment (as specified above) are followed. 
 
	c.	Battery-powered equipment for handling explosive material shall 
		comply with the criteria listed below. 
 
		(1)	Battery-powered equipment and its use in hazardous locations 
			shall comply with OSHA standards.  All equipment shall be 
			appropriately labeled for ready identification.
  
		(2)	Types E, EE, ES, and EX rated, battery-powered equipment 
			are satisfactory for handling all classes of properly packaged 
			ammunition and explosives.  Types EE and ES 
			battery-powered equipment may be used to handle packaged 
			explosives or components in corridors or ramps connecting 
			hazardous operations, provided the ramps and corridors are 
			not Class I or II, Division 1, hazardous locations (NEC).  
			Type EE equipment is authorized for use in Class II, Division 
			2, Group G hazardous locations, and Type ES equipment may 
			be authorized with facility management’s approval (see 
			NFPA 505, Powered Industrial Trucks).  

		(3)	Only Type EX equipment is approved for use in specifically 
			named Class I, Division 1, Group D or Class II, Division 1, 
			Group G hazardous locations.  At this time, EX equipment 
			does not carry a dual rating and shall only be used in 
			hazardous areas for which it is specifically rated.  

16.2	General Operation Guidelines

	a.	Explosives-containing items transported by special agents in SSTs are 
		governed by DOE Orders 452.2 and 460.1 series documents.  

	b.	Drivers shall be given special training that emphasizes caution, road 
		courtesy, and defensive driving.
  
	c.	The operator of an explosives-transport vehicle shall have proper training in 
		the general safety precautions for explosives handling.  

	d.	Congested areas should be avoided.  

	e.	Road vehicles shall stop at all railroad crossings.  

	f.	No personnel shall ride in the cargo area.  Loose items (e.g., handling gear) 
		in the cargo compartments are prohibited.  

	g.	No smoking is allowed in or within 25 ft of any vehicle containing 
		explosives.  Matches, lighters, or other fire-, flame-, or spark-producing 
		devices shall not be in the vehicle or carried by personnel in the vehicle.  

	h.	The vehicle shall be subjected to regular maintenance checks.  

	i.	Before shipment by commercial carrier, explosives materials shall be 
		classified by testing or analogy in accordance with DOT regulations.  

	j.	Other than when opened for inspection, containers of explosives shall not be 
		opened or repaired on any transportation vehicle.  

	k.	Except for emergency situations, fueling or maintenance of vehicles 
		containing explosives is forbidden. 
 
	l.	Each facility shall establish traffic rules governing the operation of 
		explosives-transport vehicles and the operation of other onsite vehicles in the 
		vicinity of explosives-transport vehicles. 
 
	m.	Industrial trucks shall not be used in locations where high concentrations of 
		dusts or sublimation of explosives may result in contaminated surfaces (e.g., 
		screening buildings, pouring bays, melt-pour units, drilling bays, 
		consolidating bays, and explosive washout facilities).  

16.3	Emergency Conditions

	a.	Explosives should not be transported in hazardous conditions (e.g., storms, 
		icy roads, or poor visibility), unless an emergency plan is in effect to provide 
		instruction and guidelines while an explosives-transport vehicle is in transit.  
		The plan should address the following issues:  

		(1)	Parking the vehicle.
 
		(2)	Safeguarding the vehicle from other traffic. 
 
		(3)	Notifying appropriate authorities of the emergency situation.  

		(4)	Leaving the vehicle unattended. 

	b.	A plan shall be prepared to address mechanical breakdowns.  The plan shall 
		address the following issues:  

		(1)	Removing the vehicle from the road as far as practical.  

		(2)	Posting emergency reflectors, signals, etc. (carrying flares on the 
			vehicle is not permitted).  

		(3)	Reporting the problem.  

		(4)	Maintaining surveillance of the vehicle.  

		(5)	If necessary, removing the vehicle load to facilitate repair of the 
			vehicle.  

	c.	If an explosives-carrying vehicle is involved in an accident, the following 
		steps should be taken:  

		(1)	Inspect the load for evidence of fire. 
 
		(2)	If there is a fire, but the explosives material is not presently or 
			imminently involved, attempt to prevent the fire from spreading to the 
			load.  The fire may be fought using the vehicle’s fire extinguishers.  
			Ensure the security of explosives items removed from the vehicle.  

		(3)	If a fire presently or imminently involves the explosives load, 
			evacuate all personnel to a pre-established safe distance.  Block or 
			divert traffic from the vicinity of the accident.  Evacuate potentially 
			affected area residents.  

		(4)	Unless the explosive cargo is imminently involved in fire, the 
			operator is to stay with the vehicle until the cargo is properly 
			dispositioned.  

		(5)	Notify the fire department or fire brigade of the accident immediately 
			and inform them of the general type and approximate quantity of 
			explosives involved.  

		(6)	Inform the proper authorities of the accident.  


17.0	EXPLOSIVES STORAGE

17.1	Storage Magazine Facilities

	a.	Permanent explosives facilities shall comply fully with TM 5-1300, 
		“Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions,” and 
		DOE/TIC-11268, “A Manual for the Prediction of Blast and Fragment 
		Loading of Structures.”  Portable magazines should be ventilated and 
		resistant to water, fire, and, theft.  They can be made of any material that 
		meets these guidelines.  (Portable facilities that comply with 27 CFR 55.203 
		and 55.207 through 55.211, “Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms,” 
		(BATF) meet this criteria.)  Portable magazines shall be sited 
		per DoD 6055.9-STD as above ground magazines.  

	b.	Placards shall be posted on or near each magazine door, specifying explosive 
		and personnel limits and general safety precautions that should be observed 
		during work in the magazine.  

	c.	Vegetation around storage magazines should be controlled to minimize 
		potential damage to the magazine (see Chapter VI, section 5.1).  

	d.	At least two fire extinguishers, minimum rating 2A:10BC and winterized 
		where necessary, should be provided and maintained for immediate use by 
		personnel working around a magazine.  These extinguishers may be located 
		in the area or available on an explosives transportation vehicle.  The purpose 
		of these extinguishers is to fight small external fires or magazine fires that do 
		not involve explosives.  

	e.	Suitably rated telephone or other emergency communication equipment 
		should be provided in magazine storage areas.  All communication 
		equipment located outdoors should be protected from the weather.  

	f.	Temperature control

		(1)	In general, storage magazines should not be heated unless heating is 
			necessary to prevent damage caused by sudden temperature changes 
			or when dimensional changes of components are undesirable.  

		(2)	Magazines requiring heat should be heated with steam, hot water, or 
			electrically heated hot water.  Some magazines with tight temperature 
			controls may require both heating and air conditioning.  Electrical 
			systems with forced air through ducts may be allowed if the systems 
			are located exterior to any explosive hazard.  

		(3)	Heating coils shall be arranged so that explosives material cannot 
			come into contact with the coils.  They shall be equipped with covers 
			designed to prevent storage of materials on top of the coils.
 
		(4)	Maximum and minimum temperature monitors should be provided in 
			all heated magazines.  

17.2	Storage Magazine Operations

	a.	Explosives items shall be properly packaged and stored in either 
		DOT-approved manufacturers’ containers/packages or in specified onsite 
		containers (see section 17.5 of this chapter).  

	b.	Explosives may be stored on magazine shelves.  The bottom of the container 
		should not be more than 2 m off the floor, except as permitted by 
		section 17.2c of this section.  

	c.	Explosives and explosives containers in storage shall be positioned safely 
		and securely.  If explosives containers must be stacked, they shall be placed 
		in stable arrays.  

	d.	Load limits shall be established for shelving in magazines containing 
		explosives.  If overloading is possible, the loading conditions shall be posted.  
	e.	Materials shall not be left suspended by booms, cranes, or hoists in any 
		explosives storage facility.  

	f.	Stored explosives should be segregated by lot designation.  Stacks of 
		explosives should be arranged so that air freely circulates to all parts of the 
		stack.  To prevent moisture accumulation, pallets or appropriate dunnage 
		should be used to ensure that containers are not stacked directly on the 
		magazine floor. 
 
	g.	Aisles shall be wide enough to accommodate inspection, inventory, 
		sampling, and materials handling operations of the stored explosives 
		containers.  

	h.	Crews shall not be permitted to work in a position that requires passing the 
		work aisle or the position of a second crew to reach the exit.  Unobstructed 
		aisles shall be maintained to permit rapid exit of personnel.  
	i.	Each crew working in a magazine must have their own exit route that does 
		not interfere with exit routes for other crews.  

	j.	Magazines shall be locked at all times except when permissible operations are in 
		progress or opened for ventilation.  Personnel shall be present while the magazine 
		is open for ventilation.  All exit doors shall be unlocked and open when personnel 
		are working in the magazine.  

	k.	Each magazine shall be inventoried at least annually to determine the total weight 
		of explosives present (to assure this weight conforms to allowable 
		quantity-distance constraints) and to remove and destroy materials that are not 
		properly identified or labeled.  

	l.	The liquid level in storage containers for wet explosives shall be checked and 
		replenished as necessary at least once a year.  A log of the checks shall be 
		maintained.  

	m.	Empty containers, tools, conveyors, lift trucks, skids, etc., should not be stored in 
		a magazine containing explosives.  

	n.	Combustible materials such as excess dunnage, packing material, and boxes shall 
		not be stored in a magazine containing explosives.  

	o.	Flammable liquids shall not be stored or used in explosives magazines unless the 
		liquid is an explosive, is needed as an explosives-wetting agent, or is an integral 
		part of an explosives device.  

	p.	Operations in and around magazines shall be prohibited when an electrical 
		storm is in progress and minimized when it is evident that such a storm is 
		approaching.  

	q.	Explosives-handling operations shall not be performed when magazine 
		entranceways are icy or do not provide adequate footing for any other reason.  

	r.	Unless excepted, no operation in which hazardous materials are involved shall be 
		permitted in any magazine.  The following exceptions are recognized.  

		(1)	Those operations incident to storage or removal from storage. 
 
		(2)	Inspection and surveillance sampling of compatibility Group D materials, 
			and Group C materials consisting of bulk propellants and IHE, provided 
			that each storage container sampled is in good condition (i.e., the container 
			is not leaking, no evidence exists of explosives contamination at the 
			closure or of seal failure, and the closure is mechanically sound and free of 
			excessive corrosion, etc.).  Only one container of explosives shall be 
			opened at one time in a magazine.  

		(3)	Adding liquid to adjust the liquid composition level in which a 
			Group D explosive is stored.  (Water and alcohol mixtures may be 
			used).  If only water is added to the explosive, the water should be 
			distilled or deionized.  Bacteria present in untreated water may 
			produce gas during storage).  

17.3	Storage Review Program

	a.	Each facility shall establish a program to review the explosive materials 
		stored at that facility.  Explosives may degrade during prolonged storage, 
		increasing the hazards of handling or use.  The following procedure is 
		provided as an example.  

		(1)	A storage review date should be assigned to each bulk explosive 
			placed in storage.  The storage review date should be shown on or 
			adjacent to the identification tag or sticker attached to every container 
			or package of explosive in storage or should be listed in the inventory 
			records.  

		(2)	Storage review intervals should be based, whenever possible, on 
			stability data.  A safe storage interval should be considered as that 
			time period, at maximum anticipated storage temperature, during 
			which an explosive material can be conservatively expected to show 
			an acceptable level of decomposition.  

		(3)	Facility management should designate or create a storage review 
			committee to establish and approve storage review intervals for all 
			explosives stored at the DOE facility.  Also, the committee should 
			prescribe for each explosive appropriate tests to evaluate the safety of 
			handling and processing the material after it has exceeded its storage 
			review interval.  These tests may be referred to as “stability tests,” 
			although sensitivity, or other types of testing, may be included in the 
			material evaluation program.  In some cases, the review committee 
			may simply require periodic stability testing rather than establishing a 
			storage review interval (i.e., nitrocellulose, single- and double-base 
			propellants, etc.).  

		(4)	To store a new explosive, to increase (or decrease) the review interval 
			for a previously approved material, or to use different stability test 
			data for an explosive, the following procedure should be used:  

			(a)	A responsible person should communicate the request to the 
				storage review committee.  

			(b)	If the request concerns storage of a new explosive, the 
				individual should recommend a storage review interval and 
				stability-evaluation testing.  

			(c)	Supporting data should be supplied with the recommended 
				review interval and proposed stability tests for the explosive.  
			(d)	The storage review committee should review the request and 
				supporting data and then prescribe a storage review interval 
				and stability tests as appropriate.  

			(e)	A new explosive should be assigned an interim storage review 
				and stability test interval before Phase II scaleup (see 
				Chapter VIII).  

			(f)	The following general guidelines are offered to assist the 
				storage review committee in establishing review intervals 
				when there is insufficient stability information to predict 
				storage life.  

				1	If no information is available on a new material 
					relative to storage stability, a review interval of 
					90 days or less should be assigned.  

				2	A new formulation should be assigned a storage 
					review interval not exceeding that of its least stable 
					component.  

				3	If the compound or formulation is new to DOE 
					but DoD agencies have extensive experience with it, 
					the DoD information should be used conservatively.  

				4	For a formulation or ingredient with a 
					manufacturer-assigned shelf life, a review interval that 
					exceeds the recommended shelf life should not be 
					assigned unless additional DOE tests indicate such 
					storage is warranted.  

		(5)	A storage review interval of up to 20 years should be permissible for 
			an explosive if a conservative evaluation of stability data indicates 
			that such an interval is justified.  

17.4	Storage Compatibility

	a.	Explosives shall not be stored with materials or items that increase the risk of 
		initiation or decomposition.  Examples are mixed storage of explosives with 
		flammable or combustible materials, acids, or corrosives.  

	b.	Different types of explosives may be stored in the same magazine if they are 
		compatible.  Explosives shall be assigned to a storage compatibility group 
		when they can be stored together without significantly increasing either the 
		probability of an accident or, for a given quantity of explosive, the magnitude 
		of such an accident.  

	c.	Each type of explosive shall be assigned to an appropriate storage 
		compatibility group (A through G, L, and S) for the purpose of storage at 
		DOE facilities.  The nine groups are defined in the following sections.  These 
		definitions and Table II-4 Storage Compatibility Mixing Chart, are in 
		accordance with the principles and tables in DoD 6055.9-STD, 
		DoD Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards.  Table II-4 presents some 
		examples of commonly used materials that are assigned to each storage 
		compatibility group.  This list does not enumerate all materials that may be 
		included in each group.
  
		(1)	Group A—Initiating explosives.  Bulk initiating explosives that have 
			the necessary sensitivity to friction, heat, or shock to make them 
			suitable for use as initiating elements in an explosives train.  
			Examples are lead azide, lead styphnate, mercury fulminate, and 
			tetracene.  

		(2)	Group B—Detonators and similar initiating devices not containing 
			two or more independent safety features.  Items containing initiating 
			explosives that are designed to initiate or continue the functioning of 
			an explosives train.  Examples are detonators (all types, excluding 
			EBWs and slappers), blasting caps, small arms primers, and fuzes.  

		(3)	Group C—Bulk propellants, propellant charges, and devices 
			containing propellant with or without their own means of initiation.  
			Items that will deflagrate, explode, or detonate upon initiation.  
			Examples are single-, double-, triple-base, and composite propellants, 
			rocket motors (solid propellant), and ammunition with inert 
			projectiles. 
 
		(4)	Group D—High explosives (HE) and devices containing explosives 
			without their own means of initiation and without a propelling charge, 
			or articles containing a primary explosives substance and containing 
			two or more effective protective features.  This group shall include 
			explosives and ammunition that can be expected to explode or 
			detonate when any given item or component thereof is initiated.  

		(5)	Group E—Explosives devices without their own means of initiation 
			and with propelling charge (other than one containing a flammable or 
			hypergolic liquid).  Examples are artillery ammunition and rockets.  
		(6)	Group F—Explosives devices with their own means of initiation and 
			with or without propelling charge.
  
		(7)	Group G—Pyrotechnic materials and devices containing pyrotechnic 
			materials.  Examples are devices that when functioning, result in an 
			incendiary, illumination, lachrymatory, smoke, or sound effect. 
 
		(8)	Group H—Ammunition containing both explosives and WP or other 
			pyrophoric material.  Ammunition in this group contains fillers, 
			which are spontaneously flammable when exposed to the atmosphere.  
			Examples are WP, plasticized white phosphorus (PWP), or other 
			ammunition containing pyrophoric material.  

		(9)	Group J—Ammunition containing both explosives and flammable 
			liquids or gels.  Ammunition in this group contain flammable liquids 
			or gels other than those that are spontaneously flammable when 
			exposed to water or the atmosphere.  Examples are liquid or gel filled 
			incendiary ammunition, fuel-air explosive (FAE) devices, flammable 
			liquid fueled missiles, and torpedoes.  

		(10)	Group K—Ammunition containing both explosives and toxic 
			chemical agents.  Ammunition in this group contain chemicals 
			specifically designed for incapacitating effects more severe than 
			lachrymation.  Examples are artillery or mortar ammunition (fuzed or 
			unfuzed), grenades, and rockets or bombs filled with a lethal or 
			incapacitating chemical agent.  

		(11)	Group L—Explosives or ammunition not included in other 
			compatibility groups which present a special risk, requiring isolation 
			of each type.  This group shall include explosives or ammunition 
			having characteristics that do not permit storage with other similar or 
			dissimilar materials.  Examples are damaged explosives, suspect 
			explosives, and explosives, explosive devices or containers that have 
			undergone severe testing unless documented determination is made 
			that these items do not present a special risk; fuel/air explosive 
			devices, and water-activated devices.  Also included are experimental 
			explosives, explosives of temporary interest, newly synthesized 
			compounds, new mixtures and salvaged explosives until they have 
			been established to be compatible with the original materials.  Types 
			presenting similar hazards may be stored together.  

		(12)	Group N—Hazard Division 1.6 ammunition containing only 
			extremely insensitive detonating substances (EIDS).  

		(13)	Group S—Explosives, explosive devices, or ammunition presenting 
			no significant hazard.  Explosives or ammunition so designed or 
			packed that when in storage any hazardous effects from accidental 
			functioning are limited to the extent that they do not significantly 
			hinder fire fighting.  Examples include:  explosive switches or valves 
			and small arms ammunition.  

	d.	Mixing of Storage Compatibility Groups may be permitted as indicated in 
		Table II-5.  Items from Storage Compatibility Groups B, C, D, E, F, G, and S 
		may be combined in storage if the items are in approved containers and if the 
		net quantity of explosives in the items (or in bulk) does not exceed 1,000 lb.  
		Each article of Storage Compatibility Groups B and F shall be segregated in 
		storage from those of other compatibility groups by means that will prevent 
		propagation of those articles.  

	e.	Newly synthesized compounds and mixtures shall be stored in Group L 
		storage facilities.  After more complete evaluation, the EDC shall assign 
		those compounds or mixtures of continuing interest (see Chapter VIII, 
		section 1.1) to the appropriate compatibility group, and stored according to 
		the following considerations:  

		(1)	The material’s sensitivity to initiating stimuli (i.e., friction, impact, 
			spark, shock, and thermal) is similar to that of other explosives in the 
			group.  

		(2)	The material’s reactions and the effects of these reactions, in the 
			event of application of initiating stimuli, are similar to other members 
			of the group.  

		(3)	The material is chemically compatible with other materials in the 
			group.  Sensitivity and compatibility testing is described in 
			Chapter VIII. 
 
	f.	As an alternate to Table II-4 and Table II-5, samples of explosives up to 
		4.4 lbs (2 kg) total, may be stored in the same cubicle if the cubicle walls are 
		designed to prevent propagation.  The material shall be stored in separate 
		cubicles in one of the following categories:  

		(1)	High explosives.  

		(2)	Propellants.  

		(3)	Detonators, actuators, and similar devices.
  
		(4)	Primary and static-sensitive explosives.  


Table II-4.  Storage Compatibility Groups for Explosives  and Explosive-Containing Devices

Table II-5.  Storage Compatibility Mixing Chart

17.5	Containers (Onsite)

	a.	Explosives containers shall be designed and constructed so they will not leak 
		and will protect their contents from excessive movement, external stimuli, 
		contamination, or spillage during handling, transportation (including 
		transportation to disposal sites), and storage.  Container closures shall prevent 
		spilling or leakage of contents if the container is overturned.  Screw-type 
		container closures should not be used.  

	b.	Explosives containers should be constructed of, or lined with, nonabsorbent 
		materials that are compatible with the explosive contents.  Use of glass 
		containers is discouraged, except for small samples, and shall be used only 
		when the explosive reacts with other materials or when a high degree of purity 
		is required.  

	c.	Metal containers for materials that are potential dust producers shall be 
		constructed without seams or rivet heads.  Seams or rivet heads can provide 
		locations for dust accumulation.  

	d.	Containers for cast or pressed explosives pieces that are larger than 1 ft (0.3 m) 
		at their greatest dimension or weigh more than 11 lb (5 kg) loaded should be 
		provided with handles or some other type of handhold.  If the loaded container 
		weighs more than 110 lb (50 kg), provisions should be made to allow handling 
		by mechanical handling equipment.  

	e.	Containers shall be labeled with the applicable UN hazard classification code 
		and clearly marked to identify the contents.  

	f.	Whenever possible, explosive pellets and items containing small quantities of 
		explosives (e.g., detonators) shall be packaged in containers constructed so the 
		functioning of one item will not propagate to the remaining items in the 
		container.  When a nonpropagating array is not possible, the pellets or 
		detonators shall be stored inside a closed container and shall be labeled to 
		indicate the total weight of the explosive contents.  

	g.	Container closures shall be the type that will not apply excessive pinching or 
		rubbing forces to explosives during closing and opening.  The closures and 
		surfaces of container openings shall be kept clean of explosives contamination 
		to minimize any hazard during closing and opening. 
 
	h.	Explosives and ammunition in damaged containers shall not be stored in a 
		magazine with other explosives and ammunition.  Damaged containers shall be 
		repaired, or the contents transferred to new or undamaged containers, or the 
		container plus contents moved to a Group L storage magazine.  

	i.	Open containers and containers with covers not securely fastened shall not be 
		stored in magazines.  Containers that have been opened shall be properly closed 
		before being returned to storage.  

17.6	Storage in Buildings Other Than Storage Magazines

17.6.1	Packing and Shipping Buildings

	a.	In buildings specifically designated for packing and shipping, 
		explosives may be stored subject to the following rules.  

		(1)	Incoming shipments shall be distributed as soon as practical 
			after receipt and shall not be allowed to accumulate.  
		(2)	Items for outgoing shipments should not be accumulated before 
			receipt of orders covering each specific shipment.  

		(3)	Separate rooms shall be provided for the temporary storage of 
			explosives awaiting shipment and for their preparation for 
			shipment (i.e., assembling, crating, marking, etc.).  The rooms 
			shall be divided by walls or separated to prevent an explosion in 
			the preparation area from propagating to the temporary storage 
			area.  

		(4)	The combined total amount of explosives permitted in 
			shipping/receiving buildings, platforms, and transportation 
			vehicles shall be based on quantity-distance constraints.  When 
			an adequate barricade (sufficient to prevent sympathetic 
			detonation) is in place between transportation vehicles and the 
			adjoining building or platform, quantities on each side of the 
			barricade may be considered individually to determine 
			quantity-distance requirements.  

		(5)	If required by operational necessity, explosives and pyrotechnics 
			that are part of the work in process within the building may be 
			stored during non-operational hours in operating buildings 
			provided:  

			(a)	Explosives limits are not exceeded.  

			(b)	Containers of bulk explosives or pyrotechnics are 
				properly secured and covered.  

			(c)	Processing equipment, such as hoppers and pipelines, is 
				empty.  

17.6.2	Service Magazines

	a.	The guidelines for storage magazines presented in sections 17.1 through 
		17.5 of this chapter shall also apply to service magazines, except as 
		modified below
:  
		(1)	An explosives item should be stored for no longer than 
			necessary in a service magazine (with a maximum of 180 days). 
 
		(2)	Service magazine inventory should be reviewed every 
			three months.  Any material that has been in the service 
			magazine for a period approaching 180 days and is not expected 
			to be used immediately should be disposed of or removed to an 
			appropriate storage magazine.  

		(3)	When practical, explosives stored in service magazines shall be 
			in containers.  Unpackaged explosives-containing devices and 
			unsealed bulk explosives containers may be present in a service 
			magazine.  However, these items and unsealed containers shall 
			be stored in a manner that renders them stable and unlikely to be 
			dropped or spilled.  

		(4)	Minimum/maximum temperature monitors are not normally 
			required for service magazines.  

17.6.3	Warehouses

	a.	Hazard Class 1.4 materials (see Chapter VI, section 3.1) packaged as 
		Hazard Class/Division 1.4, Storage Compatibility Group S, may be 
		stored in warehouses if they are placed in segregated and specifically 
		designated areas.  

	b.	Articles in Hazard Class/Division 1.4 and Storage Compatibility 
		Group S are considered inert for storage purposes and are not subject to 
		quantity-distance requirements as long as they are stored with inert 
		items or other Hazard Class/Division 1.4S items only.  This applies only 
		if Hazard Class/Division 1.4 and Storage Compatibility Group S articles 
		remain in their original packaging container or are proven to be 
		self-contained.  When stored with items in a Storage Compatibility 
		Group other than S, normal quantity-distance requirements must be 
		observed.  

17.6.4	Pre-positioned Storage of Security Response Munitions

	a.	When required for defense against hostile forces, and in support of 
		response and contingency plans, limited quantities of authorized 
		response force munitions may be pre-positioned at locations other than 
		bulk-storage magazine areas. 
 
	b.	Compliance with Quantity-Distance and compatibility criteria is not 
		required during a heightened security condition.  

	c.	Munitions will be kept in their original shipping containers unless 
		operational necessity dictates otherwise.  

	d.	Personnel charged with the responsibility of overseeing storage of 
		munitions at guard stations and contingency deployment sites shall be 
		trained in explosives storage and transportation, as required in 
		Chapter V of this Manual.  

	e.	When Hazard Class/Division 1.2 is stored inside or at less than 
		inhabited-building distance from inhabited buildings, fragment barriers 
		will be provided.  Minimally acceptable fragment barriers are:  0.25 in. 
		(6.35 mm) of mild steel plate, one layer of sand bags, 12 in. (.3 m) of 
		loose sand or dirt, or other equivalent protection.  

18.0	DECONTAMINATION AND CLEANING

18.1	General

	a.	Operating procedures shall specifically cover decontamination.  These procedures 
		should cover methods, inspection, marking, control, dismantling, maintenance, 
		final disposition, etc.  

	b.	Hot water or steam may be used to clean or remove explosives contamination 
		from equipment.  If necessary, solvents that have been tested for and are 
		compatible with explosives can be used.  Operating procedures must specify 
		controls for their use.  When cleaning or removing explosives material from 
		equipment, work surfaces, and floors, only clean cloth rags, paper wipes, and 
		approved non-metallic brushes or scrapers should be used in conjunction with hot 
		water, steam, and solvents.  

	c.	Disposal of waste generated during decontamination shall be coordinated with site 
		environmental/waste management personnel.  

18.2	Cleaning Contaminated Equipment

	a.	Items to be cleaned should be positioned so that water and residue will drain 
		directly into an approved collection system.  See sections 19.0 and 20.0 of this 
		chapter for guidance concerning waste collection and waste disposal.  

	b.	Personal decontaminating facilities and equipment shall use personal protective 
		equipment as required.  Emergency shower and eyewash shall be provided where 
		needed.  

	c.	Exhaust ventilation may be required to remove toxic explosives fumes, vapors, or 
		steam from the decontamination area.  

18.3	Cleaning Screw Threads

	a.	To avoid the necessity of cleaning explosives from threads, explosives processing 
		techniques shall be designed to prevent explosives from being deposited on 
		threaded fasteners.  When screw threads are required, covering or protection (i.e., 
		RTV cement) over the exposed threads should be provided.  

	b.	Threads should be cleaned by judicious use of approved non-metal “picks,” 
		solvent, hot water, or steam.  Soaking in solvents and applying penetrating oil 
		may be useful.  

	c.	After decontaminating threads of screws, bolts, pipe, etc., operator protection may 
		still be required to facilitate safe disassembly.  

18.4	Final Decontamination and Disposal of Equipment

	a.	If the item to be decontaminated has only smooth, flat surfaces (i.e., no cracks, 
		seams, voids, or other places where explosive residue may be inaccessible), hot 
		water, steam, or solvents may be employed to effect total decontamination.  Any 
		explosives contamination of concern will be visible to the unaided eye and will 
		have dimensions (length, width, and depth). 
 
	b.	If the item to be decontaminated has tight places where explosives may remain 
		lodged following normal cleaning procedures, the item shall be subjected to final 
		decontamination techniques that may include partial disassembly.  

		(1)	Items undergoing final decontamination by thermal techniques shall be 
			subjected to sustained heating at a temperature at least 60°C higher than 
			required for decomposition of the most thermally stable explosive 
			substance present.  The item shall be kept at that temperature for a 
			sufficient period of time to ensure that all parts have reached the 
			temperature and all explosives material is decomposed.  Thermal 
			decomposition is usually accomplished by placing the items to be 
			decontaminated in a high-temperature sustained fire (see TB 700-4, 
			Decontamination of Facilities and Equipment).  This operation shall be 
			conducted remotely or with operator protection.  

		(2)	Final decontamination also may be accomplished by immersing the item 
			in a chemical cleaning agent.  The period of immersion shall be sufficient 
			to ensure that all explosive material is chemically decomposed.  The 
			chemical cleaning agent shall be one that the Department of the 
			Army TM 9-1300-214 (Military Explosives) has approved for use.  
			Chemical cleaning agents for decontamination or destruction of explosives 
			should not be used for more than about 1 oz. (or about 28 g) of explosives.  
			Reference U.S. Department of the Army TM 9-1300-214 for 
			decontaminating chemicals for explosives and for color tests for 
			identification of energetic materials.  

		(3)	Before subjecting an item to final decontamination by thermal or chemical 
			techniques, as much explosive as possible shall have been removed by 
			approved means (hot water, steam, and approved solvents in conjunction 
			with cloth or paper wipes and non-metallic brushes or scrapers).  

18.5	Inspection

	a.	After decontamination procedures are complete and before transfer to a 
		nonexplosive area, the item shall be inspected.  The degree of decontamination 
		shall be determined/documented and the item shall be labeled to indicate its 
		decontaminated state.  Representatives of at least two departments, such as 
		operations or safety, should accomplish the inspection.  

18.6	Identification and Control of Decontaminated Items

	a.	Decontaminated items shall be marked to indicate the degree of decontamination 
		and stored separately from non-contaminated items until final disposition is made.  
	b.	Degrees of decontamination shall be designated and all items shall be tagged 
		and/or marked with this designation.  

	c.	Guidelines for establishing a system to designation degrees of decontamination 
		are provided below.  

		(1)	X—A single X indicates that the facilities or equipment have been 
			partially decontaminated.  Additional decontamination processes are 
			required before facilities or equipment are moved or any 
			maintenance, repair, etc., is performed.  The X rating would apply to 
			facilities, rooms, bays, or equipment that have been subjected to 
			routine decontamination performed by an operator at the close of the 
			workday.  

		(2)	XXX—Three Xs indicate the equipment or facilities have been 
			examined and decontaminated by approved procedures; no 
			contamination can be detected by appropriate instrumentation, test 
			solutions, or by visual inspection on easily accessible surfaces or in 
			concealed housings, etc., and are considered safe for the intended use.  
			Items decontaminated to this degree cannot be furnished to qualified 
			DOE, DoD, or industry users or be in direct contact with an open flame 
			(cutting, welding, high temperature heating devices), or operations 
			which generate extreme heat, such as drilling and machining unless the 
			following two conditions are met:  

			(a)	It has been determined that decontamination to the XXXXX level 
				will destroy the item’s usefulness.  

			(b)	Decontamination to a degree less than XXXXX in combination 
				with administrative and technical safeguards will eliminate risk of 
				injury.  As a minimum, an approved SOP setting forth the specific 
				operational limitations, precautions, and monitoring necessary to 
				assure safety will be available and decontamination will be 
				performed under the direction of the inspectors who will certify 
				decontamination.  

		(3)	XXXXX—Five Xs indicate the equipment or facilities are completely 
			decontaminated, hazard-free, and may be released for general use or to the 
			general public.  

		(4)	0—A zero indicates the item, although located in a contaminated area, was 
			never directly exposed to contamination.  

	d.	Reference U.S. Department of the Army TB 700-4, “Decontamination of 
		Facilities and Equipment” for decontamination methods and marking.  

18.7	Decontamination of Real Estate

	a.	For decontamination of real estate reference DoD 6055.9-STD.  

18.8	Decontamination and Cleaning References

	a.	In addition to this Manual, the following are reference sources for 
		decontamination and cleaning.  

		(1)	DoD 6055.9-STD, “Department of Defense Ammunition and Explosives 
			Safety Standard,” Assistant Secretary of Defense (Force Management and 
			Personnel), Chairman Department of Defense Explosives Safety Board, 
			2461 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22331. 
 
		(2)	Department of the Army Technical Bulletin TB 700-4, “Decontamination 
			of Facilities and Equipment,” Army AG Publications Center, St. Louis, 
			MO.  

		(3)	Department of the Army Technical Manual TM 9-1300-214, “Military 
			Explosives,” Army AG Publications Center, St. Louis, MO.  

19.0	WASTE COLLECTION

19.1	General

	a.	Provision shall be made to remove explosives waste from areas where explosive 
		waste is generated.  Removal of explosives waste may be accomplished by 
		collecting dust/fines or chips in a wet or dry vacuum system or a slurry of water 
		or nonflammable solvent, or by collecting solid waste in receptacles (see also 
		Chapter II, sections 9.0, 10.0, and 11.0).  

	b.	Explosives waste shall be collected and maintained separately from conventional 
		waste.  

	c.	Mixing of incompatible explosive waste shall be avoided.  Receptacles shall be 
		clearly labeled to indicate the type of waste permissible.  

19.2	Solid Wastes

	a.	Areas where solid explosives wastes are not removed by vacuum or liquid 
		systems shall be equipped with a seamless or lined receptacle to collect explosives 
		wastes.  The receptacle should never be more than half full.  

	b.	Explosives waste shall be removed from the collection point on a regularly and 
		frequently enough to keep aggregate levels within explosive weight limits.  

	c.	Rubbish not contaminated by explosives or containing noncombustible materials 
		shall not be placed in an explosives waste receptacle.  

	d.	Explosives-contaminated rubbish shall be placed in separate waste containers and 
		segregated as combustibles and noncombustibles.  

	e.	Before being transported, explosives waste shall be packaged to prevent spills, 
		leaks, or exposure to initiation stimuli.  Incompatible materials shall not be 
		packaged together.  All packages of explosives waste shall be labeled clearly to 
		indicate the nature and approximate quantity of contents.  

19.3	Vacuum Collection of Explosives Dusts

	a.	Explosives dusts should be collected by a vacuum system, preferably the wet 
		type.  Dust in a wet vacuum should be maintained in wet form using a wetting 
		agent that is kept close to the point of origin and kept wet in the collection system 
		until removed for disposal.  Water-soluble explosives such as Explosive D should 
		be collected in a dry vacuum system.  

	b.	Storage compatibility Group A explosives may be collected by a wet vacuum 
		system, provided they are maintained in a wet form using a wetting agent that is 
		kept close to the point of intake.  Use of a vacuum system to collect these more 
		sensitive materials should be confined to operations involving small quantities of 
		explosives.  

	c.	Dry-type dust collection chambers, except portable units, should be located in the 
		open, outside operating buildings, or may be inside if adequate shielding is 
		provided.  The quantity of explosives collected shall not exceed the capacity of 
		the shielding to protect operating personnel.  The degree of barricading and the 
		appropriate intraline distance shall determine this limit.  

	d.	If dry dust collection outside a building is not practical, a separate room or 
		shielded area within the building shall be designated for this purpose.  This room 
		or shielded area shall not contain other operations or be used as a communicating 
		corridor or passageway between other operating locations within the building 
		when explosives are being collected.  

	e.	Stationary and portable wet-type collectors may be placed in the explosives 
		operating bays or cubicles if the quantity of explosives in the collectors does not 
		exceed 4.4 lbs (2 kg).  If placed in separate cubicles, the explosive weight limits 
		may be increased by an amount determined by the extent of the cubicle walls’ 
		capabilities to serve as operational shields.  

	f.	Collection systems and chambers shall be designed to prevent explosives from 
		being pinched between metal parts.  See sections 9.0 and 10.0 of this chapter for 
		additional design information.  

	g.	Two collection chambers shall be installed ahead of the pump or exhauster in 
		series to prevent explosives dust from entering the vacuum producer in dry 
		vacuum collection systems.  In addition, non-sparking fans and dust-tight motors 
		shall be used.  

	h.	Dry-type portable vacuum collectors shall not be located in bays or cubicles 
		where explosives are present or in enclosed ramps, but may be positioned outside 
		the building or in a separate cubicle.  The building or cubicle walls shall provide 
		adequate shielding for at least 4.4 lbs (2 kg) of explosives.  Shielding and 
		quantity-distance constraints shall define the explosives limits.  

	i.	Explosives dust shall be removed from the collection chamber periodically to 
		eliminate unnecessary and hazardous explosives concentrations.  The entire 
		system should be cleaned periodically, dismantling the parts if necessary.  A 
		cleaning schedule shall be established for the collection chamber and the entire 
		system using the operating hours as a basis.  

	j.	The entire explosives-dust collecting system shall be electrically bonded and 
		grounded with resistance-to-ground not exceeding 10 ohms.  The grounds shall be 
		tested periodically.  

19.4	Explosives Slurries

	a.	Machine tools shall be fitted with wet boxes to catch and direct water and 
		explosives fines to an explosives waste gutter system.  

	b.	Wastewater that might contain explosives materials shall be kept from 
		contaminating potable water or conventional wastewater systems.  

	c.	Settling tanks shall be inspected regularly to monitor the waste accumulation.  
		Records of waste removal shall be kept.  

	d.	When pumping settled explosives from a slurry-settling tank, the operation shall 
		be arranged to preclude exposure of the explosive material to pinching.  

	e.	Explosives materials in settling basins shall be kept wet until removed.  The 
		materials shall be maintained wet until spread out for disposal.  Explosives 
		materials containing powdered metals shall be kept sufficiently wet to prevent a 
		dangerous temperature rise resulting from a reaction of the metal with water.  The 
		possibility of hydrogen generation in this situation must be anticipated.  If an 
		explosive or flammable gas can be generated, then proper ventilation shall be 
		supplied to prevent an explosive or flammable mixture from accumulating.  

19.5	Metal Scrap

	a.	Metal scrap shall be inspected to detect explosives-contaminated items and a 
		qualified reviewer shall certify that the scrap is free of explosives before 
		disposition. 
 
	b.	When scrap is found to be contaminated with explosives, it shall be 
		decontaminated in accordance with final decontamination procedures (see 
		section 18.4 of this chapter).  

19.6	Explosives Recovery and Reuse

	a.	Salvaged explosives materials shall be thoroughly inspected by operating 
		supervisors and reused, screened, reprocessed, or destroyed as the situation 
		warrants.  

	b.	Salvaged explosives materials shall be classified as Storage Compatibility 
		Group L until they have been established to be compatible with the original 
		material.  

20.0	WASTE DISPOSAL

20.1	Preparation for Open Burning

	a.	Preparations to burn or place explosives waste on a pad or in a pit shall 
		not begin until 24 hours after the previous burn at the same burning 
		point.  The only exception is if the burning area has been thoroughly 
		soaked with water and inspected by qualified personnel to assure 
		personnel safety during subsequent burning operations.  In any case, the 
		burning point shall be inspected for residual embers or hot spots before 
		loading with explosives.  

	b.	Before beginning preparations, firing controls shall be disconnected power 
		sources and circuits shunted and grounded.  

	c.	Some explosives give off toxic vapors or fumes when destroyed by burning.  
		Proper respiratory protective equipment shall be worn when such hazards are 
		likely.  

	d.	Incompatible explosives materials shall not be in the same pit or on the same 
		pad at the same time. 
 
	e.	Personnel engaged in burning explosives should be provided with non-static 
		producing cotton clothing.  

	f.	Containers of explosives materials shall not be opened less than 10 ft (3 m) 
		from each other. 
 
	g.	Empty explosives waste containers that are to be reused shall be situated an 
		adequate distance from the burning point to prevent charring or damage 
		during the destruction operation.  

	h.	Based on past experience or analysis, a layer of excelsior or similar material 
		may need to be placed on the bottom of the pit or pad where the explosives 
		waste will be placed.

	i.	Powdered, granular, or slurry form explosives should be placed in a layer not 
		more than 8 cm thick.  Water-wet initiating explosives (storage compatibility 
		Group A) shall not be allowed to dry completely.  

	j.	Wood, heating oil, LPG, or natural gas is authorized to ensure complete 
		combustion of the explosives waste material.  

	k.	The ignition train should be set up to burn upwind, except that the ignition 
		train for burning IHE may be set to burn downwind.  

	l.	The firing circuit shall require a key for completion.  Only one copy of the 
		firing key shall exist, and it shall be in the lead operator’s possession.  

	m.	Radio transmitters and cellular phones in the control shelter and vehicles 
		at the burning site shall be turned off during setup and firing of low 
		energy electrical squibs to provide protection against radio frequency 
		currents.  

	n.	Precautions shall be taken to ensure that extraneous electrical currents from 
		any source will not unintentionally activate the firing system.  

	o.	The burn shall be primed after all other preparation work is complete and with 
		a minimum number of personnel present.  

	p.	Ignition shall be accomplished remotely.  

20.2	Destruction by Burning or Flashing

	a.	Open burning operations will comply with the requirements of applicable 
		Federal, State, and local air pollution, hazardous waste, and other 
		environmental regulations and permits.  

	b.	Explosives waste may be destroyed by remote burning if it can be done with 
		little chance of detonation.  Explosives-contaminated waste may be burned 
		remotely in a wire cage.  

	c.	An open furnace or burning area for explosives should be used to destroy 
		wet-machining cuttings and classified parts.  The same furnace or burning 
		area may also be used for flashing casings after washout of an explosive 
		charge.  

	d.	Explosives should not be burned in closed containers or casings, or in large 
		pieces likely to detonate.  Special attention should be given to the placement 
		and orientation of large items and those in closed containers or casings.  
		Approved incinerators may be used to destroy small devices such as 
		detonators, actuators, etc.  

	e.	Concurrent burning operations shall not be conducted within 150 ft (45 m) of 
		each other.  

	f.	When several pads are burned, the downwind pad shall be ignited first, 
		followed by the others in succession.  

20.3	Ignition System Malfunctions

	a.	If the ignition system fails to fire, check the circuit’s continuity.  If no open 
		circuits are detected, refire.  

	b.	If the squibs fire but fail to ignite the ignition train, remotely survey the area, 
		and wait at least 30 minutes.  When it appears safe to emerge from the 
		control shelter, disconnect, shunt, and ground the firing circuit, and inspect 
		the squibs, firing system, or ignition train.  

20.4	Post-burn Operations

	a.	No entry should be allowed into the disposal area until eight hours have 
		elapsed unless it can be determined visually that all explosives have been 
		destroyed.  

	b.	Squib firing lines shall be disconnected, shunted, and grounded before 
		personnel can enter the burn area.  

	c.	Unburned or partially burned explosives material remaining in the pit or pad 
		may be moved or repositioned for further burning.  The material shall not be 
		raked or otherwise insulted.  The burning operation shall be repeated to 
		destroy any remaining explosive waste.  

	d.	At least 24 hours shall elapse before ashes are collected and the pit is 
		prepared for another burn.  

20.5	Disposal Area

	a.	Explosives waste destruction operations shall be separated from 
		magazines, inhabited buildings, public traffic routes, and occupied 
		operating buildings to ensure that personnel and facilities are not exposed 
		to hazardous blast overpressure, fire brands, fragments, or projectiles from 
		burning or detonation of explosives.  The following separation distances 
		shall apply:  

		(1)	Destruction by open burning or flashing shall not be performed 
			within 2395 ft (730 m), unless carried out in pits or with other 
			aids for limiting the range of fragments and debris if an 
			accidental detonation occurs.  In no case may the pit be located 
			at less than 670 ft (204 m) for weights of 100 lbs (45 kg) or 
			less and 1250 ft (381 m) for weights exceeding 100 lbs (45 kg).  
			Sites should be located taking into account the direction of the 
			prevailing winds to prevent sparks from being blown toward 
			explosives locations.  

		(2)	The size of the danger zone for destruction by open detonation shall 
			be determined by the formula 

				D(ft) = 328 W1/3 [D(m) = 131 Q1/3]  

		(3)	The minimum separation distance shall be:  

			(a)	Non-fragmenting explosive materials		1250 ft (381 m)

			(b)	Fragmenting explosive materials		2500 ft (762 m)

			(c)	Bombs/projectiles with 5 in. caliber or greater	4000 ft (1220 m)

			(d)	If known, the maximum fragment (debris) throw distances with an 
				applicable safety factor may be used to replace the 2500 ft (762 m) 
				and 4000 ft (1220 m) minimum separation distances but not below 
				1250 ft (381 m).  

		(4)	Self-contained destruction facilities fully analyzed for the intended 
			NEW are exempt from the above requirements.  

	b.	The maximum quantity of explosives that may be destroyed at one time 
		shall be determined by starting with a small quantity, gradually increasing 
		until an optimum amount, consistent with safe and efficient operation, is 
		reached.  

	c.	Explosives waste and ordinary rubbish shall not be destroyed in the same 
		destruction area at the same time.  

	d.	During destruction operations, the area within 200 ft (60 m) of the destruction 
		point shall be kept clear of dry grass, leaves, and other extraneous combustible 
		material.  This clearance may be reduced to fire brand distance if aids to limit 
		the range of fragments and debris are provided for the destruction points used 
		within the disposal area.  

	e.	Explosive waste awaiting destruction shall be stored at least intraline distance 
		from the explosives being destroyed.  

	f.	Trucks transporting explosives to the burning disposal area shall meet the 
		requirements of Chapter II, section 16.0.  Upon arrival at the burning grounds, 
		explosives containers will be distributed to trays or other disposal locations.  
		Vehicles shall be moved to a safe location as soon as explosives items have 
		been removed.  Explosives containers shall not be opened until vehicles have 
		been withdrawn.  

	g.	Provisions for emergency fire fighting shall be readily available at the waste 
		disposal area. 
 
	h.	The burning grounds shall be serviced with telephones or two-way radio 
		communication.  

20.6	Destruction by Detonation

	a.	Cased explosives should be removed from cases and burned or the cased item 
		destroyed by detonation.  Detonators, primary explosives, and other explosives 
		that might detonate if burned should also be destroyed by detonation.  

	b.	A high-energy detonator (e.g., an EBW) should initiate the detonation.  

20.7	Use of Solvents

	a.	Solvent immersion may be used to prepare small quantities of explosives and 
		explosive detonators for destruction.  

	b.	Items to be destroyed shall be soaked in suitable, compatible solvents until all the 
		explosives material is dissolved.  Saturated solvent solutions shall not be reused.  

	c.	Solvent-explosives mixtures shall be destroyed by burning.  

21.0	LABORATORY OPERATIONS

21.1	General

	a.	Safety guidelines presented in this section are applicable to general laboratory 
		operations involving explosive materials.  Laboratory operations shall be 
		conducted in a manner that maintains employee exposures to hazardous chemicals 
		at or below the permissible exposure limits (PELs) and complies with the facility 
		chemical hygiene plan.  

	b.	Laboratory personnel shall conduct work involving explosives materials only in 
		accordance with the provisions of written operating procedures (see Chapter VII).  
		Laboratory operations shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 45, Fire 
		Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals.  

	c.	The quantity of explosives present in a laboratory shall be the minimum required 
		for the operations and should be at or below assigned limits.  Storage of material 
		not in process is allowed provided the material is secured when the laboratory is 
		unoccupied.  The material shall be configured to preclude exceeding the 
		maximum credible event (MCE).  

	d.	Open flames shall be prohibited in laboratories where explosives or flammable 
		solvent vapors are or may be present unless allowed by an approved hazards 
		assessment or procedure.  

	e.	Disposal of explosives through laboratory drains shall be forbidden unless the 
		drain plumbing has no traps and is designed to handle explosives (i.e., is provided 
		with a sump or other device for the collection of solids).  Even if a drain is 
		designed to handle explosives, deliberate disposal of explosives in these drains 
		should be avoided.  These drains should be used only to clean up explosives 
		spills.  Special care should be exercised to prevent entrance of compounds into 
		drains that may react with iron or rust to form sensitive salts (e.g., picrates and 
		picric acid).  

	f.	Solvents or other flammable substances shall be protected against electrical 
		sparks, heat, and open flames.  

	g.	Suitable guards shall be provided for all glass or fragile equipment that must 
		withstand reduced or elevated pressure.  

21.2	Safety Shields

	a.	If a laboratory operation involves an explosion hazard, personnel should be 
		protected by safety shields or the operation should be performed remotely.  
		Table II-5 lists shields that have been tested and found acceptable for the 
		indicated quantities of explosive.  

		NOTE:  Shields listed in Table II-5 were not tested for metal-fragment penetration 
		(unless specifically indicated) and thus may not offer effective protection 
		when the explosive is closely confined in a heavy-walled metal 
		container.  (“Heavy-walled” is defined here as wall thickness to diameter 
		ratio greater than 0.01.)

Table II-6.  Safety Shields for Explosive Laboratory Operations Shield

	b.	If an experiment poses a metal-fragment hazard (as opposed to a glass-fragment 
		hazard) and the experiment cannot be conducted remotely, the proposed shield 
		should be tested and approved under conditions simulating an explosion in the 
		experimental setup but with at least 125 percent of the anticipated explosive 
		content.  

	c.	The shield shall be anchored to the hood frame or bench top when it is being used 
		for protection against more than 0.16 oz (5 grams) of TNT equivalent.  

	d.	Other shields may be used after successfully passing a test of 125 percent of the 
		rated explosive charge and being approved.  

	e.	For confined areas, a blast vent having less strength than the shield should be 
		provided. 

	f.	When explosives operations require personnel to reach around a shield to 
		manipulate equipment, exposure shall be minimized.  

21.3	Heating Operations

	a.	During synthesis, formulation, or experimental work, heat may be applied to 
		initiate or maintain reaction, to increase solubility, etc., if the principles below are 
		followed:  

		(1)	Heat shall be applied indirectly using steam, a water bath, oil bath, or 
			an approved laboratory electrical heating device such as a mantle.  

		(2)	Utmost caution shall be exercised to ensure that reactive material 
			does not come in direct contact with the heating elements.  

		(3)	If an experiment must be conducted behind a shield, any heating 
			device shall be mounted so that temperature can be controlled from 
			the operator side of the shield.  The heating device should be 
			mounted so it can be separated quickly from the reaction vessel 
			without operator exposure.  Consideration should be given during 
			design of the experiment to providing emergency cooling for the 
			reaction vessel or its contents.
  
		(4)	Heating of explosives with devices without proper controls shall be 
			monitored at all times.  If the operator must leave for any reason, the 
			heating device should be turned off.  Heating systems that will be 
			operated unattended shall have dual controls, an override shutoff, or 
			some other protection against failure of the primary heating control.  
			Systems capable of totally containing the effects of an explosion may 
			be exempted from this requirement.  

	b.	Periodic checks should be made to ensure that an experiment is proceeding 
		satisfactorily and that the apparatus is not boiling dry, malfunctioning, etc.  
		In the case of remotely controlled operations, provisions shall be made for 
		observation, using mirrors, television monitors, etc.  

21.4	Laboratory Setups

	a.	Good workmanship and laboratory practice shall be exercised in making and 
		operating laboratory setups.  In particular, the following guidelines apply:
  
		(1)	Equipment and apparatus shall be clean, in good condition, and in 
			good working order.  

		(2)	All glassware and apparatus shall be inspected for cracks, defects, 
			etc., before use.  Defective or damaged equipment shall be removed 
			from service.  

		(3)	Setups shall be geometrically and structurally stable.  

		(4)	Work areas should be as neat and uncluttered as possible.  

21.5	Low Concentration of Explosives in Solution

	a.	After explosives are in dilute solution (less than 25 percent explosives by 
		weight), the primary hazard shall be considered as that associated with the 
		solvent and not the explosive.  Where supported by technical data and 
		approved by the Explosives Development Committee (EDC), a 
		solvent/explosives solution greater than 25 percent may also be similarly 
		classified.  

	b.	If the explosive recrystallizes or precipitates out of solution, safety 
		guidelines for pure explosives shall apply.

21.6	Explosives Sample Control

	a.	Samples shall be delivered to a laboratory only at specific designated 
		locations.  

	b.	Each sample shall be properly identified and labeled.  

	c.	Upon completion of required tests or analyses, the sample should be 
		removed from the laboratory.  

	d.	A safety information sheet should accompany all samples of new 
		experimental explosive material submitted to a laboratory for 
		analysis.  

22.0	EMERGENCY CONTROL

22.1	Placarding and Fire Symbols

	a.	Placards and fire symbols (as specified in DoD 6055.9-STD or the 
		NFPA 704 Standard) shall be displayed consistently on buildings and work 
		areas throughout an entire facility to warn of potential hazards from 
		explosives and to provide information for emergency situations.  

22.2	Explosives Emergency Control Plans

	a.	Each installation shall have a facility-specific written plan for the control of 
		emergencies involving explosives (The plan may be need to be broken down 
		for each operating area).  An explosives emergency control plan may be part 
		of the facility’s overall emergency control plan.  All facility personnel shall 
		be trained in the plan’s content applicable to their area.  The plan shall be 
		available to all personnel for ready reference.  

	b.	Emergency situations that should be covered include the following:  

		(1)	Fires and explosions.  

		(2)	Floods.  

		(3)	Extreme weather conditions.  

		(4)	Conditions resulting in environmental disturbances.  

		(5)	Civil disturbance. 
 
		(6)	Threats and bomb scares.  

		(7)	Enemy attack. 
 
		(8)	Other emergencies that require rapid mobilization of personnel and 
			equipment to minimize death and injury to personnel or to prevent 
			the spread of damage and destruction.  

	c.	The plan should address:  

		(1)	Reporting an emergency. 
 
		(2)	Criteria for activating the emergency plan.  

		(3)	Authority and responsibility for administration and execution of the plan.  

		(4)	Mobilization of personnel to respond to an emergency or disaster.  

		(5)	Roles of operating personnel in responding to an emergency.  

		(6)	Procedures for responding to an emergency or disaster.  

		(7)	Accounting for evacuation of personnel. 
 
		(8)	Plant and document security.



       		  CHAPTER III—EXPLOSIVES AND PERSONNEL LIMITS AND CONTROL

1.0	EXPLOSIVES LIMITS

	a.	The quantity of explosives at an operating location shall be the minimum 
		necessary to carry out the operation safely and efficiently.  When practical, this 
		quantity shall be subdivided and separated to prevent propagation of detonation.  
		Supplies exceeding this minimum quantity shall be removed from the operating 
		area.  

	b.	In no case shall the quantity of explosives permitted in an operating building 
		exceed the maximum permitted by quantity-distance criteria.  Quantity-distance 
		criteria and guidelines for application of these criteria are presented in Chapter VI 
		of this Manual.  

2.0	PERSONNEL LIMITS

	a.	The number of personnel at an operating location shall be the minimum consistent 
		with safe and efficient operation.  In establishing personnel limits, the following 
		principles shall be followed: 
 
		(1)	Only jobs not necessary to the performance of a hazardous explosives 
			operation should not be performed in the same location as the hazardous 
			operation.  Only personnel needed for the hazardous operations shall be 
			allowed in hazardous locations.  

		(2)	Personnel limits shall allow for necessary casuals. 
 
		(3)	Sufficient personnel shall be available to perform a hazardous operation 
			safely and to obtain help and aid the injured if an accident occurs. 
 
		(4)	No person shall perform explosives work with a high risk of serious injury 
			alone.  Prompt and easy communications with other employees shall be 
			provided.  Facility management shall specify explosives activities that 
			may be performed alone.  

3.0	LIMIT CONTROL

3.1	Posting and Recording

	a.	All rooms, bays, and buildings containing explosives shall have posted in a 
		conspicuous place a standardized placard stating the maximum amount of 
		explosives and the maximum number of workers and casuals permitted in the 
		control unit at any one time. 
 
	b.	Maximum explosives and personnel limits for all buildings and bays for each 
		explosives area shall be documented and maintained on file.  

3.2	Limit Review and Approvals

	a.	Management personnel with authority and jurisdiction over an operating bay or 
		building shall review explosives and personnel limits for each location 
		periodically and recommend changes as required.  When the use of a location 
		changes, personnel and explosives weight limits shall be reviewed and limits 
		reestablished as required.  

	b.	Changes in explosives and personnel limits shall be reviewed and approved in the 
		same manner as operating procedures (see Chapter VII).  A procedure shall be 
		established for the approval of temporary changes in explosives and personnel 
		limits for an operating location.  

3.3	Personnel Controls

	a.	A system shall be established to control the presence of personnel within 
		explosive operating areas.  The movement of transients in the vicinity of an 
		explosives operating area should be controlled when their presence creates a 
		congestion problem or other safety concern.  

3.4	Explosives Control

	a.	A verifiable system shall be established to control the amount of explosives 
		present in an explosives facility.  

4.0	INSENSITIVE HIGH EXPLOSIVE LIMITS

	a.	When no other explosives are present, IHE weight limitations shall be based on 
		separation distances for Hazard Class 1.6 explosives (see Chapter VI, section 3.1) 
		or equivalent protection provided by facility design features.  The quantity of IHE 
		at an operating location shall be the minimum necessary to carry out the operation 
		safely and efficiently.  

	b.	IHE limits for pressing, dry blending, dry milling, dry screening, and certain 
		machining operations (see Chapter II, section 12.4.2c), should be the same as 
		those established for HE operations.  



       		 CHAPTER IV—PERSONAL PROTECTIVE  CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT

1.0	CLOTHING AND PERSONAL EQUIPMENT

1.1	Clothing

	a.	Each operation shall be analyzed to determine when personnel working with 
		explosives and toxic materials must wear approved coveralls or laboratory coats 
		to prevent contact with these materials and prevent contaminating personal 
		apparel.  Flame-retardant coveralls may be desired for explosives operations with 
		the potential for flash fire.  These coveralls shall not have cuffs and should not 
		have metallic fasteners.  Written procedures shall include protective clothing and 
		equipment requirements.  

	b.	Cotton or other antistatic outer and undergarments, including socks, should be 
		worn where generation of static electricity would create a hazard.  

1.2	Footwear

	a.	Personnel working in areas where electrostatic-sensitive explosive powders or 
		materials are handled shall wear conductive, non-sparking footwear.  Exception:  
		personnel working on electrical or electronic equipment shall not wear conductive 
		footwear unless protected by insulated mats, ground fault circuit interrupters 
		(GFCI), etc.  Personnel working in other areas where explosives contamination 
		may be present shall wear non-sparking footwear or bootie shoe coverings.
  
1.3	Respirators

	a.	Approved respiratory protection shall be worn when exhaust ventilation is 
		unavailable or does not adequately control airborne particulate, gases, or vapors 
		released during explosives operations.  The employee shall have current approval 
		to wear respiratory protection (medical exam, respirator fitting, and training).  

1.4	Eye Protection

	a.	Personnel working in or visiting eye hazard areas shall wear suitable eye 
		protection devices, particularly when EEDs are handled.  Explosive operations 
		shall be evaluated for eye hazard risks.  Contact lenses shall not be considered 
		appropriate eye protection.  

1.5	Gloves

	a.	Skin contact with some explosives and associated materials can result in 
		dermatitis or absorption across the skin barrier.  Operations where these materials 
		are present must be evaluated for skin contact hazards and the need for the proper 
		gloves.  

2.0	MAINTENANCE AND TESTING

2.1	Equipment Maintenance and Inspection

	a.	Personal protective equipment shall be properly maintained.  The operator’s life 
		may depend on the equipment functioning properly.  An appropriate inspection 
		schedule shall be established.  

2.2	Conductivity Testing

	a.	When conductive footwear is worn, the conductivity shall be tested initially and 
		regularly thereafter to ensure continued conductivity from person to ground.  

2.3	Cleaning and Disinfecting

	a.	Provision shall be made to launder and disinfect protective garments and devices.  
		This is especially important for equipment worn about the face.  Because 
		laundering affects the flame-retardant properties of fabric, flame-retardant 
		coveralls should be tested to establish the maximum number of laundering cycles 
		permitted.  

2.4	Contaminated Clothing

	a.	Contaminated clothing should be wiped or dusted to remove as much 
		contamination as possible.  Compressed air shall not be used for this purpose.  If 
		obvious contamination remains, personnel shall change their clothing.  



       				  CHAPTER V—TRAINING

1.0	GENERAL

	a.	Personnel shall be properly trained before they are assigned to explosives 
		operations or operate any explosives-transport vehicle.  The training for 
		explosives work, which serves to assist in conducting work safely and developing 
		safety awareness, shall ensure that personnel:  

		(1)	Develop and maintain a safe attitude towards work with explosives.  

		(2)	Define and understand the potential hazards involved.  

		(3)	Learn correct skills to perform tasks safely.  

		(4)	Are prepared for unexpected hazardous conditions.  

		(5)	Read and understand the appropriate operating procedures.  

2.0	SUPERVISORY RESPONSIBILITY

	a.	The supervisor shall be responsible for:  

		(1)	Determining the required training for personnel.  

		(2)	Verifying that training has qualified the worker to perform assigned tasks 
			safely and efficiently.  

		(3)	Ensuring that the worker can perform required emergency duties.  

		(4)	Providing on-the-job training.  

		(5)	Continually updating worker training.  

3.0	TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION PROGRAMS

	a.	Each organization shall have a training and qualification program and shall 
		establish qualification requirements.  Paragraph 3.0b, below,  is an example.  

	b.	Completion of training should qualify the worker to perform a task for a specific 
		period of time.  The following items should govern maintenance of qualifications.  

		(1)	At the end of the initial qualification period, qualification may be extended 
			for subsequent specific time periods if:  

			(a)	The worker has successfully performed the task during the 
				preceding six months and has read and understands the current 
				operating procedures; or

			(b)	The worker has completed refresher training and is again found to 
				be qualified by his or her supervisor.  

		(2)	Retraining in areas of weakness should be required of workers who do not 
			demonstrate job proficiency or who subsequently violate safe practices.  
		(3)	When an operating procedure is modified, all personnel using that 
			procedure should be retrained in the modified procedure.  

		(4)	An employee should not be permitted to continue working with explosives 
			if the supervisor, with counsel from medical personnel, determines that he 
			or she is unable to perform the task safely.  Possible reasons include:  

			(a)	Physical injury or illness.  

			(b)	Disease.  

			(c)	Mental or emotional disturbances.  

		(5)	Training records should be maintained for each worker, with the following 
			information included:  

			(a)	Description and dates of training received. 
 
			(b)	Description and dates of refresher training.  

			(c)	A signed “statement of understanding” for operating procedures.  

			(d)	Attendance at safety meetings and participation on safety 
				committees. 
 
			(e)	Qualification review by supervisor.  

		(6)	The supervisor may temporarily authorize an employee who has not 
			completed the required training to perform a task under the following 
			conditions:  

			(a)	The supervisor determines that the employee has a working 
				knowledge adequate to perform the task safely.  

			(b)	A qualified person directly supervises the work.  

	c.	Hazardous materials information and training programs are required for personnel 
		who work with explosives and hazardous materials used in conjunction with 
		explosives operation.  Training should include:
  
		(1)	Information on physical and health hazards.  

		(2)	The purpose and proper use of engineering controls, work practice 
			controls and protective equipment.  

		(3)	Labeling systems and MSDS terms.  

		(4)	Methods to detect the presence or release of hazardous materials in the 
			work area.  

4.0	UNEXPLODED ORDNANCE (UXO) TRAINING

	a.	Personnel in charge of UXO removal or disposal should be US citizens and shall 
		have successfully completed training at a United States Military Explosives 
		Ordnance Disposal (EOD) school.  Personnel shall provide documentation of 
		completed training and have a minimum of 18 months operational EOD 
		experience.  All personnel engaged in operations shall be thoroughly trained in 
		applicable UXO recognition and explosives safety.  

	b.	Personnel performing UXO removal or disposal shall have completed training at a 
		US Military EOD school or have equivalent training or experience.  All other 
		personnel engaged in operations shall be trained thoroughly in applicable UXO 
		recognition and explosives safety.  

	c.	Personnel not involved in UXO operations, but requiring access to areas known or 
		suspected to contain UXOs shall be required to have completed UXO awareness 
		training and shall be escorted by personnel qualified under 4.0a or b above.  The 
		UXO HE Awareness video (EPL 122) is recommended for the awareness training.  

5.0	REFERENCES

	a.	OT-525, Personnel Qualifications, Commanding Officer, Naval Explosive 
		Ordnance Disposal Technology Division, 2008 Stump Neck Road, Indian Head, 
		MD 20640-5070

	b.	UXO High Explosives Awareness Video (EPL 122), Sandia National 
		Laboratories/New Mexico Environmental Restoration Program.  


      		   CHAPTER VI—QUANTITY-DISTANCE AND LEVEL-OF-PROTECTION CRITERIA  
				FOR EXPLOSIVES ACTIVITIES 

1.0	GENERAL

	a.	This chapter establishes quantity-distance and level-of-protection criteria for all 
		DOE operations involving explosives.  These criteria provide specific levels of 
		personnel and property protection from the effects of potential fires and 
		explosions within and outside of DOE installations.  

	b.	The cardinal principle to be observed at any location or in any operation involving 
		explosives, ammunition, severe fire hazards, or toxic materials is to limit, in a 
		manner consistent with safe and efficient operation, the exposure to a minimum 
		number of personnel, for a minimum time, and to a minimum amount of the 
		hazardous material.  

	c.	The Facility Management shall ensure that ammunition and explosives safety site 
		plans are submitted, as specified in sections 1.1 and 1.2 to DOE for review and 
		approval.  DOE review and approval will be conducted by the Authority Having 
		Jurisdiction for explosives safety within the Operations/Site Office. 
 
1.1	For New Explosives Facilities and Operations and Explosives Facilities 
	Undergoing Major Modifications:  

	a.	Preliminary Site Plan must be developed and submitted for DOE/NNSA approval 
		before CD-1 approval and the Final Site Plan submitted and approved before 
		CD-4 (See DOE O 413.3)

	b.	For a facility where the risk associated with the operation is increased, with an 
		increase in explosive weight or a major modification or level of protection, a new 
		site plan shall be required and approved prior to start of operations.  

1.2	For Existing Explosives Facilities and Operations:  

	a.	A Site Plan must be developed and submitted for review by DOE/NNSA local 
		authority as soon as possible but not later than two (2) years from approval of 
		DOE M 440.1-1A (Revision 9) of the DOE Explosives Safety Manual.  The Site 
		plan shall contain the following information:  

		(1)	A Quantity Distance (QD) Chart containing the following:  

			(a)	Each sited facility (PES) listing maximum Net Explosives 
				Weight for each applicable Hazard Division

			(b)	Actual and required distance to exposed sites (ES)

			(c)	QD criteria used for siting each PES – ES relationship

		(2)	Map showing each PES, its clear zone, and all ESs within the clear zone.  

		(3)	Personnel Limits for the explosives facility.
  
		(4)	Brief description of explosives and  nonexplosives operations within the 
			clear zone.  

		(5)	Statement that the current operation presents no significantly greater risk 
			than that assumed when the facility was originally constructed and

		(6)	If the facility does not meet current criteria for the operation being 
			conducted, provide a statement: 
 
			(a)	Why it is not feasible to bring the facility up to current standards 
				and

			(b)	That the current operation presents no significantly greater risk 
				than that assumed when the facility was originally constructed.  

	b.	A letter of transmittal shall accompany each site plan or group of site plans.  The 
		letter should contain the reason for submittal (preliminary or final siting of new 
		facility, site plan/plans for grandfathered facility/facilities, change in operation 
		with increased or decreased QD requirement) and a request for site plan approval.  
		For a grandfathered facility, note whether the facility meets current criteria for the 
		operation being conducted.  

	c.	If the siting has any unique characteristics explain what they are and what criteria 
		is being applied.  (Example:  If a facility is built to control blast effects and 
		fragments, QD to other facilities will not apply).

2.0	APPLICABILITY OF CRITERIA

2.1	Specific Applications

	a.	Criteria presented in this chapter shall be used to:  

		(1)	Establish maximum explosives limits for explosives facilities and 
			operations.  

		(2)	Plan explosives activities in existing facilities.  

		(3)	Design and site new facilities and operations.  

2.2	Explosives Limits

	a.	Explosives limits shall never exceed the minimum required for efficient, safe 
		operation (see Chapter III).  

2.3	Areas Where Criteria Are Not Applicable

	a.	The quantity-distance and level-of-protection criteria defined in section 4.0 of this 
		chapter are not applicable to portable buildings used at specified nuclear test shot 
		locations.  

3.0	QUANTITY-DISTANCE CRITERIA

	a.	Quantity-distance criteria must account for the types and severity of hazards each 
		explosive material presents, the construction and orientation of facilities to which 
		the criteria are applied, and the degree of protection desired for personnel and 
		facilities adjacent to the explosives operations.  

	b.	The hazard classification system recommended by the UN defines the types and 
		severities of explosives hazards.  The guidelines presented below specify 
		minimum degrees of protection for various facility categories and describe how 
		quantity-distance tables are to be applied to facilities of various construction and 
		orientation with respect to adjacent facilities.  

3.1	Hazard Classes and Class Division

	a.	Explosives shall be classified based on their reactions to specific initiating 
		influences.  Personnel shall use the UN recommended hazard classification 
		system for DOE explosives classification.  The UN system consists of nine 
		classes for dangerous goods, with explosives included in Class 1.  The 
		explosives hazard class is further subdivided into “divisions” based on the 
		character and predominance of the associated hazards and their potential for 
		causing personnel casualties or property damage.  Table VI-1 lists the six 
		divisions of Class 1.  

Table VI-1.  Divisions of Class 1 Hazard Class and Division Designators

	b.	When required to properly describe the hazard, a numerical figure in 
		parentheses shall be placed to the left of the division designators 1.1 through 
		1.3 [e.g., (18) 1.1, (08) 1.2, and (06) 1.3]; this number indicates the minimum 
		separation distance (in hundreds of feet) for specified levels of protection 
		from explosive items for inhabited buildings, public traffic routes, and 
		personnel in the open.  A minimum distance number shall be used for all 
		items in Class 1, Division 2, as shown in the applicable tables.  Figure IV-1 
		illustrates the use of the UN hazards classification system and lists the storage 
		compatibility group opposite each hazard class.  The listed compatibility 
		group is typical for the expected compatibility to hazard class relationships.  
		Note:  The two classification systems apply to different concerns.  

		(1)	Compatibility groupings define which explosives may be stored together 
			safely without increasing the risk of initiation.  

		(2)	Hazard classifications indicate the initiation effects of the various 
			explosives.  
 
Figure VI-1.  Application of Hazard Classification System
		
	c.	Classification tests (described by TB 700-2, Explosives Hazard 
		Classification Procedures) and additional tests (as desired), including 
		United Nations ST/SG/AC.10/1 and ST/SG/AC/10/11, shall be used to 
		assign energetic materials to the appropriate compatibility groups and 
		hazard divisions.  Supplemental tests may be used to characterize material 
		hazards more fully if material properties or anticipated material 
		environment are expected to significantly influence the explosives 
		classification.  

	d.	Although DOT Hazard classifications require the use of the Bureau of 
		Explosives’ (BOE) Impact Apparatus to determine impact sensitivity, other 
		impact apparatus may be used, providing:  

		(1)	Test results for at least two reference explosives are compared to 
			results for the reference explosives on the BOE Impact Apparatus; 
			and

		(2)	A minimum of 10 trials each is run for the reference explosives and 
			the explosives being classified.  

3.2	Establishing Quantity of Explosives and Distances

3.2.1	General

	a.	The principles and tables presented 

		in DoD 6055.9-STD, DoD Ammunition and Explosives Safety 
		Standards, shall be used to determine the following:  

		(1)	The total quantities of explosives in adjacent magazines, 
			operating buildings, or other explosives facilities that must 
			be applied to quantity distance tables.  

		(2)	When the levels of protection required by section 4.0 of this 
			chapter differ from the requirements of DoD 6055.9-STD, 
			section 4.0 shall take precedence.  

		(3)	The minimum separation distances required for the facilities 
			are based on the desired level of protection and total 
			quantities of explosives.  

		(4)	The total quantity of explosives is determined by defining and 
			examining the maximum credible event (MCE).  If an explosives 
			event occurs, the MCE is the largest credible amount of explosives 
			that could be involved (not necessarily the total quantity of 
			explosives present).  

3.2.2	Use of Metric System

	a.	Throughout DoD 6055.9-STD, the NEW is used to calculate distance 
		using the formula D=KW1/3, when D is the distance in feet, K is a factor 
		based on the risk assumed or permitted, and W is the NEW in pounds.  
	b.	When metric units are used, the symbol Q denotes net explosive quantity 
		(NEQ) expressed in kilograms.  In the formula D=KQ1/3, the distance D is 
		expressed in meters.  Thus, the respective units of K are ft/lb1/3 and 
		m/kg1/3 in the two systems.  The value of K in English units is 
		approximately 2.5 times its value in metric units [e.g., if D(m)=6Q1/3, then 
		D(ft)=15W1/3].  

3.2.3	Railcars and Transport Vehicles

	a.	Explosives-loaded railcars, motor vehicles, and other transport vehicles in 
		holding yards are considered aboveground magazines for 
		quantity-distance purposes.  They shall be kept in groups, and each group 
		shall be limited to a maximum of 250,000 lb (113,398 kg) of high 
		explosives.  

		(1)	When a railcar receiving yard or point is the site where explosives 
			will be interchanged between the common carrier and the facility 
			rail system, quantity-distance provisions do not apply provided that 
			the cars are moved expeditiously to a suitable location.  

		(2)	When inspection of a railcar of explosives indicates a hazardous or 
			potentially hazardous condition, the railcar should be moved at 
			once to a suspect car spur track or an isolated section of track.  
			This spur or section of track should be accessible directly from the 
			inspection point.  The distance between the spur or track and 
			facility boundaries, classification yards, inhabited buildings, 
			administration areas, operating buildings, magazines, inert storage 
			locations, and public traffic routes should be the inhabited-building 
			distance based on the maximum quantity of explosives that the 
			facility can receive in one railcar.  Only one car is permitted at this 
			location at any time. 
 
		(3)	Incoming motor vehicles carrying explosives shall be inspected at 
			a station remote from hazardous and populated areas.  

3.2.4	Utilities Installations

	a.	Permanent DOE-controlled underground utilities installations (excluding 
		building service lines) should be separated from explosives locations 
		containing Hazard Class/Division 1.1 materials (see Table VI-2).  

	b.	Privately owned or operated utilities installations (aboveground and 
		underground) shall be separated from explosives locations by at least 
		public traffic route distances.  Installations that include structures should 
		be separated from explosives facilities by inhabited-building distance.  

	c.	Certain auxiliary power facilities, transformer stations, etc., present fire 
		hazards to explosives facilities.  Transformers and associated electrical 
		switching apparatus serving one explosives facility or complex that do not 
		present a fire hazard to the facility (i.e., dry-type, “less flammable” 
		oil-insulated, etc.) shall be located as specified in NFPA 70 and FM Data 
		Sheet 5-4/14-18.  

	d.	Normal oil-insulated transformers shall be located at least 50 ft (15 m) 
		from an explosives facility or as specified in DoD 6055.9-STD.  

Table VI-2 .  Quantity-Distance Separation for Protection  

3.2.5	Petroleum Storage Tanks

	a.	Above ground tanks containing 500 gal or less of petroleum that serve 
		equipment (such as oil heaters or diesel generators) located in or near 
		explosives buildings shall be located a minimum of 50 ft (15 m) from 
		explosives locations and comply with NFPA 30.  Tanks located near 
		intentional detonation areas should be barricaded.  Similar underground 
		tanks complying with NFPA 30 do not require separation from explosives 
		facilities.  In both cases, the tanks shall be equipped with an anti-siphoning 
		device, unless siphoning is impossible.  

4.0	LEVEL-OF-PROTECTION CRITERIA

4.1	Hazard Classes

	a.	The level of protection required for an explosives activity shall be based on the 
		hazard class (accident potential) for the explosives activity involved.  These four 
		hazard classes are defined for explosives activities as follows:  

		(1)	Class I consists of those explosives activities with a high accident 
			potential.  Remote operations are required because any personnel exposure 
			is unacceptable for Class I activities.  

			(a)	In general, Class I includes activities where energies that may 
				interface with explosives are approaching the upper safety 
				limits, or the loss of control of the interfacing energy is likely to 
				exceed the safety limits for the explosives involved.  Class I 
				includes those research and development activities with safety 
				implications have not been fully characterized.
 
			(b)	Examples of Class I activities are screening, blending, pressing, 
				extrusion, drilling of holes, dry machining, machining 
				explosives and metal in combination, some environmental 
				testing, new explosives development and processes, explosives 
				disposal, and destructive testing.  

		(2)	Class II consists of explosives activities with moderate accident potential 
			because of the explosives type, condition of the explosives, or nature of 
			the operations involved.  Class II activities have an accident potential 
			greater than Class III activities, but personnel exposure in contact 
			operations is acceptable.  

			(a)	Class II includes activities where the energies that do or may 
				interface with the explosives are normally well within the safety 
				boundaries for the explosives involved, but where the loss of 
				control of these energies could approach the safety limits.  
			(b)	Examples of Class II activities are weighing, some wet 
				machining, assembly and disassembly, some environmental 
				testing, and some packaging operations.  

		(3)	Class III consists of explosives activities with low accident potential such 
			as activities during storage and operations incidental to storage or removal 
			from storage.  

		(4)	Class IV consists of those explosives activities with IHE or IHE 
			subassemblies.  Although mass detonating, this explosive type is so 
			insensitive that the probability of accidental initiation or transition from 
			burning to detonation is negligible.  If the containers are heated in a fire, 
			IHE reactions will be limited to pressure ruptures of the containers.  Most 
			processing and storage activities with IHE and IHE subassemblies are 
			Class IV.  However, the following examples of explosives activities with 
			IHE and IHE subassemblies remain Class I:  

			(a)	Pressing.  

			(b)	Some machining (see Chapter II, section 12.4.2c).  

			(c)	Dry blending.  

			(d)	Dry milling. 

			(e)	Dry screening.  

4.2	Required Level of Protection

	a.	Each bay (i.e., storage, handling, or processing building) housing an 
		explosives activity shall have a protection level based on the hazard class 
		determined for the activity.  The level of protection may be provided by 
		equipment design, structural design, operation separation, or provision of 
		operational shields.  The levels of protection required for each hazard class 
		are as follows and shall be required for new facilities or redesign of any 
		existing facilities when changes in activities will result in a more hazardous 
		class.  

4.2.1	Explosives Bay

	a.	Class IV.  Bays for Class IV (negligible probability of accidental 
		initiation) activities shall provide protection from fire hazards effects.  
		This protection may be achieved by Hazard Class/Division 1.3 
		aboveground-magazine distance separation or by a design that 
		contains the effects of an accident.  Because accidental detonation is 
		not considered credible, Class IV bays shall be sited and designed as 
		acceptors rather than donors for the effects of blast overpressure, 
		structural collapse, and missiles (hazardous fragments).  

	b.	Class III.  Bays for Class III (low accident potential) activities shall 
		provide protection from explosion propagation from bay to bay within 
		buildings and between buildings that are located at intraline or magazine 
		distance.  If intermediate storage of explosives is within an operating 
		building containing Class II or Class I operations, the intermediate storage 
		or staging bay will require Class II level of protection.  Examples of 
		Class II activities include weighing, assembly and disassembly, some wet 
		machining, some environmental testing, and some packaging operations.  
		Minimum separation distances may be reduced when explosives bays are 
		designed to adequately contain the effects of an accident (blast pressures 
		and missiles).  

	c.	Class II.  Bays for Class II (moderate accident potential) activities shall 
		comply with the requirements for Class III bays, and in addition provide 
		protection to prevent fatalities and severe personnel injuries in all 
		occupied areas other than the bay of occurrence.  (For Class II, access 
		ramps and plant roads are not considered occupied areas).  Prevention of 
		fatalities and severe injuries is satisfied when personnel in occupied areas 
		other than the bay of occurrence will not be exposed to the following:  

		(1)	Overpressures greater than 100 kPa (15 psi) maximal effective 
			pressure.  

		(2)	Structural collapse resulting from overpressure or debris impact.  
			Structural collapse is a structural component’s failure as a direct 
			result of a facility losing structural integrity.  This collapse must 
			not result in explosives propagation, fatalities, or severe personal 
			injuries.  

		(3)	Missiles (hazardous fragments) generated in acceptor-occupied 
			areas.  Hazardous fragments that can cause fatalities and severe 
			injuries are defined as those having greater than 58 ft-lb impact 
			energy.  The threshold pressure for eardrum rupture is 34 kPa 
			(5 psi); one-half of the threshold pressure for lung damage is 
			100 kPa (15 psi).  (See Chapter I of TM 5-1300).  

	d.	Class I.  Bays for Class I (high accident potential) activities shall comply 
		with the requirements for Class II bays, and in addition provide protection 
		to prevent serious personal injuries, including personnel performing the 
		activity, personnel in other occupied areas, and transients.  This protection 
		can be achieved by controlling blast and debris through suppression, 
		containment, or establishing an exclusion area with positive access 
		control.  Serious injury prevention is satisfied when personnel will not be 
		exposed to:  

		(1)	Overpressures greater than 34 kPa (5 psi) maximal effective 
			pressure, which should not exceed 16 kPa (2.3 psi) peak 
			positive incident pressure.

		(2)	Structural collapse of a facility or building from overpressure or 
			debris impact.  Structural collapse a structural component’s 
			failure as a direct result of loss of structural integrity.  This 
			collapse must not result in explosion propagation, fatalities, or 
			severe personal injuries.  

		(3)	Missiles (hazardous fragments)—hazardous fragments that 
			can cause serious injuries are defined as those having greater 
			than 11 ft-lb impact energy.  

		(4)	Thermal fluxes greater than 0.3 cal/cm2/sec.  This value is 
			specified in DoD 6055.9-STD, Chapter 4, as required protection 
			for all personnel assigned to perform remote operations.

4.2.2	Bays for Joint Explosives-Plutonium Activities

	a.	Bays for joint explosives-plutonium activities shall comply with the 
		requirements of section 4.2.1 of this chapter for the class of explosives 
		activity involved and DOE DNA TP 20-7.  Because the plutonium has 
		contamination potential, the bays shall also comply with the following:  

		(1)	Bays for Uncased Explosives—Plutonium Activities.  Where it is 
			necessary to store, handle, or process uncased explosives 
			components and plutonium in the same bay, the enclosing structure 
			and its ventilation, electrical, fire protection, and utility systems 
			shall be designed to assure that, if all the explosives present should 
			detonate, radiation exposures shall comply with the current version 
			of DOE O 420.1B standards for hypothesized accidental releases.  
			The safety analysis report shall govern the quantity of plutonium 
			allowed in such a bay.  Activities may be performed in Class IV 
			bays if IHE, IHE subassemblies, or IHE weapons are present; 
			however, criticality considerations shall govern the quantity of 
			plutonium allowed.  

		(2)	Bays for Cased Explosives—Plutonium Activities.  When 
			handling or processing cased high-explosive components that 
			contain plutonium, the enclosing structure shall be designed as a 
			Class II explosives bay.  Storage shall conform to Class III 
			requirements.  The plutonium quantity shall be limited to 25 kg 
			per bay.  Plutonium limits for magazines are specified in DOE 
			DNA TP 20-7.  Activities may be performed in Class IV bays if 
			only IHE, IHE subassemblies, or IHE weapons are present; 
			however, criticality considerations shall govern the quantity of 
			plutonium allowed. 

5.0	FIRE PROTECTION

5.1	Vegetation Control

	a.	Vegetation around storage magazines and explosives operating facilities should 
		be controlled to minimize potential damage to the magazine or facility from 
		erosion or grass, brush, or forest fires.  A firebreak at least 50-ft (15-m) wide 
		and free from combustible material should be maintained around each 
		aboveground magazine or explosives operating facility.  If an aboveground 
		magazine or explosive facility exterior is fire resistant, the firebreak can have 
		vegetation, but the growth must be controlled to prevent rapid transmission of 
		fire to the magazine or facility.  Maintaining the firebreaks around 
		earth-covered magazines and cutting grass covering these structures is only 
		required around ventilators to prevent transmission of a fire into a structure.  

5.2	Fire Protection Criteria

	a.	The following fire protection criteria shall be required for all new facilities or 
		redesign of existing facilities where changes in activities will result in a higher 
		hazardous classification.  

		(1)	Automatic fire suppression systems shall be installed in all buildings 
			containing HE and plutonium, except storage magazines.  

		(2)	For buildings containing explosives, but no plutonium, facility 
			management shall determine the need for fire suppression systems 
			based on the maximum fire loss criteria and program mission 
			interruptions and delays as outlined in the current versions of 
			DOE O 420.1B, Facility Safety; DOE O 430.1B, Real Property Asset 
			Management; and DOE O 440.1A, Worker Protection Management for 
			DOE Federal and Contractor Employees.  

		(3)	Where fire suppression is required, each explosives bay shall have an 
			individual feed with its controls protected outside the bay and located to 
			enable system operation if a detonation occurs in any bay.  

		(4)	Transmitted fire alarms shall distinguish between explosives and 
			nonexplosives areas through the use of annunciator panels at safe 
			locations; small non-HE areas do not need separately transmitted 
			alarms.  

6.0	EXPLOSIVES FACILITY SITING AND DESIGN CRITERIA REFERENCES

	a.	Permanent explosives facilities shall comply fully with TM 5-1300, “Structures to 
		Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions,” and DOE/TIC-11268, “A Manual 
		for the Prediction of Blast and Fragment Loading of Structures.”  Portable 
		magazines should be ventilated and resistant to water, fire, and theft.  Portable 
		magazines can be made of any material that meets these guidelines.  [Portable 
		facilities that comply with 27 CFR 55.206, “Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and 
		Firearms” (BATF) meet this criteria.]  Portable magazines shall be sited 
		per DoD 6055.9-STD as above ground magazines.  

	b.	Blast-resistant design for personnel and facility protection shall be based on the 
		TNT equivalency of the maximum quantity of explosives and propellants.  In 
		accordance with TM 5-1300, the TNT equivalency shall be increased by 
		20 percent for design purposes. 
 
	c.	For an unproven facility design, either a validated model or full-scale test is 
		required to ensure structural adequacy unless a high degree of confidence can be 
		provided by calculations or other means.  The contract administrator (Head of 
		Field Organization) with competent engineering review shall concur in any 
		determination regarding test requirements.  

	d.	The design of new facilities, or those with major modifications, shall conform to 
		the DOE explosives safety requirements.  For a tabular summary of the protective 
		design types established by these criteria, see Table VI-3.  Protective construction 
		design features are specified in TM 5-1300 and DOE/TIC-11268.  

	e.	Studies necessary to provide the technical basis for location, engineering, design, 
		and operation (under normal and potential design basis accident conditions) of 
		buildings shall follow the stricter of this Manual or DoD 6055.9-STD, DoD 
		Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards, for establishing explosives 
		quantity-distance separation.  

6.1	Site and General Construction Plans for Ammunition and Explosives Facilities

	a.	Site and general construction plans for ammunition and explosives facilities as 
		well as plans for changes in utilization of facilities or mission changes that 
		adversely affect the explosives Q-D requirements shall be submitted to the 
		Operations/Site Office for review and approval.  Plans shall be forwarded for:  

		(1)	New construction or major modifications of facilities for ammunition and 
			explosives activities.  Modifications or rehabilitation plans for existing 
			facilities do not require submission to the Operations/Site Office when the 
			plans do not introduce additional hazards or do not increase the net 
			explosives capacity or chemical agent hazard for which the facility was 
			designed or sited.  

		(2)	Facilities for activities not involving ammunition or explosives that are 
			in such proximity to ammunition and explosives as to be exposed to 
			hazards or for which a reasonable doubt may exit regarding possible 
			exposure to hazards.  

		(3)	Facilities for activities not involving ammunition and explosives that 
			become exposed to blast, fire, or fragment hazards; or potential toxic 
			chemical agent release due to change in facility mission or facilities 
			usage.  

	b.	When the review of site and general construction plans is required, the 
		Facility Management shall:  

		(1)	Indicate specifically in the letter of transmittal its approval of the 
			proposal, along with changes, modifications, or specific precautionary 
			measures considered necessary.  

		(2)	Comply with applicable requirements of DoD 6055.9-STD for site 
			plan submission.  

		(3)	A copy of the complete site plan and the final safety submission, 
			together with Operations/Site Office letter(s) of approval, must be 
			retained as a permanent record at the facility/site of origin.  The 
			information may be subject to review during the DOE surveys.  
			Facility maps shall be kept current with the latest site plan 
			approval and reconciled with the facility master planning 
			document.  

	c.	DoD 6055.9-STD requires that the minimum distance for protection from 
		hazardous fragments to facility boundaries, critical facility, and inhabited 
		structures shall be 1,250 ft for explosives quantities of 101 to 20,000 lb and 
		670 ft for 100 lbs or less of Hazard Class/Division 1.1 explosives, unless it 
		can be shown that there will be no hazardous fragments or debris at lesser 
		distances.  The methods of calculation presented in the Department of 
		Defense Explosives Safety Board (DDESB) Technical Paper No. 13 may be 
		used to establish a smaller fragment exclusion zone.  It is not intended that 
		these minimum fragment distances be applied to operating facilities or 
		dedicated support functions within an operating line.  For these exposures, 
		the DOE criteria presented in this Manual, for Class I, II, III, or IV activities 
		with appropriate quantity-distance separations are the required protection 
		levels.  

	d.	In addition to this Manual, the following are resource documents for the siting 
		and design of explosives facilities:  

		(1)	DOE O 420.1B, Facility Safety, (current version), U.S. Department of 
			Energy, Washington, D.C. 20545.  

		(2)	DOE O 430.1B, Real Property Asset Management, (current version), 
			Office of Project and Facilities Management, U.S. Department of 
			Energy, Washington, D.C. 20545.  

		(3)	10 CFR 830, Nuclear Safety Management.  

		(4)	TM 5-1300, NAVFAC P-397, AFM 88-22, Structures to Resist the 
			Effects of Accidental Explosions, Departments of the Army, the Navy, 
			and the Air Force, Chairman, Department of Defense Explosives Safety 
			Board, 2461 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22331.
  
		(5)	DOE/TIC-11268, A Manual for the Prediction of Blast and Fragment 
			Loading of Structures, U.S. Department of Energy, Albuquerque 
			Operations, Amarillo Area Office, Facilities and Maintenance Branch, 
			P.O. Box 30030, Amarillo, TX 79120.  

		(6)	DoD 6055.9-STD, Department of Defense Ammunition and Explosives 
			Safety Standards, Assistant Secretary of Defense (Manpower, 
			Installations, and Logistics), Chairman, Department of Defense 
			Explosives Safety Board, 2461 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 
			22331.  

		(7)	DDESB, Technical Paper No. 13, Prediction of Building Debris for 
			Quantity-Distance Siting, April 1991, Chairman, Department of 
			Defense Explosives Safety Board, 2461 Eisenhower Avenue, 
			Alexandria, VA 22331.  

		(8)	AMC-R-385-100, AMC Safety Manual, Headquarters, United States 
			Army Materiel Command, 5001 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 
			22333.  

		(9)	TR-828, Blast Environment from Fully and Partially Vented Explosions 
			in Cubicles, W.A. Keenan and J.E. Tancreto, Civil Engineering 
			Laboratory, Naval Construction Battalion Center, Port Hueneme, CA 
			93043.  

		(10)	AD 411445, Industrial Engineering Study to Establish Safety Design 
			Criteria for Use in Engineering of Explosives Facilities and Operations, 
			Process Engineering Branch, APMED Picatinny Arsenal, Dover, NJ; 
			Defense Technical Information Center, Defense Logistics Agency, 
			Cameron Station, Alexandria, VA 22314.  

		(11)	AFWL-TR-74-102, The Air Force Manual for Design and Analysis of 
			Hardened Structures, Air Force Weapons Laboratory, Air Force 
			Systems Command, Kirtland Air Force Base, NM 87117; AD B004152, 
			Defense Technical Information Center, Defense Logistics Agency, 
			Cameron Station, Alexandria, VA 22314. 
 
		(12)	HNDM-1110-01-2, Suppressive Shields, Structural Design and Analysis 
			Handbook, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Huntsville Division, 
			HNDED-CS, P.O. Box 1600, Huntsville, AL 35807.

Table VI-3.  Explosives Facilities:  Protective Design Requirements by Activity Type



        			 CHAPTER VII—OPERATING PROCEDURES
1.0	GENERAL

1.1	Requirements

	a.	This chapter establishes requirements for preparing and controlling procedures 
		used for operations involving explosives at DOE installations.  These 
		requirements minimize the probability of an incident resulting from operations 
		using outdated, inapplicable, or incomplete procedures, or from operations 
		performed in violation of established practices. 

	b.	This chapter also specifies that procedures must be generated for all explosives 
		operations because the step-by-step reasoning process that is used in developing 
		the procedure will identify many safety-related problem areas that might be 
		overlooked otherwise.  In addition, the approval system for new or revised 
		procedures also provides other viewpoints and knowledge that may not be 
		available to the originator and may need incorporation into the procedure.  

1.2	Types of Procedures

	a.	This chapter describes two general types of operating procedures:  

		(1)	Standard operating procedures (SOPs).  Standard operating procedures are 
			formalized documents prepared for performance of a task on a routine 
			basis.  Existing and applicable Department of Defense (DoD) ordnance 
			publications (see section 3.0 for references) will be reviewed for 
			application of unexploded ordnance (UXO) work.  Revisions to these 
			documents will invalidate the DoD procedures.  If the documents are not 
			appropriate for the situation, then changes may be made, subject to the 
			[DOE] review and approval process.  

		(2)	Nonstandard procedures, which include experimental and special 
			procedures.  Experimental and special procedures are documents prepared 
			for performance of a task on a limited basis.  For the purpose of this 
			Manual, special procedures are those written to correct a problem 
			encountered in an explosive operation.  

2.0	GUIDELINES

	a.	The following general guidelines should be used in creating operating procedures.  

2.1	Before Operation

	a.	Before starting any operation involving explosives, a hazard analysis shall be 
		undertaken to identify any abnormal problems that will require special training, 
		equipment, or procedures to safeguard personnel conducting the operation. 
 
	b.	A thorough review shall be conducted in accordance with Chapter II, section 1.7, 
		which will establish if the operation is safe to field.  A Safety Analysis Report 
		(SAR) is not required for UXO cleanups.  For nonstandard cleanups, such as 
		mass burial or radiation contamination, a Safety Assessment (SA) is required, 
		along with SOPs/special procedures that include the additional precautions to be 
		taken. 
 
	c.	General operating procedures shall be written and approved for each activity to 
		ensure consistency and safety of operations.  

2.2	Supervisory Responsibility

	a.	Supervisory personnel shall be responsible for enforcing the provisions of all 
		procedures used in their jurisdiction.  

2.3	Preparation

	a.	Responsible personnel with knowledge of the operations involved shall prepare 
		the procedures.  

	b.	All material called out in the procedure and operational steps shall be checked for 
		compliance with the guidance in this Manual and other DOE directives that may 
		be applicable per DOE O 440.1A.  

	c.	The specific types of equipment and building or area in which the operation is to 
		be conducted should be designated in the procedure, when applicable.  

	d.	If similar operations in the same area involve differences in equipment or process, 
		supplemental procedures or sections shall be written.  

2.4	Approval

	a.	New or revised operating procedures shall be reviewed and approved prior to use.  
		Each operator should establish levels of approval required based on the 
		operation’s inherent risk. As a minimum, review and approval requirements shall 
		include line and safety organizations.  

	b.	Work control processes shall be in place prior to any operational activities.  

2.5	Control

	a.	Distribution of procedures shall be controlled to ensure that each operating area 
		has the most current revision.  Superseded or inactive procedures shall be 
		removed from operating areas.  No operation shall be performed with superseded, 
		inactive, or unapproved procedures.  

	b.	Files of active procedures should be maintained.  

2.6	Audits

	a.	An audit system should be established that will routinely evaluate the 
		adequacy, availability, and currency of procedures.  Also, audits should 
		include an evaluation of operator knowledge and compliance with 
		procedures. 
 
	b.	Groups conducting the audits should include personnel from other than the 
		operating department or division using the procedure.  

2.7	Reviews

	a.	Appropriate departments should review active procedures at least annually. 
 
	b.	If a procedure is no longer completely applicable to an operation or if new safety 
		considerations (i.e., compatibility, toxicity, ignition sources, etc.) have been 
		identified, the procedure shall be revised.  

	c.	A procedure not expected to be used during the coming year may be placed in an 
		inactive procedure file.  

	d.	Before an inactive procedure can be reactivated, it shall be reviewed and 
		approved.  Minimum approval shall be the same as that required for a new or 
		revised procedure (see section 2.4 of this chapter).  

2.8	Content of Standard Operating Procedures

	a.	The following presentation is intended to specify content of procedures, not the 
		format or organization.  Each operator should develop its own system for 
		preparing safety procedures.  

2.8.1	General Operating Procedures

	a.	Introduction.  The introduction to the procedure should include the 
		following:
  
		(1)	A statement of the scope, defining what facilities and equipment 
			are covered.  

		(2)	The name of the department and individual responsible for the 
			operation. 
 
		(3)	If the procedure serves as the basis for an exemption or waiver 
			from the requirements of this Manual, a statement to this effect and 
			a specific reference to the standard involved.  

	b.	Safety and Health.  The safety section of the procedure should present the 
		following information or reference a safety manual that specifies the 
		requirements:  

		(1)	General safety rules to be observed and techniques to be applied 
			that will ensure safety of operations, prevent personnel injury or 
			illness, and prevent equipment damage.  In particular, this SOP 
			section should describe the facility’s personnel control features that 
			protect personnel from exposure to hazardous operations, toxic 
			materials, or tests.  

		(2)	The number of personnel (workers and casuals) and explosives 
			weight limits.  

		(3)	Additional or specific emergency controls not addressed by the 
			facility emergency plan.  

	c.	Operations.  The operations section should consist of general directions 
		for operation of all major explosives-handling equipment.  Particular 
		emphasis should be placed on safety interlocks and controls, and their 
		proper use.  If operation of a particular item of equipment or of an area 
		requires that no other operation be performed simultaneously in the same 
		area, this requirement shall be stated clearly in the procedure.  

2.8.2	Unit Operating Procedures

	a.	Introduction.  The procedure introduction should include the following:  

		(1)	A statement of the nature of the operation and its objectives.  
		
		(2)	The name of the department responsible for the operation and the 
			procedure.  

		(3)	A description of the range of work the procedure authorizes.  

		(4)	If the procedure serves as the basis for an exemption or waiver 
			from the standards of this Manual, a statement to this effect and a 
			specific reference to the standard involved.  

	b.	Materials and Equipment.  The materials and equipment section should 
		present the following information:  

		(1)	All significant tools, supplies, chemicals, and equipment necessary 
			to perform the operation should be listed in the SOP or in a 
			separate required document.  

		(2)	Specifications for approved chemicals, supplies, tooling, and 
			equipment should be referenced where applicable.  

		(3)	An explanation of any specific hazard involved in the handling of 
			chemicals or explosives, or a reference to a document that 
			describes the hazards should be included.  

	c.	Safety.  The safety section should present the following information or 
		reference a safety manual that specifies the requirements:  

		(1)	Safety rules specific to the operation.  

		(2)	Protective equipment that must be used during the operation.  

		(3)	Emergency controls applicable to the operation not considered in 
			the general operating procedures.  

	d.	Operations.  The operations section should consist of sequential directions 
		written or pictured in clear, concise steps that describe how to perform a 
		particular operation.  If a particular operation requires that no other 
		operation be performed simultaneously in the same work area, this 
		requirement shall be stated clearly in the procedure.  

2.9	Content of Special or Experimental Procedures

	a.	In addition to the applicable requirements listed in section 2.8 of this chapter, the 
		following shall also be addressed: 
 
		(1)	Field operations remote to normally occupied areas shall include 
			procedures to ensure prompt response of both fire and medical emergency 
			services or those services shall be staged at the event site.  

		(2)	Personnel involved with the operation shall be briefed or trained on any 
			unique aspects of the operation and emergency procedures.  

	b.	When a special or experimental operation will be conducted a number of times, an 
		SOP should be written and approved.  

3.0	REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

	a.	The following documents set forth some of the non-DOE procedures to be used in 
		UXO operations.  

		(1)	60-Series Publications, Commanding Officer, Naval Explosive Ordnance 
			Disposal Technology Division, 2008 Stump Neck Road, Indian Head, MD  
			20640-5070

		(2)	OE CX Interim Guidance, US Army Corps of Engineers, Huntsville 
			Center, P.O. Box 1600, Huntsville, AL  35807-4301.  


         			CHAPTER VIII—FORMULATION SCALEUP

1.0	EXPLOSIVES DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM

1.1	Explosives Development Committee

	a.	A committee shall be established at each DOE facility engaged in explosives 
		development to be the approving authority for each phase of an explosives 
		development program.  This committee will be referred to in this Manual as the 
		Explosives Development Committee (EDC), but it may have a different name at 
		each DOE facility.  Individuals chosen to serve on the EDC should have 
		considerable experience in explosives handling, processing, chemistry, sensitivity, 
		and safety.  

1.2	Phase-by-Phase Approvals

	a.	The EDC shall review and approve data generated in each phase of a development 
		project that involves a new explosive or new explosive formulation before the 
		next phase begins.  

1.3	Modified Formulations

	a.	Compositional modifications to previously evaluated explosive formulations shall 
		be approved by the EDC.  However, the EDC may approve minor modifications 
		to the explosives formulation for a given phase of development without requiring 
		all of the developmental steps and tests.  

1.4	Sensitivity Data from Another Laboratory

	a.	If comparable sensitivity data for the subject material are available from another 
		laboratory, the EDC may waive some developmental phase tests.  

2.0	DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURES

2.1	General

	a.	All DOE explosives handling facilities shall establish an administrative 
		procedure that defines the basic steps for developing and evaluating new 
		explosives and explosive formulations.  The procedure shall require that each 
		development effort proceed in phases from small to large quantities.  The 
		quantities of materials that may be handled in each phase shall be limited.  
		The EDC shall be responsible for establishing criteria for acceptable explosive 
		behavior in each test of each phase of the explosives development procedure.  
		The development procedure should consist of three phases plus a synthesis 
		phase and compatibility testing, when required.  Guidelines for establishing 
		this procedure are proposed in the following sections.  Table VIII-1
		summarizes these guidelines.  

2.2	Synthesis Phase

	a.	Before mixing a new explosive with other materials, the sensitivity and 
		stability of the explosive should be determined and should comply with the 
		criteria set by the EDC.  Recommended tests include the following:  

		(1)	Drop-weight impact.
  
		(2)	Friction.  

		(3)	Spark.  

		(4) 	Thermal stability-these tests should include two or more of the 
			following:  

2.2.1.1	Differential thermal analysis or differential scanning calorimetry.  

2.2.1.2	Thermal gravimetric analysis.
  
2.2.1.3	Gas evolution rate at elevated temperature (chemical reactivity test, vacuum 
	stability, etc.).  

2.2.1.4	Time-to-explosion analysis.  

2.3	Compatibility Testing

	a.	If a proposed formulation contains new ingredients (explosive or nonexplosive), 
		the new ingredients should be tested for compatibility with the other ingredients 
		before preparing batches for Phase I testing.  Compatibility tests should include 
		any of the stability tests listed under section 2.2a(4) of this chapter.  

	b.	No more than 2 g of the new formulation should be prepared, handled, or stored 
		before compatibility testing. 
 
	c.	Formulations for compatibility testing should be processed remotely, whenever 
		possible.  

Table VIII-1.  Scaleup Procedure Guidelines for New Explosives and Formulations

2.4	Phase I—Preliminary Explosives Testing

	a.	The total quantity of material that may be processed, handled, or stored at any one 
		time in Phase I should not exceed 10 g.  Whenever possible, this material should 
		be processed remotely.  

	b.	The new explosive or formulation should be subjected to sensitivity and stability 
		tests.  As a minimum, drop-weight impact, friction, spark sensitivity, and thermal 
		stability tests should be run.  Thermal stability testing need not be performed here 
		if one or more of the compatibility tests listed under section 2.2a(4) of this 
		chapter have already been conducted on the new formulation.  

	c.	If the new explosive or formulation is acceptable in the above tests, it may be 
		scaled up to Phase II.  The EDC may impose handling or processing restrictions 
		or precautions on the material if its performance in any of the above tests is 
		questionable. 
 
	d.	After Phase I testing of a formulation is complete, the EDC should define, on the 
		basis of the test results, what variations in composition are permissible during 
		Phase II development without retesting.  

2.5	Phase II—Experimental Characterization and Development

	a.	The total quantity of materials that may be processed or handled at any one time 
		in Phase II should not exceed 16.075 oz (500 grams).  No limit exists on the 
		quantity that may be stored, other than the storage facility limits for Group L 
		explosives.  

	b.	Materials investigated in Phase II should be produced by techniques similar to 
		those that will be used to produce larger batches in a subsequent scaleup phase.  

	c.	A thermal characterization test and evaluation should be run before pressing the 
		new material at elevated temperature.  

	d.	The Phase I sensitivity and stability tests should be rerun in Phase II if the 
		following conditions apply:  

		(1)	The formulation to be scaled up to Phase III differs from that tested in 
			Phase I.  In this case, testing should be completed before Phase III scaleup.  

		(2)	The explosive or formulation prepared for Phase II development is 
			produced by techniques different than those used in Phase I.  Testing 
			should be completed before Phase III scaleup.  

		(3)	During Phase II, the composition of a formulation is modified to an extent 
			that the composition is no longer within the limits specified by the EDC 
			(see section 2.4d of this chapter).  Testing should be completed before 
			proceeding with Phase II.  

		(4)	The compatibility of explosives and formulations with materials 
			contacting the explosives in test and production devices shall be evaluated 
			before any such device is assembled.  If compatibility testing is required, 
			one or more of the tests listed under section 2.2a(4) of this chapter should 
			be recommended.  

2.6	Phase III – Full-Scale Testing and Production

	a.	The maximum quantity of materials that may be processed or handled in Phase III 
		should be defined in the EDC grant of authorization to proceed with Phase III.  
		No limit is imposed for the storage facilities except the limits imposed by the 
		quantity-distance tables.  

	b.	All additional testing necessary to define storage compatibility grouping should 
		be completed before committing bulk quantities of the material to storage, (see 
		Chapter II, section 17.4).  

	c.	During Phase III development, the composition of all formulations should be 
		fixed.  

	d.	Any new explosive material that is to be contact machined shall be subjected to a 
		machining overtest.  Reaction threshold should be determined if possible. 
 
	e.	If billets of 15.4 lb (7 kg) or greater are to be produced in Phase III, drop-skid 
		testing should be performed and EDC criteria for this test should be met.  

	f.	Section 2.5d of this chapter should also apply to Phase III development.  


         		CHAPTER IX—INSENSITIVE HIGH EXPLOSIVES QUALIFICATION

1.0	INSENSITIVE HIGH EXPLOSIVES (IHE)

	a.	Some explosive substances, although mass detonating, are so insensitive that the 
		probability of accidental initiation or transition from burning to detonation is 
		negligible.  Any explosive that is a candidate for classification as an IHE shall be 
		subjected to the DOE qualification tests listed in Table IX-1or Recommendations 
		on the Transport of Hazardous Goods-Tests and Criteria, Test Series 7.  Test 
		procedures, where not specified, are contained in MHSMP-84-22, IHE Material 
		Qualification Tests, Description and Criteria.  The DOE laboratory or operation 
		shall submit test data for each explosive requested for this classification through 
		the appropriate Operations Office to the DOE Office of Facility Safety.  The DOE 
		Explosives Safety Committee will independently analyze the data and recommend 
		action on including the explosive in Table IX-2 as an approved IHE.  

Table IX-1.  DOE IHE Qualification Tests.

Table IX-2.  Approved IHEs

	b.	New candidate explosives formulations will not be classified by analogy 
		as IHE until reviewed by the DOE Explosives Safety Committee.  The 
		general guidelines for requesting and obtaining an IHE approval by 
		analogy are:  

		(1)	All requests, including rationale, must be submitted in writing to 
			the DOE Explosives Safety Committee for analysis and 
			recommended action.  

		(2)	Approved IHEs with complete test data must be used for baseline 
			comparison purposes.  

	c.	More specific guidelines will depend on circumstances surrounding the 
		specific analogy request.  

	d.	When a partial analogy can be drawn, only partial testing is needed 
		depending on the type and extent of change in the candidate IHE relative 
		to the baseline IHE and the potential effects of these changes on specific 
		initiation mechanisms (shock, thermal, mechanical, impact, electrostatic, 
		etc.).  A candidate IHE can be placed in one of the following categories to 
		define the tests required for approval:  

		(1)	CASE I (partial testing required).  The candidate IHE formulation 
			substitution of the inert binder component of the approved baseline 
			IHE with a new inert binder component.  Sufficient testing is 
			required to verify that no chemical incompatibilities have been 
			introduced that would de-stabilize the base IHE.  In this case, test 
			data normally generated by the requesting facility during their 
			explosive development scaleup phasing process may be submitted 
			for approval in lieu of the qualification tests of Table IX-1.  During 
			the development phase, the facility EDC may dictate restrictions 
			consistent with an IHE internal to their facility only.  Final 
			approval as an IHE must be obtained through the DOE Explosives 
			Safety Committee.  Tests 1, 2, 3, and 7 of Table IX-1or equivalent 
			are required as a minimum.  

		(2)	CASE II (all IHE tests of Table IX-1 required; analogy 
			inappropriate).  The candidate IHE involves the addition of an 
			untested (IHE tests) energetic component to the approved baseline 
			IHE.  

					OR

		(3)	The candidate IHE involves the same energetic and inert 
			components as the approved baseline IHE, the only change being a 
			volume- percent increase in the energetic component content.  

	e.	In deliberating the approval request, the DOE Explosives Safety Committee will 
		consider any data available over and above that required by Table IX-1.  

2.0	IHE SUBASSEMBLIES

	a.	IHE subassemblies are composed of IHE hemispheres or spheres with 
		booster charges, with or without detonators.  Successful completion of the 
		applicable DOE qualification tests listed in Table IX-3 is required for 
		classification as an IHE subassembly.  The requestor shall submit a test 
		plan defining specific test procedures for candidates for this classification 
		through the appropriate Site Office to the DOE Explosives Safety 
		Committee for review.  On approval of the plan, tests shall be run and the 
		DOE Explosives Safety Committee shall independently analyze the data 
		and recommend approval or disapproval.  DOE Headquarters will then 
		issue a memorandum to appropriate Site Offices and DOE contractors 
		classifying those configurations meeting the required test criteria as IHE 
		subassemblies.  Approved IHE subassemblies are listed in Table IX-4.  
		Subassemblies will not be classified as IHE Subassemblies by analogy 
		until reviewed by the DOE Explosives Safety Committee.  When no other 
		explosives are present in the same location, these subassemblies are 
		classified as Class 1.6 explosives (see Table IX-5) for storage and 
		processing.  

Table IX-3.  DOE Qualification Tests for IHE Subassemblies*

Table IX-4.  Approved IHE Subassemblies

3.0	IHE WEAPONS

	a.	IHE weapons are those weapons listed in DOE DNA TP 20-7 that are exempt 
		from storage and transportation limits when stored or transported alone or in 
		combination with each other.  This classification is valid only if storage 
		containers provide adequate spacing between individual units.  TP 20-7 specifies 
		the spacing requirements for materials stored or transported out of containers.  
		These weapons are classified as Class 1.6 explosives for storage, processing and 
		transportation purposes.  

4.0	REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

	a.	The following documents set forth some of the non-DOE procedures to be used in 
		the IHE and IHE subassembly testing required by Table IX-1and Table IX-3:  

		(1)	TB 700-2, NAVSEA INST 8020.8A, TO 11A-1-47, DLAR 8220.1, 
			Department of Defense Explosives Hazard Classification Procedures, 
			Departments of the Army, the Navy, the Air Force, and the Defense 
			Logistics Agency, Washington, D.C.  

		(2)	Mason & Hanger-Silas Mason Publication 84-22 (MHSMP-84-22), IHE 
			Material Qualification Tests, Description and Criteria (Rev 1, July 1985), 
			National Technical Information Service, U.S. Department of Commerce, 
			5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.  

		(3)	Recommendations on the Transport of Hazardous Goods-Tests and 
			Criteria, Second Edition, ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.1, LABELMASTER, 
			Chicago, IL, 60646 USA. 

		(4)	Mason & Hanger-Silas Mason Publication (MHSMP-86-16), IHE 
			Subassembly Test Results for the B-83, B-61, 3/4/6/7/8, W80, W81, and 
			W85, June 1996, Robert S. Slape, National Technical Information Service, 
			U.S. Department of Commerce, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 
			22161.  


     		   CHAPTER X—ELECTRICAL STORMS  AND LIGHTING PROTECTION

1.0	ELECTRICAL STORM HAZARDS

	a.	The primary focus of this chapter is to provide protection to explosives in 
		event of an electrical storm, and to personnel working in explosives areas, and 
		personnel near those explosives areas from the consequences of an explosives 
		incident resulting from a lightning strike.  Lightning presents a hazard to 
		explosives in at least five ways:  

		(1) 	The electrical current produced by a voltage gradient resulting from a 
			lightning strike could initiate the explosives directly.  

		(2) 	The surface flashover or arcing of the generated electrical current 
			between conductive surfaces that are not at equilibrium could initiate 
			the explosives directly by the heat, sparks, and molten metal generated 
			by the arc.  

		(3) 	This same arcing could cause damage or fires in electrical fixtures and 
			equipment.  

		(4) 	The lightning could initiate a fire involving combustible materials in 
			the facility, including the containers around explosives.  

		(5)	The spalling generated by the heat of the current flowing through the 
			structural components of the facility could initiate, by impact, 
			unprotected explosives.  In addition, lightning could affect support 
			systems such as fire protection and security.  Lightning can reach a 
			structure not only by direct strike, but also indirectly by coupling to a 
			conductor that penetrates the structure. 
 
	b.	This chapter summarizes the minimum requirements for design, maintenance, 
		testing, and inspection of lightning protection systems and lightning detection 
		systems.  Only lightning protection systems described in this chapter shall be 
		used.  The DOE Explosives Safety Committee must specifically approve use 
		of non-conventional systems, such as streamer emission and charge 
		dissipation systems.  Protection from lightning induced hazards can best be 
		achieved by enclosing the explosives in an interconnected network of good 
		conductors, such that the exterior fields, currents, and voltages are reduced.  
		This method of protection is similar to a Faraday cage and is called a 
		“Faraday-like shield” LPS.  A second method or layer of protection is 
		achieved by providing a sufficiently large sideflash separation (standoff) 
		distance between the explosives and any electrical conductor within the 
		structure (including the walls and ceiling) to preclude the possibility of current 
		flowing onto the explosives or arcing to them.  (Note:  As part of the 
		Faraday-like shield LPS, a minimum sideflash separation distance is required 
		from the boundaries of the structure.)  A third method involves directing the 
		current away from the structure and directly to ground by use of air terminals, 
		masts or catenaries, and down conductors.  When none of the above methods 
		of lightning protection are provided, personnel can be protected by evacuating 
		them an appropriate distance as specified in section 6.0 of this chapter.
  
	c.	Facilities have five years from the issuance of DOE M 440.1-1A (Revision 9) 
		of this Manual to fully implement for existing structures those requirements 
		and recommendations of sections 2.0 through 4.0 that were not contained in 
		Revision 8 of this Manual or NFPA 780.  Neither waivers nor exemptions are 
		required for such items during the implementation period.  New structures and 
		conversion of an LPS to a Faraday cage-style shield shall comply with the 
		most current requirements.  

2.0	LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS

	a.	A properly designed and installed lightning protection system (LPS) meeting the 
		requirements below and maintained per section 3.0 is required for all explosives 
		structures except as identified in section 4.0.  

2.1	Lightning Protection System Basic Design

	a.	Lightning protection system design consists of the use of strike termination 
		means, low impedance paths to ground, and earth electrode systems, coupled with 
		bonding of all conductive penetrations into the protected area, surge suppression, 
		and sideflash protection.  Metallic elements of the structure meeting the material 
		requirements of NFPA 780 are allowed to serve as strike termination devices, 
		down conductors, or parts of the earth electrode system.  Facility Management, 
		the Authority Having Jurisdiction, and a person competent in lightning protection 
		system theory and design shall approve design variations from those specified 
		below.  

	b.	Design of lightning protection systems per NFPA 780 shall be based on a 100-ft 
		(30.5-m) striking distance (“Rolling Sphere”).  The zone of protection provided 
		by an LPS is the space beneath the LPS that is substantially immune to direct 
		lightning attachment.  The LPS design shall ensure that explosives facilities and 
		their associated components that require lightning protection are within the LPS 
		zone of protection.  Structural elements of the building meeting the material 
		requirements of NFPA 780 are authorized to serve as the LPS or parts of the LPS.  

	c.	Design parameters for a Faraday cage and Faraday shield-like LPS shall be based, 
		as a minimum, on a one percent threat level and include the following:  

		(1)	Return stroke amplitude = 200 kA

		(2)	Rise rate = 400 kA/?sec

		(3)	Number of strokes per flash = 26 max

		(4)	Striking Distance = 30.5 m (100 ft)

		(5)	Burn through of 0.19 in. (4.8 mm) for steel, 0.20 in. (5 mm) for copper, 
			and 0.28 in. (7 mm) for aluminum.  

		(6)	Action = 3x106 amps2-sec.  

2.2	Lightning Protection Subsystems

	a.	An approved LPS consists of the following subsystems:  

		(1)	A strike termination device to intercept the direct attachment of a lightning 
			flash and connects it to a path to ground.  A strike termination device may 
			include metal masts, air terminals, overhead wires (catenary) or permanent 
			metal parts of a building. 
 
		(2)	Down conductors to interconnect the strike termination devices and form 
			paths from each strike termination device to the earth electrode system 
			(e.g., heavy metallic cables, metallic building structural members).  

		(3)	An earth electrode system to transfer lightning current to the earth.  The 
			earth electrode system is connected to the down conductor and is in direct 
			contact with the earth.  Examples of earth electrode systems include 
			ground rods, a ground ring (counterpoise), buried metal plates, and an 
			Ufer ground or other similar devices. 
 
		(4)	Surge suppression devices (SSDs) to limit harmful energy due to lightning 
			or power line transients from entering a structure via power and metallic 
			signal lines and initiating an explosion or fire.  SSD attenuates, suppresses 
			or diverts lightning induced electrical energy to the earth electrode system. 
 
2.3	Approved Lightning Protection Systems

	a.	The approved types of LPS are Mast, Catenary, Integral Air Terminal, and 
		Faraday cage or Faraday-like shield systems.  Faraday cage or Faraday-like shield 
		systems are preferred for new structures where applicable.  The main features of 
		each type system are summarized below.  

2.3.1	Mast System

	a.	A Mast System consists of one or more poles with a strike termination device 
		connected to an earth electrode system by down conductors.  It provides a zone of 
		protection as shown in Figure X-1 for a single mast.  The principal design 
		parameters include:  

		(1)	The minimum mast separation distance from the structure is 6 ft (1.8 m) or 
			the formula as defined in NFPA 780 (2004), D = h/6, whichever is greater 
			where the h is the height of the mast of structure considered.  

		(2)	Non-metallic masts require a metal air terminal or metal cap installed at 
			the top that is connected to the earth electrode system by at least two down 
			conductors installed on opposite sides of the mast.  (Note:  Mast guy wires 
			are allowed to serve as down conductors, provided they are connected to 
			the earth electrode system.  

		(3)	Metallic masts serve as both air terminal and down conductors, and will be 
			connected to the earth electrode system with two independent main size 
			conductors attached approximately symmetrically to (i.e., opposite sides 
			of) the mast base.  

Figure X-1.  Single Mast Zone of Protection

2.3.2	Catenary System

	a.	The Catenary LPS consists of wires (cables) stretched between the 
		tops of two or more masts (see Figure X-2).  The main design 
		parameters include:  

		(1)	Each wire shall be an electrically continuous run of main size 
			conductor [i.e., copper-clad or galvanized steel cable with a 
			minimum diameter of 0.25 in. (6.4 mm)] bonded to all down 
			conductors.  

		(2)	Non-metallic masts require a metal air terminal or metal cap 
			installed at the top that is connected to the earth electrode system 
			by at least two down conductors installed on opposite sides of the 
			mast.  (Note:  Mast guy wires are allowed to serve as down 
			conductors, provided they are connected to the earth electrode 
			system.)

		(3)	Metallic masts serve as both air terminal and down conductors 
			themselves, and shall be connected to the earth electrode system by 
			two main size conductors attached approximately symmetrically to 
			(i.e., opposite sides of) the mast base.  

Figure X-2.  Example of Catenary System Zone of Protection

		(4)	The minimum vertical separation between an overhead wire and 
			the protected structure, including its projections, shall be the 
			greater of 6 ft (1.8 m) or as defined in NFPA 780 (2004), as 
			D = (L/6n).  

		Where:  

			D = 	Sideflash distance from a catenary

			L = 	Length of lightning protection conductor between its 
				grounded point and the point being calculated.  

			n = 	1.00 where there is a single overhead ground wire that 
				exceeds 200 ft (60 m) in horizontal length.  

			n = 	1.50 where there is a single overhead wire or more than one 
				wire interconnected above the structure to be protected, 
				such that only two down conductors are located greater 
				than 20 ft (6 m) and less than 100 ft (30 m) apart.  

			n =	2.25 where there are more than two dozen conductors 
				spaced more than 25 ft (7.6 m) apart within a 100-ft (30-m) 
				wide area that are interconnected above the structure being 
				protected.  

		(5)	Deflections of the wire resulting from wind, ice, or other weather 
			conditions shall be considered in determining the separation 
			distance.  The supporting mast will be at least 6 ft (1.8 m) from the 
			structure.  

2.3.3	Integral Air Terminal System

	a.	An integral LPS is one that has the strike termination devices mounted on 
		the structure to be protected.  These strike termination devices are 
		connected to the earth electrode system via down conductors.  Metallic 
		structural members can serve as parts of the LPS.  However, sideflash 
		protection is required.  (See bonding distance formula in NFPA 780).  An 
		example of this system is shown in Figure X-3.  The relevant design 
		parameters are:  

		(1)	The down conductors of integral systems shall be installed in as 
			nearly a vertical position as possible.  

		(2)	No bend of a conductor shall form an included angle of less than 
			90 degrees, nor shall it have a radius of bend less than 8 in. 
			(203 mm).  
		(3)	The number of conductors and configuration of the connections 
			between air terminals are as required by NFPA 780.  

		(4)	Air terminals height and location are as required by 
			NFPA 780.  

2.3.4	Faraday-Cage and Faraday-like Shield

	a.	The preferred method of protecting explosives operations from 
		lightning flashes, as well as from other external sources of 
		electromagnetic radiation, is to enclose the operations or facility inside 
		a Faraday cage.  A Faraday cage is an enclosure composed of a 
		continuous grid of conductors, such that the voltage between any two 
		points inside the enclosure is zero, when immersed in an electrostatic 
		field.  A Faraday cage or Faraday-like shield LPS is one where the 
		protected volume is enclosed by a heavy metal screen (i.e., similar to a 
		birdcage) or continuous metallic structure with all metallic 
		penetrations bonded.  The lightning current flows on the exterior of the 
		structure not through the interior.  A Faraday-like shield (which is not 
		an ideal Faraday cage) is formed by a continuous conductive matrix 
		that is properly bonded and grounded.  
 
Figure X-3.  Integral System Zone of Protection

		(1)	Examples of Faraday-like shields include:  

			(a)	Steel arch magazines where the steel arches and reinforcing 
				bars (rebar) of the concrete end-walls and floor are 
				electrically continuous and meet spacing requirements.  

			(b)	Earth covered magazines and operating buildings where the 
				reinforcing bars (rebar) of the concrete walls, floors, and 
				ceiling are electrically continuous and meet spacing 
				requirements.  

			(c)	Reinforced concrete buildings where the reinforcing bars 
				(rebar) of the concrete walls, ceiling, and floor of are 
				electrically continuous and meet spacing requirements.  

			(d)	The metal shell of prefabricated portable magazines and 
				metal buildings.  

		(2)	The main design parameters are:  

			(a)	The structural components of buildings shall be electrically 
				bonded together (i.e., walls, floor, roof, door and window 
				frames) via built in attachments such as rebar welded or 
				wired together, or by adding external bonding wires 
				between components.  The techniques commonly used and 
				approved in the construction industry are acceptable for this 
				purpose.  (If welds are used, a structural engineer should 
				verify that they do not adversely affect structural response).  

			(b)	The structural components should be electrically bonded at 
				intervals no greater than 3 ft unless testing shows 
				otherwise.  Bonding distances may vary based on building 
				design.  Use of greater than the nominal bonding distance 
				requires an electromagnetic characterization of the 
				building’s transfer impedance to determine the specific 
				bonding distances.  

			(c)	A freestanding structure that is determined by a competent 
				expert to be a Faraday cage or Faraday-like Shield may not 
				require strike termination devices, down conductors or 
				grounding systems.  Structures that satisfy the Faraday 
				cage/shield definition have suitable down conductors and 
				grounding components within the structure’s design.  
				However use of a strike termination device on these 
				structures provides a preferred point of attachment for 
				lightning and could prevent structural damage, such as 
				concrete spall, in the event of a direct lightning strike 
				attachment).  

2.4	Lightning Protection Subsystem Criteria

2.4.1	Components of Strike Termination System

	a.	Air Terminal:  An air terminal is the component of an LPS used to 
		intercept lightning strikes.  Air terminals include vertical spikes 
		attached to the structure (commonly referred to as Franklin Rods), 
		overhead wires (as used with catenary systems) or grids, and for earth 
		covered magazines only, overhead air vents.  

		(1)	When used as air terminals, air vents shall be (a) fabricated 
			from metal 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) thick or greater and be 
			electrically continuous with the steel reinforcing rod of the 
			magazine or (b) designed to trap any molten metal a strike 
			might produce.  In all cases air vents on earth covered 
			magazines shall be bonded to the structure as discussed in 
			section 2.4.3.  

		(2)	On structures modified to a verified Faraday-like shield LPS 
			where an NFPA 780 LPS system exists, it is recommended 
			that air terminals be maintained as they provide a preferred 
			point of attachment for lightning strikes.  If they are bonded to 
			the Faraday cage, conductive downlines need only be 
			maintained and visibly inspected to the point of juncture with 
			the grounding system (i.e., ground rods or counterpoises).  
			When Facility Management makes the determination that the 
			NFPA 780 system will be retained, a visible inspection shall 
			be performed on the same schedule as maintenance of the 
			Faraday-like shield LPS.  Electrical resistance and resistance 
			to earth testing will not be required.  

		(3)	Air terminals on an integral LPS shall consist of a cylindrical 
			rod or tube of material and size as specified in NFPA 780.  
			They can be pointed or blunt, but the optimal tip radius of 
			curvature for interception of lightning strikes is 3/16 in. 
			(4.8 mm) minimum to ½ in. (12.7 mm) maximum.  

	b.	Conductors:  Conductors provide low impedance paths from air 
		terminals to the earth electrode system.  

		(1)	Where wires are used as down conductors, they shall meet the 
			requirements of NFPA 780.  

		(2)	Lightning conductors should run vertical or horizontal.  If run 
			upwards, they must have a rise of no more than 1/4 pitch.  

		(3)	In a Faraday cage based LPS, the structural elements have a 
			higher current carrying capacity and lower impedance to 
			ground than wire down conductors.  Structures with such an 
			LPS do not require wire down conductors.  When a structure 
			with an existing air terminal LPS is modified to a verified 
			Faraday cage based LPS, it is recommended air terminals be 
			maintained as they provide a preferred point of attachment.  If 
			they are bonded to the Faraday cage, conductive downlines 
			need only be maintained and visibly inspected to the point of 
			juncture with the grounding system (i.e., ground rods or 
			counterpoises).  When Facility Management makes the 
			determination that the NFPA 780 system will be retained, a 
			visible inspection shall be performed on the same schedule as 
			maintenance on the Faraday-like shield LPS.  Electrical 
			resistance and resistance to earth testing will not be required.  

2.4.2	Grounding

	a.	Lightning protection systems, to include integral and catenary 
		systems, but with the exception of Faraday cage or Faraday-like 
		Shield systems, require an earth electrode (ground) system to 
		dissipate the electrical energy of a lightning strike to the earth.  The 
		use of an earth electrode systems with a Faraday-like shield lightning 
		protection system is not required as the floor of such a structure acts 
		as the earth (ground) electrode; however, electrical safety grounding 
		requirements do apply.  Examples of earth electrode systems include 
		ground rods, a ring electrode (counterpoise) system, buried metal 
		plates, or Ufer grounds.  

		(1)	The resistance of a lightning protection grounding system will 
			not exceed that specified in section 3.0 below.  

		(2)	When multiple ground rods are used as a grounding system, 
			the rods will be separated by a distance so that they do not 
			influence each other.  

		(3)	All other grounding systems, e.g., AC power, electronic 
			multi-point, electronic single-point, will be bonded to the 
			lightning protection grounding system.  

		(4)	In cases where some other installed system requires a lower 
			resistance to ground than specified in section 3.0 below, the 
			lower requirement will govern.  

		(5)	See the following documents for specific guidance:  

			(a)	National Electric Code, Article 250, Grounding

			(b)	IEEE 80, Guide for Safety in AC Substation 
				Grounding 

			(c)	NFPA 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning 
				Protection Systems
2.4.3	Bonding

	a.	Bonding provides a physical and electrical connection from all parts 
		of the LPS to the ground connection.  Bonding produces electrical 
		continuity between the LPS and metallic objects to minimize 
		potential differences.  Methods of bonding include mechanical, 
		compression and thermal connections.  

		(1)	NFPA 780 requirements for bonding to the LPS that 
			specifically need to be addressed include:  

			(a)	Metallic gates and fences if they cross or are within 
				sideflash distance of a LPS or are within 6 ft (1.8 m) of 
				an explosives structure.  

			(b)	Railroad tracks if they cross or come with in sideflash 
				distance or 6 ft of an explosives structure’s LPS or enter 
				an explosives structure.  If the tracks are used to carry 
				electrical signals, they should have insulated joints 
				immediately external to the bond of the LPS ground loop 
				conductor.  If the tracks enter an explosives structure, 
				they also should be bonded to the metal frame of the 
				structure or equivalent.  

			(c)	All shielded cabling, power cabling, communication 
				lines, data lines, and electrical conduit will be buried 
				underground in conduit for a minimum of 50 ft (15.2 m) 
				before entering the structure.  These and other metallic 
				utility lines and pipes will be electrically bonded to the 
				LPS or the structural steel of the building as close as 
				reasonably achievable, as determined by a competent 
				expert, to the point of entry.  

			(d)	Metallic penetrations within the zone of protection that 
				are within sideflash distance of a component of the LPS 
				or within sideflash distance of an item that is bonded to 
				the LPS.  

			(e)	Utilities (gas, water, power, signal) entering the structure 
				from exterior to the LPS.  (Apply NFPA cathodic 
				protection guidance to prevent excessive corrosion.)

			(f)	Potential presence of ground loops.  

	b.	All metallic penetrations into a Faraday cage or shield shall be bonded to 
		the nearest structural member or LPS component that is integrally bonded 
		to the earth (ground) electrode system.  Bonding connections shall be as 
		close to the point of entry as reasonably achievable.  More than one bond 
		may be required in some situations where a conductive penetration passes 
		a structural member inside the structure.  The bond resistance should be 
		less than that specified in section 3.3.  

	c.	Other metal masses that are integrated into the structure of the building 
		(e.g., ventilators, steel doors, metal doorframes, steel reinforcing bars, 
		etc.) shall be bonded to the nearest structural member or LPS component 
		that is integrally bonded to the earth (ground) electrode system.  Interior 
		metal masses (desks, cabinets, etc) should be bonded if required by the 
		competent expert.  

	d.	Lightning protection system bonds should be as short and as direct as 
		reasonably achievable to minimize inductance.  Route the bonds as 
		close to the rebar as reasonably achievable.  

	e.	To preclude confusion between LPS bonding and electrical safety 
		grounding, the following key differences should be understood:  

		(1)	Lightning bonds must be as specified in NFPA 780 Table 3.1 
			or equivalent.  

		(2)	Lightning clamps and fasteners must comply with UL-96 and 
			UL-96A, and be listed for use with LPS.  

	f.	Do not paint LPS bonds and conductors.  

	g.	Bond resistance shall be as specified in section 3.3.  

2.4.4	Surge Suppression for Incoming Conductors

	a.	Surge suppression devices shall be provided in accordance with 
		NFPA and the provisions of this Manual on each power line, signal 
		line, or communication line conductor entering the LPS protected 
		structure.  They shall be located between the respective conductor 
		and the structure ground and/or Faraday cage, as close as reasonably 
		achievable to the point where the conductor penetrates the LPS zone 
		of protection or the structure.  All cabling, power cabling, 
		communication lines, data lines, and electrical conduit shall be buried 
		underground in metallic conduit for a minimum of 50 ft (15.2 m) 
		before entering an explosives structure.  These and other metallic 
		utility lines and pipes shall be electrically bonded to the LPS or 
		structural steel of the building as close as reasonably achievable to 
		their entry point.  

	b.	Surge suppression designed for specific equipment does not 
		necessarily provide adequate protection for an explosives structure.  
		It is the responsibility of the Facility Management to provide 
		additional surge and/or transient protection for sensitive equipment 
		located in and about the structure.  This additional protection may or 
		may not be incorporated in a surge suppression device.  If it is 
		incorporated, the additional protection shall not decrease or 
		compromise the protection intended by this Manual.  

		(1)	All lightning protection systems shall include surge 
			suppression for all incoming metallic power, communications, 
			instrumentation lines, and other electrical conductors, 
			including low voltage lines or extensions, in addition to any 
			NEC requirements for surge suppression.  

		(2)	Conductors leading from the surge suppression devices shall 
			be kept separated from conductors leading to the surge 
			suppression device.  All leads will be as short as reasonably 
			achievable.  (Note:  Coupling mechanisms include inductive, 
			capacitive and breakdown.  Refer to IEEE 1100-1999, 
			Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding 
			Sensitive Electronic Equipment [Emerald Book] for location, 
			sizing requirements and installation details).  

		(3)	Surge suppression devices should be located as close as 
			reasonably achievable to the panel.  For new structures, the 
			panel shall be located as close as reasonably achievable to the 
			area being protected.  

2.4.5	Sideflash (Arcing) Protection

	a.	Sideflash is an electrical spark caused by differences of potential that 
		occurs between conductive metal bodies or between conductive metal 
		bodies and a component of the LPS or earth electrode system.  
		Sideflash presents direct and indirect hazards to explosives and 
		hazardous environments.  The direct hazard is the electrical energy 
		transferred from the structure or its LPS to the explosives.  Indirect 
		hazards are the heat and the electromagnetic fields generated by the 
		electrical energy.  The heat can cause concrete to spall or ignition of 
		combustible materials.  Electromagnetic fields could induce electrical 
		currents on or in the explosives.  To prevent unintentional initiation 
		of explosives by either the direct or the indirect effects of sideflash, 
		protection should be provided explosives unless analysis of 
		operations shows otherwise.  Separating the explosives from the LPS, 
		or the walls and conductive penetrations of the structures provides 
		protection against consequences of sideflash.  Appropriate separation 
		(standoff) distances shall be determined and applied for each 
		structure by Facility Management based on the following:  

		(1)	NFPA 780 shall be used to determine sideflash protection for 
			all structures other than those with a Faraday-like shield LPS.  

		(2)	For Faraday-like shield structures, in general, explosives and 
			dunnage should be in contact with no more than one interior 
			surface, and shall not be closer than the distance calculated 
			using transfer impedance analysis and a safety factor of two 
			from any other interior surface.  This contact surface is 
			normally the floor, shelf, or workbench. 

		(3)	Sideflash separation distance shall be applied as given below:  

			(a)	All sideflash separation distances shall be measured 
				from the outermost surface of the container, packing, 
				device or equipment holding the explosive that is 
				nearest the structural surface, penetration, or 
				penetration extension in question.  Measure from the 
				surface of the explosive itself only when the explosive is 
				bare.

			(b)	When sideflash separation distance from structural 
				elements and penetrations is maintained, wooden 
				boxes, fiberboard drums, and metal outer containers 
				provide adequate protection from effects of lightning 
				current flow.  Sideflash separation distances do not 
				apply to separation between containers of explosives.  
				Containers are authorized to be in direct contact with 
				each other.  

3.0	INSPECTION AND TESTING OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS

3.1	Initial Installation or Approval

3.1.1	Structures with Catenary, Integral, or Mast lightning Protection Systems. 
 
	a.	Structures shall be inspected to determine that:  

		(1)	The LPS complies with the current requirements of NFPA 780 
			Chapter 3, Chapter 6, Appendix B, and Appendix K.  

		(2)	All required bonds are in place and secure.  

		(3)	Surge suppression devices are installed and functional, as required 
			in section 2.4.4 of this chapter.  

	b.	The resistance of each required bond and the earth electrode system shall 
		be tested to ensure that they meet the requirements of section 3.3.1 of this 
		chapter.  

3.1.2	Structures with Faraday-like Shield Lightning Protection System

	a.	Proper bonding or electrical continuity of the structure’s walls, ceiling and 
		floor shall be validated by measuring the transfer impedance versus the 
		frequency using an appropriate test instrument approved per section 3.3.4 
		of this chapter.  

	b.	Proper bonding of all conductive penetrations as required in section 2.4.3 
		of this chapter shall be validated through inspection of building 
		documentation and specifications, inspection of the facility, and by the use 
		of resistance readings, as specified in section 3.3.2 of this chapter, or other 
		instrument approved by a competent expert and the Authority Having 
		Jurisdiction.  

	c.	Protection of all AC power lines, communication, and data lines that 
		penetrate the structure by surge suppressors, as required in section 2.4.4 of 
		this chapter, shall be validated by review of the building documentation 
		and specifications and by inspection of the lines.  

3.2	Periodic Inspections and Testing

3.2.1	Structures with Catenary, Integral, or Mast Lightning Protection Systems

	a.	Elements of the lightning protection system shall be visually inspected as 
		specified in NFPA 780 Appendix B and K.  The visual inspection of 
		lightning protection systems should be conducted every seven months and 
		shall be conducted at least annually.  Any evidence of corrosion, broken 
		wires or connections, or any other problem that would negate the system’s 
		usefulness will be noted and repaired.  

	b.	A visual inspection shall be performed of applicable surge suppression 
		devices and other LPS components after all lightning flash events where 
		there are visible indications on the structure of a lightning strike and any 
		time there is modification, maintenance or repair to the structure, or 
		penetration that could affect the SSD or LPS component.  

	c.	Resistance-to-earth testing of the earth electrode ground system should be 
		conducted every 14 months and shall be conducted at least every 
		47 months to afford testing during all seasons.  It shall also be tested any 
		time major modification, maintenance, or repair to the structure, or LPS 
		components require the bond or connection to be broken.  Tests shall be 
		performed as specified below and in section 3.3.1 of this chapter in 
		accordance with Facility Management developed procedures. 
 
	d.	Electrical resistance measurements of visible external bonds shall be 
		taken, as a minimum, every 14 months and shall be taken at least every 
		47 months to afford testing during all seasons.  Visible internal bonds shall 
		be tested at least every five years.  Such measurements are also required 
		when there are visible indications on the structure that an act of nature 
		such as an earthquake, tornado, flood, etc. or other act could have affected 
		the integrity of the bonds; and any time modification, maintenance, or 
		repair to the structure, penetration or LPS components require the bond or 
		connection to be broken.  

3.2.2	Structures with Faraday Cage or Faraday-like Shield Lightning Protection 
	System

	a.	Bonds (where feasible) and surge suppressors shall be visually inspected 
		as a minimum every two years to validate the installation and 
		serviceability. 
 
	b.	A visual inspection shall be performed of applicable surge suppression 
		devices and other LPS components after all lightning flash events where 
		there are visible indications on the structure of a lightning strike and any 
		time there is modification, maintenance, or repair to the structure, or 
		penetration that could affect the SSD or LPS component.  

	c.	Electrical resistance measurements of visible bonds shall be taken, as a 
		minimum, once every five years.  Such measurements are also required 
		when there are visible indications on the structure that a act of nature such 
		as an earthquake, tornado, flood, etc. or other act could have affected the 
		integrity of the bonds; and any time modification, maintenance, or repair 
		to the structure, penetration or LPS components require the bond or 
		connection to be broken.  

	d.	Transfer impedance measurements, as determined by Facility 
		Management, shall be taken, as a minimum, once every fifteen years.  
		Such measurements are also required when there are visible indications on 
		the structure that an act of nature such as an earthquake, tornado, flood, 
		etc. or other act could affect the integrity of the internal structure bonds; 
		and any time there is major modification, maintenance, or repair to the 
		structure.
  
3.3	Acceptable Electrical Test Measurements

3.3.1	Structures with Catenary, Integral, or Mast NFPA 780 Lightning Protection 
	Systems

	a.	Required earth electrode ground resistance-to-earth readings shall be 
		25 ohms or less.  Corrective action shall be initiated when the threshold 
		resistance (25 ohms.) is exceeded unless it is not feasible to meet the 
		threshold resistance criterion.  In that case, Facility Management is 
		authorized to establish alternative resistance standards without waiver or 
		exemption.  However, before taking this option reasonable means to 
		improve the grounding system must be considered.  Alternative standards 
		must include determination of a baseline system resistance and a testing 
		methodology with criteria to determine system serviceability.  Testing 
		shall be conducted only with instruments designed specifically for 
		resistance-to-earth testing.  

	b.	The resistance of required bonds shall not exceed 1 ohm.  Larger readings 
		require tightening or resecuring the bonds.  

3.3.2	Structures with Faraday Cage/Faraday-like Shield Lightning Protection System

	a.	The bond resistance should be less than 1.00 ohm.  Although a resistance 
		of 1.00-ohm or lower is preferred, a 1.5-ohm resistance is acceptable 
		where necessary for joining of existing structural elements by rebar 
		bonding.  Larger readings require tightening or resecuring the bonds.  

3.3.3	Test Instruments

	a.	Resistance measurement instruments shall be capable of measuring within 
		plus or minus 10 percent of the required reading.  

3.3.4	Alternative Testing

	a.	In lieu of taking resistance readings, other instruments capable of showing 
		the continuity of the bond are authorized for use when approved by a 
		competent expert and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.  The providers of 
		the equipment used must demonstrate the explosives and electro-magnetic 
		radiation (EMR) safety of the instruments and equipment.  The minimum 
		safe separation distance from all explosives and the test equipment during 
		testing also must be provided.  The scientific principles of the 
		measurement, the accuracy of the particular instrumentation system, and 
		mathematical algorithms employed must be peer reviewed by an 
		independent and dispassionate group of technical experts.  The instrument 
		must show that as a minimum, the bond drains 75 percent of the induced 
		current flow.  Complete test plans and procedures must be formulated.  

3.4	Procedures

	a.	Facility Management and the Authority Having Jurisdiction must approve all 
		testing procedures. 
 
3.5	Documentation and Trend Analysis

	a.	A record of all resistance or transfer impedance measurements at all required 
		points and of visual inspections should be maintained for the life of the facility 
		and shall be maintained for at least six inspection and testing cycles.  In addition, 
		those records specified in NFPA 780 Appendix B shall be maintained for an 
		equivalent time.  The records shall be reviewed for trend analysis.  A diagram of 
		the structure or room showing all points requiring measurements or visual 
		inspection and location of surge suppressors should be prepared.  

	b.	Trend analysis shall be conducted on resistance-to-earth test results to identify 
		significant increases in the resistance of the LPS.  Corrective action shall be 
		initiated before the threshold resistance is exceeded unless it is not feasible to 
		meet the threshold resistance criterion.  However, trend analysis shall continue 
		and all reasonable measures shall be implemented and documented to maintain 
		the lowest possible resistance.  

3.6	Training

	a.	Personnel responsible for maintenance, inspection, and testing of lightning 
		protection systems must be knowledgeable of and properly trained in the 
		fundamentals described in NFPA 780 and this Manual.  

4.0	LIGHTNING PROTECTION EXCEPTIONS

	a.	The requirements of sections 2.0 and 3.0 for lightning protection systems do not 
		apply in the following cases.  Neither a waiver nor an exemption is required:  

		(1)	A documented analysis approved by Facility Management and the 
			Authority Having Jurisdiction demonstrates that the cumulative annual 
			risk of a lightning strike to the structure in question or to any of the 
			metallic penetrations of that structure is low.  

		(2)	Explosives operations served by a local lightning warning system (LWS) 
			where
 
			(a)	Facility Management is willing to accept, in the event lightning 
				does strike the unprotected structure or the structure’s 
				penetrations, the potential injuries, the damage, the loss of use of 
				the structure, and the impact on other explosives operations at 
				the Facility; and

			(b)	Facility Management is willing to accept the impact of shutting 
				down all operations in other structures and the area within public 
				traffic route (remote) distance of the structure without an approved 
				LPS during a lightning threat; and

			(c)	The Facility has a local effective lightning warning system (LWS) 
				and lightning warning plan (LWP).  

		(3)	Totally, metal lined storage structures (such as magazettes) with metal 
			doors making metal-to-metal contact at least every linear foot and having 
			a metallic thickness of at least 3/16-in. (4.8-mm) steel or 9/32-in. (7-mm) 
			aluminum are the equivalent of a near perfect Faraday cage.  As such, they 
			are exempt from LPS requirements.  

		(4)	Facilities or operations where personnel are not expected to sustain injury 
			and the resulting economic loss of the structure, its contents or 
			surrounding structures is acceptable to Facility Management.  

5.0	LIGHTNING THREAT DETECTION

	a.	Facility Management shall ensure that a plan is established for (1) detecting when 
		lightning is in the near vicinity and when there is a potential for lightning and 
		(2) to notify appropriate personnel of these conditions.  Lightning Threat 
		Detection Systems (LTDS) are generally of three types—those that detect the 
		electrical gradient buildup, those that detect actual cloud to cloud or cloud to 
		ground electrical discharges, and an independent weather monitoring service, 
		such as the National Lightning Detection Network (NLDN) or NEXRAD Radar, 
		that notifies the Facility when lightning is in the vicinity.  The use of two or more 
		systems provides more reliable detection of lightning threats and is recommended.  
		A LTDS should be in use and serviceable when Facility Management chooses to 
		evacuate explosives areas.  

	b.	Facility Management shall establish a plan for maintenance and testing of the 
		LTDS.  This plan should incorporate the manufacturer’s recommendations and 
		should include, where applicable:
 
		(1)	Cross checking the cloud to ground detector with the National Lightning 
			Detection Network or a similar weather information source.  

		(2)	Calibration of electric field monitors.  

6.0	LIGHTNING THREAT ACTIONS

	a.	Facility Management shall evaluate their explosives operations to determine 
		the time required (1) to safely shut down explosive operations where required, 
		or (2) to evacuate personnel from the areas specified in section 6.0d below to 
		safe locations, or (3) to relocate explosives to a safe sideflash separation 
		(standoff) distance.  These times and local storm movement and tracking 
		history are fundamental to establishing the minimum lightning detection 
		bounding limits and the respective threat levels.  The use of two threat levels 
		allows initiation of a lightning threat alert (LTA) or similar threat identifier 
		when lightning or a potential for lightning is detected within the lower threat 
		level.  When lightning or a potential for lightning is detected within the higher 
		level threat parameters, a lightning threat warning (LTW) or similar threat 
		identifier can be initiated.  

	b.	When operations are required to continue in buildings without a LPS during a 
		lightning threat, before the start of further operations, explosives should be moved 
		and kept at least a distance established by Facility Management following review 
		by a competent expert from the walls, ceiling and penetrations of the structure.  
		(See UL 96A.)

	c.	Facility Management shall determine in advance of any lightning threat those 
		activities that shall be terminated and at what threat level the termination for each 
		identified activity shall begin.  

		(1)	For an LTA, Facility Management shall evaluate terminating the following 
			activities:  

			(a)	Activities involving AC powered electrical equipment in direct or 
				indirect contact with explosives regardless of the form of LPS 
				installed.  

			(b)	Explosives operations in an unprotected building or outside (some 
				activities may be safer to proceed to a planned detonation or to a 
				safe mode for the explosive).  

			(c)	Work with exposed electrostatic discharge sensitive (0.1 joule or 
				less) EEDs in structures not equipped with a Faraday-like shield 
				LPS.  

			(d)	Explosives work in structures not equipped with a Faraday-like 
				shield LPS and where any explosives are at a sideflash separation 
				(standoff) distance less than that specified above or by NFPA 780.  

		(2)	For an LTW, Facility Management shall evaluate stopping the following 
			activities in addition to those specified in Chapter X, section 6.0c(1).  

			(a)	Activities involving AC powered electrical equipment in direct or 
				indirect contact with explosives regardless of the form of LPS 
				installed.  

			(b)	Outside activities involving explosives.  

			(c)	Activities within “magazine areas” (area dedicated solely to 
				magazines).  See Chapter II, section 17.2o for other requirements.  

			(d)	Activities where extensions of penetrations, bonded or not, are in 
				direct or indirect contact with the explosives.  

			(e)	Positions of hoists, without non-conductive links, and other 
				movable conductive projections into a facility that can be moved or 
				retracted to a maximum distance from explosives or explosive 
				devices.  

			(f)	Explosives operations in structure not equipped with a LPS.  

			(g)	Positions of hoists, without non-conductive links, and other 
				movable conductive projections into a facility that can be moved or 
				retracted to a maximum distance from explosives or explosive 
				devices.  

	d.	Facility Management shall determine in advance of any lightning threat those 
		structures and areas that must be evacuated and at what threat level the evacuation 
		should begin.  Facility Management should evaluate evacuating the following 
		areas as a minimum:  

		(1)	Explosives structures without a LPS.  

		(2)	Magazine areas.  

		(3)	Structures not equipped with a Faraday-like shield LPSs and containing 
			exposed electrostatic discharge sensitive (0.1 joule or less) EEDs.  

		(4)	Structures not equipped with a Faraday-like shield LPS and containing 
			exposed electrostatic discharge sensitive (0.1 joule or less) explosives.  
		(5)	Parked explosives laden vehicles and rail cars. 
 
		(6)	All buildings and areas within public traffic route distance (based on a 
			2.3 psi and the applicable fragment distance as given in DoD 6055.9-STD) 
			of an explosive structure not equipped with a LPS.  

	e.	When Facility Management determines that evacuation of personnel from and 
		around explosives structures is required, the following shall apply:  

		(1)	DOE, NNSA, and DOE/NNSA contractor/subcontractor personnel in the 
			identified buildings and areas shall be evacuated to at least public traffic 
			route distance.  

		(2)	Non-DOE and Non-NNSA contractor/subcontractor personnel shall 
			evacuate to Inhabited Building distance.  

		(3)	The evacuation distances shall be based on the maximum operating 
			quantities and Class/Division of explosives approved for the structure and 
			on applicable psi and fragment distances as given in DoD 6055.9-STD.  

		(4)	In lieu of evacuation, DOE, NNSA, DOE/NNSA contractor/subcontractor, 
			and non-DOE/NNSA contractor personnel are authorized to take shelter in 
			a room or building that provides protection from overpressures in excess 
			of 15.8 kPa (2.3 psi), fragments, and structural collapse in event of an 
			explosion of any adjacent structure containing explosives and not 
			equipped with a LPS.  

		(5)	During evacuation periods, personnel are allowed, at Facility 
			Management’s discretion, to pass within the specified distance of 
			explosives structures not equipped with a LPS if required for evacuation 
			or to gain access to or leave other operating areas.  

7.0	SHUTDOWN OF OPERATIONS

	a.	When operations must be terminated during electrical storms, the following 
		should apply:  

		(1)	Process equipment containing explosives should be stopped as soon as 
			safety permits.  

		(2)	If a building or bay must be evacuated, the minimum number of personnel 
			needed to safely shut down operations that cannot be shut down 
			immediately is authorized to remain at the building.  As soon as shutdown 
			is completed, they shall evacuate.  

		(3)	Explosives testing can continue as long as personnel are not required to 
			leave the test shelter.  

8.0	LIGHTNING WARNING AND PROTECTION PLAN

	a.	Facility Management shall develop and implement a Lightning Warning and 
		Protection Plan (LWPP).  Based on the above requirements of this chapter, the 
		LWPP shall address as a minimum:  

8.1	Evaluation of Lightning Risk

	a.	A uniform site wide methodology should be applied to all the Facility’s structures 
		being evaluated to determine if lightning protection is required for a specific 
		structure.  

	b.	The level of risk that Facility Management is willing to accept for a structure not 
		to have lightning protection.  A uniform site wide risk criteria should be applied 
		to all the facility’s structures.  

8.2	Lightning Protection System Installation

	a.	Identification of the Facility’s site wide competent expert and reviewer on 
		lightning protection systems design, installation, and testing.  

	b.	Acceptable lightning protection systems.  

	c.	Facility’s policy on the installation, retention, and maintenance of air terminals 
		and wire down conductors when the Faraday-like style of lightning protection 
		system is installed.  

	d.	Techniques and procedures for initial installation of each approved lightning 
		protection system.  These, as a minimum, shall include specifications on 
		bonding, surge suppression, separation between bonds and type of conductors, 
		etc.  

	e.	Techniques and procedures for retrofitting structures to a Faraday-like cage form 
		of lightning protection, if a decision is made to retrofit the structure.  

8.3	LPS Inspection and Maintenance

	a.	Procedures for inspecting and validating that installed lightning protection 
		meets the requirements of this Manual and the LWPP.  This area shall include 
		acceptable test instruments, calibration requirements, and acceptable 
		measurement readings.  

	b.	Required visual inspection, electrical testing, and transfer impedance testing and 
		their frequency for the elements of the lightning protection system.
 
	c.	Procedures for documenting and maintaining documentation of required visual 
		inspection, electrical testing, and transfer impedance testing of all elements of 
		the lightning protection system.  

	d.	Required training and qualification of personnel maintaining, inspecting, and 
		testing the lightning protection systems.  

8.4	Sideflash Separation (Standoff) Distances

	a.	Acceptable sideflash separation (standoff) distances for each explosives 
		structure.  

	b.	Methodology for calculating the distances.  

8.5	Lightning Threat

	a.	Levels of threat.  

	b.	Bounding criteria for each threat level, (including safe shutdown, most 
		attainable safe mode of explosive, and evacuation time).  

	c.	Responsibilities for calling a threat.  

	d.	Actions required at each level of threat.  

	e.	Methods of notification of personnel to include those non-related personnel that 
		might be within Inhabited Building Distance of an explosives facility. 
 
	f.	Operations to be shut down during each level of the alert. 
 
	g.	Areas to be evacuated.  

	h.	Identification of safe or sheltered areas.  

	i.	Actions taken by personnel transporting explosives on site.  

	j.	Identification of safe parking areas for vehicles transporting explosives on site.  
	k.	When, by whom, how threat is canceled and resumption of activities.
  
	l.	Methods and requirements for testing and evaluating lightning detection 
		equipment.  

	m.	Required training of personnel maintaining, inspecting, and testing the 
		lightning detection systems.  

	n.	Required training of personnel making decisions regarding lightning threat 
		alerts.  

9.0	REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

	a.	The following documents set forth some of the non-DOE procedures to be used in 
		implementing the requirements and recommendations of this chapter.  

		(1)	IEEE 80, Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding.  

		(2)	IEEE 1100, Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding 
			Sensitive Electronic Equipment.  

		(3)	Lightning Protection System Electrical Characterization Results for 
			Pantex Cell 12-44.1, Kimball Merewether, Paris Holmes, James Selberg, 
			Sandia Technical Memorandum, Sandia National Laboratories, 
			Albuquerque, New Mexico, February, 2002.  

		(4)	Lightning Protection System for HE Facilities at LLNL – Certification 
			Template Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, Todd J, Clancy, 
			Mike M. Ong, Charlie G. Brown, Livermore, CA., December 2005.  

		(5)	Maximum Lightning Induced Voltages and Recommended Isolation 
			Distances in Nuclear Explosive Areas at Pantex, Kimball Merewether, 
			Sandia National Laboratories, Albuquerque, New Mexico, December, 
			1997.  

		(6)	Measured Response of Explosive Storage Structures M38, M41, 832B and 
			832D at Lawrence Livermore National Laboratories Site 300 to Direct 
			Flash Attachment of Lightning, Dr. Marvin E. Morris, September 22, 
			1998.  

		(7)	MIL-HDBK-419A, Grounding, Bonding, and Shielding for Electronic 
			Equipment and Facilities, Volumes 1 and 2, US Department of Defense.  
		(8)	NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.  

		(9)	NFPA 780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.  

		(10)	Pantex Lightning Protection Project Team Final Report, Scruggs, 
			Merewether, Ong, Yactor et al, Pantex Plant, Amarillo, Texas, April, 
			1999.  

		(11)	Rocket-Triggered Lightning Studies for the Protection of Critical Assets; 
			Marvin E. Morris, Richard J. Fisher, George H Schnetzer, Kimball O. 
			Merewether, and Roy E. Jorgenson; IEEE Transactions On Industry 
			Applications, Vol. 30, No. 3, May-June 1994.  

		(12)	RPT-MIS-273038, Pantex Lightning Protection Project Team Final 
			Report, Revision 1, April 1999.  

		(13)	UFC 3-570-01, Unified Facilities Criteria, Static and Lightning Protection 
			Systems.  
		(14)	UL 96, Standard for Safety, Lightning Protection Components.  

		(15)	UL 96A, Standard for Safety for Installation Requirements for Lightning 
			Protection Systems.  

APPENDIX A—REFERENCES

American Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists (ACHIH), ACHIH Ventilation 
Manual.  

American National Standards Institute (ANSI), National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI C2.  

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D-2240-86, Standard Method for Rubber 
Property—Durometer Hardness.  

Defense Logistics Agency, Industrial Engineering Study to Establish Safety Design Criteria for 
Use in Engineering of Explosives Facilities and Operations, AD, 411445, Process Engineering 
Branch, APMED Picatinny Arsenal, Dover, NJ; Defense Technical Information Center, Defense 
Logistics Agency, Cameron Station, Alexandria, VA 22314.  

Defense Logistics Agency, The Air Force Manual for Design and Analysis of Hardened 
Structures, AFWL-TR-74-102, Air Force Weapons Laboratory, Air Force Systems Command, 
Kirtland Air Force Base, NM 87117; ADB004152, Defense Technical Information Center, 
Defense Logistics Agency, Cameron Station, Alexandria, VA 22314.  

Departments of the Army, the Navy, and the Air Force; Structures to Resist the Effects of 
Accidental Explosions; TM 5-1300, NAVFAC P-397, AFM 88-22; Chairman, Department of 
Defense Explosives Safety Board, 2461 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22331.  

Departments of the Army, the Navy, the Air Force, and the Defense Logistics Agency, 
Department of Defense Ammunition and Explosives Hazard Classification 
Procedures, TB 700-2.  

Department of Commerce, IHE Material Qualification Tests, Description, and Criteria, Rev. 1, 
July 1985, National Technical Information Service, U.S. Department of Commerce, 5285 Port 
Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.  

Department of Defense (DoD) Department of Defense Ammunition and Explosives Safety 
Standards, DoD 6055.9-STD, Assistant Secretary of Defense.  (Force Management and 
Personnel), Chairman, Department of Defense Explosives Safety Board, 2461 Eisenhower 
Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22331.  

Department of Energy (DOE), DOE Hoisting and Rigging Standard, DOE-STD-1090 (current 
version).  

DOE, A Manual for the Prediction of Blast and Fragment Loading of Structures, 
DOE/TIC-11268, U.S. Department of Energy, Albuquerque Operations, Amarillo Area Office, 
Facilities and Maintenance Branch, P.O. Box 30030, Amarillo, TX 79120.  

DOE, Nuclear Safety Criteria (for Warhead Storage), DOE-DNA TP-20-7, Classified.  

Keenan, W.A. and J.E. Tancreto, Blast Environment from Fully and Partially Vented Explosions 
in Cubicles, TR-828, Civil Engineering Laboratory, Naval Construction Battalion Center, Port 
Hueneme, CA 93043.  

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 
(1000 Volts Maximum), NEMA Publication No. 250-1979, 2101 L Street N.W., Washington, 
D.C. 20037.  

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals, 
NFPA 45.  

NFPA, National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, ANSI C1.  

NFPA, Life Safety Code, NFPA 101.  

NFPA, Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, NFPA 496.  

NFPA, Powered Industrial Trucks, NFPA 505.  

NFPA, Identification of the Fire Hazards of Materials, NFPA 704.  

NFPA, Lightning Protection Code, NFPA 780.  

Title 49 CFR, Parts 171-177, Transportation, Hazardous Materials Regulations, and Parts 
300-399 (for Driver Selection and Training).  

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Suppressive Shields, Structural Design and Analysis Handbook, 
HNDM-1110-1-2, U.S. Army Corps of Engineering, Huntsville Division, HNDED-CS, P.O. Box 
1600, Huntsville, AL 35807.  

APPENDIX B—INDEX
		Available and usable in the PDF file


DOE ORGANIZATIONS TO WHICH DOE M 440.1-1A IS APPLICABLE

Office of Environment, Safety and Health
Office of Environmental Management
Office of Security and Safety Performance Assurance
National Nuclear Security Administration
Office of Nuclear Energy, Science and Technology
Office of Science
Office of Security

DOE ORGANIZATIONS TO WHICH DOE M 440.1-1A IS NOT APPLICABLE

Office of the Secretary
Chief Information Officer
Office of Civilian Radioactive Waste Management 
Office of Congressional and Intergovernmental Affairs
Office of Counterintelligence
Departmental Representative to the Defense Nuclear Facilities Safety Board
Office of Economic Impact and Diversity
Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy 
Energy Information Administration
Office of Fossil Energy 
Office of General Counsel
Office of Hearings and Appeals
Office of the Inspector General
Office of Intelligence
Office of Management, Budget and Evaluation and Chief Financial Officer
Office of Policy and International Affairs
Office of Public Affairs
Secretary of Energy Advisory Board
Office of Worker and Community Transition
Office of Energy Assurance
Bonneville Power Administration
Southeastern Power Administration
Southwestern Power Administration
Western Area Power Administration

		CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS DOCUMENT
	DOE M 440.1.1A, DOE EXPLOSIVES SAFETY MANUAL

Regardless of the performer of the work, contractors with the CRD incorporated into their 
contracts are responsible for compliance with the requirements of the CRD.  Affected 
contractors also are responsible for flowing down the requirements of the CRD to 
subcontracts at any tier to the extent necessary and sufficient to ensure the contractor’s 
compliance with the requirements.  

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Available in the PDF file


ACRONYMS

ACGIH	American Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists
AHJ	Authority Having Jurisdiction
ASTM	American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTI	American National Standards Institute
BOE	Bureau of Explosives
DBA	Design Basis Accident
DDESB	Department of Defense Explosives Safety Board
DoD	Department of Defense
DOE	Department of Energy
DOT	Department of Transportation
DSC	Differential Scanning Calorimetry
DTA	Differential Thermal Analysis
EBW	Exploding Bridge Wire
EDC	Explosives Development Committee
EED	Electroexplosive Device
EIDS	Extremely Insensitive Detonating Substance
EOD	Explosive Ordnance Disposal
FMECA	Failure Modes, Effects, and Criticality Analysis
HAZOP	Hazard and Operability Study
HE	High Explosive
HMX	Cyclotetramethylene Tetranitramine
IHE	Insensitive High Explosive
LEL	Lower Explosive Limit
LFL	Lower Flammable Limit
LPS	Lightning Protection System
MCE	Maximum Credible Event
MSDS	Material Safety Data Sheet
NE	Nuclear Explosive
NEC	National Electric Code
NEO	Nuclear Explosive Operation
NEW	Net Explosive Weight
NEQ	Net Explosive Quantity
NFPA	National Fire Protection Association
NNSA	National Nuclear Security Administration
OSHA	Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PBX	Plastic Bonded Explosive
PEL	Permissible Explosive Limit
PETN	Pentaerythritol Tetranitrate
RDX	Cyclotrimethylene Trinitramine
SOP	Standard Operating Procedure
SPMS	Safety Performance Measurement System
SSR	Safe Secure Railcar
SST	Safe Secure Trailer
TATB	Triamino Trinitrobenzene
TMAC	Toxic Materials Advisory Committee
TNT	Trinitrotoluene
UL	Underwriters Laboratory
UN	United Nations
UXO	Unexploded Ordnance


       				  CHAPTER I—INTRODUCTION

1.0	SCOPE, PURPOSE, AND JUSTIFICATION

	a.	This Manual prescribes the Department of Energy (DOE) safety standards and 
		procedures used to implement the DOE safety policy contained in 
		DOE O 440.1A, Worker Protection Management for DOE Federal and 
		Contractor Employees (current version) for operations involving explosives, 
		pyrotechnics, and propellants, or assemblies containing these materials.  

	b.	DOE explosives handling and processing operations are an integral part of DOE 
		weapons and weapons-related development, manufacturing, and dismantlement 
		activities.  Safety in all operations associated with weapons development is an 
		ongoing, prime concern and must continually be given high priority in all 
		program direction and management.  This Manual provides uniform guidance for 
		all DOE and National Nuclear Security Administration (NNSA) facilities and 
		installations involved in explosives handling or processing.  DOE will update the 
		Manual periodically to incorporate lessons learned, new technology, and 
		suggestions for improvements.  The Assistant Secretary for Environment, Safety 
		and Health is responsible for this task.  

	c.	Maintaining explosives safety in all operations within DOE is an ongoing process 
		that, to be truly effective, must be given high priority in all program direction, 
		management, and line activities.  Due to the unique nature of DOE’s active role in 
		research and development in new explosives formulations, explosives synthesis, 
		charge geometry, and explosives assemblies, as well as the proximity of 
		explosives to weapon components, it is necessary to maintain the level of 
		explosives safety standards commensurate with the risks.  

	d.	This Manual establishes safety controls and standards not addressed in other 
		existing DOE or non-DOE regulations to close the considerable safety gap created 
		by DOE’s unique activities to govern the DOE explosives safety process and 
		ensure that explosives safety is commensurate with the actual risk.  However, the 
		Department of Defense (DoD), Occupational Safety and Health Administration 
		(OSHA), and other nationally recognized standards, such as the National Fire 
		Protection Association (NFPA) codes, provide the basic framework.  Specific 
		requirements from these documents are applicable and pertinent as determined by 
		the “Authority Having Jurisdiction.”  Since the conception of the first DOE 
		Explosives Safety Manual in 1978, and the formation of the expert DOE 
		Explosives Safety Committee, no explosives-related fatalities have occurred in 
		DOE and explosives safety practices have significantly improved.  Continued 
		maintenance of this Manual, combined with field adherence, will maintain the 
		high level of explosives safety evidenced within DOE over the past two decades.  

2.0	APPLICABILITY

	a.	This Manual applies to all DOE facilities engaged in developing, manufacturing, 
		handling, storing, transporting, processing, or testing explosives, pyrotechnics, 
		and propellants, or assemblies containing these materials, and to the safe 
		management of such operations.  With the exception of explosives storage and 
		transportation, this Manual does not apply to commercial activities such as routine 
		construction or routine tunnel blasting.  

	b.	The design of all new explosives facilities shall conform to the requirements 
		established in this Manual and implemented in the current version of 
		DOE O 420.1B, Facility Safety.  It is not intended that existing physical facilities 
		be changed arbitrarily to comply with these provisions, except as required by law.  
		Existing facilities that do not comply with these standards may continue to be 
		used for the balance of their functional lives if the following two conditions are 
		met:  

		(1)	The current operation presents no significantly greater risk than that 
			assumed when the facility was originally designed.  

		(2)	It can be demonstrated clearly that a modification to bring the facility into 
			compliance is not feasible.  

	c.	However, in the case of a major renovation, the facility must be brought into 
		compliance with current standards.  

	d.	The requirements are presented as either mandatory or advisory.  Mandatory 
		requirements, denoted by the words “shall,” “must,” or “will,” must be followed 
		unless the DOE Operations Officer or NNSA Site Manager grants an exemption.  
		Advisory requirements denoted by “should” or “may,” may be deviated from with 
		a written waiver granted by facility management.  

3.0	EXEMPTIONS

	a.	An exemption is a written release from a mandatory safety requirement.  
		Competent, knowledgeable, and experienced explosives safety engineers shall 
		review all exemption requests.  Approved exemption requests should feature 
		methodologies to mitigate to the highest practical level the additional safety risks 
		through additional engineering or administrative controls.  

3.1	Each such request shall contain the following information:  

	a.	Description of the condition.  

	b.	Safety requirement necessitating deviation. 
 
	c.	Reason why compliance cannot be achieved. 

	d.	Steps taken to provide protection and to ameliorate the additional risk.  

	e.	Statement of whether equivalent safety is provided and, if not, assessment of the 
		residual risk.  
	f.	Any proposed corrective action and schedule.  

	g.	Duration of the exemption.  

3.2	Exemptions Achieving Equivalent Safety

	a.	The DOE Operations Officer or NNSA Site Manager is permitted to grant 
		exemptions from the mandatory requirements of this Manual provided 
		compliance is impracticable and the facility operator has demonstrated that the 
		conditions, practices, means, methods, or processes to be used are equivalent.  
		Requests for exemptions shall be submitted to the DOE Operations Officer or 
		NNSA Site Manager for action.  

3.3	Exemptions Not Achieving Equivalent Safety

	a.	The DOE Operations Officer or NNSA Site Manager shall submit to the Program 
		Secretarial Officer (PSO) all requests for exemptions from mandatory 
		requirements for which equivalent protection of operating personnel, the public, 
		and property cannot be achieved.  The PSO, with the advice and recommendation 
		from the Assistant Secretary for Environment, Safety and Health, shall make a 
		final determination on the request for exemption.  The DOE Operations Office or 
		NNSA Site Manager may grant a temporary exemption while the PSO is 
		processing an exemption request.  The temporary exemption is limited to the 
		shorter of 180 days from its granting or until the exemption is approved or denied.  
		Exemptions will be reviewed for applicability and currency at intervals not to 
		exceed 5 years.  

4.0	WAIVERS

	a.	If an activity, operation, or process is determined to be out of compliance with the 
		Manual’s advisory requirements, but the activity, operation, or process is 
		determined to be safe and necessary, facility management may grant written 
		approval in the form of a waiver for an alternate solution.  Waivers will be 
		granted for the minimum time necessary; ongoing waivers shall be updated every 
		three years.  Facility management shall maintain a central file of active waivers 
		and provide a copy of each waiver to the local DOE contracting officer.  

4.1	Each waiver shall contain, as a minimum, the following information:  

	a.	Description of the condition.  

	b.	Safety standard requiring alternate solution.  

	c.	Reason why compliance is not achieved.  

	d.	Steps taken to provide alternate protection.  

	e.	Any proposed corrective actions and schedule.  

	f.	Waiver duration or expiration date.  

5.0	MANUAL ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT

	a.	This Manual shall be kept current.  The Office of Facility Safety shall ensure that 
		this Manual is kept up-to-date and that the DOE Directives System maintains a 
		current version online at http://www.directives.doe.gov.  

	b.	The DOE Explosives Safety Committee, through the Office of Facility Safety, 
		shall administer and manage this Manual.  

5.1	DOE Explosives Safety Committee Organization

	a.	The DOE Explosives Safety Committee is composed of a member from each of 
		the following:  [The membership listing has been updated by the Chairman of the 
		DOE Explosives Safety Committee to reflect reorganizations in DOE/NNSA.  
		Current membership is available upon request from the site representative to the 
		Committee, or from the Committee Chairman].  

		(1)	DOE Office of Facility Safety

		(2)	NNSA Office of Military Application and Stockpile Support

		(3)	NNSA Service Center, Albuquerque

		(4)	NNSA Service Center

		(5)	NNSA Livermore Site Office

		(6)	NNSA Nevada Site Office

		(7)	NNSA Sandia Site Office

		(8)	NNSA Pantex Site Office

		(9)	DOE Idaho Field Office

		(10)	DOE Savannah River Office

		(11)	Los Alamos National Laboratory

		(12)	Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory

		(13)	Pantex Plant

		(14)	Kansas City Plant

		(15)	Idaho National Engineering and Environmental Laboratory

		(16)	Nevada Test Site

		(17)	Sandia National Laboratories

		(18)	Wackenhut Services, Savannah River Site

	b.	A representative of the DOE Office of Facility Safety shall chair the committee 
		and will report directly to the DOE Director, Office of Facility Safety.  

5.2	DOE Explosives Safety Committee Functions

	a.	The DOE Explosives Safety Committee shall perform the following 
		functions:  

		(1)	Review, evaluate, and act under authority delegated from the DOE 
			Director, Office of Facility Safety, on proposed changes or revisions to 
			this Manual.  

		(2)	Evaluate and respond to requests for interpretations of the Manual.  

		(3)	Meet periodically, as appropriate, to review and evaluate Manual 
			adequacy and existing exemptions, and to initiate Manual changes as 
			needed.  

	b.	The DOE Explosive Safety Committee (at the local level its individual voting 
		members) is (are) the “Authority Having Jurisdiction” over DOE explosives 
		safety matters.  

	c.	Changes to this Manual become effective once they have been approved by the 
		DOE Explosives Safety Committee and the approval is published in the official 
		minutes of committee meetings.  

6.0	DEFINITIONS

For purposes of this Manual, the following terms are defined.  

AIR TERMINAL.  (1) A component of a Lightning Protection System (LPS) designed to accept 
direct attachment of the lightning flash and transfer the current to the down conductor.  (See 
STRIKE TERMINATION DEVICE).  (2) A strike termination device that is a receptor for 
attachment of flashes to the LPS and is listed for the purpose.  

APPROVED.  Complying with the provision(s) of this Manual and with instructions and details 
issued by the authority having jurisdiction or with those of other approving agencies specified 
herein.  

ARM.  A general term that implies the energizing of electronic and electrical circuitry, which in 
turn controls power sources or other components used to initiate explosives.  The arming 
operation completes all steps preparatory to electrical initiation of explosives except the actual 
fire signal.  

BARRICADE.  An intervening approved barrier, natural or artificial, of such type, size, and 
construction as to limit in a prescribed manner the effect of an explosion on nearby buildings or 
personnel.  

BAY.  A location (e.g., room, cubicle, cell, or work area, etc.) containing a single type of 
explosives activity, which affords the required protection specified for appropriate hazard 
classification of the activity involved.  

BLENDING.  The mixing of solid materials (usually dry) by gravity flow, usually induced by 
vessel rotation.  

BOND.  An interconnection of metal objects, generally to the LPS.  (See BONDING).  

BONDED.  The joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path that will ensure 
electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed.  

BONDING.  (1) An electrical connection between a metal object and an LPS component.  This 
produces electrical continuity between the LPS and the object and minimizes electro-magnetic 
potential differences.  Bonding is done to prevent sideflash.  (2) An electrical connection 
between an electrically conductive object and an LPS component that is intended to significantly 
reduce potential differences created by lightning currents.  

BOOSTER.  Explosives used in an explosive train to amplify the shock output of the initiating 
device and cause detonation of the main explosive charge.  

CASUAL.  A person other than an operator who intermittently visits an explosives operation for 
the purpose of supervision, inspection, maintenance, etc.  Casuals do not perform hands-on work 
with explosives but are otherwise involved with the explosives operation being performed.  
Casuals are accounted for in the established personnel limits for the area and are provided a level 
of protection consistent with the explosion hazard of operations in adjacent areas.  

CATENARY SYSTEM.  An LPS consisting of overhead wire suspended from poles connected 
to a grounding system via down conductors.  Its purpose is to intercept lightning flashes from the 
protected area.  

CLEAR ZONE.  The required maximum quantity-distance for the protection of personnel and 
facilities from the Potential Explosion Site (PES).  

COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL.  Any material that, when ignited, will sustain burning.  

COMPATIBILITY.  The chemical property of materials to coexist without adverse reaction for 
an acceptable period of time.  Compatibility in storage exists when storing materials together 
does not increase the probability of an accident or, for a given quantity, the magnitude of the 
effects of such an accident.  Storage compatibility groups are assigned to provide for segregated 
storage.  

CONCURRENT OPERATIONS.  Operations performed simultaneously and in close enough 
proximity that an incident with one operation could adversely influence the other.  

CONDUCTOR.  Usually a cable intended to be used to carry lightning currents between strike 
termination devices and ground terminals.  The conductor also serves as a strike termination 
device for a catenary LPS.  Conductors are usually heavy metallic cables but metallic building 
structural members, (e.g., steel I-beams) can also function as down conductors.  

CONTACT OPERATIONS.  An operation in which an operator and an explosive item are both 
present with no operational shield.  

CONTROL POINT.  The location used for personnel control and operation coordination in an 
explosives operating or test area.  

CORING.  A machining operation that removes material in the form of a cylinder by cutting at 
the circumference to create a hole or recover the material from the center of the cut.  

COUNTERPOISE.  A type of an earth electrode system consisting of conductor cables buried 
around the structure to be protected.  Generally, a counterpoise will have more surface area 
contacting the earth than ground rod systems.  Commonly called a ground ring electrode.  (See 
EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM).  

CRITICAL TEMPERATURE.  Temperature above which the self-heating of an explosive causes 
a runaway reaction.  It is dependent on mass, geometry, and thermal boundary conditions.  

DANGER ZONE.  That area around a test site where personnel could be in physical jeopardy 
due to overpressure, fragments, or firebrands released during an explosive test.  

DEFLAGRATION.  A rapid chemical reaction in which the output of heat is sufficient to enable 
the reaction to proceed and be accelerated without input of heat from another source.  
Deflagration is a surface phenomenon with the reaction products flowing away from the 
unreacted material along the surface at subsonic velocity.  The effect of a true deflagration under 
confinement is an explosion.  Confinement of the reaction increases pressure, rate of reaction, 
and temperature and may cause transition into a detonation.  

DETONATION.  A violent chemical reaction within a chemical compound or mechanical 
mixture evolving heat and pressure.  A detonation is a reaction that proceeds through the reacted 
material toward the unreacted material at a supersonic velocity.  The result of the chemical 
reaction is exertion of extremely high pressure on the surrounding medium, forming a 
propagating shock wave that is originally of supersonic velocity.  When the material is located 
on or near the surface of the ground, a detonation is normally characterized by a crater.  

DIFFERENTIAL SCANNING CALORIMETRY (DSC).  A technique in which the difference in 
energy inputs into a substance and a reference material is measured as a function of temperature 
or time while the substance and the reference material are subjected to a controlled temperature 
program, or are held isothermally.  The record is the differential scanning calorimetry or DSC 
curve.  The energy input is substituted for ?T and is plotted in the same manner as a normal 
DTA curve.  

DIFFERENTIAL THERMAL ANALYSIS (DTA).  A technique in which the temperature 
difference between a substance and a reference material is measured as a function of temperature 
or time while the substance and the reference material are subjected to a controlled temperature 
program or are held isothermally.  The record is the DTA curve.  The energy input is substituted 
for ?T and is plotted in the same manner as a normal differential thermal analysis (DTA) curve.  

DIRECT CONTACT WITH EXPLOSIVES.  Physical contact between an electrical instrument 
or equipment to bare explosives, the metallic casing of an explosive, or the firing leads of an 
explosive device.  

DOWN CONDUCTOR.  A form of a main conductor designed to conduct the current of a 
lightning flash vertically down to the earth electrode system.  

DRYING.  The removal of volatiles from ingredients or mixtures.  

DSC.  See DIFFERENTIAL SCANNING CALORIMETRY.  

DTA.  See DIFFERENTIAL THERMAL ANALYSIS.  

EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM.  Sometimes called a ground terminal.  (1) A component of an 
LPS that transfers the current of a lightning flash to the earth.  The earth electrode system is 
connected to the down conductor and is in direct contact with the earth.  Examples of earth 
electrode systems include ground rods, a counterpoise, buried metal plates, Ufer grounds, or 
other similar devices.  The matrix of a Faraday-like shield acts as the earth (ground) electrode for 
an LPS.  (2) The portion of an LPS, such as a ground rod, ground plate, or ground conductor, that 
is installed to provide electrical contact with earth.  

EBW.  See EXPLODING BRIDGEWIRE.  

EED.  See ELECTROEXPLOSIVE DEVICE.  

ELECTRICAL BONDING.  Electrical connection between two conductive objects intended to 
prevent development of an electrical potential between them.  

ELECTROEXPLOSIVE DEVICE (EED).  An EED is a device containing some reaction 
mixture (explosive or pyrotechnic) that is electrically initiated.  The output of the initiation is 
heat, shock, or mechanical action.  See also LOW-ENERGY EED.  

EXPERIMENTAL OPERATING PROCEDURE.  A procedure prepared for conducting a 
specific experiment a limited number of times under close technical supervision.  

EXPLODING BRIDGEWIRE (EBW).  An EED that is initiated by the discharge of a high 
current through the device bridgewire, causing the wire to explode and produce a shockwave.  
An EBW as defined herein is a device containing no primary explosive.  

EXPLOSIVE.  Any chemical compound or mechanical mixture which is designed to function as 
an explosive, or chemical compound which functions through self-reaction as an explosive, and 
which, when subjected to heat, impact, friction, shock, or other suitable initiation stimulus, 
undergoes a very rapid chemical change with the evolution of large volumes of highly heated 
gases that exert pressures in the surrounding medium.  The term applies to materials that either 
detonate or deflagrate.  DOE explosives may be dyed various colors except pink, which is 
reserved for mock explosive.  

EXPLOSIVE DECONTAMINATION.  The removal of hazardous explosive material.  

EXPLOSIVES FACILITY.  A structure or defined area used for explosives storage or 
operations.  Excluded are explosives presenting only localized, minimal hazards as determined 
by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.  Examples of excluded items may include user quantities 
of small arms ammunition, commercial distress signals, or cartridges for cartridge actuated tools, 
etc.  

EXTRUDING.  Forcing a plastic-type material, under pressure, into a confined space or through 
a confined opening to produce a desired configuration.  

FACILITY.  A group of buildings or equipment used for explosive operations at one geographic 
location, generally owned by DOE.  

FACILITY MANAGEMENT.  Management staff of the facility operator (the contractor).  

FACILITY OPERATOR.  The organization having responsibility for conducting operations at a 
DOE facility.  

FARADAY CAGE or FARADAY-LIKE SHIELD.  An LPS where the area to be protected is 
enclosed by a heavy metal screen (like a birdcage) or continuous metallic structure with no 
unbonded metallic penetrations.  On such a system, the lightning current flows on the exterior of 
the structure, not through the interior.  

FIREBRAND.  A projected burning or hot fragment whose thermal energy is transferred to a 
receptor.  

FIRING PAD.  The prepared site where explosive items are fired for test data acquisition.  

FIRING SITE.  Controlled access area where test firing of explosives is conducted.  

FLAMMABLE LIQUID.  Any liquid having a flash point below 60°C and a vapor pressure not 
exceeding 280 kPa (41 psia) at 37.8°C.  This is the definition as applied in this Manual; it 
includes some materials defined as combustible liquids by the Department of Transportation 
(DOT) and/or NFPA 70, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.  

FLASH.  The total lightning event.  A flash may involve several lightning strokes, generally 
using the same path through the air as the initial event.  

FLASH POINT.  The temperature at which a liquid or volatile solid gives off a vapor sufficient 
to form an ignitable mixture with air near the surface of the material or within the test vessel.  

FORMULATION.  (1) The operation of combining ingredients to produce a mixture of a final 
desired composition possessing specific physical and explosive properties.  (2) An explosives 
composition.  

GROUND RESISTANCE.  The value (in ohms) of the resistance between an earth electrode 
system and earth.  

GROUND RING ELECTRODE (GRE).  An earth electrode system that encircles the structure, 
either on or buried in the earth.  (See COUNTERPOISE and EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM).  

GROUND ROD.  A component of one type of earth electrode system, generally a cylindrical 
device of approximately 3/4-in. diameter by approximately 10-ft long driven into the soil.  The 
ground rod is attached to the down conductor and dissipates a lightning flash’s current into the 
earth.  

GROUND TERMINAL.  See EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM.  

GROUNDED.  (1) Connected to earth or some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.  
(2) Connected to earth or some conducting body that is connected to earth.  
GROUNDING.  Providing an electrical path to the earth, generally to the earth electrode system.  

HEATING LIMITS.  The conditions established for safely heating an explosive system 
(maximum temperature, heating time, heating rate, etc.).  These limits are based on the estimated 
critical temperature of the explosive system with a suitable margin of safety.  

HIGH-ENERGY INITIATOR.  Exploding bridge wire systems, slapper detonators, and EEDs 
with similar energy requirements for initiation.  

HIGH PRESSURE.  Gas pressure greater than 3,000 psig (21 MPa gauge); liquid pressure 
greater than 5,000 psig (35 MPa gauge).  

HOLE.  (as applied to machine explosives).  Any cavity that is more than one-half diameter 
deep, being cut by any tool with the direction of feed along the axis of rotation.  

HOT WORK (thermal).  Any operation requiring the use of a flame-producing device, an 
electrically heated tool producing a temperature higher than 109°C, or a mechanical tool that can 
produce sparks or heat explosives or explosives contamination to provide an initiation stimulus.  

HYDROSTATIC PRESSING.  The operation of compacting a material that is confined in a 
press by a diaphragm by hydraulically applying pressure to the diaphragm.  

IHE.  See INSENSITIVE HIGH EXPLOSIVES.  

IHE SUBASSEMBLIES.  IHE hemispheres or spheres with booster charges, with or without 
detonators that pass the DOE qualification tests listed in Table IX-3.  

IHE WEAPONS.  Weapons listed in DOE-DNA TP 20-7, Nuclear Safety Criteria (for Warhead 
Storage), as being exempt from storage and transportation limits are classified as IHE weapons 
when stored or transported alone or in combination with each other.  This classification is valid 
only if the spacing between individual units is that provided by storage or shipping containers or, 
if not in containers, by the spacing specified in TP 20-7.  

IMPEDANCE.  The resistance and reactance to an electrical current.  

INDIRECT CONTACT WITH EXPLOSIVES.  When bare explosives, the metallic casing of an 
explosive, or the firing leads of an explosive device make contact with electrical instrument or 
equipment through electrically conductive equipment or surfaces other than the equipment leads.  

INDUCTANCE.  (1) The property of a conductor that makes it oppose any current change 
through it.  (2) A process where an object having electrical or magnetic energy can produce 
similar properties in a nearby object without direct contact.  

INERT MATERIALS.  Materials that show no exothermic decomposition when tested by DSC 
or DTA.  Moreover, when tested by recognized compatibility tests, the inert material shall not 
show any incompatibility with energetic material with which it may be combined.  Inert material 
shall neither alter the onset of exotherm of the DSC or DTA trace of the energetic material nor 
increase the rate of decomposition or gas evolution of the energetic material.  

IN-PROCESS STORAGE MAGAZINE (facility, vault, rest house, etc.).  See SERVICE 
MAGAZINE.  

INHABITED BUILDING.  A building or structure other than operating buildings, magazines, 
and auxiliary buildings occupied in whole or in part as a habitation for people or where people 
are accustomed to assemble, both within and outside DOE facilities.  Land outside DOE facilities 
shall be considered as sites for inhabited buildings.  

INHABITED BUILDING DISTANCE.  The minimum distance permitted between explosives 
locations and inhabited buildings, administrative areas, site boundaries, main power stations, and 
other facilities of vital or strategic nature.  

INITIATION STIMULUS.  Energy input to an explosive in a form potentially capable of 
initiating a rapid decomposition reaction.  Typical initiation stimuli are heat, friction, impact, 
electrical discharge, and shock.  

INITIATION, WITH ITS OWN MEANS.  Explosives or ammunition having their normal 
initiating device (e.g., detonators or squibs) assembled to them so that this device is considered 
to present a significant risk of activation during storage.  

INITIATION, WITHOUT ITS OWN MEANS.  Explosives or ammunition that (1) are not stored 
with an initiating device assembled to them; or (2) have the initiating device assembled to them, 
but (a) safety features preclude initiation of the explosives filler of the end item in the event of 
accidental functioning of the initiating device, or (b) the initiating device does not contain any 
primary explosives and has a high threshold of initiation (e.g., EBW or slapper detonators).  The 
power source for the initiator should not be present within the assembly or system.  If the 
initiator’s power source is present, two or more management-certified safety devices connected 
in series shall be present to interrupt any flow of energy from the power source to the initiator.  

INSENSITIVE HIGH EXPLOSIVES (IHE).  Explosive substances that, although mass 
detonating, are so insensitive that the probability of accidental initiation or transition from 
burning to detonation is negligible.  The materials passing the DOE qualification tests in 
Table IX-1 are classified as IHE, and are listed in 

INTEGRAL SYSTEM.  An LPS that has strike termination devices mounted on the structure to 
be protected.  These strike termination devices are connected to the earth electrode system via 
down conductors.  Metallic structure members can serve as parts of the LPS.  

INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE.  Gas pressure from 150 to 3,000 psig (1 to 21 MPa gauge); 
liquid pressure from 1,500 to 5,000 psig (10 to 35 MPa gauge).  

INTRALINE DISTANCE.  The minimum distance permitted between any two operating 
buildings or sites within an operating line, at least one of which contains, or is designed to 
contain, explosives.  

INTRINSICALLY SAFE.  An apparatus or system whose circuits are incapable of producing 
any spark or thermal effect capable of causing ignition of a mixture of flammable or combustible 
material under test conditions described in ANSI/UL 913.  

ISOSTATIC PRESSING.  The operation of compacting a material in a sealed flexible container.  
The container is submerged in a pressure vessel, and the vessel is pressurized with liquid.  

LABORATORY OPERATIONS.  Experimental study, testing, and analysis of small quantities 
of energetic materials.  Manufacturing processes with small quantities of materials are not 
included.  

LEL.  See LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT.  

LFL.  See LOWER FLAMMABLE LIMIT.  

LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM, (LDS).  A device or system to detect the presence of 
lightning activity in the general area.  

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (LPS).  A lightning protection system is a complete 
system of strike termination devices, conductors, ground terminals, interconnecting conductors, 
surge suppression devices, and other connectors or fittings required to complete the system.  

LIGHTNING WARNING SYSTEM.  A system that detects the presence and range of lightning 
activity and thereby issues an alert or warning advisory.  

LOW-ENERGY EED.  All EEDs except EBW detonators and slapper detonators.  

LOW PRESSURE.  Gas less than 150 psig (1 MPa gauge); liquid less than 1,500 psig (10 MPa 
gauge).  

LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (LEL).  The concentration of vapor or dust in air below which an 
explosion cannot occur.  

LOWER FLAMMABLE LIMIT (LFL).  The concentration of a vapor or dust in air below which 
a burning reaction cannot be sustained.  

MACHINING.  A forming operation accomplished by removing material with a mechanically 
operated cutting tool.  

MACHINING OVERTEST.  A test to evaluate the susceptibility of an explosive material to 
initiation during machining.  

MAGAZINE.  See SERVICE MAGAZINE or STORAGE MAGAZINE.  

MAGAZINE DISTANCE.  The minimum distance permitted between any two storage 
magazines.  The distance required is determined by the type(s) of magazine and also the type and 
quantity of explosives stored therein.  

MAST SYSTEM.  An LPS system that consists of one or more poles with a strike termination 
device connected to an earth electrode system by down conductors.  In the case of a metallic 
pole, the pole could serve as the strike termination device and down conductor.  Its purpose is to 
intercept lightning flashes from the protected area.  

MAXIMUM CREDIBLE EVENT (MCE).  The MCE from a hypothesized accidental explosion 
or fire is the worst single event that is likely to occur from a given quantity and disposition of 
explosives or explosives devices.  The event must be realistic with a reasonable probability of 
occurrence considering the explosive propagation, burning rate characteristics, and physical 
protection given to the items involved.  

MELTING.  Operations involving change in the physical state of explosives from solid to liquid.  

MILLING.  (1) Operations that either reduce solid material particle size by attrition or apply high 
shear mixing to incorporate solid materials into plastic binders.  (2) A surface machining 
operation performed on a mill.  

MIXING.  A mechanical operation that combines dissimilar materials.  

MOCK EXPLOSIVE.  Substances bearing similar physical properties (texture, density, 
cohesion, etc.) to an explosive material.  They are non-detonable. However, some are exothermic 
materials that will burn.  Mock explosives are used to represent explosives for purposes such as 
dry run testing of equipment.  DOE mock explosives are normally pink in color.  

NET EXPLOSIVE WEIGHT (NEW).  Net explosive weight expressed in pounds.  

NEW (OR EXPERIMENTAL) EXPLOSIVES.  Explosive, explosive mixture or explosive and 
binder mixture that the Explosives Development Committee (EDC) has not characterized.  

NON-FACILITY PERSONNEL.  Construction or maintenance personnel who do not have a 
continuing contract with DOE or NNSA or their agents at the facility concerned.  

NON-OCCUPIED or UNOCCUPIED AREA.  A location where occupancy is of a transitory 
nature such as building corridors, access ramps, and facility roads.  Other examples are locations 
such as mechanical equipment rooms, equipment/parts staging/storage areas, decontamination 
areas and janitors closets, which typically have a low personnel density and an intermittent and 
relatively short-term duration of occupancy for assigned work but in which personnel are not 
normally permanently assigned.  

NUCLEAR EXPLOSIVE (NE).  An assembly containing fissionable and/or fusionable materials 
and main charge high-explosive parts or propellants capable of producing a nuclear detonation 
(e.g., a nuclear weapon or test device).  

NUCLEAR EXPLOSIVE OPERATION (NEO).  Any activity involving a nuclear explosive, 
including activities in which main charge high-explosive parts and pit are collocated.  

OCCUPIED AREA.  Any work area that can be reasonably considered integral to an explosives 
operating area to which personnel are assigned or in which work is performed, however 
intermittently.  Examples of areas to be considered as occupied are assembly/disassembly cells 
or bays, explosives operating bays, radiography control and film processing rooms, offices, break 
areas and rest rooms.  

OPERATIONAL SHIELD.  A barricade constructed to protect personnel, material, or equipment 
from the effects of a possible fire or explosion occurring at a particular operation.  

PENETRATION.  A conductive object that passes through the zone of protection or exterior 
surface of an LPS.  

PERSONNEL BARRIER.  A device designed to limit or prevent personnel access to a building 
or an area during hazardous operations.  

POTENTIAL EXPLOSION SITE (PES).  The location of a quantity of ammunition and 
explosives that will create a blast, fragment, thermal, or debris hazard in the event of an 
accidental explosion of its contents.  

PRESSING.  The operation of increasing the density of explosive material by applying pressure.  

PRIMARY EXPLOSIVE.  A sensitive explosive which nearly always detonates by simple 
ignition from such means as a spark, flame, impact and other primary heat sources of appropriate 
magnitude.  Examples are mercury fulminate, lead azide, and lead styphnate, and other materials 
of similar sensitivities.  

PROGRAM SECRETARIAL OFFICER.  A senior program official, which includes the 
Assistant Secretaries or Office Directors at the Assistant Secretary level for DOE or the Deputy 
or Associate Administrators for NNSA.  

PROPELLANT.  Explosive composition used to propel projectiles and rockets and to generate 
gases for powering auxiliary devices.  

PUBLIC TRAFFIC ROUTE DISTANCE.  The minimum separation distance required between a 
potential explosion site and any public street, road, highway, passenger railroad, or navigable 
waterway (including roads on DOE-controlled land open to public travel).  

PUNCH AND DIE PRESSING.  The operation of compacting a material confined by a die by 
forcing a punch or punches into the die and against the material.  

PYROTECHNIC MATERIAL.  Physical mixtures of finely divided fuels and oxidizer powders; 
may include various organic binders and color intensifiers.  The material is intended to produce 
an effect by heat, light, sound, gas or smoke, or a combination of these as the result of non-
detonative, self-sustaining exothermic chemical reactions.  

RATED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES, INSTRUMENTATION AND 
MATERIALS.  As used in the DOE Explosives Safety Manual, “rated” refers to those items used 
in explosives locations that meet identified standards or have been tested and found suitable for 
use in Class I or Class II hazardous atmosphere.  For an item to be considered “rated,” a 
nationally recognized testing laboratory shall have approved its use (for example, Factory 
Mutual) or listed it for use (for example, Underwriters Laboratory) in the appropriate Class I or 
Class II hazardous atmosphere.  “Rated” items are used to provide protection in explosives 
locations where the National Electrical Code Article 500 does not normally apply.  

REMOTE OPERATION.  An operation performed in a manner that will protect personnel in the 
event of an accidental explosion.  This can be accomplished by distance, shielding, barricades, or 
a combination thereof.  

RESISTANCE.  The property of a conductor to oppose the flow of an electric current and 
change electric energy into heat.  For lightning protection purposes low resistance values are 
desired.  Resistance is measured in ohms.  

RETURN STROKE.  That part of a lightning flash where high electric currents are developed as 
the negatively charged leader encounters the positively charged return stroke.  The phase of 
lightning that produces electric current, heat, a light flash and thunder.  

RISK.  A measure of the combination of the probability and consequences of the hazards of an 
operation, expressed in qualitative or quantitative terms.  

ROLLING SPHERE ZONE OF PROTECTION MODEL.  A theoretical concept describing the 
area protected by an LPS where an imaginary sphere (100-ft radius for explosive facilities) 
approaches an LPS from all angles and directions.  The protected area is the area of the curve 
between where the curve is tangent to the ground, and the curve touches the LPS.  For example, 
with the rolling sphere method the area protected by a mast system looks like a teepee.  

SAFETY ANALYSIS.  A document prepared to systematically identify the hazards of a DOE 
operation; describe and analyze the adequacy of measures taken to eliminate, control, or mitigate 
identified hazards; and analyze and evaluate potential accidents and their associated risks.  

SCREENING.  An operation using screens to separate particles of differing sizes.  

SECONDARY EXPLOSIVES.  An explosive substance which is relatively insensitive (when 
compared to primary explosives), which is usually initiated by primary explosives with or 
without the aid of boosters or supplementary charges.  Such explosives may react as a 
deflagrating or as a detonating explosive.  Examples are TNT, plastic bonded formulations, and 
other materials of similar sensitivity.  

SERVICE MAGAZINE, REST HOUSE, ETC.  An auxiliary building or suitable designated 
room (vault) used for the intermediate storage of explosives materials not exceeding the 
minimum amount necessary for safe and efficient operation.  

SHUNT.  An electrical interconnection of various portions of EED circuitry to prevent the 
development of an electrical charge differential between the parts.  

SIDEFLASH.  (1) The phenomena where lightning current will jump through a non-conductive 
medium to attach to improperly bonded metallic objects.  (2) An electrical spark, caused by 
differences of potential, which occurs between conductive metal bodies or between conductive 
metal bodies and a component of an LPS or ground.  

SITE PLAN.  A formal explosives facility and operations safety document to be prepared by 
Facility Management for DOE/NNSA approval of explosives facilities siting and operations 
before the operation starts.  This document becomes the authorization basis for explosives 
facility operations.  

SITE PLANNING.  The process of performing and documenting an analysis of planned and 
existing facilities and missions involving ammunition and explosives, or occurring within the 
hazard zones created by explosives.  It may include evaluations of blast hazards; fragment 
hazards; protective construction; grounding, bonding, and lightning protection systems; electrical 
installations; natural or man-made terrain features; or other mission or local requirements.  
Effective site planning relies heavily on explosives safety standards, but it also incorporates 
survivability and operational considerations, and economic, security, environmental, and legal 
criteria to meet the goals and needs of the DOE community.  

SLAPPER DETONATOR.  An EED initiated by a rapid discharge of a high current through a 
metal foil.  The expansion of the metal vapor causes a plastic or metal covering to be propelled 
across an air gap and detonate a high-density explosive pellet.  

SMALL ARMS AMMUNITION.  (1) Ammunition designed to be fired from a pistol, revolver, 
rifle, or shotgun held by the hand or to the shoulder; (2) Ammunition of caliber less than 20 mm 
with incendiary, solid, inert, or empty projectiles (with or without tracers) designed to be fired 
from machine guns or cannons; (3) Blank cartridges.  

SOP.  See STANDARD (STANDING) OPERATING PROCEDURE.  

SPECIAL OPERATING PROCEDURE.  A procedure prepared for performance of a specific 
task on a one-time basis, or for situations not encountered in normal operation.  

STANDARD (STANDING) OPERATING PROCEDURE (SOP).  A procedure prepared for 
operation of a facility or performance of a task on a routine basis.  

STORAGE MAGAZINE.  A structure designed or specifically designated for the long-term 
storage of explosives or ammunition.  

STRIKE TERMINATION DEVICE.  (1) A component or feature of an LPS that is intended to 
accept the direct attachment of a lightning flash or strike.  Strike termination devices include 
overhead wires or grids, air terminals, or a building’s (grounded) steel structural elements.  (2) A 
component of an LPS that intercepts lightning flashes and connects them to a path to ground.  
Strike termination devices include air terminals, metal masts, permanent metal parts of 
structures, and overhead ground wires installed in catenary LPSs.  

STROKE.  The high electric current phase of a lightning strike.  The term is better defined as the 
return stroke.  

SUBSTANTIAL DIVIDING WALL.  An interior wall designed to prevent the propagation of an 
accidental detonation on one side of a wall to explosives on the other side.  

SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICE.  Also called a surge protector.  (1) A device used on power 
and communication lines to attenuate, suppress or divert lightning induced electrical energy to 
ground.  (2) A protective device used to limiting surge voltages by discharging or bypassing 
surge current.  It can also prevent continued flow of follow current while remaining capable of 
discharging or bypassing surge current.  

SYNTHESIS.  The chemical operation or operations required to produce a desired chemical 
compound.  

TARGET.  The area, structure, or material into which a projectile is fired.  

TNT EQUIVALENT.  A measure of the blast effects from explosion of a given quantity of 
material expressed in terms of the weight of TNT that would produce the same blast effects when 
detonated.  

TRANSFER IMPEDANCE.  (1) A transmittance expressed as the ratio of the voltage at a pair of 
terminals divided by the driving current, with all other terminals terminated in a specified way.  
(2) A transmittance expressed as the ratio of the electric field on the interior of a shielded 
enclosure divided by the current density on the exterior of the shield.  

TRANSIENT.  Any person within inhabited building distance but not inside an explosives bay or 
other occupied areas (offices, break areas, shops, etc.).  A transient’s presence within IBD of an 
explosives operation is transitory in nature, or to complete a relatively short-term, nonexplosives 
related work assignment in an area in which personnel are not permanently assigned, such as a 
building corridor, access ramp, or roadway.  Transients are not accounted for in established 
personnel limits for any explosives operating area and are afforded a level of protection only 
from Class I explosion hazard activities.  

UFER GROUND.  An LPS ground produced by electrodes encased in concrete.  This can be a 
coil of cable encased in concrete or even the reinforcing steel in the footers or floor of buildings.  
(See EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM).  

UNEXPLODED ORDNANCE (UXO).  Explosive ordnance which has been primed, fuzed, 
armed, or otherwise prepared for action, and which has been fired, dropped, launched, projected, 
or placed in such a manner as to constitute a hazard to operations, installations, personnel, or 
material and remains unexploded either by malfunction, design, or for any other cause.  

UNITED NATIONS (UN) CLASS 1 EXPLOSIVES.  (1) Explosive substances (a substance that 
is not itself an explosive but that can form an explosive atmosphere of gas, vapor, or dust is not 
included in Class 1), except those that are too dangerous to transport or those where the 
predominant hazard is appropriate to another class; (2) Explosive articles, except devices 
containing explosive substances in such quantity or of such a character that their inadvertent or 
accidental ignition or initiation during transport shall not cause any effect external to the device 
either by projection, fire, smoke, heat, or loud noise; and (3) Substances and articles not 
mentioned under (1) and (2) that are manufactured with a view of producing a practical, 
explosive or pyrotechnic effect.  

ZONE OF PROTECTION.  (1) The area considered statistically safe from the direct attachment 
of a lightning strike as defined by the rolling sphere zone of protection model.  (2) The space 
adjacent to an LPS that is substantially immune to direct lightning flashes.


     			    CHAPTER II—OPERATIONAL SAFETY

1.0	GENERAL OPERATIONS SAFETY GUIDELINES 

1.1	Protection of Explosives

	a.	Explosives are energetic materials that can react violently and should be protected 
		from abnormal stimuli or environments, including:  

		(1)	Friction forces.  

		(2)	Excessive pressures and temperatures.  

		(3)	Impact, shock, and pinching.  

		(4)	Deformation.  

		(5)	Electrical sparks, abrasive or welding sparks, and open flame.  

		(6)	Contamination.

		(7)	Contact with incompatible materials.  

1.2	Equipment Checks

	a.	Before being used in the explosives process, and at established intervals, 
		processing and test equipment shall be checked for 

		(1)	Proper design.  

		(2)	Proper function.  

		(3)	Specified clearances between parts in relative motion.  

		(4)	Abnormal metal-to-metal rubbing of moving parts potentially contacting 
			explosive materials.  

		(5)	Cracks, voids, or screw threads where explosives may accumulate.  

		(6)	Contamination that is incompatible with the materials to be introduced.  

	b.	This checkout may require the use of mock explosives in process or test 
		conditions.  

	c.	Explosive materials must not be pinched or confined between equipment lids or 
		covers and their mating surfaces.  These surfaces shall be cleaned before cover 
		placement.  This includes pressing operations.  

1.3	Inspection Frequency

	a.	When this Manual calls for an inspection, but the inspection interval is not 
		specified, local facility management shall establish the inspection interval.  
		Inspection intervals shall be modified when experience dictates a need.  

1.4	Laboratory Operations

	a.	The special safety guidelines applicable to general laboratory operations 
		involving explosive materials are contained in section 21.0 of this chapter.  

1.5	Toxicity Hazards

	a.	Explosives materials, explosives components (additives or adhesives), and 
		materials such as organic solvents used in explosives processing can be toxic 
		when inhaled, ingested or absorbed through the skin.  The most frequently 
		reported effect from working with explosives is a skin rash resulting from skin 
		contact with explosives materials, or with solvents and adhesives used with 
		explosives operations.  This is the most frequently reported effect from working 
		with these materials.  The following general precautions should be used to prevent 
		overexposure to these materials during explosives processing and handling:  

		(1)	Know the health hazard and controls before beginning operations.  

		(2)	Evaluate the operation during startup to assure that occupational exposure 
			limits are not exceeded; routine operations should be monitored 
			periodically.  

		(3)	Handle materials in a well ventilated area; local exhaust ventilation is 
			preferred.  

		(4)	Avoid skin contact; use appropriate protective clothing.  

		(5)	Practice good personal cleanliness; wash before eating, smoking, or using 
			toilet facilities; end-of-shift showers may be required for some operators.  

1.6	Hazard Identification and Communication 

	a.	Before beginning explosives operations, managers shall ensure the following:  

		(1)	Identify and maintain a current list of explosives and other hazardous 
			materials used in conjunction with their operations.  

		(2)	Determine the hazardous properties and toxicity of these materials through 
			the use of the manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) or 
			other information sources and through consultation with the facility 
			Industrial Hygiene staff.  For explosives without published toxicological 
			data, guidance can be obtained through the DOE Toxic Materials 
			Advisory Committee (TMAC).  Health hazard information must be 
			available and communicated to employees who work with or generate 
			hazardous materials.  

		(3)	Educate and train employees in the hazards and precautions required for 
			handling explosives and materials used in conjunction with explosives 
			operation.  This training should be a part of the employee training and 
			qualification program specified in Chapter V.  

1.7	Process Hazard Analysis 

	a.	Before beginning any explosives synthesis, formulation, manufacturing, testing, 
		or disposal operation, a process hazard analysis shall be performed.  A single 
		process hazard analysis may be performed for similar processes performed in a 
		single facility, provided that the “worst-case” process is the basis for the hazard 
		analysis.  If required, a shield or other protective measure shall be employed.  
		Selection criteria for the worst-case process are:  

		(1)	Sensitivity of materials.  

		(2)	Quantity of materials.  

		(3)	Number of personnel potentially affected.  

		(4)	Impact on other operations/activities.  

	b.	The process hazard analysis shall be performed as a team effort.  The team 
		shall consist of a minimum of three personnel, and preferably no more than 
		seven personnel.   The team shall include at least one engineer and one 
		operator, and should have the following makeup:  

		(1)	Team Leader, who is familiar with the analysis methodology used.  

		(2)	Technical Member(s), who is familiar with the process being analyzed.  

		(3)	Scribe, who writes notes of meetings and interviews and drafts reports.  

	c.	The facility manager or team leader may select the analysis methodology 
		used, which should be one of the following:  

		(1)	Preliminary Hazard Analysis.  

		(2)	Checklist (usually for similar batch operations).  

		(3)	What-if Analysis.  

		(4)	Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP).  

		(5)	Failure Modes, Effects, and Criticality Analysis (FMECA).  

		(6)	Fault Tree Analysis.  

		(7)	Event Tree Analysis.  

	d.	The process hazard analysis shall be formally documented.  

	e.	Employees and employee representatives shall be consulted on the process 
		hazard analysis.  The result of the process hazard analysis shall be provided to 
		employees involved in or affected by the operation.  

	f.	The process hazard analysis shall be updated and revalidated at least every 
		five years by a team meeting the criteria in section 1.7b.  

	g.	The facility manager shall be responsible for establishing a system to address 
		the team’s findings and recommendations promptly.  Corrective actions, 
		schedules for corrective actions, and completion of corrective actions shall be 
		formally documented.  Such documentation shall be filed with the process 
		hazard analysis.  

	h.	Files containing process hazard analyses, updates, and corrective actions 
		status shall be maintained for the life of the process.  

2.0	WORK ENVIRONMENT

2.1	General Requirements

	a.	Workspace shall be adequate to perform operations safely and efficiently.  

	b.	Work shall be organized to eliminate clutter in the area while operations are 
		being performed.  

	c.	Walkways should be kept clear.  

	d.	In work environments where solid, bare explosive pieces are handled, the 
		floor should be cushioned, and all hard objects that explosives could strike in 
		a handling incident should be cushioned where practical.  Physical safety 
		systems demonstrated to preclude the explosives from being dropped or struck 
		could meet these requirements.  

	e.	A procedure should be established to account for hand tools that may be 
		inadvertently dropped into an explosives processing operation, thus creating a 
		hazard.  

	f.	Personnel shall be assigned in such a manner that each worker’s presence is 
		monitored frequently and assistance can be provided or aid summoned in the 
		event of an emergency.  

	g.	Safety analyses of explosives facilities and operations shall be performed.  
		The safety analysis shall be performed during the design of new explosives 
		facilities or the redesign of existing facilities.  Facility management shall 
		prepare and obtain DOE/NNSA approval of the Site Plan.  The Site Plan shall 
		include the result of this analysis.  

	h.	Noisy environments caused by explosives testing operations or process and 
		handling equipment shall be evaluated.  Areas with noise above the allowable 
		occupational exposure limits must be posted and appropriate control measures 
		instituted (e.g., engineering controls, protective equipment, and a hearing 
		conservation program).  

2.2	Emergency Exit Requirements for Explosives Operations 

	a.	Exit requirements for any building or structure containing explosives shall 
		comply with the intent of the Life Safety Code, NFPA 101, except as 
		otherwise permitted in this section.  

2.2.1	Building or Structure Occupancy

	a.	In determining occupancies:  

		(1)	Explosives operating buildings shall be classified as industrial 
			occupancies (NFPA 101, Chapter 40).  

		(2)	Explosives storage or staging buildings or structures shall be 
			classified as storage occupancies (NFPA 101, Chapter 42).  

2.2.2	Hazard of Contents Classification

	a.	The hazard of contents classification of any explosives occupancy 
		shall be determined using the guidelines given in NFPA 101 and the 
		following requirements:  

		(1)	High-hazard explosives contents are those which, because of 
			form, character, or volume, are likely to burn with extreme 
			rapidity can release poisonous fumes or explosions in a fire.  
			The expectation of poisonous fumes or explosions is to be 
			determined on a case-by-case basis.  Operating buildings 
			containing propellant, pyrotechnic, or explosive powders shall 
			be classified as high-hazard occupancies unless a reduced 
			hazard classification can be justified.  

		(2)	Reduced-hazard explosives contents are those that burn with 
			rapidity that is moderate or less and will not produce poisonous 
			vapors.  This criterion shall be documented by a hazard 
			analysis.  

2.2.3	Personnel Protective Restrictions and Requirements

	a.	DOE occupancies containing high explosives dictate that personnel be 
		protected from blast overpressures and fragments (and spread of 
		plutonium in some occupancies) from an accidental detonation.  
		Accidental detonation of explosives is usually the result of stimuli 
		other than a fire.
  
	b.	Non-compliance with some NFPA 101 provisions (such as those 
		covering exit doors, exit travel distance, number and location of exits, 
		and common path of travel to exits), is authorized where required to 
		provide protection from blast overpressure and fragments.  When 
		NFPA 101 requirements are not met the following additional 
		personnel-protective restrictions or requirements should be imposed:  

		(1)	The building and means of egress should be protected by 
			supervised automatic sprinkler systems connected to sound 
			evacuation alarms.  This requirement is not applicable to 
			explosives storage magazines, firing chambers, or rooms used 
			as firing chambers, within explosives operating buildings.  

		(2)	Explosives operating buildings and their means of egress 
			should have automatic, early warning fire detection systems 
			connected to sound evacuation alarms where such early 
			warning might reasonably aid in prevention or mitigation of 
			personnel injury.  This requirement is not applicable to 
			explosives storage magazines, firing chambers, or rooms used 
			as firing chambers within explosives operating buildings.  

		(3)	Personnel limits within the explosives work area (bay, cell, 
			etc.) shall be established and controlled.  These should not 
			exceed 20 for reduced-hazard occupancies or 6 for high-hazard 
			occupancies.  The need for personnel in numbers greater than 
			these limits shall be documented in a hazards analysis based on 
			the criteria of section 2.2.5 of this chapter.  

2.2.4	Requirements for Existing Facilities

	a.	Existing facilities may deviate from current NFPA 101 requirements in 
		the following situations:  

		(1)	Current code requirements were not in effect when the building 
			was constructed.  The building, however, is still required to 
			meet the code of record.  

		(2)	Deviations were made to meet the level-of-protection and 
			design criteria in Chapter VI, section 6, of this Manual.  

		(3)	Building construction predates both current and 
			level-of-protection criteria, but a hazards analysis has shown 
			the risk of operations to be at an acceptable risk.  

		(4)	The risk from deviation has been analyzed and accepted by 
			current hazards analysis.  

			NOTE:  Those facilities requiring hazards analysis to determine whether a 
			deviation from the Life Safety Code is acceptable shall follow the 
			considerations and criteria described in section 2.2.5 of this chapter.  

2.2.5	Requirements for New Facilities 

	a.	New facilities shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 101, 
		except when deviation is necessary to provide personnel protection 
		from blast overpressure and fragments per Chapter VI of this Manual.  

2.2.5.1	If deviations from NFPA 101 requirements are made, the Fire Hazards 
	Analysis required by Chapter VI of this Manual shall document the following 
	aspects related to each explosives operation, bay, and/or workroom where a 
	deviation exists.  

	a.	Clear pathways to exit in explosives bay or workroom.  

	b.	Potential for sustained fire from the presence of combustible and 
		flammable materials and the presence of ignition sources in work 
		environments.  

	c.	Total time required to exit the bay or workroom.  

2.2.5.2	The criteria considered acceptable for the components of the analysis in 
	section 2.2.5.1 of this chapter are, respectively:  

	a.	No obstruction shall limit the width of the pathway to less than 36 in.  

	b.	Combustible and flammable material quantities shall be minimized, 
		justified, documented, and reviewed by site fire protection personnel 
		and approved by line management.  Ignition sources shall be identified 
		and eliminated where possible.  

	c.	The total time for six people to exit the workroom or bay, including 
		the opening of doors where necessary, is 30 seconds or less.  The total 
		time for twenty people to exit the workroom or bay is 90 seconds or 
		less.  Noncompliance with this criterion shall be evaluated and 
		justified during the conceptual design review.  

2.2.6	Single Exits

	a.	Where NFPA 101 requires at least two exits, but provisions for 
		personnel protection from a blast will not permit at least two exits 
		from a room or structure, a single exit is acceptable, provided the 
		requirements of sections 2.2.3 and 2.2.4 of this chapter and the 
		following are met:  

		(1)	The path of exit travel shall be arranged so it is not through or 
			toward a hazardous operation.  

		(2)	A room containing a high-hazard explosive occupancy shall 
			not exceed 500 ft2, and the occupant load of the room shall be 
			restricted to two operators and two transients.  

		(3)	A room containing a reduced-hazard explosive occupancy shall 
			not exceed 1,000 ft2.  

	b.	Explosives storage magazines may have only single exits for the 
		purpose of maintaining integrity of design.  The conditions of this 
		section do not apply to these magazines.  

2.2.7	Blast-Resistant Doors

	a.	Blast-resistant doors required to protect personnel from the effects of 
		an accidental detonation may be located in the means of egress, 
		provided the requirements of sections 2.2.3 through 2.2.5 of this 
		chapter and the following are met:  

		(1)	Where power-operated doors are required to accomplish 
			unlatching and opening, they shall have redundant features or 
			be capable of being opened manually (to permit exit travel) or 
			closed where necessary to safeguard exits.  

		(2)	The time required to fully open or close a door shall be as short 
			as reasonably possible. 
 
		(3)	A revolving door is acceptable if a secondary means of escape 
			(with swinging doors) is provided at the same location.  The 
			revolving door must also be prevented from rotating at too 
			rapid a rate to permit orderly exit of personnel.  

		(4)	The following exceptions to NFPA 101 may be allowed when 
			justified and documented.  

			(a)	Swinging doors may exceed 48 in. wide.  

			(b)	The NFPA-required swinging doors adjacent to a 
				revolving blast door can be omitted.  

			(c)	Revolving blast doors need to be designed to collapse 
				into book-fold position.  

			(d)	Where fire-rated doors are required, blast doors are 
				considered to have the required fire rating.  

			(e)	An airlock with two or more doors that is intended 
				during routine operations to prevent continuous and 
				unobstructed passage by allowing the release of only one 
				door at a time shall be permitted in a means of egress.  In 
				such cases, there shall be provisions to allow for 
				continuous and unobstructed travel during an emergency 
				egress condition.  

			(f)	Panic hardware is not required on blast doors. 
 
2.2.8	Slide Escapes

	a.	Slide escapes should be provided for elevated explosives operating 
		locations from which rapid exit may be vital and cannot be obtained by 
		other means.  Slide escapes should be located on opposite sides of the 
		explosives operation to reduce the likelihood of personnel being trapped 
		by fire between them and a single slide.  

	b.	Exits to slide escapes must open onto platforms that are not less than 3 ft2, 
		and the platforms must be equipped with guardrails.  The slides shall 
		begin at the outside edge of the platform, not at the edge of the buildings.  
		Slide escape landings shall be located at selected places leading directly to 
		escape routes that are free from tripping hazards, low guy lines, drains, 
		ditches, or other obstructions.  Manually or automatically controlled 
		devices (trips) that sound an alarm in the operating building shall be 
		installed at or near the entrances to slide escapes.  These devices may also 
		actuate deluge valves and water curtains in the building or room affected.  
		Recommended slide escape specifications:  

		(1)	Angle, 40 to 50 degrees horizontal.  

		(2)	Slide depth, 24 in.  

		(3)	Radius at bottom of slide, 12 in.  

		(4)	Height at lower end of slide, not over 24 in. above the landing.  

	c.	If necessary, the end of the slide shall have a horizontal run sufficient to 
		prevent employee injury from exit speed without the use of landing 
		cushions, which are unsatisfactory in cold weather.  One foot of horizontal 
		run is required for a 15-ft-long slide.  One additional foot of horizontal run 
		will be provided for each additional 5 ft of slide length.  The juncture of 
		the two sections must be well rounded.  Metal sheets constructing the slide 
		must overlap in the direction of travel.  

3.0	BUILDING AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE

3.1	Cleaning

	a.	Structures containing explosives shall be kept clean and orderly.  

	b.	Explosives and explosives dust shall not be allowed to accumulate on 
		structural members, radiators, heating coils, utility lines, equipment, or 
		electrical fixtures.  

	c.	To maintain safe conditions, there shall be a regular cleaning program for 
		building interiors to prevent the accumulation of explosives dust and waste.  
		This program should not be conducted in any bay where a hazardous 
		operation is being conducted.  

	d.	In buildings containing explosives, floors should be cleaned with hot water or 
		a water-steam mix wherever practical.  Non-abrasive sweeping compounds 
		that are compatible with the explosives involved may be used when a 
		water-steam mix or hot water is not practical.  Such sweeping compounds 
		may be combustible but must not be volatile (closed-cup flash point must not 
		be lower than 110?C).  Sweeping compounds containing wax shall not be used 
		on conductive flooring.  Where nitrated organic explosives (which may form 
		sensitive explosive compounds with some alkalis) are involved, the use of 
		cleaning agents containing those alkalis is prohibited.  

	e.	Before beginning explosives decontamination activities involving large 
		amounts of organic solvents (generally over 1L), provisions must be made for 
		adequate ventilation or respiratory protection, fire protection, and adequate 
		protective clothing.  

3.2	Maintenance and Repair

	a.	Records shall be maintained for inspection, repair, and servicing of process 
		and handling equipment and fire protection systems.  

	b.	Maintenance operations involving major repairs, changes, or the use of 
		hazardous equipment should not be performed within bays (rooms) while 
		explosives are present.  Before beginning such maintenance, explosives 
		should be removed and the area prepared.  An approval procedure shall be 
		established to ensure that the area has been inspected and is safe for these 
		operations.  

	c.	Non-facility personnel performing maintenance or construction operations 
		shall be at least intraline distance from any explosives operation and should be 
		at least intraline distance from any building containing explosives.  This 
		requirement does not apply to personnel making job site inspections or 
		equipment repairs requiring less than eight hours (e.g., technical 
		representatives, architect-engineering surveyors, etc.).  Providing equivalent 
		protection may satisfy the intraline distance separation requirement.  
		Transportation of explosives is permitted on roadways at less than intraline 
		distance. 
 
	d.	Facility management shall determine the minimum practical distance by 
		which non-facility personnel (e.g., technical representatives, service 
		representatives, architect-engineering surveyors, etc.) shall be separated from 
		explosives operations while making job site inspections or equipment repairs 
		requiring less than eight hours.  Facility management shall control explosives 
		operations so that the chance of an explosion shall be kept to a minimum.  The 
		rationale for establishing the minimum practicable distance and additional 
		control measures taken shall be documented and maintained until operations 
		have been completed and personnel have permanently vacated the work site.  
		All such personnel shall be informed of the risk of working at less than 
		intraline distance and shall agree to accept such risk.  

	e.	New equipment or equipment subjected to major repair or modification 
		shall be test-operated, and handling equipment shall be tested before being 
		returned to operations.  The DOE Hoisting and Rigging Standard 
		(DOE-STD-1090-current version) may be used as a guide.  

	f.	Only authorized personnel shall perform maintenance work.  

	g.	Before resuming operations following maintenance, the area shall be cleaned 
		and approved by the operations supervisor.  

3.3	Hot Work Permits

	a.	Where explosives are involved, a written permit shall be required for the 
		temporary use of portable, heat-producing equipment that generates 
		temperatures higher than 228°F (109°C).  Explosives decontamination of the 
		immediately affected work areas and explosives removal shall be required 
		before beginning hot work operations.  The permit should state the location, 
		time, duration, purpose of use, details of safety, and fire-fighting equipment 
		required.  The permit shall be available at the named location for checkout by 
		supervisory personnel.  

		(1)	Permits shall be authorized by signature of personnel designated by 
			local facility management.  Designated personnel should be qualified 
			by experience in explosives work, fire prevention, and general safety 
			precautions, in particular, the purging of equipment, presence of 
			flammable mixtures, and the avoidance of electrical and mechanical 
			hazards that could be incident to repair work.  

		(2)	Personnel designated to sign the hot work permit should represent 
			supervision of the work location, supervision of personnel performing 
			the hot work, and a third group independent of the first two (usually 
			the safety and fire protection group).  

		(3)	An individual should remain at the site of a cutting or welding job for 
			approximately 30 minutes after the job has been completed to 
			extinguish or report any fires that develop.  Designated supervision 
			should inspect the job site before, during, and after completion of the 
			job.  

4.0	REMOTE OPERATIONS

4.1	Personnel Protection

	a.	Explosives operations judged to present a significant level of risk to be 
		performed remotely shall be conducted in facilities where the construction of 
		the operating bay or the control room affords sufficient protection to 
		personnel to prevent serious injuries.  Chapter VI, section 4.2.1d specifies 
		criteria for the prevention of serious injuries.  

	b.	Prevention of serious injury from a remote operation applies to both transient 
		personnel and personnel involved in the operations.  

4.2	Access and Equipment Controls

	a.	Procedures and equipment shall be used to prevent entry into a hazardous bay 
		or area in which a remote operation is occurring or to prevent the operation 
		from proceeding when personnel enter, as follows:  

		(1)	Roads shall be blocked at a minimum of the public traffic route 
			distance from buildings where hazardous (remote) operations are being 
			performed.  Public traffic route separation may be satisfied by 
			providing equivalent protection.  

		(2)	Corridors leading to bays in which hazardous (remote) operations are 
			being performed shall be marked to warn of the danger.  Barriers shall 
			also be set up.  

		(3)	Visual methods such as closed circuit television should be used to 
			monitor remote operations and to enable viewing of the operating area 
			conditions before entering.  Remote audio monitoring and video 
			recording should also be considered.  

		(4)	Interlocking of remote operating equipment to access doors should be 
			required for each remote operation.  

		(5)	Lights or similar warning devices shall conspicuously identify 
			buildings or bays in which remote operations are performed to indicate 
			when remote operations are under way.  

5.0	GENERAL EXPLOSIVES AREA CONTROLS

5.1	Smoking, Matches, Lighters, Metal Articles

	a.	There shall be no smoking in explosives storage, processing, or test areas, 
		except in designated locations.  

	b.	No matches, lighters, or other fire-, flame-, or spark-producing devices shall 
		be taken into an explosives control area except with written authorization.  If 
		authorized to be carried, matches shall be contained in a metal carrying device 
		too large to fit into pockets.  Kitchen “strike anywhere” matches shall not be 
		used.  

	c.	Operating personnel should not carry metal articles (e.g., keys, jewelry, 
		knives, coins, etc.) in explosives processing areas where such items could 
		constitute a hazard if dropped into the process operation.  

5.2	Cooking and Eating

	a.	Food or beverages shall not be consumed in explosives buildings, except in 
		designated areas.  

	b.	There shall be no personal dishes or utensils in an explosives building, except 
		in designated eating areas. 
 
	c.	Coffee pots, hot plates, ovens (including microwaves), and portable electric 
		heaters shall not be permitted in rooms where:  

		(1)	Explosives may be present.  

		(2)	Combustible vapors or dust may be present.
  
		(3)	Smoking or drinking is prohibited because toxic materials are present.  

		(4)	Electrical classification of appliances is not compatible with the area.  

5.3	Access to Explosives Areas

	a.	Access control procedures shall be established for entry to all explosives 
		areas.  

6.0	PROTECTION OF ELECTROEXPLOSIVE DEVICES (EED) FROM 
	ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION

	a.	EEDs are vulnerable to initiation from a variety of sources.  One potential hazard 
		associated with EEDs is the accidental initiation by stray electromagnetic energy.  
		This hazard exists when an electromagnetic field of sufficient intensity is 
		generated to induce or otherwise couple currents and/or voltages of magnitudes 
		large enough to initiate electroexplosive devices or other sensitive explosive 
		components of weapon systems, or other explosive devices.  This unintended 
		actuation could have safety (premature firing) or reliability (duding) 
		consequences.  

	b.	A large number of these devices are initiated by low levels of electrical energy 
		and are susceptible to unintentional initiation by many forms of direct or induced 
		stray electrical energy, such as from lightning discharges, static electricity, or 
		tribo-electric (friction generated) effects, and radio frequency (RF) energy.  
		Hazards from lightning discharges are covered in Chapter X.  Lightning 
		protection systems and requirements normally preclude the inadvertent initiation 
		of EEDs by direct lightning strikes.  Precautions for static electricity discharges 
		are addressed in section 7 of this chapter.  Stray energy, such as transients and 
		other forms of induced energy, can be imposed on circuits affecting EEDs from 
		other subsystems by various methods.  Examples are inductive or capacitive 
		coupling; sneak ground circuits; defective components or wiring; errors in design, 
		modification, or maintenance.  

	c.	The degree to which EEDs are susceptible to unintentional initiation by exposure 
		to the radiated fields of RF emitters depends on many variables.  These variables 
		include the ability of the leads, circuit, or installation to capture RF energy; the 
		type and characteristics of RF energy; and methods of coupling which can 
		introduce this energy into the EED.  

	d.	Emitter operating frequencies, power levels, modulation, and illumination angles 
		are some of the factors that affect the vulnerability of EEDs to RF energy. 
 
	e.	As a precautionary measure, EEDs should normally be left inside their containers 
		until ready for use.  Shorting clips or other safety devices should not be removed 
		until the EED is actually ready for use.
  
	f.	For precautionary separation distances, see Chapter II, section 13, Tables II-1, 
		II-2, and II-3.  

7.0	STATIC ELECTRICITY

7.1	General

	a.	Positive steps must be taken to control or eliminate static electricity in areas 
		where materials that are ignitable by static spark discharge are processed or 
		handled.  This includes spark-sensitive explosives, propellants, and 
		pyrotechnics as well as solvent vapors, and flammable gases.  

7.2	Bonding and Grounding of Equipment

	a.	Bonding straps can be used to bridge locations where electrical continuity 
		may be broken by the presence of oil on bearings, paint, or rust at any 
		contact point.  Pressure contact alone is not adequate grounding for 
		permanent equipment in contact with conductive floors or tabletops. Static 
		grounds shall not be made to gas, steam, or air lines; dry pipe sprinkler 
		systems; or air terminals of lightning protection systems.  Static grounds 
		can be made to water pipes, ground cones, buried copper plates, or driven 
		ground rods of lightning protection systems.  If a structure is equipped with 
		a lightning protection system, all grounds shall be interconnected.  Wires 
		used as static ground conductors should be at least No. 10 AWG or 
		equivalent.  

7.3	Testing Bonded Equipment Grounds 

	a.	Grounding systems shall be tested for electrical resistance and continuity 
		after installation has been completed and, in the case of active equipment, at 
		intervals to be locally determined.  If the equipment has been inactive for 
		more than one month, the ground system shall be visually inspected for 
		continuity before reactivation of the system.  All exposed explosives or 
		hazardous materials shall be removed before testing.  When testing for 
		resistance-to-ground, equipment should be considered as a unit except in 
		the case of an electrically isolated device or a belt-driven machine.  In 
		measuring the total resistance-to-ground for belt-driven machinery (to 
		assure compliance with the section below), resistance of the belting is to be 
		excluded.  The maximum resistance-to-ground permitted for different types 
		of equipment is as follows in section 7.3b.  

	b.	Hazardous locations (operations where a static spark discharge may be 
		dangerous).  All conductive parts of equipment shall be bonded; in the case 
		of grounded equipment, bonding shall be such that resistance to ground 
		does not exceed 25 ohms, unless resistance is not to exceed 10 ohms 
		because of a lightning protection installation.  For existing equipment, the 
		rate of static generation should be considered before making changes in 
		grounding systems.  The resistance of conductive rubber hose should not 
		exceed 250,000 ohms.  

7.4	Conductive Floors, Shoes, Mats and Wristbands

	a.	Conductive floors and shoes should be used for grounding personnel in 
		operations involving explosives (propellants, pyrotechnics, lead azide, lead 
		styphnate, mercury fulminate, CP, etc.) that are sensitive to initiation by the 
		electrostatic spark discharge from a person.  Static discharge from a person 
		may ignite many flammable liquids and air mixtures.  In areas where personnel 
		come into the proximity of (i.e., possible contact with) static-sensitive 
		explosives or vapors, conductive floors shall be installed except where 
		adequate housekeeping, dust collection, ventilation, or solvent recovery 
		methods eliminate the hazards of dust-air or flammable vapor-air mixtures.  
		Conductive floors may also be required in areas where operations involve 
		EEDs that contain a static-sensitive explosive.  

	b.	Conductive floors are not required throughout an entire building or room if the 
		hazard is localized.  In such cases, conductive mats or runners may be used where 
		required.  These mats or runners shall meet all specifications and test 
		requirements that apply to conductive floors.  Conductive wristbands may be 
		substituted for conductive mats and footwear at fixed, grounded or bonded 
		workstations or outdoor locations.  

7.5	Conductive Floor, Work Surface, and Wristband Specifications

	a.	Conductive floors must be made of non-sparking material such as conductive 
		rubber or conductive flooring composition and shall meet the following 
		requirements:  

		(1)	The flooring and its grounding system must provide for electrical 
			resistance not to exceed 1,000,000 ohms (measured as specified in 
			section 7.6 of this chapter).  

		(2)	The surface of the installed floor must be free from cracks and reasonably 
			smooth.  The material must not slough off, wrinkle, or buckle under 
			operating conditions.  Conductive tiles are not recommended for use in 
			areas where explosives dust can cause contamination.  The large number 
			of joints and the tendency of tiles to loosen provide areas in which 
			explosive dust can become lodged, making normal cleanup procedures 
			difficult. 
 
		(3)	Where conductive floors and shoes are required, resistance between the 
			ground and the wearer shall not exceed 1,000,000 ohms, (i.e., total 
			resistance of conductive shoes on a person, plus the resistance of floor to 
			ground).  (See Figure II-1 for testing method.)  Where conductive floors 
			and shoes are required, tabletops on which exposed explosives or dusts are 
			encountered should be covered with a properly grounded or bonded 
			conductive material that meets the same requirements as those for 
			flooring.  

		(4)	Conductive floors must be compatible with the explosive materials to be 
			processed.  

		(5)	Conductive wristbands shall not exceed a resistance between the wearer 
			and ground or bonding point of 1,200,000 ohms.  This resistance shall be 
			measured with a suitably calibrated ohmmeter.  Wristbands shall be of a 
			design that maintains electrical contact with the wearer when used.  

		(6)	Table-top work surface mats that are not part of a total conductive system 
			(section 7.5a(3) shall have a resistance not to exceed 1,200,000 ohms.  
			This resistance shall be measured by a method similar to that outlined in 
			section 7.6 and records shall be maintained.  
 
Figure II-1.  Testing Shoes on Wearer

7.6	Conductive Floor Tests

	a.	Initial tests shall be made of all conductive floors, and subsequent tests shall be 
		made at least semi-annually.  Test results shall be permanently recorded and a copy 
		filed in a central location.  Instruments used in making tests shall be used only 
		when the room is free from exposed explosives and flammable gas mixtures.  

	b.	Maximum floor resistance shall be measured with a suitably calibrated ohmmeter 
		that operates on a normal open circuit output voltage of 500 volts DC and a short 
		circuit current of 2.5 milliamperes with an effective internal resistance of 
		approximately 200,000 ohms.  Minimum floor resistance will be measured with 
		an ohmmeter suitably calibrated for the task.  

	c.	Each electrode shall weigh 2.3 kg and shall have a dry, flat, circular contact area 
		6.5 cm in diameter, which shall comprise a surface of aluminum or tinfoil 1.3- to 
		2.5-mm thick, backed by a layer of rubber 0.6- to 0.65-cm thick and measuring 
		between 40 and 60 durometer hardness as determined with a Shore Type A 
		durometer (ASTM D-2240-68).  

	d.	The floor shall be clean and dry.  “Electrode jelly” such as brushless shaving soap 
		or saline solution shall not be used.  

	e.	The resistance of the floor shall be more than 5,000 ohms in areas with 110 volt 
		service and 10,000 ohms in areas with 220 volt service, and less than 
		1,000,000 ohms in all areas, as measured between a permanent ground connection 
		and an electrode placed at any point on the floor and also as measured between two 
		electrodes placed 3 ft apart at any points on the floor.  Measurements shall be made 
		at five or more locations in each room.  If the resistance changes appreciably with 
		time during a measurement, the value observed after the voltage has been applied 
		for about five seconds shall be considered as the measured value.  

7.7	Humidification

	a.	Humidification to prevent static electricity accumulations and subsequent 
		discharges is usually effective if the relative humidity is above 60 percent.  
		However, due to the possibility of spontaneous ignition, certain materials such as 
		metallic powders and some pyrotechnic mixtures cannot be exposed to air with 
		60 percent relative humidity.  Where this technique is used to prevent static 
		electricity accumulations, a daily preoperational check of the humidity levels will 
		be accomplished before work starts.  

7.8	Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter

	a.	Ground fault circuit interrupter protection shall be provided in static grounded 
		areas where personnel may come in contact with AC-powered electrical 
		equipment.  

8.0	ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING

8.1	Location/Operation Electrical Hazard Classification

	a.	The National Electrical Code (NEC) shall be followed in all situations where 
		the code normally applies.  Although the NEC does not specifically address 
		explosives, Article 500, Hazardous (Classified) Locations, requirements for the 
		design and installation of electrical equipment and wiring in “classified” 
		locations shall be used as guidance for the installation of rated equipment and 
		fixtures where required by this section.  The use of rated wiring, fixtures, 
		equipment, and instrumentation where the code normally does not apply, 
		provides additional safety for work with explosives materials by (1) restricting 
		electrical ignition sources, such as sparks, electrical faults (shorts, power 
		surges, etc.), (2) controlling surface temperatures of electrical items, and 
		(3) reducing the potential for electrically initiated fires.  Rated wiring, fixtures, 
		equipment, and instrumentation shall be used for the operations specified below 
		unless demonstrated unnecessary through analysis for a specific operation and 
		location.  The analysis shall be performed and documented per sections 8.4 and 
		8.6 of this chapter.  

	b.	Explosives do not normally fit the NEC definitions for groupings, classes, 
		divisions, and area classifications.  In order to apply Article 500 as a guide, 
		vapors containing explosives shall be treated as Group D (unless NEC requires 
		a higher classification because of other components of the vapor) and dusts of 
		explosives or solid explosives shall be treated as Group G.  Class, division, and 
		area classification determinations shall be based on the explosives operation 
		being performed, as specified below, and not on the location or surrounding 
		atmosphere, nor its potential for producing an ignitable or explosive mixture.  
		Maximum temperature limits shall be based on the thermal analysis of the 
		explosives used in the operation.  Division 1 items can be substituted for 
		Division 2 items, but never Division 2 for Division 1 items.  Where there is a 
		conflict between the requirements of the code and requirements of this Manual, 
		the more stringent of the two applies.  

	c.	Rated wiring, equipment and instruments shall be approved for use by a 
		nationally recognized testing laboratory.  Rated items shall have labels and/or 
		clearly identifiable markings to show Class, Division, Group, and Temperature 
		Range for which they are approved.  Equipment approved for one Hazard 
		Class is not interchangeable with another Hazard Class.  

	d.	The operations discussed below shall comply with the recommended 
		class/division unless it is determined unnecessary through documented analysis 
		for a specific operation and location.  

		(1)	Class I, Division 1 wiring, fixtures, process equipment, and 
			instrumentation are recommended for operations involving flammable 
			gases or chemicals/materials expected to produce flammable vapors 
			with explosives present.  

		(2)	Class I, Division 1 and Class II, Division 1 (dual rated) wiring, fixtures, 
			process equipment, and instrumentation are recommended for synthesis, 
			formulation, mixing, wet blending, and casting explosives, 
			heating/drying of uncased explosives, plus any explosives processing 
			that is expected to produce sublimation.  

		(3)	Class II, Division 1 wiring, fixtures, process equipment, and 
			instrumentation are recommended for screening, grinding, blending, 
			pressing, dry machining explosives, and weighing of explosives 
			powders, the use of explosive or ignitable dust mixtures with explosives 
			present, plus any explosives process that is expected to produce dust 
			from explosives that is suspended in the air.  

		(4)	Class II, Division 2 wiring, fixtures, process equipment, and 
			instrumentation are recommended for storage, inspection, assembly, and 
			wet machining of explosives, heating of fully encased explosives, plus, 
			any explosives operation capable of producing dust of explosives that 
			can accumulate on electrical equipment or apparatus.  Class II, Division 
			1 or dual-rated equipment and wiring can be substituted.  

		(5)	General Purpose wiring, fixtures, process equipment, and 
			instrumentation are allowed for shipping and receiving operations with 
			fully encased explosives or explosives packaged in DOT/DoD approved 
			shipping containers and areas in explosives facilities where no 
			explosives are present.  Examples are offices, control rooms, halls, rest 
			rooms, and mechanical equipment rooms.  General Purpose Areas may 
			be established in explosives locations if facility management can 
			determine, based on documented analysis of the processes involved and 
			the separation between explosives operations requiring Class I or 
			Class II rated electrical wiring, fixtures, process equipment, and 
			instrumentation and the General Purpose Area is established and 
			maintained such that:  

			(a)	Migration of explosive or ignitable gases, vapors or dust 
				mixtures into the General Purpose Area from the rated area (not 
				to be confused with the NEC Classified locations) will not occur 
				under normal operating conditions.  

			(b)	Ignition energy that may be developed in the General Purpose 
				Area will not be transferred to the rated area (not to be confused 
				with the NEC Classified locations), even under electrical fault 
				conditions.  

		(6)	Due to the potential for unacceptable consequences concerning 
			operations with nuclear explosives, subassemblies, or components, they 
			shall be evaluated in accordance with section 8.0 of this chapter to 
			determine the appropriate electrical hazard classification.  

		(7)	Facility management shall evaluate, by using the principles given 
			above, all explosives operations not specified elsewhere in this 
			section to determine the appropriate electrical classification.  The 
			analysis shall be documented.  

8.2	Electrical Supply System

	a.	Mutual hazards may exist where explosives facilities are located near electrical 
		supply lines and stepping equipment.  To protect against these hazards, the NEC 
		(NFPA 70) and the following requirements apply to all new construction or 
		major modifications, and should be considered for existing facilities.  Quantity 
		distance requirements are based on air blast overpressure only, and fragment 
		distances are not considered.  Electric supply lines that can be interrupted 
		without loss of power, i.e., power is rerouted through existing lines and/or 
		networks, can be separated from explosives sites in accordance with 
		section 8.2a(1)(c) below.  

		(1)	Electric transmission lines (those carrying 69 kV or more) and the tower 
			or poles supporting them shall be located no closer to explosives 
			facilities than:  

			(a)	Inhabited-building distance if the line in question is part of a 
				grid/system serving a large, offsite area.  

			(b)	Public traffic route distance if loss of the line will not create 
				serious social or economic hardships to offsite areas.  

			(c)	Electric distribution lines (those carrying less than 69 kV) and the 
				tower or poles supporting them shall be located no closer to 
				explosives facilities than public traffic route distance.  

		(3)	Aboveground, DOE-controlled electric service lines required to be in 
			close proximity to a combustible constructed or uncovered explosives 
			facility shall be no closer to that facility than the length of the lines 
			between the poles or towers supporting the lines, unless an effective 
			means is provided to ensure that broken, energized lines cannot come 
			into contact with the facility or its appurtenances.  Acceptable controls 
			include, but are not limited to, geographic terrain features, instantaneous 
			circuit interrupters, cable trays, and linking lines together.  Equivalent 
			underground service lines shall be located as specified in Chapter VI, 
			section 3.2.4 and Table VI-2.  

		(4)	Electric lines serving explosives facilities shall be installed underground 
			from a point not less than 50 ft away from such facilities.  

		(5)	Unmanned privately owned or contractor-owned electrical substations 
			(not to include building transformers and associated switch gear) shall be 
			no closer to explosives facilities than public traffic route distances.  

		(6)	Certain types of auxiliary power facilities, transformer stations, etc., 
			present fire hazards to explosives facilities.  Transformers and associated 
			electrical switching apparatus serving one explosives facility or complex 
			that do not present a fire hazard to the facility (i.e., dry-type, “less 
			flammable” oil-insulated, etc.) shall be located as specified by NFPA 70 
			and Factory Mutual Data Sheet 5-4/14-18.  Normal oil-insulated 
			transformers shall be located at least 50 ft from an explosives facility or 
			as specified in DoD 6055.9-STD.  

		(7)	Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) should be provided if electrical 
			power is critical to an explosives operation during a power shut down or 
			interruption.  

8.3	Building Electrical Service Entrance

	a.	Each electrical service entrance for explosives facilities should be provided with 
		the following protection.  

		(1)	Arrestors

			(a)	Lightning arrestors shall be the appropriate size and class for the 
				application and system voltages and shall be provided on the 
				primary side of the transformer located in, on, or near the 
				facility.  See Chapter X for additional lightning protection 
				guidance.  

			(b)	Surge arrestors and surge capacitors shall be provided on the 
				supply side of the main service disconnect.  

		(2)	Grounding

	b.	The lightning arrestor, surge arrestor, surge capacitors, service entrance ground, 
		and building ground shall be interconnected.  This interconnection shall be made 
		outside the building.  

8.4	Permanent Wiring, Fixtures and Equipment

	a.	Permanent facility wiring includes installed electrical wiring, communications 
		wiring, security systems wiring, and fire protection systems alarm and response 
		wiring.  Permanent equipment includes the installed electrical fixtures and 
		equipment associated with permanent wiring.  Permanent equipment also 
		includes equipment such as HVAC, hoods, vacuum pumps, hydraulic pumps, 
		etc.  

	b.	New Facilities and Renovations

		(1)	All permanent equipment and wiring of a room shall conform to 
			section 8.1 of this chapter for the operations for which the room is 
			designed.  

		(2)	To maintain maximum, long-term flexibility of use of facilities, facility 
			management is encouraged to consider installing dual-rated (i.e., Class I, 
			Division 1 and Class II, Division 1) permanent wiring and equipment in 
			explosives operating rooms.  As a minimum, installation should allow for 
			easy conversion to dual-rated wiring and equipment.  

		(3)	Rated electrical fixtures shall not be painted. 
 
		(4)	Where equipment cannot meet the above requirements, the equipment 
			should be located outside the hazardous environment.  Otherwise, the 
			equipment shall be analyzed and controlled as specified for electrical 
			equipment and instrumentation in section 8.6 of this chapter.  

	c.	Existing Facilities

		(1)	Permanent wiring and equipment shall meet the requirements in effect at 
			the time the facility was built.  The wiring and equipment shall be 
			brought into conformance with section 8.4b of this chapter  If remodeling 
			or renovation would affect the wiring or equipment.  

		(2)	As a minimum, the permanent wiring and equipment shall meet the 
			requirements of section 8.1 of this chapter for the explosives operations 
			performed.  

		(3)	Where equipment cannot meet the above requirements, the equipment 
			should be located outside the hazardous environment.  Otherwise, the 
			equipment shall be analyzed and controlled as specified for electrical 
			equipment and instrumentation in section 8.6 of this chapter.  

8.5	Flexible Cords/Wiring

	a.	Wiring from the permanent premises wiring to process equipment or process 
		instrumentation should be rated for actual explosives operation being performed, 
		per section 8.1 of this chapter.  As a minimum, flexible cords shall be hard usage 
		service cord.  Splices are not allowed.  In addition, all flexible cords, receptacles, 
		and attachment plugs must be equipped with three prongs so that the third prong 
		(green wire) acts as ground.  The cord shall be supported so that there is no 
		tension on the terminal connections.  Seals shall be provided where the cord 
		enters explosion-proof enclosures.  For Hazard Class I or Class II, Division I or 
		dual-rated operations, the cord shall also be equipped with explosion-proof 
		attachment plugs.  Flexible cords shall not be used where fixed installed 
		electrical wiring is required by equipment design.  

8.6	Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation

	a.	Non-permanent electrical equipment and instrumentation shall comply with the 
		following:  

		(1)	Process instrumentation and process equipment should be rated for 
			the actual environment based on the explosives operation being 
			performed as defined in section 8.1 of this chapter.  

		(2)	If the thermal properties of an explosive are such that Group G or Group D 
			equipment provides inadequate surface temperature limits, special 
			protection shall be provided, or the equipment shall be excluded from the 
			hazardous location.  This equipment shall not have a surface temperature 
			exceeding the lowest onset of the exotherm of the explosive, as 
			determined by the differential thermal analysis (DTA) test or the 
			differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) test in section 12.1.1c of this 
			chapter and Chapter VIII, section 2.2d.  Approved instrumentation and 
			equipment shall be administratively controlled and marked accordingly.  

		(3)	When Hazard Class I or II, as applicable, equipment or instrumentation is 
			required but not available, the substitute equipment should be purged or 
			pressurized in accordance with NFPA 496, or be determined intrinsically 
			safe (without regard to voltage) in accordance with NEC Article 
			504/ANSI 913/NFPA 493 by facility management, or in Hazard Class II 
			locations, sealed to prevent explosives contamination.  When the 
			equipment is purged or sealed, the surface temperature shall not exceed 
			120°C for normal operations, or 165?C for overload conditions. 

		(4)	All electrical equipment or instrumentation in hazardous locations that do 
			not meet the requirements of section 8.6a(3) above shall be evaluated and 
			documented as to their suitability for use in the specific area and 
			operation.  The following are suggested areas for evaluation:  

			(a)	Malfunction of electrical equipment or process instrumentation.  

				1	Consequences of electrical initiated fire. 
 
				2	Initiation of explosives by electrical current. 
 
			(b)	Initiation of explosives by electrical fault. 
 
			(c)	Breach of containment resulting in exposed explosives or spillage 
				of explosives.  

			(d)	Ignition sources arising from physical damage to the wiring 
				method used (e.g., crushing by forklift or other material handling 
				equipment, frayed cords, etc.).  

			(e)	Exposed electrical conductors or connectors that could make 
				contact with leg wires or cables of explosive devices during routine 
				handling.  

			(f)	Exposed electrical conductors or connectors on which explosives 
				dust or vapors could collect.  

			(g)	Collection of explosives dust on or in the equipment.  

			(h)	Sensitivity to heat and spark, and thermal stability of explosives 
				involved.  

		(5)	If the equipment is purged, the airflow shall be monitored per 
			NFPA 496 and interlocked to the equipment, or alarmed, if operator 
			shutdown of the machine can be reliably performed immediately 
			upon receipt of that alarm.  

		(6)	A waiver is not required when the wiring, equipment or 
			instrumentation meets the requirements of either section 8.6a(3) or 
			8.6a(4) of this chapter.  If the wiring, equipment or instrumentation 
			cannot meet these criteria or has not been evaluated by facility 
			management, it shall meet the appropriate electrical hazard class 
			requirements.  

	b.	Watertight equipment (that would pass a NEMA 4 hose test) should be 
		provided in those locations where water-explosives mixtures may come in 
		contact with the electrical equipment and wiring.  

8.7	Electrical Requirements for Outdoor Test Areas

	a.	Requirements for outdoor test areas shall be contained in the specific test 
		procedures.  

8.8	Hand-held, Battery-Powered Lights and Instruments

	a.	Flashlights and hand lanterns, powered by low-voltage dry cell batteries and 
		“miners cap lamps” approved as “permissible” by the U.S. Bureau of Mines 
		and by UL for NEC Class I hazardous locations, are authorized for use in 
		both Class I and Class II locations.  Devices that provide “cold light” through 
		chemical action are acceptable for use in any location.  

	b.	Hand-held instruments, watches, calculators, hearing aids, cameras, 
		self-contained flashes, and communication devices powered by low-voltage 
		dry cell batteries are authorized for use in the vicinity of Hazard Class II, 
		Division 2 rated hazardous operations and during setup of Hazard Class I or 
		Class II, Division 1 hazardous operations.  They shall be evaluated as to their 
		intrinsic safety and approved by facility management prior to use during 
		Hazard Class I or Class II, Division 1 hazardous operations. 
 
	c.	Hand-held, battery-operated equipment shall not come in direct or indirect 
		contact with bare explosives.  Batteries shall not be removed or replaced in 
		hazard rated areas (section 8.1 of this chapter).  

8.9	Non-Rated Extension Lighting

	a.	When it is necessary to use extension lights within 10 ft of exposed 
		explosives, where no airborne dust exists, the following requirements shall 
		apply:  

		(1)	Lights shall be mounted on heavy tripod stands. 
 
		(2)	The lights shall be fitted with exterior globes to prevent the falling of 
			hot sparks or particles that might ignite the explosives.  

		(3)	The lights shall be fitted with adequate guards to protect the globes 
			from physical damage. 
 
		(4)	The wire providing power to the lights shall be positioned so as to 
			prevent vehicles and personnel damaging the cord.  

		(5)	The flexible cord shall comply with section 8.5 of this chapter.  

		(6)	The light stand shall be secured to prevent tipping.  


		(7)	Neither the light nor the power cord shall be allowed to come in 
			direct or indirect contact with the explosives. 
 
		(8)	Lights shall be positioned outside the fall-down distance to the 
			explosives.  

8.10	Laboratories

	a.	Permanent wiring and equipment for existing laboratory areas are not 
		required to meet the requirements of section 8.4 of this chapter, except as 
		noted in section 8.4c(1).  

	b.	Process equipment used for synthesis, heating, drying, mechanical mixing, 
		and blending shall be dual-rated.  Weighing equipment shall be Class II, 
		Division 1 or mechanical.  These operations shall be isolated from non-rated 
		wiring, electrical equipment, and instrumentation in a manner that prevents 
		dust or vapors reaching an ignition source.  

	c.	When laboratory equipment cannot meet the requirements of section 8.10b 
		of this chapter, apply section 8.6a(3) or 8.6a(4) of this chapter.  

8.11	Modifications

	a.	Operating buildings and magazines are constructed to perform a specific 
		function that dictates the requirements for electrical installation.  Procedures 
		shall be established by each DOE facility to control the use and modification 
		of electrical equipment in explosives areas and ensure that uniform standards 
		are adhered to throughout the facility.  

9.0	VACUUM EQUIPMENT

9.1	General

	a.	Precautions shall be taken to prevent explosives from entering any vacuum 
		system not specifically designed to collect explosives.  

9.2	Labeling

	a.	All vacuum lines used for explosives operations should be labeled to warn 
		maintenance personnel that explosive residue may be present in these lines.  One 
		suggested label is:  

				DANGER, MAY CONTAIN EXPLOSIVES

9.3	Disassembly

	a.	All vacuum lines that are potentially contaminated with explosives shall be 
		disassembled according to approved operating procedures.  Disassembly should 
		be accomplished at flanged connections or elastomeric tubing whenever practical.  
		No attempt should be made to disassemble a vacuum line at a threaded 
		connection.  The design or installation of any new vacuum lines shall not employ 
		demountable, internal screwed, or threaded fittings or connections unless welded 
		or fixed permanently in place.  

9.4	Traps or Filters

	a.	Vacuum pumps used to evacuate processes for explosives operations shall be 
		equipped with primary and secondary intake line traps or filters to prevent 
		explosives from contaminating the pump.  

10.0	EXPLOSIVES DUST EXHAUST VENTILATION AND COLLECTION SYSTEMS

10.1	General

	a.	Exhaust ventilation should be used to control explosives dust (or other hazardous 
		materials used in or resulting from explosives operations) that could be 
		hazardous to operating personnel or contaminate the operating area.  Exhaust 
		ventilation used to remove explosives dust requires an approved dust collection 
		system to prevent the release of the dust outside the building.  

10.2	Exhaust Ventilation

	a.	Exhaust ventilation and collection systems that control explosives dust and 
		materials associated with explosives production shall be designed to meet 
		minimum requirements established in the ACGIH Ventilation Manual (most 
		current edition) and this Manual.  The exhaust ventilation system should 
		have sufficient capture and adequate makeup air to reduce exposure to 
		explosives dusts, or materials used in conjunction with explosives, to as low 
		as reasonably achievable.  This is particularly important when toxicity 
		information and occupational exposure limits are not available for the 
		explosives in use.  

10.3	Dust Collection Systems

	a.	A “wet collector” that moistens the dust close to the point of origin and keeps 
		it wet until the dust is removed for disposal is preferred.  A “dry type 
		collector” is permitted when authorized by a Standard Operating Procedure 
		(SOP).  

	b.	Dust collectors shall be designed to prevent explosives dust from reaching any 
		mechanical power source of the collection system.  

	c.	All conductive portions of the collection system shall be grounded and 
		bonded.  

	d.	A dust collection system shall not have screw threads, recesses, or cracks that 
		may be exposed to explosives contamination.  

	e.	Dust collection lines should be equipped with flanged connectors and inspection 
		ports. 
 
	f.	Pipes or ducts through which explosives are conveyed shall have long radius 
		bends with a centerline radius at least four times the diameter of the ducts or 
		pipes.  

	g.	Dust collectors shall be emptied and cleaned on a regular basis as system use 
		warrants and must be inspected periodically.  

10.4	Dust Collection Location

	a.	Wherever practical, dry-type explosives dust collection chambers should be 
		located outside operating buildings, in the open, or in buildings exclusively set 
		aside for the purpose.  

	b.	Stationary and portable wet-type collectors may be placed in the explosives 
		operating bays or cubicles, provided the quantity of explosives in the collectors 
		does not exceed 2 kg.  

11.0	DRAINS AND SUMPS

11.1	Collection

	a.	All drain lines handling explosive wastes shall be provided with sumps, 
		clarifiers, weirs or basins of adequate design and capacity for removal of 
		explosives by settling.  The drains shall be of adequate capacity, free of pockets, 
		and have sufficient slope (at least 1/4 in./ft) to prevent the settling out of 
		explosives in the line until it reaches the sump, clarifier, weir or other settling 
		basin.  

	b.	Drain gutters within buildings may be constructed with a slope of 1/8 in./ft.  
		However, a satisfactory program of cleaning must be developed to assure 
		removal of all hazardous material from drain gutters.  

	c.	Sumps must be designed to prevent suspended and settleable solid explosive 
		material from being carried in the wash waters beyond the sumps.  The design 
		shall allow sufficient settling time on the basis of the settling rate of the material 
		and the usual flow rate.  Sumps shall be constructed so that the overflow will not 
		disturb any floating solids.  The design must also permit easy removal of 
		collected explosives and retention of those explosives that float on water (until 
		they can be skimmed off).  When using settling basins to supplement sumps, 
		they will be cleaned periodically and a log will be maintained.  

	d.	Explosives collection trays for sumps will be constructed of nonferrous metal.  
		Hoisting equipment used to lift trays will be designed to prevent the trays from 
		binding on the sides of the sump.  Bolted sump tanks or other types of 
		construction that permit the explosives to settle in obscure or hidden spaces are 
		prohibited.  

	e.	Drains between the source of explosive and the sump shall be troughs with 
		rounded bottoms and removable ventilated covers to facilitate inspection for 
		accumulation of explosives.  This requirement applies to all new construction 
		and major modifications and should be considered for existing facilities.  Short 
		sections of closed pipe or trough are permitted if they can be visually inspected 
		for blockage or explosives buildup.  Explosives or explosives-contaminated 
		waste liquids shall not be released into closed drains and sewers.  

	f.	Drains shall be inspected periodically and necessary steps taken to prevent the 
		buildup of explosive deposits.  

11.2	Effluent

	a.	Drains containing explosive waste materials must not be connected in a manner 
		that allows such wastes to empty into the normal sewage systems carrying inert or 
		sanitary wastes.  

	b.	Care must be taken to avoid the possibility of deposition of explosives from sump 
		effluent due to drying, temperature changes, or interaction with other industrial 
		contaminations.  When handling explosives that are appreciably soluble in water, 
		sweeping and other dry collecting measures shall be used to keep such out of the 
		drainage system.  

	c.	The combination of sumps, settling ponds, and other systems must remove 
		explosives so that outflows meet environmental standards.  

12.0	PROCESSING

12.1	Heating, Drying, and Thermal Conditioning

12.1.1	General

	a.	Heating explosives is potentially dangerous for several reasons:  

		(1)	Elevated temperature can increase an explosive’s sensitivity to other 
			stimuli such as impact, shock, friction and static electricity.  
		(2)	At or above the explosive’s critical temperature (see definition in 
			Chapter I, section 6.0) a runaway chemical reaction may occur that 
			can produce an explosion or fire.  

		(3)	Elevated temperature of an explosive in a sealed container can cause 
			gas generation and pressure rupture of the containment even at 
			temperatures below the critical temperature.  

		(4)	Chemically incompatible or reactive materials, which may be 
			present as accidental contaminants, as components of the 
			formulation, or in external contact with the explosive, can intensify 
			the preceding dangers or cause them to occur at lower temperatures.  

		(5)	Nonuniform heating can cause excessively hot regions in the 
			explosives.  Causes may include inadequate agitation of fluid 
			explosives, nonuniform heaters, and nonuniform heat conduction.  

	b.	Critical temperature is a system property that depends on a combination of 
		the explosive’s chemical decomposition reactions, its mass and shape, heat 
		transfer and other thermal characteristics of the system, and the 
		confinement or pressure of decomposition products, especially gases.  
		Several different methods of thermal analysis can be used to determine or 
		estimate the critical temperature.  The process is typically quite complex 
		because of the complexity of normally occurring chemical reactions.  For 
		operational safety, a conservative estimate (i.e., lower limit) of the critical 
		temperature for a heating operation shall be made (uncertainties of 10 to 
		25°C being common).  Analogy of one explosive or system to another 
		similar system with a reliable thermal analysis may be used to determine 
		safe heating temperatures and heating times (heating limits).  

	c.	The DTA, DSC (differential scanning calorimetry), or other comparable 
		techniques can be used to measure the temperature of the onset of an 
		exothermic reaction in an explosive.  The test results can be used to rank 
		the thermal stability of explosives and as part of a thermal analysis.  
		Because of the complexity of chemical decomposition, however, the 
		DTA/DSC exotherm has no systematic relationship to the critical 
		temperature and is unreliable for estimating safe heating limits.  Exotherm 
		temperature is always considerably above critical temperature and usually 
		increases with the heating rate of the test.  Where the DTA/DSC exotherm 
		is specified as a standard for temperature control, the test heating rate shall 
		not exceed 10°C per minute.  DTA/DSC shall not be used as a sole means 
		for establishing heating limits (except as specified in section 8.6a(4) of this 
		chapter).  

	d.	Each facility shall conduct or obtain thermal analysis of any explosives 
		system before the explosive is heated in a contact operation or in 
		association with hazardous radioactive materials as described in 
		section 13.6.2 of this chapter.  From this analysis, a heating limit for the 
		explosives system shall be established which the EDC shall approve.  All 
		factors in sections a and b, above, shall be considered.  Any significant 
		change in the geometry or an increase in mass should be considered a new 
		explosives system.  For a contact operation, the maximum temperature 
		should be set at least 10°C below the critical temperature.  For heating 
		explosives in association with hazardous radioactive materials, the 
		maximum temperature should be set at least 20°C below the critical 
		temperature.  Facility management may approve heating to a temperature 
		greater than the above specifications if a documented analysis of the 
		explosive’s thermal characteristics indicates that an acceptable time or 
		temperature safety factor is still present for a specific operation.  These 
		operations shall be conducted remotely.  

	e.	Heating controls for each operation shall be established and specified in 
		written operating procedures.  Specified conditions should be set at the 
		lowest temperatures and heating times to do the job efficiently and should 
		not exceed the heating limit for the explosives system.  Factors to consider 
		when establishing heating controls include the heating limit and accuracy of 
		the estimated critical temperature, accuracy of the temperature control 
		equipment, and the likelihood of incompatible chemical contamination and 
		other operational parameters.  

12.1.2	Heating and Drying Equipment

	a.	Heat should be done by steam, hot water, friction air, or electrically heated 
		transfer fluid.  Redundant, automatic heat controls shall limit temperatures.  

	b.	In systems heated by steam only, the requirements for redundant, automatic 
		heat controls shall be satisfied if a pressure-reducing valve, pressure relief 
		valve, and thermostatic valve on the system control the steam pressure. 
 
	c.	In electricity heated systems, a manual reset secondary overtemperature 
		system consisting of a controller, failsafe sensor, and an interrupting device 
		shall be provided to interrupt the heat supply source if the primary system 
		fails.  The secondary interrupter shall be separate from the primary 
		interrupter.  The upper limit of the primary controller is determined by the 
		desired operating temperature limit.  The secondary (override) controller is 
		set at a higher temperature but should not exceed the maximum temperature 
		determined by the heating limit specified for the explosives system as 
		determined in section 12.1.1d of this chapter.  

	d.	Visual and/or audible alarms should be provided to alert operating 
		personnel to abnormal temperature conditions.  The heating of explosives 
		should be monitored at all times.  

	e.	The air or gas used to condition exposed explosives shall not be recirculated 
		if directly heated by electrical resistance elements.  

	f.	Drying or heating ovens should be vented to a safe location outdoors.  
		Water wash or filtration of the exhaust may be required.  If exhaust fans are 
		used, they shall be interlocked with the heat source.  

12.1.3	Heating and Drying Operations

	a.	Heating and drying shall be performed under the mildest set of conditions 
		that will accomplish the task safely and efficiently.  A thermal analysis 
		shall be made and a written procedure prepared consistent with 
		section 12.1.1.  The procedure shall include controls on the mass and 
		geometry (thickness of the layer, etc.) of the material that may be heated. 
 
	b.	Except as described in section 12.1.3c, below, drying shall be achieved by 
		circulating a warm, dry gas—either air or inert—over or through the 
		material. 
 
	c.	Small samples may be dried by placement in desiccators or by subjecting 
		them to vacuum.  Vacuum drying of larger items should be preceded by 
		drying at atmospheric pressure to remove quantities of moisture or solvent 
		before vacuum is applied to remove the final traces of moisture or solvent.  
		Explosives having a vapor pressure exceeding 1 x 10-4 mm Hg at the 
		drying temperature shall not be subjected to vacuum drying.  A cold trap 
		shall be used for vacuum drying where the vapor pressure of the explosives 
		is unknown.
  
	d.	A vapor-air mixture within explosive concentration limits shall be avoided.  
		Such a vapor-air mixture can be controlled by providing sufficient airflow 
		to maintain a vapor concentration well below the lower flammability limit 
		or by using an inert atmosphere.  For inert atmosphere, positive purge shall 
		be used to preclude oxygen leakage into the unit.  If vapor concentrations 
		approaching a flammable level are anticipated, they shall be monitored.  
		Airflow shall be controlled to prevent dusting.  

	e.	When heating explosives whose vapor pressure may cause undesired 
		condensation of explosives on equipment parts, heating shall be conducted 
		in a manner to control condensation of the explosive material.  This control 
		should be accomplished by heating the exhaust system or by circulating the 
		air at a rate that will keep the explosives concentration below the level at 
		which condensation could occur.  

	f.	The proper operation of heater controls shall be verified on a regular 
		schedule established by site management.  

12.2	Pressing

	a.	Explosives pressing operations subject explosives to high pressures to achieve a 
		physical change.  Pressing of explosives formulations is done routinely to 
		consolidate explosive materials into configurations required for test assemblies or 
		weapon systems.  Two common types of pressing operations commonly performed 
		are isostatic/hydrostatic and punch and die.  The following safety guidelines apply 
		to these types of pressing operations.  

12.2.1	General

	a.	Explosives pressing operations shall be conducted as remote operations.  

	b.	The correct functioning of press interlock systems shall be verified at 
		regular intervals.  

	c.	Pressing mandrels, punches and dies used in explosives operations shall be 
		examined regularly during periods of use for evidence of structural failure.  
		Suitable nondestructive test methods shall be used to perform the 
		examination.  Site management shall establish intervals between 
		inspections for each tooling design before committing the tooling to use.  
		The inspection interval and updating should be based on experience with 
		similar tooling designs and configurations.  All new or modified mandrels, 
		punches, and dies shall be inspected before their first use.  At least one 
		pressing cycle should be completed with mock explosives before 
		proceeding to explosives.  

	d.	Pressure controllers and indicators shall be calibrated periodically to ensure 
		accurate control and monitoring of pressing operations.  

	e.	Press parts that contact explosive materials shall be cleaned thoroughly to 
		remove residual explosives before use with a different explosive 
		formulation. 

	f.	Temperature control for heated presses and dies shall comply with the 
		requirements of sections 12.1.2a and 12.1.2b of this chapter.  

	g.	All pressing assemblies shall be designed or procedural controls established 
		to minimize or eliminate the extrusion of explosives between two mating 
		metal surfaces during the pressing operation.  

	h.	Operations with explosive powders should be performed in a manner that 
		reduces the release of explosives dust and thereby reduces operator 
		exposure and general room contamination.  For operations involving large 
		amounts of powders, local exhaust ventilation with a dust collection 
		system should be provided.  Respiratory protection to prevent inhalation 
		of explosives dust may be required when adequate ventilation is not 
		available.  

12.2.2	Isostatic/Hydrostatic Pressing

	a.	Before an elastomeric container or mandrel constructed of a new material 
		is introduced into a pressing operation (where it will contact explosives), 
		the material shall be evaluated for compatibility with the explosives.  

	b.	All pressing vessels shall be examined for evidence of cracking or other 
		signs of incipient structural failure at regular use intervals by suitable 
		nondestructive test methods.  Local management shall establish 
		examination intervals.  

	c.	Before large-scale pressings of new explosives or explosives 
		formulations, the materials shall be evaluated for thermal stability (see 
		scaleup procedures, Chapter VIII).  “New explosives or explosives 
		formulations” refer to those that are “new” to large-scale pressing.  
		Stability test results shall be used to assist in establishing safe pressing 
		conditions for the specific pressing size.  

	d.	For isostatic pressing, procedural controls shall be established to ensure 
		that:  

		(1)	An acceptable vacuum can be obtained on the mandrel assembly 
			to prevent adiabatic heating during pressing; and

		(2)	Air is bled out of the press before pressurization.  

	e.	Consideration should be given to the use of fire-resistant hydraulic fluids.  
		New fluids must be checked to ensure compatibility with the explosives 
		used.  

12.2.3	Punch and Die Pressing

	a.	All pressing punches and dies shall be inspected visually for damage, 
		deformation, and cleanliness before installation on a press.  Any 
		questionable condition shall be resolved before the pressing proceeds to 
		ensure that the operation’s safety is not compromised.  

	b.	All punches, dies, and press attachment fixtures shall be designed to 
		minimize the possibility of the punch being misaligned with the die 
		(resulting in gouging of a die surface during pressing).  Press setup 
		procedures shall provide for operator verification of proper alignment 
		before pressing.  

	c.	The responsible user of a gauging section capable of performing the 
		necessary measurements shall control punches and dies, which should be 
		maintained in matched sets.  A group other than the user should check 
		critical punch and die dimensions before initial use and at suitable 
		intervals thereafter.  Suitable check intervals for each punch and die 
		design should be determined as in section 12.2.1c of this chapter.  

12.3	Extruding

	a.	Extrusion operations involve the flow of plastic explosives material under 
		pressure into a cavity in a component of an assembly.  The following general 
		safety guidelines apply to this type of extrusion operation.  

		(1)	Extrusion operations shall be conducted remotely.  Contact extrusion may 
			be performed only when extruding nonexplosive or mock materials or 
			when hand-extruding small quantities with no metal-to-metal contact.  
			Precautions shall be taken to prevent personnel from being injured by the 
			rupture of pressurized equipment.  

		(2)	The explosive shall be protected against extrusion beyond the tooling 
			cavity.  Precautions shall be taken to prevent foreign material from 
			entering the explosives. 
 
		(3)	New designs and significant design changes in equipment, tooling or 
			components shall be tested by mock explosives extrusion before actual 
			explosives extrusion.  

		(4)	Pressure controllers and indicators shall be calibrated periodically to 
			ensure that proper sealing and extrusion pressures are maintained.  

		(5)	Extrusion press parts shall be cleaned thoroughly of residual explosives 
			remaining from the previous operation before the press is loaded with a 
			different explosive formulation.  

		(6)	Hand-loading of extrudable explosives is covered in section 12.8.2 of this 
			section.  

12.4	Machining

	a.	Explosives machining is a class of operation that involves cutting of the explosive 
		material, often in conjunction with harder inert materials.  Heat buildup from 
		friction at the cutting surface can result in thermal initiation of the explosive 
		substance.  Precautions must be taken to limit this buildup and to facilitate the 
		dissipation of thermal energy.  

12.4.1	Equipment Requirements

	a.	Interlocks shall be provided for wet machining operations to ensure 
		coolant flow before machine operation.  The coolant flow shall be 
		monitored and the equipment automatically and safely shut down if 
		loss-of-coolant flow is detected.  The interlocks shall be protected from 
		tampering and unauthorized disabling by physical means, or supervisory 
		control.  

	b.	The vacuum on vacuum chuck holding fixtures shall be monitored and 
		interlocked with the equipment for automatic shutdown of machining in 
		the event of vacuum loss.  

	c.	Tool path controls (stops, limits, design patterns, etc.) shall be provided to 
		prevent the unplanned travel path of a tool or work piece.  Positive means 
		or secondary verification shall control and limit equipment speed and feed 
		rates.  

	d.	Pressure-relief devices should be installed on pneumatically or 
		hydraulically powered equipment to ensure safe operation.  

	e.	Metal chip waste from machining operations should be kept separate from 
		explosives waste.  When this is not possible, mixed explosives and metal 
		waste should be completely segregated from unmixed waste and held for 
		separate disposal.  

	f.	Dull or damaged tools shall not be used.  A cutting tool inspection and 
		control program shall be established for explosives machining operations.  

	g.	Consideration will be given to additional safety control devices (i.e., 
		design patterns, safety templates, chip thickness sensors, tool pressure 
		sensors, etc.), depending on the type of machining operations, size of 
		explosives pieces, types of explosives, and other factors.  

	h.	The “machining overtest” shall be considered a testing operation (see 
		section 12.4.4e of this section) and shall be exempt from equipment 
		requirements.  

12.4.2	Contact or Remote Operations

	a.	The following explosives may be contact machined if a compatible, 
		nontoxic, noncombustible coolant is used.  Explosives not listed below 
		shall be machined remotely.  

		(1)	Amatol

		(2)	Baratol

		(3)	Boracitol

		(4)	Explosive D

		(5)	Octol with no more than 75 percent HMX

		(6)	Pentolite with no more than 50 percent PETN

		(7)	RDX/TNT compositions with no more than 75 percent RDX.  
			These compositions include Composition B, Composition B-3, and 
			75/25 Cyclotol.  

		(8)	TATB and TATB compositions with an inert plastic binder

		(9)	TNT

	b.	Explosive assemblies composed of any combination of explosives listed 
		in the above section and the following nonexplosive materials may be 
		contact machined if a compatible, nontoxic, noncombustible coolant is 
		used.  If an assembly contains an explosive not listed in the above 
		section or a nonexplosive material not listed below, the assembly shall be 
		machined remotely: 
 
		(1)	Foamed plastics.  

		(2)	Solid plastics.  

		(3)	Adhesives.  

		(4)	Amorphous graphite.  

		(5)	Calcium sulfate casting powder.  

		(6)	Explosives mockup.  

	c.	On any explosive, with certain exceptions for IHE and explosives 
		machined by fluid jet (see section 12.4.2e of this section), the following 
		operations shall be performed remotely:  

		(1)	Drilling of holes smaller than 5 cm in diameter, except for IHE, 
			where drilling of holes smaller than 5 mm shall be done remotely.  

		(2)	Coring operations (except contact operations on those explosives 
			listed in section 12.4.2a of this chapter, when the requirements of 
			section 12.4.5b of this chapter are met and a coolant is used).  

		(3)	Machining of any metal/explosives interface.  

		(4)	Machining IHE subassemblies with Hazard Class/Division 1.1 
			boosters installed.  

		(5)	Dry machining, except that IHE booster pellets may be contact 
			machined provided a dust collection system (see section 10.0 of 
			this chapter) is used.  

		(6)	Machining of explosives in Phase II or earlier stage of scaleup 
			(see Chapter VIII).  

	d.	Machining of primary explosives shall be avoided.  Alternative 
		methods, such as forming or pressing to final dimensions, should be 
		used to achieve the desired shape.  

	e.	IHE, PBX 9404, and LX-10 may be contact-machined by high-pressure 
		fluid jet.  The fluid-jet system pressure shall not exceed 20,000 psig.  
		The velocity of the fluid jet shall not exceed 520 m per second 
		(theoretical).  The jet nozzle orifice diameter shall not exceed 0.010 in.  
		The system machining fluid shall be water and shall not contain any 
		abrasives.  See section 12.15 of this section for use of low-pressure 
		fluids.  

	f.	Concurrent contact machining operations in the same bay should not be 
		permitted.  However, concurrent IHE contact machining is permitted 
		when other explosives are not present.  

	g.	Provisions shall be made to monitor remote machining operations 
		visually.  Consideration should be given to video recording and audio 
		monitoring.  

12.4.3	Setup and Preparation

	a.	The following precautions are provided for preparation and setup before 
		beginning the machining operation.  

		(1)	Before setting up the explosive work piece, the equipment shall 
			be checked for proper function and the absence of interference 
			between stationary and moving parts.  

		(2)	A mock explosive should be used to test the equipment function 
			of any operation using new tooling or new part programs.  

		(3)	The explosive component to be machined shall be inspected by 
			radiography or other suitable nondestructive test methods for 
			cracks, voids, and high-density foreign objects.  The component 
			shall also be checked for proper size.  

		(4)	Caution shall be exercised during setup and adjustment to avoid 
			pinching, dropping, crushing, or otherwise applying abnormal 
			forces to explosives present.  Special care must be given to 
			mounting and centering a part on a vacuum chuck.  Special 
			attention must be given to the proper functioning of the vacuum 
			system and its surface holding area.  

		(5)	Limits on machine speed, depth of cut, and feed rate shall be set 
			before the machine is activated.  

		(6)	Interlocks shall be functional before the machine is used to 
			machine explosives.  They should be tested once per shift.  

12.4.4	Operations Guidelines

	a.	The minimum tool speed necessary for safe and efficient operation 
		should be maintained.  The following maximums shall apply:  

		(1)	The relative velocity between the explosives surface and the 
			cutting tool shall not exceed 65 m per minute; 

		(2)	Work pieces or cutting tools shall not be rotated at speeds 
			exceeding 525 rpm; and

		(3)	The feed rate of the cutting tool or work piece shall not exceed 
			1 mm per revolution.  

	b.	The work piece, fixture, cutting tools, equipment, floor, troughs, drains, 
		etc., should be cleaned frequently to prevent accumulation of explosive 
		wastes.  

		(1)	Approved measures should be taken to prevent rust and 
			minimize deterioration of precision surfaces.  

		(2)	All tools, equipment, fixtures, and parts should be cleaned 
			before removal from the work area for storage.  

	c.	For contact machining operations, coolant shall be used to aid in 
		removing heat and cutting waste.  Coolant should be used for remote 
		operations when practical.  

		(1)	Coolant should be used on explosives/inert assemblies.  When 
			the explosives portion is included in the cut, coolant shall be 
			used for contact machining.  Coolant is not required if the 
			explosives portion of the assembly is contained (no bare 
			explosives) and is not included in the cut, or the machining is 
			conducted remotely.  

		(2)	Spray mist coolant may be used during machining of the 
			explosive-containing assemblies if the explosives portion is not 
			included in the cut.  

	d.	All visible explosives shall be removed from the machine before 
		maintenance or repairs.  No safeguards or interlocks shall be removed 
		or made inoperative, except by authorized personnel.  

	e.	Before submitting an explosive for contact machining approval, a 
		machining overtest program shall be conducted to identify the 
		machinability and associated hazards.  These HE qualification tests 
		should be performed in facilities set aside for these purposes.  

		(1)	Machining overtest shall be conducted remotely. 
 
		(2)	Operations performed during sample preparation may include 
			gaging and assembly, but shall not include any contact cutting, 
			scraping, or other material-removing operations on explosives 
			specimens.  

12.4.5	Specific Machining Operations

	a.	Drilling

		(1)	Drilling operations should be set up to maximize the ease of 
			achieving and maintaining proper alignment and to facilitate 
			removal of explosives chips, fines, and powder. 
 
		(2)	The fluting length on the drill bit shall exceed the depth of the 
			hole to be drilled by a minimum of 1.3 cm or one hole diameter, 
			whichever is greater.  

		(3)	The depth of a hole shall not be extended more than 1.5 times 
			the hole diameter (up to a maximum of 2 cm) during a single 
			insertion of the drill into the material.  After each insertion, it 
			may be advisable to withdraw the drill completely and remove 
			loose explosives from the cavity and drill bit before reinserting.  

		(4)	Coolant flow (when used) shall be directed to the 
			explosives/cutting edge interface.  Drill bits with coolant 
			channels to the tip of the drill should be used.  Pulsating 
			pressure types of coolant supplies are recommended for drills of 
			6-mm diameter or less to remove drill fines.  

	b.	Coring

		(1)	Coolant flow (when used) shall be directed at the 
			explosives/cutting edge interface.  

		(2)	If the hole is not positioned to provide continuous breakout, the 
			coring shall be accomplished incrementally.  When done in 
			increments, no more than 1.5 times the diameter of the hole shall 
			be cored at one time.  Before the maximum distance has been 
			cored, the tool shall be totally retracted from the hole and 
			cleaned.  The hole shall be flushed with coolant.  

	c.	Sawing

		(1)	The feed rate of the saw blade or work piece shall not exceed 
			7.5 cm per minute.  

		(2)	For band saws, coolant flow should be directed onto the saw 
			blade at the cutting interface, guide rollers, and the drive 
			wheel/saw blade interface.  For circular saws, the coolant flow 
			should be directed at the explosives/cutting edge interface.  

12.5	Dry Screening

	a.	Dry explosives often require screening for size classification or to remove 
		extraneous objects.  Magnetic separators are often advisable to remove ferrous 
		materials that may have passed through the screens.  The following guidelines 
		shall be observed for screening operations and equipment:  

		(1)	Operations using mechanical screens shall be performed remotely.  
			Equipment shall be designed and operations performed to avoid 
			subjecting explosive materials to pinching, friction, or impact.  

		(2)	Screening small samples may be performed as a contact operation if 
			approved by written procedures.
  
		(3)	Equipment shall be electrically bonded and grounded.  
			Resistance-to-ground shall be 10 ohms or less and shall be inspected on 
			a regular basis.  Equipment used to transfer electrostatic-sensitive 
			explosives to or from screens shall be conductive and electrically 
			bonded to the screen during transfer.  

		(4)	Operations and equipment shall be set up to minimize and control dust 
			generation.  

		(5)	Operating areas and equipment therein shall be cleaned frequently to 
			avoid accumulation of explosives dust.  

		(6)	Precautions shall be taken to prevent metals from rubbing together 
			when the screens vibrate.  Vibrating equipment shall be inspected 
			frequently for developing cracks subject to contamination by 
			explosives.  

12.6	Blending

	a.	Dry blending of explosives shall be performed remotely.  However, dry, hand 
		blending of small samples may be performed as a contact operation when 
		approved by facility management.  

	b.	Equipment should be designed and operations performed to minimize generation 
		and dispersion of explosives dust.  

	c.	Equipment shall be electrically bonded to provide a continuous path-to-ground.  
		Resistance-to-ground shall be 10 ohms or less and shall be inspected regularly.  
		Equipment used to transfer electrostatic-sensitive explosives to or from blenders 
		shall be conductive and electrically bonded to the blender during transfer.  

12.7	Melting

	a.	The heat for melting explosives shall be supplied by saturated steam, hot water, or 
		another temperature-controlled medium.  The steam pressure shall be controlled 
		in accordance with section 12.1.2b of this section.  

	b.	Temperatures for contact melting of TNT-based explosives (except those 
		containing PETN, e.g., pentolite) and keeping them molten shall not exceed 
		121°C.  The temperature limit for TNT explosives containing PETN shall be 
		109°C.  

	c.	Feeding of the melt kettle and the melting operation shall be controlled or 
		regulated to prevent the formation of large chunks of explosives.  

	d.	Alarms shall be provided on the melt temperature and on melt kettle agitation 
		when the operation will be left unattended.  Alarms shall sound if the temperature 
		exceeds the specifications of section 12.7b above, or if agitation ceases.  

	e.	Wherever possible, valves, piping, and threaded bolts and fasteners should be 
		eliminated from melted explosives handling systems.  

	f.	Provisions should be made for emergency emptying of melt kettles in the event of 
		temperature control problems or power failures.  

	g.	Melt kettles shall be constructed with corrosion-resistant materials.  Construction 
		shall not contain blind holes, threads, or cracks in areas exposed to melted 
		explosives.  Welds shall be inspected and found free of cracks and porosity.  

12.8	Assembly and Disassembly

	a.	Hand tools and electrical and pneumatic tools that may subject the explosives to 
		abnormal frictional forces, pinching, or excessive pressure, or cause significant 
		deformation, shall not be used during assembly or disassembly.  However, they 
		may be used on nonexplosive components.  

12.8.1	Assembly Operations

	a.	During assembly operations, the operator should be alert for mismated 
		parts and misaligned components.  Hard surfaces that will contact 
		explosives shall be precisely machined to mate with the explosives, lined 
		with cushioning material, or otherwise configured to keep sharp corners or 
		projections from being forced into explosives.  

12.8.2	Loading Assemblies with Plastic or Extrudable Explosives

	a.	The workability and plasticity of plastic and extrudable explosives 
		improves with increased temperature.  Plastic explosive Compositions C-3 
		and C-4 may be softened by warming to between 21°C and 38°C before 
		working.  Extrudable explosives LX-13 and extex should be kept as cool 
		as practical to prevent premature curing.  

	b.	Contamination of these explosives with abrasive or foreign substances 
		shall be avoided.  

	c.	The assembly shall be loaded with small increments of explosives and 
		may be tamped with suitable nonmetallic tools to eliminate air voids.  

12.8.3	Disassembly Operations

	a.	Before beginning disassembly, the device’s condition shall be assessed to 
		determine if it can be safely handled.  

	b.	Disassembly operations shall be planned before actual disassembly.  
		Possible problem areas caused by method of construction or physical 
		condition shall be considered.  A safety procedure for each unique 
		disassembly shall be written and reviewed.  

	c.	If disassembly would normally cause release of the pressure or if there is a 
		credible hazard of the pressure causing components to fly apart, before 
		beginning disassembly, pressurized units shall be thoroughly 
		depressurized.  

	d.	If approved for use, compressed air shall be applied cautiously during 
		disassembly to avoid causing to fly apart.  This may require remote 
		operation.  Use hydraulic pressure if possible.  

12.8.4	Personnel Protection for Disassembly Operations

	a.	Operators and all other personnel shall be provided complete 
		protection from disassembly operations involving conditions known or 
		expected to require the use of abnormal force.  Such operations require 
		either remote operation or the use of an operational shield.  The 
		shielding shall be designed to protect personnel at other operations or 
		locations from blast and missiles arising from a possible explosion.  

	b.	When disassembly requires that the operator be protected by an 
		operational shield, disassembly shall be defined as complete separation 
		(threads or other connections) of component parts.  For example, parts 
		shall not be loosened while the operator is properly protected and then 
		separated without the same protection.
  
12.9	Inspection

	a.	This section deals with the following types of explosives inspection 
		operations:  

		(1)	Inspecting incoming explosives raw materials and pressed explosive 
			billets for foreign bodies or cracks that could cause operating or safety 
			problems in processing operations; and

		(2) 	Measuring physical parameters of explosive pieces and assemblies.  

	b.	To enhance the safety of process operations, positive steps shall be taken to 
		assure the proper identification of explosives used and to prevent foreign 
		material from entering the operation via the explosives raw materials or via 
		materials in process (i.e., pressed explosive billets).  Some of the means by 
		which this can be accomplished include:  

		(1)	Screening.  

		(2)	Visual inspection.  

		(3)	Magnetic separation.  

		(4)	Radiographic inspection.  

		(5)	Chemical analysis.  

	c.	The following principles shall be followed in the design and operation of 
		explosives inspection equipment.  

		(1)	Pinch points shall be eliminated or steps taken to preclude explosives 
			contamination of pinch points.  

		(2)	Threaded fasteners or threads of measuring equipment shall be protected 
			from explosives contamination.  Care shall be taken to prevent parts of the 
			measuring or handling equipment from becoming loose and getting into 
			the explosives.  

		(3)	Inspection fixtures shall be designed to secure the explosives piece or 
			assembly securely to prevent toppling, rolling, or dropping during 
			measurement operations.  This is especially critical if the explosives 
			assembly is in motion (i.e., spinning, vibrating, etc.) during measurement.  

12.10	Synthesis

	a.	Synthesis and other chemical processing of new explosives compounds are 
		ongoing activities at DOE weapons facilities.  Synthesis operations are conducted 
		both on laboratory and pilot scales.  The Explosives Development Committee 
		(EDC, Chapter VIII) will approve new operations and materials.  In the 
		laboratory, the new material will initially be prepared on a small scale and 
		characterized as to sensitivity, physical, and explosive properties.  Also, the 
		laboratory will develop processing techniques for the material.  If laboratory 
		studies determine that the explosive is of continuing interest, it may be advanced 
		to the Pilot Plant where processing techniques will be refined and scaled up.  The 
		Pilot Plant will produce sufficient material for larger-scale physical, explosive, 
		and sensitivity characterizations.  

12.10.1	Laboratory-Scale Synthesis

	a.	Before initiation of work, the professional staff member who is directing 
		or conducting the synthesis shall analyze each explosives or potential 
		explosives experiment for the type and magnitude of hazards.  This staff 
		member shall be responsible for planning the proper selection of 
		conditions, quantity of explosives, and safety devices to be employed.  

	b.	Experiments should be designed to minimize the amount of explosives 
		involved and to use the mildest conditions that will yield the desired 
		information.  

	c.	New explosives materials shall be afforded extra protection against 
		impact, pinching, friction, pressure, sparks, contamination, and 
		deterioration.  If it is necessary to subject explosives to any of these 
		conditions, the operation shall be conducted remotely or adequate 
		personnel shielding shall be provided.  

12.10.2	Pilot- or Processing-Scale Synthesis

	a.	When operations are conducted using flammable or toxic liquids or gases, 
		local ventilation shall be provided to prevent hazardous vapor 
		concentrations from forming in the work area.  

	b.	Alarms should be provided for coolant flow to the reactor, for reaction 
		vessel agitation, and for reactor temperature.  These alarms should be 
		energized whenever coolant supply or agitation is critical to prevent a 
		runaway reaction.  When agitation is critical, the reactor should be 
		equipped with at least two sources of power to maintain agitation in the 
		event of failure.  For example, a reactor might employ an air or inert gas 
		bubble tube as a backup for a mechanical agitator.
  
	c.	The reaction vessel should be equipped with an emergency system.  Upon 
		activation, the emergency system will automatically cool the vessel or will 
		open or close a vessel dump valve as required by the process.  Contact 
		operations should be conducted with a means to activate the emergency 
		system manually.  

	d.	The building exhaust ventilation system shall be operating during all 
		synthesis operations involving flammable liquids.  

	e.	An alarm or monitor should be provided for the critical exhaust ventilation 
		system to warn operating personnel if airflow rates drop below a 
		predetermined level.  

	f.	Emergency plans shall be established for the synthesis area, specifying 
		action to be taken in the event an alarm sounds.  

	g.	Before operations begin, all equipment shall be set up and checked for 
		proper function.  Now or infrequently used equipment shall be tested in a 
		“dry run” before being used with any hazardous material.  

	h.	All explosives synthesis process equipment shall be maintained routinely.  
		Equipment with defects that could affect safe operations shall be tagged to 
		prevent its use until repairs are completed.  

	i.	Before starting any process operation, the transfer lines to be used should 
		be properly labeled and their function specified in the operating procedure.  

	j.	Transfer hoses and portable equipment not involved in the process shall be 
		removed from the work area and stored in their proper places.  

	k.	All control valves shall be correctly identified according to function.  

	l.	Safety equipment and clothing shall be worn as defined in operating 
		procedures.  

	m.	Agitator blades on reactors and mixers shall be inspected regularly for 
		proper clearance to ensure that there is no pinch point or metal-to-metal 
		contact.  Local facility management shall set up and approve the 
		inspection schedule.  

	n.	Explosives warning signs shall be conspicuously displayed on any 
		processing vessel in which explosive materials are to be left overnight.  

	o.	Any vessel that can be sealed and that can operate above atmospheric 
		pressure shall be equipped with overpressure protection. 
 
	p.	All closed vessels should be purged with inert gas before flammable 
		liquids are introduced.  

	q.	Inert gas pressure should be used to transfer flammable liquids when 
		gravity flow or pumping is not practical.  

12.11	Formulation

	a.	Formulation operations considered in this section involve combining compounds 
		or mixtures when one or more of the ingredients are explosive.  Combining 
		ingredients is commonly accomplished at DOE explosives handling facilities to 
		obtain some desired physical property, combination of properties, or reaction 
		parameters.  

12.11.1	General

	a.	Explosives may be loaded into mixers, mills, and deaerators as an 
		operator-attended, contact operation.  However, the starting, operating, 
		and stopping of such equipment with explosives present shall be 
		accomplished remotely.  As an exception, mixing-type operations 
		involving a low energy transfer may be allowed as a contact operation 
		(e.g., slurry coating and melt agitation).  

	b.	Equipment used for explosives formulation shall be checked for proper 
		operation before adding explosives.  Equipment shall be examined for 
		proper clearances and for metal-to-metal rubbing of moving parts with the 
		potential to contact explosives.  Bearings should be sealed to preclude 
		explosives contamination.  

	c.	Fast-action deluge systems shall be considered for equipment (e.g., 
		mixers, mills, and deaerators) used for easily ignitable explosives 
		formulations.  

	d.	Hot water, cold water, or steam, can be applied to mixers and mills.  
		Heating fluid temperatures shall not exceed known safe operating 
		temperatures for the explosives involved.  When roll milling, allowance 
		shall also be made for viscous shear heating of the explosives in process.  
		Heated systems shall comply with the requirements of sections 12.1.2a 
		and 12.1.2b of this section.  

12.11.2	Mixing

	a.	Mixer seals and gaskets shall be checked on a regular schedule and 
		cleaned or replaced as required.  

	b.	Checks should be made to ensure that maximum particle sizes of 
		ingredients or hard agglomerates of proposed mixes are less than the 
		blade-to-blade or blade-to-bowl clearances.  

	c.	Initial cleaning with solvents used for dissolving or suspending the 
		explosives residues shall be done remotely (except for melt-mix or slurry 
		coating vessels).  

	d.	Explosive powders and plastic-bonded explosives formulations may be 
		mixed wet in a contact operation.  This can be accomplished if the wet 
		mixture cannot be initiated with energy sources available and the viscosity 
		is kept low and the possibility of isolated portions of the mix becoming 
		dry is precluded.  

12.11.3	Ball or Jar Milling

	a.	Balls that are porous or contain cavities shall not be permitted in mills for 
		grinding explosives.  

	b.	Grinding media contaminated with explosives slurry shall be protected 
		from excessive impact when emptying of the mill.  

	c.	After grinding, a careful inspection shall be made to ensure that the 
		explosive is free of grinding media.  Dispose of any explosives 
		contaminated with broken media.  

	d.	After separating the explosive, the grinding media shall be thoroughly 
		cleaned and inspected before reuse or disposal.  

12.11.4	Roll Milling

	a.	Positive stops should be installed on roll mills to prevent rolls from 
		rubbing against each other.  

	b.	Before starting a milling operation on a roll mill, the contact of the scraper 
		blade with the roll should be adjusted to the minimum pressure necessary 
		to perform the operation.  

	c.	Roll gaps should be set as wide as possible while still allowing adequate 
		working of the material.  The minimum gap setting shall be 0.1 mm.  

	d.	Roll rpm should be held at the minimum required to process the material 
		adequately. 
 
	e.	All roll mills that may be contact operated (e.g., with nonexplosive 
		materials) shall be equipped with emergency stop devices (breaker bar, or 
		chain) within easy reach of the operator.  

12.12	Concurrent Contact Operations

	a.	The preferred setup for explosives operations is to perform each operation in a 
		separate location to preclude any adverse operation interaction.  Because such an 
		arrangement is frequently impractical, concurrent operations may be permitted if 
		the following conditions exist:  

		(1)	Potential equipment-operator interactions between the two operations have 
			been analyzed and the risk is not appreciably greater than that for both 
			operations considered separately.  

		(2)	Explosive materials in either operation are not exposed to stress conditions 
			such as elevated temperature (melting or heat conditioning), elevated 
			pressures (pressing or extruding), or deformation/shear (machining or 
			cutting).  

		(3)	Mixing of materials in the concurrent operations will not create 
			compatibility problems.  

		(4)	Each operator is aware at all times of concurrent operations in his or 
			her area.  

12.13	Contamination Prevention

	a.	Precautions shall be taken to avoid mutual contamination when two or more 
		incompatible explosives or materials are handled on a single line or within one 
		building or room.  This includes vacuum systems and explosives scrap collection.  
		Inadvertent mixing of incompatible explosives materials can be hazardous not 
		only to manufacturing facilities and personnel but also to the user if such 
		materials are loaded into explosives devices.  

	b.	When two or more explosives are used in a line or within a building and mixing is 
		not intended, the materials shall be segregated in separate locations.  Containers 
		shall be clearly marked with the weight and contents identified.  Care shall be 
		exercised to properly segregate material in service magazines and in operating 
		buildings.  

	c.	When a different explosive is to be used in process equipment, the equipment 
		shall be thoroughly cleaned, and excess explosive from the previous job should 
		be removed from the bay.  This eliminates the hazards caused by mixing 
		materials.  

	d.	In any explosives operation, permanent service lines shall be labeled as to their 
		contents.  Valves and switches on service lines whose operation can result in a 
		hazardous situation shall be labeled as to their function.  

12.14	Hand-Cutting and Finishing Operations

	a.	Hand-cutting finishing, which may include cutting, trimming, coring, and lapping 
		(surface polishing) explosive materials shall be performed using the mildest 
		energy input that will accomplish the task safely and efficiently.  The facility 
		EDC shall review and approve the safety of hand-cutting and finishing operations, 
		which shall then be incorporated into an operating procedure before starting the 
		operation.  

12.15	Use of Low-Pressure Fluids

	a.	Low-pressure fluids (liquid pressure less than 1,500 psig) may be handled as in 
		contact operations to aid explosives dissolution, rinsing, system flushing and 
		similar operations under the following conditions:  

		(1)	The fluid system shall have a pressure relief device installed to prevent 
			system overpressurization.  

		(2)	Low-pressure fluid operations may be used with those explosives 
			whose impact sensitivity is less than PETN.  Such operations may 
			be used on other explosives only after analyzing the energies 
			involved.  

		(3)	Solvents shall be compatible with the explosive material.  Controls for 
			their use shall be specified in operating procedures.  

		(4)	For use of pressures above 1,500 psig, see section 12.4.2e of this 
			chapter.  

13.0	TESTING

13.1	General

	a.	This section covers the following types of testing operations.  

		(1)	Explosives test shots, gun firings (both small arms and large caliber), 
			and environmental, physical-property, and sensitivity testing of 
			explosives specimens. 

		(2)	Explosives-related experiments or tests for which the explosive 
			material is used to provide desired results such as a seismic yield, 
			overpressure effects, pulse energy, or other special applications.  
13.2	Test Planning

13.2.1	Hazards Analysis

	a.	Proposed testing programs shall be examined for all foreseeable 
		hazards involved in the test.  This shall be done with knowledge of the 
		construction and operation of all standard and nonstandard equipment 
		to be used, as well as the type of explosives involved.  

	b.	Tests that are unique in their application or pose obvious hazards shall 
		adhere to the requirements contained in Chapter VII, section 2.1.  

	c.	Large-scale tests with the potential to propel missiles off Government 
		land shall receive a formal risk analysis of the worst-case conditions 
		for each test type.  Such analysis shall address the probability and 
		potential severity of hazards with respect to injury and property 
		damage.  

13.2.2	Firing Areas

	a.	A secured firing area (danger zone) shall be established for each test to 
		protect personnel from hazardous blast overpressure, firebrands, 
		fragments, or projectiles from an explosives shot or gun firing.  The 
		danger zone can be determined by the application of the principles 
		outlined in DoD 6055.9-STD.  

	b.	Selected firing areas shall minimize the potential for secondary fires 
		and adverse effects to the environment.  

13.3	Test Firing

13.3.1	General Range Standards

	a.	Each DOE explosives test site shall establish procedures to ensure that 
		site personnel and transients are not exposed to firebrands, fragments, 
		or excessive blast overpressure from a test shot.  In establishing these 
		procedures, the following guidelines shall be considered.  

	b.	During testing operations, personnel access to each test site shall be 
		controlled.  Unattended roadblocks, gates or doors used to prevent 
		personnel from entering the danger zone during a test should be 
		interlocked or locked with specially controlled keys.  

	c.	Before test firing, all firing site personnel and visitors shall be 
		accounted for and in a safe place.  

	d.	A visual inspection of the danger zone shall be performed immediately 
		before each test shot or series of shots as applicable, to ensure that no 
		transients are present.  

	e.	The danger zone shall be free of service personnel (e.g., telephone 
		repairmen, surveyors, or road maintenance crews, etc.) during test 
		operations.  The control point shall notify service personnel of the 
		specific requirements under which they may safely work in the area 
		when testing is not in progress.  In addition, the control point shall 
		notify firing site personnel of the presence and location of service 
		personnel in their areas.  

	f.	Clearance for a test or test series shall be coordinated with all test sites 
		and other areas that could be affected.  A warning shall be provided to 
		every affected area immediately before each firing.  

	g.	Detonation of very large explosive shots, numerous smaller shots, or 
		gun firings may result in hearing damage and may exceed the DOE 
		allowable limits for impulse noise.  Perform a noise evaluation of these 
		activities to ensure that adequate hearing protection is provided to 
		those involved.  

	h.	During test operations, all personnel assigned to the test area shall be 
		continuously alert for movement of personnel, vehicles, and aircraft.  

	i.	Test firings often create hazardous conditions for aircraft operating in 
		the airspace near the danger zone.  If this airspace is subject to air 
		traffic, precautions shall be taken to ensure that the airspace is clear of 
		traffic at the time of firing.
  
	j.	Each firing site shall establish personnel limits based on the number of 
		people actually needed to conduct an operation and the number of 
		casuals that should be present.  The responsible person at the firing site 
		shall enforce these personnel limits.  

	k.	Testing of explosives can result in personnel exposure to toxic 
		decomposition products such as carbon monoxide, hydrogen chloride, 
		hydrogen fluoride, hydrogen cyanide, and nitrogen oxides.  It is good 
		practice to allow the detonation cloud to disperse before leaving 
		protective bunkers.  Fragment-danger-zone distances are normally 
		adequate to allow cloud dispersal and protect outside personnel from 
		excessive exposure.  

	l.	For testing that can result in abnormally long hazardous conditions 
		following the test, the procedure shall require a suitable waiting period 
		before personnel leave their shelter or safe haven area. 

13.3.2	Test Setup

	a.	When and where possible, test setup work should be done before 
		receipt of explosives.   Such work includes the following:  

		(1)	Firing site safety devices (at both the bunker and remote from 
			the firing bunker) shall be checked at regular intervals.  Such 
			safety devices include warning lights, door and gate firing 
			circuit interlocks, emergency firing circuit cutoff switches, and 
			grounding.  

		(2)	All firing pad and shot stand setup work that requires power 
			tools or other potential spark-producing devices should be 
			completed.  The firing pad shall be cleared of all unnecessary 
			gear.  Special precautions and procedures will be developed 
			and implemented if power tools or other spark-producing 
			devices are needed after explosives are delivered to the firing 
			pad.  

		(3)	If a special structure is required, as much work as possible 
			should be accomplished on the structure, including assembly of 
			all materials. 
 
		(4)	When possible, all diagnostic equipment shall be set up, 
			checked, and tested in a dry run.  

13.3.3	Pin Switches and Other Non-initiating Circuits

	a.	Whenever pin switches and other non-initiating circuits are checked 
		(such as for charging current or leakage) and are in contact with or in 
		close proximity to explosives, the check should be performed 
		remotely.  Other non-initiating electrical circuits include strain gauges, 
		pressure transducers, thermocouples, etc., that may be affixed to or 
		close to the explosives within an assembly.  A continuity-only 
		(resistance) check may be accomplished as a contact operation with an 
		electrical instrument approved for use with the particular explosive 
		device.  When low-firing-current actuators are involved, it may be 
		advisable to conduct these tests remotely (see section 13.8 of this 
		section).  

13.3.4	Lightning Storms

	a.	All operations at open, test-firing areas shall be discontinued during 
		lightning storms when explosives are present.  Completion of a test 
		after receiving a lightning alert may be allowed only if test preparation 
		has progressed to the point that discontinuing testing represents a 
		greater personnel exposure than completing testing.  

13.3.5	Low-Energy Electroexplosive Devices

	a.	When using hot-wire or low-energy EEDs for a test firing, the 
		following apply: 
 
		(1)	Procedures shall be established to ensure that RF, FM, and 
			television transmitters with sufficient output energy to 
			initiate an EED at the test site are either restricted to a safe 
			distance from the site or not operated.  Table II-2, and 
			Table II-3 specify minimum safe distances for several types 
			of transmitters at several output power levels. 
 
		(2)	Blasting caps and other low-firing-current igniters or 
			detonators shall be kept separate from explosives at all 
			times, except during actual test charge assembly and setup. 

		(3)	At all times wiring systems for the explosive charge and 
			any low-firing-current initiators shall be kept insulated 
			from all sources of extraneous current unless the weapon 
			components have an exposed electrical ground by design.  
			Connections made using weapon wiring connectors or 
			cables are acceptable without further modification.  Shunts 
			shall be left on low-energy initiators or lead wires until 
			connections are made.  Connections shall be taped or 
			otherwise insulated. 
 
		(4)	Test units containing low-firing-current actuators or 
			detonators shall be clearly marked.  No contact operations 
			involving electrical testing shall be permitted on this type 
			of unit unless an electrical meter for the specific application 
			is used.  

Table II-1.  Minimum Safe Distances Between RF Transmitters  

Table II-2.  Minimum Safe Distances between TV and FM Broadcasting Transmitters and 

Table II-3.  Minimum Safe Distances Between Mobile RF Transmitters and Electric 

13.3.6	Explosives Storage in Firing Areas

	a.	Explosives or ammunition storage at a firing area shall be located such 
		that ignition, explosion, or detonation is improbable if a fire, unplanned 
		explosion, or detonation occurs in the area.  

	b.	Tests that require storage of explosives or ammunition at the firing site 
		beyond a day’s event shall conform to the requirements of section 17.0 of 
		this chapter.  

13.3.7	Warning Signals

	a.	Each DOE explosives testing facility shall use standard audible signals to 
		warn personnel of any impending firing in a test area.  Each facility shall 
		establish signals, which facility management shall approve.  

13.3.8	Grass Fires

	a.	Before conducting a test shot at an outside firing pad, an evaluation shall 
		be made to determine the need to control grass fires that the test may 
		initiate.  

13.3.9	Firing Leads

	a.	All detonator lead wires shall be electrically insulated.  During setup on 
		the firing point, firing leads or cables of low-energy detonators for 
		explosive assemblies shall be kept properly shorted.  

13.3.10	Unattended Test Assemblies

	a.	When necessary, a test assembly may be left unattended on the firing pad 
		during off-shift hours under the following minimum conditions:  

		(1)	If explosives are present, appropriate safety warning signs shall be 
			displayed at all entrances to the firing pad.  

		(2)	Protective services and fire department personnel shall be notified 
			of the explosives location.  This location must be in a 
			controlled-access or secured area.  

		(3)	If low-energy detonators are present on the assembly, their leads or 
			cables shall be shorted.  

13.3.11	Post-firing Controls

	a.	If the firing appears to be normal, test personnel shall remain in the 
		protective shelter for a suitable waiting period.  The test procedure shall 
		specify the waiting period, which shall be sufficient to assure adequate 
		dissipation of smoke and dust.  In some cases, developing and analyzing 
		the diagnostic film for misfires may be helpful.  

	b.	During the waiting period, all power to the firing units shall be turned off 
		or disconnected.  Whenever possible, detonator cables should be 
		disconnected from the firing units and shunted and grounded, and the 
		firing unit capacitor grounded.  

	c.	After the waiting period, one qualified person shall inspect the firing pad 
		in person or by remote TV to determine the results of the shot before other 
		personnel leave the shelter.  

	d.	If the inspection confirms that safe conditions exist, the lead person shall 
		signal “all clear.”

	e.	When a partial detonation or a test misfire occurs or is suspected, the 
		firing area shall be inspected for unreacted explosives after the minimum 
		waiting period (see section 13.7 of this chapter).  

	f.	Recovered explosives from a destructive test shall be placed in an 
		explosives storage magazine as Storage Compatibility Group L unless a 
		documented analysis determines that the explosives do not present a 
		special risk.  

13.3.12	Contamination of Firing Areas

	a.	Test firing areas are subject to explosives contamination from incomplete 
		or failed detonations when the explosives are subjected to varying forms 
		of energy input.  Although most of this contamination will be cleaned up 
		in the post-shot inspection, the following steps shall be taken to reduce the 
		hazards from residual explosives contamination:  

		(1)	A contamination zone for each firing area shall be established and 
			permanently annotated on facility site plans.  

		(2)	Personnel access to explosives-contaminated areas shall be 
			controlled.  

		(3)	Service personnel shall not work in the area without the permission 
			of testing-area management and only when supervised by a 
			management-approved person. 
 
13.3.13	Test Range Firing Circuit Criteria

	a.	The following criteria are guidelines for the design of electrical circuits 
		used to arm and initiate squibs, igniters, detonators and similar EEDs 
		during test firing:  

		(1)	Fire control circuits shall include both an ARM switch and a FIRE 
			switch.  For low-firing-current initiators, the safe mode of the 
			arming circuit should interrupt the firing circuit and short-circuit 
			and ground the EED terminals.  Manual shorting and grounding is 
			permitted.  

		(2)	Each electrical ARM and FIRE circuit shall include an interlock 
			device consisting of a safety plug or a key-operated switch to 
			prevent inadvertent energization.  

		(3)	The safety plug design and configuration shall be unique for its 
			application and used to prevent unauthorized or accidental 
			activation of a firing circuit.  Key-operated switches for ARM and 
			FIRE circuits shall be designed to lock in the safe (OFF) position 
			when the control key is removed.  Duplicate keys or safety plugs 
			shall not be permitted in any one test area.  

		(4)	During shot-preparation the key or safety plug for a firing site shall 
			be in the control of the lead operator at all times.  

		(5)	FIRE control circuits in test areas shall be documented for 
			operational control purposes.  Documentation shall include 
			complete wiring diagrams, electrical schematics, and cable 
			function lists.  All changes or modifications to FIRE control 
			circuits shall be reviewed for safety and approved by other 
			appropriate departments before being incorporated into the circuits.  

		(6)	Each FIRE control circuit shall be isolated from all other circuits.  
			A shielded, twisted pair of wires with an outer insulating jacket or 
			coaxial cable should be employed for each circuit.  

		(7)	All sequential timers used in firing circuits shall be “failsafe.”  
			Failure of a component or circuit must not energize the firing 
			circuit. 

		(8)	Test current from the electrical instruments used to perform 
			resistance checks shall not exceed 10 percent of the no-fire rating 
			of the EED in the circuit.  

		(9)	Firing circuits shall be marked clearly or otherwise distinctively 
			identified, and shall be installed so as to prevent inadvertent 
			energization by other circuits.  

13.4	Test Firing in Tanks or Chambers

	a.	Small quantities of explosives may be detonated in cubicles or in pressure vessels.  
		The following requirements apply to such vessels.  

		(1)	The firing vessel and flanges shall be capable of withstanding and 
			confining the effects of the explosion and properly safeguarding 
			personnel.  When new firing chambers are designed and put into service, a 
			safety factor to their operational weight limit must be included during 
			certification testing.  This overtest load should be based on a percentage of 
			the operational explosives weight limit.  For example, a certification test 
			should be performed with an appropriate explosive material weighing 
			125 percent TNT equivalency of the intended operating limit.  

		(2)	The firing circuit should be interlocked with the vessel access door latch 
			so that the door must be closed and latched before the explosive can be 
			fired.  

		(3)	Qualified engineering personnel shall periodically inspect the vessel to 
			ensure that its structural integrity is maintained after repeated detonations.  

		(4)	Test firing is often conducted inside large containment vessels that allow 
			personnel entry but provide a confined working space and limited egress.  
			The SOP must include requirements for ventilating and evaluating the tank 
			or chamber’s atmosphere before personnel entry.  

13.5	Gun Firings

	a.	Work, adjustment, or observation shall not be permitted on a gun while a live 
		round is in the firing chamber.  The only exception is to check azimuth and 
		elevation.  

	b.	Precautions shall be taken to protect personnel or equipment against hazards 
		resulting from errors in assembly or preparation of equipment and ammunition.  
		In particular, the following areas shall be checked.  

		(1)	Adequate filling of hydraulic recoil mechanisms.  

		(2)	Safe function of the firing mechanisms.  (Firing mechanisms, particularly 
			electric firing mechanisms, shall be tested before use to ensure that merely 
			inserting a round or closing of the breech will not result in firing).  

		(3)	Absence of obstructions in the bore.  

	c.	Test weapons other than manually-fired small arms should be equipped for 
		remote control of the safety and for remote cocking.  The safety shall not be 
		advanced to the fire position and the weapon shall not be cocked until all 
		personnel are in a safe location. 
 
	d.	Guns used to fire projectiles at explosives targets shall meet the following criteria.  

		(1)	The gun shall be rigidly mounted so that that the impact area is defined 
			and controlled.  

		(2)	The target shall have an adequate backstop. 

		(3)	Provision should be made to remotely move the gun, remotely remove the 
			propellant charge, or remove the explosives from the line of fire if the gun 
			misfires, unless the hazardous effects of an accidental detonation of the 
			explosive target is contained or effectively shielded from personnel.  

		(4)	Provisions shall be made to collect and remove undetonated explosives 
			from the chamber or area.  

	e.	When using hydrogen gas to fire a light gas gun, the operation shall be remote 
		while hydrogen is present in the gun pressure tanks or in the gun barrel and catch 
		tank after firing.  The hydrogen shall be purged from the entire system with inert 
		gas and the atmosphere checked before personnel are allowed to reenter the gun 
		bay.  

13.6	Ballistic, Environmental, Physical Property and Sensitivity Testing

13.6.1	Checkout of Dynamic Engineering Test Equipment for Explosive Assemblies

	a.	To minimize the possibility of an incident during dynamic testing of 
		explosive assemblies, load-bearing members of the test equipment or 
		explosive assembly should be proof-tested and examined if:  

		(1)	The test equipment is new or has undergone a design modification;

		(2)	Existing test equipment is to be used under unusually severe test 
			conditions (i.e., conditions of velocity, vibration, pressure, load, 
			etc.); or

		(3)	A new or modified explosive assembly is to be tested that affects 
			the loading characteristics of the equipment.  

	b.	Proof-testing of the explosive assembly or test equipment should be 
		conducted before running tests involving systems with explosives.  

	c.	At a minimum, proof-testing should consist of the following sequence of 
		checkouts:  

		(1)	Check out load-bearing members (lifting devices, hold-down 
			mechanisms, fixtures, vehicle cases) to at least 125 percent of rated 
			load using simulated loads (see section 14.4 of this chapter).  

		(2)	“Dry run” tests of actual systems with mock materials in place of 
			explosives and hazardous radioactive materials.  

	d.	If a part failure occurs in either of the checkout tests in sections 13.6.1c(1) 
		and (2), tests involving explosives or radioactive material shall be run until 
		additional checkout tests have demonstrated that the cause of failure has 
		been eliminated.  

13.6.2	Testing of Explosives and Hazardous Radioactive Materials

	a.	Explosives and hazardous radioactive materials (i.e., plutonium, enriched 
		uranium, etc.) shall not be included in the same test or operation if the test 
		or operation is not contained and involves the following:  

		NOTE 1:  Depleted uranium and natural thorium are not considered hazardous 
		radioactive materials for this purpose.  

		NOTE 2:  Nuclear Explosive Operations, covered by DOE 452.2 Series Orders, 
		current version, are exempted from this requirement.  

		(1)	Application of high-energy stimuli (i.e., high shock, impact, or 
			friction levels) to the explosive.  

		(2)	Heating the explosive to within 10°C of the heating limit 
			determined for the explosive system without hazardous radioactive 
			materials consistent with section 12.1.1d of this chapter.  

		(3)	Intimate contact of incompatible material with the explosive as 
			determined by compatibility testing.  

		(4)	Unacceptably high risk of accidental application of stimuli listed in 
			section (1), (2), or (3) above.  

13.6.3	Heating of Explosives Test Specimens

	a.	Before heating an explosive, a thermal analysis shall be conducted and a 
		written procedure prepared consistent with section 12.1.1 of this 
		chapter.  See section 12.1.2 of this chapter for requirements on heating 
		equipment.  

	b.	Contact operations on explosives specimens undergoing thermal 
		conditioning may be permitted if:  

		(1)	The specimen will not be subjected to excessive friction, impact, or 
			spark stimuli during normal operations or during a credible 
			accident scenario.  

		(2)	The explosive involved has satisfied appropriate scaleup 
			sensitivity and stability criteria (see Chapter VIII) and has 
			sufficient handling history to reveal any special characteristics 
			affecting safe use.  

	c.	If an explosives test specimen in a contact operation is discovered to have 
		exceeded the established heating limit for the explosive system, the test 
		shall be terminated and the specimen cooled to ambient temperature.  A 
		procedure should be prepared and approved for the required corrective 
		action (i.e., disassembly or disposal).  

13.6.4	Instrumentation

	a.	Instrumentation directly applied to explosives in a test specimen shall 
		be physically disconnected, isolated, or grounded before personnel may 
		enter the test cell.  Only instrumentation channels that contain devices 
		that limit the current below the level capable of initiating the explosive 
		are exempt.  

	b.	Environmental control transducer leads, not attached to the test specimen 
		and permanently installed in an approved control system, do not need to 
		be grounded or disconnected.  

13.6.5	Explosives Limits

	a.	Explosives specimens shall not be permitted to accumulate in a test 
		cell beyond the quantity required to sustain the test.  For short-term 
		testing (less than one day), specimens present shall not exceed a 
		4-hour supply.  

13.6.6	Drop Testing

	a.	After an explosives drop test, personnel shall wait a minimum of 
		5 minutes before leaving the control bunker to inspect the test pad.  If 
		smoke or flame is observed at the drop test area, entry shall not be 
		permitted until at least 30 minutes after all visual signs have 
		disappeared.  

13.7	Test Failures and Misfires

13.7.1	Explosives Misfire

	a.	If no audible detonation is heard after once pulsing the firing circuit, the 
		firing circuitry and detonators may be checked for continuity.  This 
		checking shall be accomplished from within the control bunker or from a 
		protected location.  If the firing circuits and detonators appear operative, 
		one or more attempts to fire may be made.  

	b.	If the shot still does not fire, the following precautions shall be taken:  

		(1)	Disconnect and de-energize all electrical power sources connected 
			to the shot.  

		(2)	Ensure that all personnel in the danger zone are aware of the 
			misfire and that they must remain under cover until released.  

		(3)	Before personnel are permitted to leave the cover of the bunker, a 
			pre-established waiting period shall be observed.  A minimum 
			30-minute waiting period is advised.  

		(4)	A carefully prepared review of the situation should be initiated in 
			consultation with another knowledgeable person.  

		(5)	After an agreement has been reached and before other personnel 
			are permitted to leave the cover of the bunker, one qualified person 
			should carefully approach and examine the setup to verify that it is 
			safe.  

13.7.2	Misfire of a Remotely Fired Gun

	a.	When a misfire occurs, several more attempts to fire the gun may be 
		made.  If subsequent attempts are also unsuccessful, the following 
		precautions should be taken.  

		(1)	Disconnect all electrical circuitry to the gun to ensure that the 
			firing system cannot be energized.  

		(2)	Before approaching a light-gas driven gun, ensure that it is in a 
			safe condition by venting all pressure in the gun breech.  To reduce 
			the risk of a gas explosion if the driving gas is flammable, the gun 
			breech shall be purged with inert gas after venting. 
 
		(3)	An appropriate waiting period shall be observed before permitting 
			personnel to approach to the gun.  The waiting period shall be at 
			least 10 minutes. 
 
		(4)	When approaching the gun, if there is any indication that powder is 
			burning, personnel shall return to a safe area and observe an 
			additional waiting period of at least 20 minutes. 

		(5)	The gun shall not be approached within the known recoil distance 
			behind the breech or from the front.  Approach to and work on the 
			gun shall be from the sides.  

		(6)	For separate loading guns (i.e., propellant charge is loaded separate 
			from projectiles), the propellant igniter shall be disconnected from 
			the firing mechanism and removed from the gun before any other 
			gun operations.  

		(7)	If possible, the powder chamber of the gun shall be checked for the 
			presence of pressure and vented to the atmosphere before opening 
			the chamber. 
 
	b.	If an unforeseen failure situation arises (e.g., the explosive projectile is 
		stuck in the bore), an emergency procedure shall be prepared and followed 
		to resolve the situation.  

13.8	Electrical Instruments for Use with Explosives Systems

	a.	(Except those covered by DOE O 452.2B, current version, Safety of Nuclear 
		Explosive Operations)

13.8.1	Classification

	a.	Test instruments shall be categorized based on electrical characteristics 
		that affect safe use with explosives systems.  Specifically, the 
		instrument categories shall be established so that each category can be 
		safely applied to one or more of the following classes of explosives 
		systems:  

		(1)	low-energy or hot-wire initiators (blasting caps, actuators, squibs, 
			etc.); 

		(2)	high-energy initiators (EBWs, slappers, etc.); and 

		(3)	non-initiating electrical circuits.  

	b.	Test instruments not meeting the safety criteria may be used on an 
		explosive system only if the activity is considered a remote operation and 
		adequate personnel shielding or separation distance is provided.  

13.8.2	Certification

	a.	Each DOE facility where electrical test instruments are used on explosives 
		systems shall establish a formal system for reviewing and certifying these 
		instruments.  Procedures should also be established for marking 
		instruments to show approved uses and restrictions.  

	b.	Each individual test instrument designated for use on explosives systems 
		shall be certified and prominently labeled with its approved use and with a 
		warning if its use is restricted.  

	c.	Certified instruments shall be inspected and calibrated at prescribed 
		intervals or whenever the instrument is opened for servicing or repair.  
		Access to internal circuitry of certified instruments shall be controlled to 
		prevent unauthorized repairs, maintenance, or alteration.  

	d.	Each DOE facility using electrical instruments to test explosives systems 
		shall maintain records of all instrument types certified.  These records 
		should include type, manufacturer, model, electrical specifications, wiring 
		diagrams, and failure mode analyses.  DOE facilities management shall 
		notify the Explosives Safety Committee chairperson in writing when new 
		electrical instruments have been approved for use with initiating systems.  
		The chairperson shall disseminate this information to all committee 
		members.  

13.8.3	Electrical Instruments for Use with Initiating Electrical Circuits

	a.	Instruments in this category are used with electrical initiation circuits 
		connected to EEDs and may be further categorized for use with either 
		low-energy initiators or high-energy initiators.  Test instruments used for 
		this purpose shall be current-limited.  Before being used on initiating 
		circuits, each instrument wiring diagram and internal circuitry design shall 
		be analyzed, examined, and certified for the following:  

		(1)	The output current through resistance equivalent to that of the 
			class’s minimum resistance initiator should not exceed 1 percent 
			and shall not exceed 10 percent of the no-fire rating for the class’s 
			most sensitive initiator.  The current-limiting features of test 
			instruments shall be internal to the instrument and shall not depend 
			on test circuit load characteristics.  

		(2)	The internal circuitry shall ensure isolation features that require a 
			minimum of two independent failure modes before the specified 
			output current can be exceeded.  

		(3)	A comprehensive (point-to-point, if possible) wiring check should 
			be made to ensure that the wiring corresponds to the diagram and 
			that all components are functioning properly and within 
			specifications.  

13.8.4	Electrical Instruments for Use with Non-initiating Electrical Circuits

	a.	Instruments in this category are used with electrical circuits connected to 
		strain gauges, pin switches, pressure transducers, thermocouples, electrical 
		components, etc., that are affixed to or within an assembly with 
		explosives.  These instruments shall meet the following requirements:  

		(1)	Each specific use of the instrument shall be analyzed to ensure no 
			credible scenario exists whereby the normal test energy from the 
			instrument can ignite explosives charges or initiators in the test.  
			Guidance on operational requirements is contained in sections 
			13.3.3 and 13.6.4 of this section. 
 
		(2)	Where an instrument is used to make measurements on sensors 
			directly applied to explosives, (e.g., bonded strain gauges or pin 
			switches) the instrument shall be certified and have met the 
			requirements of section 13.8.3 of this section.  

		(3)	Instruments used with non-initiating electrical circuits shall be 
			marked prominently with restrictions on use.  Many of these 
			instruments do not meet the requirements for use with initiating 
			systems and must be marked to prevent their use on this type of 
			circuit.  

14.0	MATERIALS HANDLING

14.1	General

	a.	The distance that explosive materials can fall, if accidentally dropped during 
		handling, shall be maintained at a minimum.  

	b.	Hard surfaces and edges of equipment that could be struck by accidentally 
		dropped, consolidated explosives, should be padded with cushioning mats or 
		coverings whenever possible and needed.  (Protective padding includes both sheet 
		material on work surfaces and on equipment and approved floor coverings).  

	c.	Explosives handling shall be permitted only in areas free of obstructions and 
		where the walkway surfaces provide positive footing with no slipping or tripping 
		hazards (e.g., explosives shall not be handled on snowy or icy walkways).  
	d.	Incompatible explosives and materials shall not be handled together. 
 
	e.	Detonators, actuators, EEDs, and other items normally shipped as Hazard 
		Class/Division 1.4 explosives, should be kept in non-propagating trays or 
		containers unless handled individually.  

	f.	Dry explosive materials that generate dust shall be transported in closed 
		containers. 
 
	g.	Containers of explosives or explosive assemblies shall be labeled to identify 
		contents during handling, storage, and transportation.  

	h.	Explosives items that cannot be identified and labeled shall be stored as Hazard 
		Class/Division, Storage Compatibility Group 1.1L.  A material analysis shall be 
		performed to identify the material before it is returned to inventory or disposed of 
		in accordance with regulatory requirements.  

	i.	Components or devices that contain explosives should not be labeled or marked 
		“inert” or “dummy.”  Nonconforming items shall be labeled/tagged indicating that 
		they contain explosives.  New components or devices containing explosives shall 
		not be labeled or marked “inert” or “dummy.”  

14.2	Manual Handling of Bare Consolidated Explosives

	a.	Manual handling shall be minimized as follows:  

		(1)	One person may lift or carry up to 25 kg of explosive only if it can be 
			securely gripped.  

		(2)	Two people may lift or carry 50 kg of explosive only if manual lifting and 
			handling tooling is provided.  

		(3)	Explosive items weighing over 50 kg or that cannot be securely gripped 
			should not be manually handled.  

	b.	Explosives should not be carried up or down stairs except when in protective 
		containers.  

	c.	Operations shall be arranged to minimize the handling distance in all manual 
		explosives handling situations.  

14.3	Carts or Hand Trucks

	a.	Explosives that cannot be handled manually shall be moved only on suitable carts 
		or hand trucks.  Carts used to handle bare explosives shall be provided with a 
		padded surface to support the explosives.  These carts shall be equipped with 
		either a lip, sides of sufficient height, or tiedown straps to prevent the explosives 
		from sliding or rolling off the cart.  The cart-explosive load combination shall 
		have a center of gravity low enough to prevent tipping if the cart suddenly stops.  

	b.	Explosives handling carts or hand trucks should be equipped with brakes.  Carts 
		containing explosives shall be positively secured (e.g., setting wheel brakes or 
		chocking) when the cart is stationary.  

14.4	Mechanical Handling Equipment

	a.	All mechanical handling equipment (i.e., cranes, hoists, slings, etc.) used to lift 
		and move explosives or assemblies containing explosives shall be initially 
		proof-tested, periodically inspected, and maintained in first-class working 
		condition.  The DOE Hoisting and Rigging Standard (DOE-STD-1090-current 
		version) may be used as a guide for testing, inspection, and maintenance.  
	b.	Equipment for vacuum lifting of consolidated explosives must comply with the 
		following requirements:  

		(1)	The lifting equipment shall be designed so that the explosives cannot be 
			dislodged from the vacuum head by jerks or other irregular motions in the 
			hoisting apparatus or bumping of other equipment.  

		(2)	Equipment shall be designed to monitor the available vacuum and to 
			control loss of vacuum if the power or vacuum source fails.  

		(3)	Any handling where a loss of vacuum would allow the explosive to drop 
			an excessive distance shall incorporate some safety device (i.e., collar, net, 
			or strap) to prevent dropping.  “Excessive distance” shall be defined as a 
			distance greater than the minimum drop height giving drop-skid initiation 
			for the explosive being handled.  “Initiation” in the drop-skid test refers to 
			any indication of sample decomposition.  An alternative method of 
			protection can be a cushioning surface under and over all items that may 
			be struck by the falling explosives.  

15.0	MATERIALS RECEIPT

	a.	The following guidelines shall apply to the inspection, receipt, and unloading 
		of explosives materials.  

15.1	Motor Vehicles


	a.	A competent person using an approved checklist at a designated inspection 
		station shall carefully inspect incoming motor vehicles loaded with explosives.  

		(1)	When an inspection reveals that an incoming tractor is in unsatisfactory 
			condition, the tractor should be disconnected from the trailer at the 
			inspection station and moved to a position where it will not endanger 
			any other explosives.  

		(2)	When inspection reveals that a trailer or its load is in an unsatisfactory 
			condition, the trailer shall be moved to a location that, for the particular 
			material involved, is at least inhabited-building distance for the 
			particular material involved from inert and administration areas, 
			hazardous locations, and the facility boundary.  At this location, the 
			unsatisfactory condition shall be corrected before the vehicle is moved 
			to its destination within the facility.  When moving from the inspection 
			station to the isolated location, the route should be as far as possible 
			from built-up areas and areas with high personnel concentrations.  

		(3)	Vehicles that cannot be immediately dispatched to points where they are 
			to be unloaded may be moved to a holding yard that shall be sited in 
			accordance with Chapter VI, section 3.2.3.  

		(4)	Incoming or outgoing explosives loaded trailers that cannot be exchanged 
			directly between the carrier and DOE facilities may be moved to an 
			interchange yard.  Quantity-distance provisions do not apply if the trailers 
			are moved expeditiously.  

	b.	Vehicles shall not be backed up to a dock on which explosives are resting and 
		could be damaged. 
 
	c.	The receiving facility’s doors should be closed while the motor vehicle is in 
		motion or the engine is running.  This requirement does not apply to vehicles 
		equipped with spark arrestors or when no exposed explosives are present.
  
	d.	Once the vehicle is in position, the engine shall be shut off, the brakes set, and the 
		wheels chocked.  

	e.	After unloading, the vehicle shall be inspected for loose explosives materials.  
		Any spilled material shall be cleaned up after the inspection.  Spills involving 
		liquid explosives or explosives in solution shall be reported immediately to the 
		building supervisor.  Appropriate cleanup procedures shall be used.  

15.2	Railcars

	a.	Railcars containing explosives and ammunition entering a DOE facility must be 
		inspected.  This inspection comprises the examination of the outside and 
		underside of each car for damage such as defective brakes, couplings, wheel 
		flanges, etc.; for unauthorized and suspicious articles; and to confirm the 
		individual car numbers and seal numbers against bills of lading.  

		(1)	Cars of ammunition or explosives showing a defect that could affect the 
			facility or contents of the car should be removed to the suspect car spur for 
			additional inspection [see Chapter VI, section 3.2.3a(2)].  

		(2)	Cars that satisfactorily pass inspection may be considered reasonably safe, 
			but care must be exercised in breaking car seals and opening car doors 
			because of possible damage or shifted cargo, leaking containers, etc.  
			Interior inspection should be conducted at the unloading point.  

15.3	Damaged Shipments

	a.	Explosives shipments shall be inspected for damage before storage.  

	b.	Contents of a damaged or broken container shall be removed to another container.  
		Spilled materials shall be cleaned up before continuing with loading or unloading.  

	c.	Any shipment received in damaged condition as a result of inadequate or 
		improper blocking and bracing or as a result of not being loaded in accordance 
		with DOT requirements shall not be reshipped until the damage is corrected.  

16.0	TRANSPORTATION

16.1	Equipment and Operations

16.1.1	General

	a.	Qualified explosives handlers shall load and unload explosives (see 
		Chapter V, section 3.0)

	b.	Explosives shipped on common carriers shall be packaged and 
		shipped in accordance with DOT regulations.  

	c.	Explosives containing items transported by special agents in DOE 
		approved secure transporters are governed by DOE Orders 452.2A 
		Safety of Nuclear Explosives Operations and 460.1A Packaging and 
		Transportation Safety.  

	d.	Section 161.K of The Atomic Energy Act of 1954 as amended and 
		Title 18 USC, Chapter 40, section 845 govern security and 
		emergency vehicles carrying explosives in support of approved 
		contingency plans. 
 
	e.	When transferring explosives within facilities, open body vehicles 
		(other than flat bed types) shall have sides and tailgates or rear doors 
		that are strong and securely fastened to safely retain the explosives.  

	f.	The cargo on partly or completely loaded vehicles (including flat bed 
		types) shall be blocked, braced, chocked, tied down, or otherwise 
		secured to prevent shifting during transit.  

	g.	Precautions shall be taken to prevent the exhausts of motor vehicles 
		from igniting explosive material.  When a motor vehicle approaches 
		within 25 ft of the doors of a structure through which a shipment is to 
		be moved, the doors shall be kept closed until the motor has been 
		turned off, unless the vehicle is equipped with an exhaust spark 
		arrestor or there are no explosives exposed.  Explosives packaged in 
		DOT or onsite containers are not considered exposed.  

	h.	No explosives shall be loaded or unloaded from a motor vehicle while 
		the motor is running unless the motor is required to provide power to 
		vehicle accessories used in loading and unloading operations and is 
		equipped with an exhaust spark arrestor. 
 
	i.	Onsite movements of explosives shall be in accordance with this 
		Manual and local onsite packaging and transportation procedures.  
		Where there is a conflict, this Manual shall take precedence.  

16.1.2	Motor Vehicles

	a.	Offsite shipments

		(1)	DOT regulations govern commercial motor vehicle shipments 
			on public highways.  Motor vehicle shipments from a DOE 
			installation that meet the DOT definition of “in commerce” 
			comply in full with the applicable portions of DOT 
			regulations, and with state and municipal regulations, except 
			as provided for in these regulations.  A qualified inspector 
			shall inspect and approve for compliance with an approved 
			checklist any motor vehicle that may be loaded with 
			explosives (Hazard Class/Division 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3) and is 
			designated for movement over public highways.  After 
			loading, the cargo shall be inspected and approved.  

		(2)	Before motor vehicles loaded with explosive materials leave a 
			DOE facility, drivers shall be informed of the nature of their 
			cargo and appropriate measures to take if the vehicle or load 
			becomes involved in a fire.  

		(3)	Drivers of explosive laden vehicles shall meet the pertinent 
			requirements of 49 CFR Parts 390-397.  

	b.	Onsite shipments

		(1)	All DOE vehicles used to transport explosives onsite should 
			be equipped with the following:  

			(a)	Appropriate Hazard/Class placards plainly visible 
				from all directions.  Placards are required for 
				Class/Division 1.4, 1.5, 1.6 explosives when the gross 
				weight exceeds 1000 lbs.  

			(b)	Adequate tie-down bolts, rings, and straps to secure 
				the explosives load.  

			(c)	The cargo area where the explosives are loaded shall 
				be void of any sharp projections.  (Non-sparking lining 
				is desirable when hauling explosives in transfer 
				containers that are not DOT approved.)

			(d)	A quick-disconnect switch on the battery, if explosives 
				are left loaded on the vehicle overnight.  

			(e)	Two fully charged and serviceable fire extinguishers 
				with a minimum rating of 2A:10BC, with one 
				extinguisher mounted on the outside of the vehicle.  
				Only one extinguisher is required for the transport of 
				Hazard Class/Division 1.4 explosives.  

			(f)	Rear view mirrors on both sides of the vehicle.  

			(g)	One set of chock blocks.  

		(2)	Normal shipments of explosive materials on site shall be 
			packaged in DOT approved containers/packages or in 
			approved onsite containers (refer to Chapter II, section 17.5 
			for specifics).  

		(3)	Onsite shipments of explosive-designed systems related to 
			experiments or tests that by their nature are not conducive to 
			the requirements of 16.1.2b(2) shall be governed by 
			Chapter II, section 13.2.1 of this Manual and the following:  

			(a)	For shipping purposes, placards and labels shall reflect 
				the appropriate Hazard Classification/Division as 
				assigned by the designated onsite classification 
				authority.  

			(b)	The appropriate authority shall review and approve the 
				designed method of transport for the system.  

			(c)	Drivers shall be knowledgeable of the unique aspects 
				of the system being transported or shall be 
				accompanied by an explosives handler qualified by 
				training and experience to handle the system.  

		(4)	After the EDC has determined that new or developmental 
			explosives meet the necessary testing to establish that they are 
			not forbidden explosives and are at the proper phase of 
			development for the quantity of material being requested, 
			onsite transport shall conform to section 16.1.2b(2) or 
			16.1.2b(3) of this section.  

		(5)	Security patrol and response vehicles are authorized to 
			transport only the minimum quantity of munitions needed to 
			support approved contingency plans and to execute their 
			security duties.  Whenever possible, support munitions 
			required for defense against hostile forces should be pre-
			positioned in readily accessible magazines.  

		(6)	Security vehicles armed with a combination of up to 25 lbs net 
			explosives weight of Hazard Class/Division 1.1 and 1.2 
			munitions shall be exempt from explosives quantity-distance 
			requirements when executing approved contingency plans or 
			security duties.  Vehicles so armed will not be used for 
			administrative purposes and will be separated from inhabited 
			facilities and property lines by a minimum of 125 ft when 
			temporarily out of security service.  The vehicle shall be 
			downloaded into properly sited magazines or approved 
			facilities when parked for periods in excess of 4 hours.  
			Operation of vehicles loaded with explosives will be restricted 
			to onsite locations and transported explosives must be secured 
			within the vehicle.  Smoking in explosives loaded vehicles is 
			prohibited.  These vehicles shall be downloaded into properly 
			sited magazines or approved facilities prior to repair or 
			maintenance, except under emergency response conditions.  

		(7)	Security force personnel shall be allowed to transport on their 
			person Hazard Class/Division 1.1 and 1.2 munitions issued to 
			them for personal use in the execution of approved 
			contingency plans and security duties without regard to 
			explosives quantity-distance requirements.  Appropriate safety 
			precautions for the ammunition handling shall be observed.  
			Munitions shall be placed in an approved location if 
			temporarily removed from the uniform/load bearing 
			equipment worn to carry such items.  

16.1.3	Railcars

	a.	A railcar must not be loaded with any Hazard Class/Division 1.1 and 
		1.2 explosives unless it has been thoroughly inspected by a carrier 
		employee qualified to certify that the railcar conforms to DOT 
		regulations.  After the carrier has furnished a certified car, the shipper 
		or an authorized employee of the shipper must inspect the interior 
		before starting to load any such car and after loading to certify that 
		the vehicle is in proper condition.  A certificate will be completed and 
		signed where applicable.  Shipments of Hazard Class/Division 1.3 
		explosives may be loaded in a closed car or container car in good 
		condition (i.e., sparks cannot enter the car and the roof does not have 
		unprotected decayed wood that constitutes a fire hazard).  
		Wooden-floored cars must be equipped with spark shields.  Such cars 
		do not require a car certificate, but must display a placard in 
		accordance with DOT regulations.  

	b.	The railcar certificate, printed on strong tag board measuring 7 by 
		7 in. or 6 by 8 in., must be executed in triplicate.  The carrier must 
		file the original in a separate file at the forwarding station, and the 
		other two must be attached to the car, one to each outer side on a 
		fixed placard board or as otherwise provided.  

16.1.4	Materials Handling Equipment

	a.	Gasoline-powered materials-handling equipment (e.g., forklifts, etc.) 
		may be used only in areas where all explosives are properly packaged 
		and only if equipped in the following manner.  

		(1)	Backfire deflectors shall be the oil-bath or screen type (certain 
			types of air cleaners will serve the purpose) and shall be 
			attached securely on the throat of the carburetor.  

		(2)	A tight-fitting, properly vented cap, shall be in place on the 
			gasoline fill pipe at all times (except during refueling).  

		(3)	A flame arrestor shall be installed in the fill pipe.  

		(4)	If necessary, a deflector plate shall be installed to prevent any 
			gasoline tank overflow from reaching the motor or the exhaust 
			pipe.  

		(5)	On gravity feed systems or on pump systems where siphoning 
			might occur, a shutoff valve shall be installed at the fuel tank 
			or in the feed line to permit shutting off the flow of gasoline in 
			an emergency or a break in the fuel line or carburetor.  

		(6)	Provisions shall be made to prevent fuel lines from rupturing 
			due to vibration. 
 
	b.	Diesel-powered equipment may be used if all the precautions for 
		gasoline-powered equipment (as specified above) are followed.  
	c.	Battery-powered equipment for handling explosive material shall 
		comply with the criteria listed below. 
 
		(1)	Battery-powered equipment and its use in hazardous locations 
			shall comply with OSHA standards.  All equipment shall be 
			appropriately labeled for ready identification.
  
		(2)	Types E, EE, ES, and EX rated, battery-powered equipment 
			are satisfactory for handling all classes of properly packaged 
			ammunition and explosives.  Types EE and ES 
			battery-powered equipment may be used to handle packaged 
			explosives or components in corridors or ramps connecting 
			hazardous operations, provided the ramps and corridors are 
			not Class I or II, Division 1, hazardous locations (NEC).  
			Type EE equipment is authorized for use in Class II, Division 
			2, Group G hazardous locations, and Type ES equipment may 
			be authorized with facility management’s approval (see 
			NFPA 505, Powered Industrial Trucks).  

		(3)	Only Type EX equipment is approved for use in specifically 
			named Class I, Division 1, Group D or Class II, Division 1, 
			Group G hazardous locations.  At this time, EX equipment 
			does not carry a dual rating and shall only be used in 
			hazardous areas for which it is specifically rated.  

16.2	General Operation Guidelines

	a.	Explosives-containing items transported by special agents in SSTs are 
		governed by DOE Orders 452.2 and 460.1 series documents.  

	b.	Drivers shall be given special training that emphasizes caution, road 
		courtesy, and defensive driving.
  
	c.	The operator of an explosives-transport vehicle shall have proper training in 
		the general safety precautions for explosives handling.  

	d.	Congested areas should be avoided.  

	e.	Road vehicles shall stop at all railroad crossings.  

	f.	No personnel shall ride in the cargo area.  Loose items (e.g., handling gear) 
		in the cargo compartments are prohibited.  

	g.	No smoking is allowed in or within 25 ft of any vehicle containing 
		explosives.  Matches, lighters, or other fire-, flame-, or spark-producing 
		devices shall not be in the vehicle or carried by personnel in the vehicle.  

	h.	The vehicle shall be subjected to regular maintenance checks.  

	i.	Before shipment by commercial carrier, explosives materials shall be 
		classified by testing or analogy in accordance with DOT regulations.  

	j.	Other than when opened for inspection, containers of explosives shall not be 
		opened or repaired on any transportation vehicle.  

	k.	Except for emergency situations, fueling or maintenance of vehicles 
		containing explosives is forbidden. 
 
	l.	Each facility shall establish traffic rules governing the operation of 
		explosives-transport vehicles and the operation of other onsite vehicles in the 
		vicinity of explosives-transport vehicles. 
 
	m.	Industrial trucks shall not be used in locations where high concentrations of 
		dusts or sublimation of explosives may result in contaminated surfaces (e.g., 
		screening buildings, pouring bays, melt-pour units, drilling bays, 
		consolidating bays, and explosive washout facilities).  

16.3	Emergency Conditions

	a.	Explosives should not be transported in hazardous conditions (e.g., storms, 
		icy roads, or poor visibility), unless an emergency plan is in effect to provide 
		instruction and guidelines while an explosives-transport vehicle is in transit.  
		The plan should address the following issues:  

		(1)	Parking the vehicle.
 
		(2)	Safeguarding the vehicle from other traffic. 
 
		(3)	Notifying appropriate authorities of the emergency situation.  

		(4)	Leaving the vehicle unattended. 

	b.	A plan shall be prepared to address mechanical breakdowns.  The plan shall 
		address the following issues:  

		(1)	Removing the vehicle from the road as far as practical.  

		(2)	Posting emergency reflectors, signals, etc. (carrying flares on the 
			vehicle is not permitted).  

		(3)	Reporting the problem.  

		(4)	Maintaining surveillance of the vehicle.  

		(5)	If necessary, removing the vehicle load to facilitate repair of the 
			vehicle.  

	c.	If an explosives-carrying vehicle is involved in an accident, the following 
		steps should be taken:  

		(1)	Inspect the load for evidence of fire. 
 
		(2)	If there is a fire, but the explosives material is not presently or 
			imminently involved, attempt to prevent the fire from spreading to the 
			load.  The fire may be fought using the vehicle’s fire extinguishers.  
			Ensure the security of explosives items removed from the vehicle.  

		(3)	If a fire presently or imminently involves the explosives load, 
			evacuate all personnel to a pre-established safe distance.  Block or 
			divert traffic from the vicinity of the accident.  Evacuate potentially 
			affected area residents.  

		(4)	Unless the explosive cargo is imminently involved in fire, the 
			operator is to stay with the vehicle until the cargo is properly 
			dispositioned.  

		(5)	Notify the fire department or fire brigade of the accident immediately 
			and inform them of the general type and approximate quantity of 
			explosives involved.  

		(6)	Inform the proper authorities of the accident.  


17.0	EXPLOSIVES STORAGE

17.1	Storage Magazine Facilities

	a.	Permanent explosives facilities shall comply fully with TM 5-1300, 
		“Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions,” and 
		DOE/TIC-11268, “A Manual for the Prediction of Blast and Fragment 
		Loading of Structures.”  Portable magazines should be ventilated and 
		resistant to water, fire, and, theft.  They can be made of any material that 
		meets these guidelines.  (Portable facilities that comply with 27 CFR 55.203 
		and 55.207 through 55.211, “Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms,” 
		(BATF) meet this criteria.)  Portable magazines shall be sited 
		per DoD 6055.9-STD as above ground magazines.  

	b.	Placards shall be posted on or near each magazine door, specifying explosive 
		and personnel limits and general safety precautions that should be observed 
		during work in the magazine.  

	c.	Vegetation around storage magazines should be controlled to minimize 
		potential damage to the magazine (see Chapter VI, section 5.1).  

	d.	At least two fire extinguishers, minimum rating 2A:10BC and winterized 
		where necessary, should be provided and maintained for immediate use by 
		personnel working around a magazine.  These extinguishers may be located 
		in the area or available on an explosives transportation vehicle.  The purpose 
		of these extinguishers is to fight small external fires or magazine fires that do 
		not involve explosives.  

	e.	Suitably rated telephone or other emergency communication equipment 
		should be provided in magazine storage areas.  All communication 
		equipment located outdoors should be protected from the weather.  

	f.	Temperature control

		(1)	In general, storage magazines should not be heated unless heating is 
			necessary to prevent damage caused by sudden temperature changes 
			or when dimensional changes of components are undesirable.  

		(2)	Magazines requiring heat should be heated with steam, hot water, or 
			electrically heated hot water.  Some magazines with tight temperature 
			controls may require both heating and air conditioning.  Electrical 
			systems with forced air through ducts may be allowed if the systems 
			are located exterior to any explosive hazard.  

		(3)	Heating coils shall be arranged so that explosives material cannot 
			come into contact with the coils.  They shall be equipped with covers 
			designed to prevent storage of materials on top of the coils.
 
		(4)	Maximum and minimum temperature monitors should be provided in 
			all heated magazines.  

17.2	Storage Magazine Operations

	a.	Explosives items shall be properly packaged and stored in either 
		DOT-approved manufacturers’ containers/packages or in specified onsite 
		containers (see section 17.5 of this chapter).  

	b.	Explosives may be stored on magazine shelves.  The bottom of the container 
		should not be more than 2 m off the floor, except as permitted by 
		section 17.2c of this section.  

	c.	Explosives and explosives containers in storage shall be positioned safely 
		and securely.  If explosives containers must be stacked, they shall be placed 
		in stable arrays.  

	d.	Load limits shall be established for shelving in magazines containing 
		explosives.  If overloading is possible, the loading conditions shall be posted.  
	e.	Materials shall not be left suspended by booms, cranes, or hoists in any 
		explosives storage facility.  

	f.	Stored explosives should be segregated by lot designation.  Stacks of 
		explosives should be arranged so that air freely circulates to all parts of the 
		stack.  To prevent moisture accumulation, pallets or appropriate dunnage 
		should be used to ensure that containers are not stacked directly on the 
		magazine floor. 
 
	g.	Aisles shall be wide enough to accommodate inspection, inventory, 
		sampling, and materials handling operations of the stored explosives 
		containers.  

	h.	Crews shall not be permitted to work in a position that requires passing the 
		work aisle or the position of a second crew to reach the exit.  Unobstructed 
		aisles shall be maintained to permit rapid exit of personnel.  
	i.	Each crew working in a magazine must have their own exit route that does 
		not interfere with exit routes for other crews.  

	j.	Magazines shall be locked at all times except when permissible operations are in 
		progress or opened for ventilation.  Personnel shall be present while the magazine 
		is open for ventilation.  All exit doors shall be unlocked and open when personnel 
		are working in the magazine.  

	k.	Each magazine shall be inventoried at least annually to determine the total weight 
		of explosives present (to assure this weight conforms to allowable 
		quantity-distance constraints) and to remove and destroy materials that are not 
		properly identified or labeled.  

	l.	The liquid level in storage containers for wet explosives shall be checked and 
		replenished as necessary at least once a year.  A log of the checks shall be 
		maintained.  

	m.	Empty containers, tools, conveyors, lift trucks, skids, etc., should not be stored in 
		a magazine containing explosives.  

	n.	Combustible materials such as excess dunnage, packing material, and boxes shall 
		not be stored in a magazine containing explosives.  

	o.	Flammable liquids shall not be stored or used in explosives magazines unless the 
		liquid is an explosive, is needed as an explosives-wetting agent, or is an integral 
		part of an explosives device.  

	p.	Operations in and around magazines shall be prohibited when an electrical 
		storm is in progress and minimized when it is evident that such a storm is 
		approaching.  

	q.	Explosives-handling operations shall not be performed when magazine 
		entranceways are icy or do not provide adequate footing for any other reason.  

	r.	Unless excepted, no operation in which hazardous materials are involved shall be 
		permitted in any magazine.  The following exceptions are recognized.  

		(1)	Those operations incident to storage or removal from storage. 
 
		(2)	Inspection and surveillance sampling of compatibility Group D materials, 
			and Group C materials consisting of bulk propellants and IHE, provided 
			that each storage container sampled is in good condition (i.e., the container 
			is not leaking, no evidence exists of explosives contamination at the 
			closure or of seal failure, and the closure is mechanically sound and free of 
			excessive corrosion, etc.).  Only one container of explosives shall be 
			opened at one time in a magazine.  

		(3)	Adding liquid to adjust the liquid composition level in which a 
			Group D explosive is stored.  (Water and alcohol mixtures may be 
			used).  If only water is added to the explosive, the water should be 
			distilled or deionized.  Bacteria present in untreated water may 
			produce gas during storage).  

17.3	Storage Review Program

	a.	Each facility shall establish a program to review the explosive materials 
		stored at that facility.  Explosives may degrade during prolonged storage, 
		increasing the hazards of handling or use.  The following procedure is 
		provided as an example.  

		(1)	A storage review date should be assigned to each bulk explosive 
			placed in storage.  The storage review date should be shown on or 
			adjacent to the identification tag or sticker attached to every container 
			or package of explosive in storage or should be listed in the inventory 
			records.  

		(2)	Storage review intervals should be based, whenever possible, on 
			stability data.  A safe storage interval should be considered as that 
			time period, at maximum anticipated storage temperature, during 
			which an explosive material can be conservatively expected to show 
			an acceptable level of decomposition.  

		(3)	Facility management should designate or create a storage review 
			committee to establish and approve storage review intervals for all 
			explosives stored at the DOE facility.  Also, the committee should 
			prescribe for each explosive appropriate tests to evaluate the safety of 
			handling and processing the material after it has exceeded its storage 
			review interval.  These tests may be referred to as “stability tests,” 
			although sensitivity, or other types of testing, may be included in the 
			material evaluation program.  In some cases, the review committee 
			may simply require periodic stability testing rather than establishing a 
			storage review interval (i.e., nitrocellulose, single- and double-base 
			propellants, etc.).  

		(4)	To store a new explosive, to increase (or decrease) the review interval 
			for a previously approved material, or to use different stability test 
			data for an explosive, the following procedure should be used:  

			(a)	A responsible person should communicate the request to the 
				storage review committee.  

			(b)	If the request concerns storage of a new explosive, the 
				individual should recommend a storage review interval and 
				stability-evaluation testing.  

			(c)	Supporting data should be supplied with the recommended 
				review interval and proposed stability tests for the explosive.  
			(d)	The storage review committee should review the request and 
				supporting data and then prescribe a storage review interval 
				and stability tests as appropriate.  

			(e)	A new explosive should be assigned an interim storage review 
				and stability test interval before Phase II scaleup (see 
				Chapter VIII).  

			(f)	The following general guidelines are offered to assist the 
				storage review committee in establishing review intervals 
				when there is insufficient stability information to predict 
				storage life.  

				1	If no information is available on a new material 
					relative to storage stability, a review interval of 
					90 days or less should be assigned.  

				2	A new formulation should be assigned a storage 
					review interval not exceeding that of its least stable 
					component.  

				3	If the compound or formulation is new to DOE 
					but DoD agencies have extensive experience with it, 
					the DoD information should be used conservatively.  

				4	For a formulation or ingredient with a 
					manufacturer-assigned shelf life, a review interval that 
					exceeds the recommended shelf life should not be 
					assigned unless additional DOE tests indicate such 
					storage is warranted.  

		(5)	A storage review interval of up to 20 years should be permissible for 
			an explosive if a conservative evaluation of stability data indicates 
			that such an interval is justified.  

17.4	Storage Compatibility

	a.	Explosives shall not be stored with materials or items that increase the risk of 
		initiation or decomposition.  Examples are mixed storage of explosives with 
		flammable or combustible materials, acids, or corrosives.  

	b.	Different types of explosives may be stored in the same magazine if they are 
		compatible.  Explosives shall be assigned to a storage compatibility group 
		when they can be stored together without significantly increasing either the 
		probability of an accident or, for a given quantity of explosive, the magnitude 
		of such an accident.  

	c.	Each type of explosive shall be assigned to an appropriate storage 
		compatibility group (A through G, L, and S) for the purpose of storage at 
		DOE facilities.  The nine groups are defined in the following sections.  These 
		definitions and Table II-4 Storage Compatibility Mixing Chart, are in 
		accordance with the principles and tables in DoD 6055.9-STD, 
		DoD Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards.  Table II-4 presents some 
		examples of commonly used materials that are assigned to each storage 
		compatibility group.  This list does not enumerate all materials that may be 
		included in each group.
  
		(1)	Group A—Initiating explosives.  Bulk initiating explosives that have 
			the necessary sensitivity to friction, heat, or shock to make them 
			suitable for use as initiating elements in an explosives train.  
			Examples are lead azide, lead styphnate, mercury fulminate, and 
			tetracene.  

		(2)	Group B—Detonators and similar initiating devices not containing 
			two or more independent safety features.  Items containing initiating 
			explosives that are designed to initiate or continue the functioning of 
			an explosives train.  Examples are detonators (all types, excluding 
			EBWs and slappers), blasting caps, small arms primers, and fuzes.  

		(3)	Group C—Bulk propellants, propellant charges, and devices 
			containing propellant with or without their own means of initiation.  
			Items that will deflagrate, explode, or detonate upon initiation.  
			Examples are single-, double-, triple-base, and composite propellants, 
			rocket motors (solid propellant), and ammunition with inert 
			projectiles. 
 
		(4)	Group D—High explosives (HE) and devices containing explosives 
			without their own means of initiation and without a propelling charge, 
			or articles containing a primary explosives substance and containing 
			two or more effective protective features.  This group shall include 
			explosives and ammunition that can be expected to explode or 
			detonate when any given item or component thereof is initiated.  

		(5)	Group E—Explosives devices without their own means of initiation 
			and with propelling charge (other than one containing a flammable or 
			hypergolic liquid).  Examples are artillery ammunition and rockets.  

		(6)	Group F—Explosives devices with their own means of initiation and 
			with or without propelling charge.
  
		(7)	Group G—Pyrotechnic materials and devices containing pyrotechnic 
			materials.  Examples are devices that when functioning, result in an 
			incendiary, illumination, lachrymatory, smoke, or sound effect. 
 
		(8)	Group H—Ammunition containing both explosives and WP or other 
			pyrophoric material.  Ammunition in this group contains fillers, 
			which are spontaneously flammable when exposed to the atmosphere.  
			Examples are WP, plasticized white phosphorus (PWP), or other 
			ammunition containing pyrophoric material.  

		(9)	Group J—Ammunition containing both explosives and flammable 
			liquids or gels.  Ammunition in this group contain flammable liquids 
			or gels other than those that are spontaneously flammable when 
			exposed to water or the atmosphere.  Examples are liquid or gel filled 
			incendiary ammunition, fuel-air explosive (FAE) devices, flammable 
			liquid fueled missiles, and torpedoes.  

		(10)	Group K—Ammunition containing both explosives and toxic 
			chemical agents.  Ammunition in this group contain chemicals 
			specifically designed for incapacitating effects more severe than 
			lachrymation.  Examples are artillery or mortar ammunition (fuzed or 
			unfuzed), grenades, and rockets or bombs filled with a lethal or 
			incapacitating chemical agent.  

		(11)	Group L—Explosives or ammunition not included in other 
			compatibility groups which present a special risk, requiring isolation 
			of each type.  This group shall include explosives or ammunition 
			having characteristics that do not permit storage with other similar or 
			dissimilar materials.  Examples are damaged explosives, suspect 
			explosives, and explosives, explosive devices or containers that have 
			undergone severe testing unless documented determination is made 
			that these items do not present a special risk; fuel/air explosive 
			devices, and water-activated devices.  Also included are experimental 
			explosives, explosives of temporary interest, newly synthesized 
			compounds, new mixtures and salvaged explosives until they have 
			been established to be compatible with the original materials.  Types 
			presenting similar hazards may be stored together.  

		(12)	Group N—Hazard Division 1.6 ammunition containing only 
			extremely insensitive detonating substances (EIDS).  

		(13)	Group S—Explosives, explosive devices, or ammunition presenting 
			no significant hazard.  Explosives or ammunition so designed or 
			packed that when in storage any hazardous effects from accidental 
			functioning are limited to the extent that they do not significantly 
			hinder fire fighting.  Examples include:  explosive switches or valves 
			and small arms ammunition.  

	d.	Mixing of Storage Compatibility Groups may be permitted as indicated in 
		Table II-5.  Items from Storage Compatibility Groups B, C, D, E, F, G, and S 
		may be combined in storage if the items are in approved containers and if the 
		net quantity of explosives in the items (or in bulk) does not exceed 1,000 lb.  
		Each article of Storage Compatibility Groups B and F shall be segregated in 
		storage from those of other compatibility groups by means that will prevent 
		propagation of those articles.  

	e.	Newly synthesized compounds and mixtures shall be stored in Group L 
		storage facilities.  After more complete evaluation, the EDC shall assign 
		those compounds or mixtures of continuing interest (see Chapter VIII, 
		section 1.1) to the appropriate compatibility group, and stored according to 
		the following considerations:  

		(1)	The material’s sensitivity to initiating stimuli (i.e., friction, impact, 
			spark, shock, and thermal) is similar to that of other explosives in the 
			group.  

		(2)	The material’s reactions and the effects of these reactions, in the 
			event of application of initiating stimuli, are similar to other members 
			of the group.  

		(3)	The material is chemically compatible with other materials in the 
			group.  Sensitivity and compatibility testing is described in 
			Chapter VIII. 
 
	f.	As an alternate to Table II-4 and Table II-5, samples of explosives up to 
		4.4 lbs (2 kg) total, may be stored in the same cubicle if the cubicle walls are 
		designed to prevent propagation.  The material shall be stored in separate 
		cubicles in one of the following categories:  

		(1)	High explosives.  

		(2)	Propellants.  

		(3)	Detonators, actuators, and similar devices.
  
		(4)	Primary and static-sensitive explosives.  


Table II-4.  Storage Compatibility Groups for Explosives  and Explosive-Containing Devices

Table II-5.  Storage Compatibility Mixing Chart

17.5	Containers (Onsite)

	a.	Explosives containers shall be designed and constructed so they will not leak 
		and will protect their contents from excessive movement, external stimuli, 
		contamination, or spillage during handling, transportation (including 
		transportation to disposal sites), and storage.  Container closures shall prevent 
		spilling or leakage of contents if the container is overturned.  Screw-type 
		container closures should not be used.  

	b.	Explosives containers should be constructed of, or lined with, nonabsorbent 
		materials that are compatible with the explosive contents.  Use of glass 
		containers is discouraged, except for small samples, and shall be used only 
		when the explosive reacts with other materials or when a high degree of purity 
		is required.  

	c.	Metal containers for materials that are potential dust producers shall be 
		constructed without seams or rivet heads.  Seams or rivet heads can provide 
		locations for dust accumulation.  

	d.	Containers for cast or pressed explosives pieces that are larger than 1 ft (0.3 m) 
		at their greatest dimension or weigh more than 11 lb (5 kg) loaded should be 
		provided with handles or some other type of handhold.  If the loaded container 
		weighs more than 110 lb (50 kg), provisions should be made to allow handling 
		by mechanical handling equipment.  

	e.	Containers shall be labeled with the applicable UN hazard classification code 
		and clearly marked to identify the contents.  

	f.	Whenever possible, explosive pellets and items containing small quantities of 
		explosives (e.g., detonators) shall be packaged in containers constructed so the 
		functioning of one item will not propagate to the remaining items in the 
		container.  When a nonpropagating array is not possible, the pellets or 
		detonators shall be stored inside a closed container and shall be labeled to 
		indicate the total weight of the explosive contents.  

	g.	Container closures shall be the type that will not apply excessive pinching or 
		rubbing forces to explosives during closing and opening.  The closures and 
		surfaces of container openings shall be kept clean of explosives contamination 
		to minimize any hazard during closing and opening. 
 
	h.	Explosives and ammunition in damaged containers shall not be stored in a 
		magazine with other explosives and ammunition.  Damaged containers shall be 
		repaired, or the contents transferred to new or undamaged containers, or the 
		container plus contents moved to a Group L storage magazine.  

	i.	Open containers and containers with covers not securely fastened shall not be 
		stored in magazines.  Containers that have been opened shall be properly closed 
		before being returned to storage.  

17.6	Storage in Buildings Other Than Storage Magazines

17.6.1	Packing and Shipping Buildings

	a.	In buildings specifically designated for packing and shipping, 
		explosives may be stored subject to the following rules.  

		(1)	Incoming shipments shall be distributed as soon as practical 
			after receipt and shall not be allowed to accumulate.  
		(2)	Items for outgoing shipments should not be accumulated before 
			receipt of orders covering each specific shipment.  

		(3)	Separate rooms shall be provided for the temporary storage of 
			explosives awaiting shipment and for their preparation for 
			shipment (i.e., assembling, crating, marking, etc.).  The rooms 
			shall be divided by walls or separated to prevent an explosion in 
			the preparation area from propagating to the temporary storage 
			area.  

		(4)	The combined total amount of explosives permitted in 
			shipping/receiving buildings, platforms, and transportation 
			vehicles shall be based on quantity-distance constraints.  When 
			an adequate barricade (sufficient to prevent sympathetic 
			detonation) is in place between transportation vehicles and the 
			adjoining building or platform, quantities on each side of the 
			barricade may be considered individually to determine 
			quantity-distance requirements.  

		(5)	If required by operational necessity, explosives and pyrotechnics 
			that are part of the work in process within the building may be 
			stored during non-operational hours in operating buildings 
			provided:  

			(a)	Explosives limits are not exceeded.  

			(b)	Containers of bulk explosives or pyrotechnics are 
				properly secured and covered.  

			(c)	Processing equipment, such as hoppers and pipelines, is 
				empty.  

17.6.2	Service Magazines

	a.	The guidelines for storage magazines presented in sections 17.1 through 
		17.5 of this chapter shall also apply to service magazines, except as 
		modified below
:  
		(1)	An explosives item should be stored for no longer than 
			necessary in a service magazine (with a maximum of 180 days). 
 
		(2)	Service magazine inventory should be reviewed every 
			three months.  Any material that has been in the service 
			magazine for a period approaching 180 days and is not expected 
			to be used immediately should be disposed of or removed to an 
			appropriate storage magazine.  

		(3)	When practical, explosives stored in service magazines shall be 
			in containers.  Unpackaged explosives-containing devices and 
			unsealed bulk explosives containers may be present in a service 
			magazine.  However, these items and unsealed containers shall 
			be stored in a manner that renders them stable and unlikely to be 
			dropped or spilled.  

		(4)	Minimum/maximum temperature monitors are not normally 
			required for service magazines.  

17.6.3	Warehouses

	a.	Hazard Class 1.4 materials (see Chapter VI, section 3.1) packaged as 
		Hazard Class/Division 1.4, Storage Compatibility Group S, may be 
		stored in warehouses if they are placed in segregated and specifically 
		designated areas.  

	b.	Articles in Hazard Class/Division 1.4 and Storage Compatibility 
		Group S are considered inert for storage purposes and are not subject to 
		quantity-distance requirements as long as they are stored with inert 
		items or other Hazard Class/Division 1.4S items only.  This applies only 
		if Hazard Class/Division 1.4 and Storage Compatibility Group S articles 
		remain in their original packaging container or are proven to be 
		self-contained.  When stored with items in a Storage Compatibility 
		Group other than S, normal quantity-distance requirements must be 
		observed.  

17.6.4	Pre-positioned Storage of Security Response Munitions

	a.	When required for defense against hostile forces, and in support of 
		response and contingency plans, limited quantities of authorized 
		response force munitions may be pre-positioned at locations other than 
		bulk-storage magazine areas. 
 
	b.	Compliance with Quantity-Distance and compatibility criteria is not 
		required during a heightened security condition.  

	c.	Munitions will be kept in their original shipping containers unless 
		operational necessity dictates otherwise.  

	d.	Personnel charged with the responsibility of overseeing storage of 
		munitions at guard stations and contingency deployment sites shall be 
		trained in explosives storage and transportation, as required in 
		Chapter V of this Manual.  

	e.	When Hazard Class/Division 1.2 is stored inside or at less than 
		inhabited-building distance from inhabited buildings, fragment barriers 
		will be provided.  Minimally acceptable fragment barriers are:  0.25 in. 
		(6.35 mm) of mild steel plate, one layer of sand bags, 12 in. (.3 m) of 
		loose sand or dirt, or other equivalent protection.  

18.0	DECONTAMINATION AND CLEANING

18.1	General

	a.	Operating procedures shall specifically cover decontamination.  These procedures 
		should cover methods, inspection, marking, control, dismantling, maintenance, 
		final disposition, etc.  

	b.	Hot water or steam may be used to clean or remove explosives contamination 
		from equipment.  If necessary, solvents that have been tested for and are 
		compatible with explosives can be used.  Operating procedures must specify 
		controls for their use.  When cleaning or removing explosives material from 
		equipment, work surfaces, and floors, only clean cloth rags, paper wipes, and 
		approved non-metallic brushes or scrapers should be used in conjunction with hot 
		water, steam, and solvents.  

	c.	Disposal of waste generated during decontamination shall be coordinated with site 
		environmental/waste management personnel.  

18.2	Cleaning Contaminated Equipment

	a.	Items to be cleaned should be positioned so that water and residue will drain 
		directly into an approved collection system.  See sections 19.0 and 20.0 of this 
		chapter for guidance concerning waste collection and waste disposal.  

	b.	Personal decontaminating facilities and equipment shall use personal protective 
		equipment as required.  Emergency shower and eyewash shall be provided where 
		needed.  

	c.	Exhaust ventilation may be required to remove toxic explosives fumes, vapors, or 
		steam from the decontamination area.  

18.3	Cleaning Screw Threads

	a.	To avoid the necessity of cleaning explosives from threads, explosives processing 
		techniques shall be designed to prevent explosives from being deposited on 
		threaded fasteners.  When screw threads are required, covering or protection (i.e., 
		RTV cement) over the exposed threads should be provided.  

	b.	Threads should be cleaned by judicious use of approved non-metal “picks,” 
		solvent, hot water, or steam.  Soaking in solvents and applying penetrating oil 
		may be useful.  

	c.	After decontaminating threads of screws, bolts, pipe, etc., operator protection may 
		still be required to facilitate safe disassembly.  

18.4	Final Decontamination and Disposal of Equipment

	a.	If the item to be decontaminated has only smooth, flat surfaces (i.e., no cracks, 
		seams, voids, or other places where explosive residue may be inaccessible), hot 
		water, steam, or solvents may be employed to effect total decontamination.  Any 
		explosives contamination of concern will be visible to the unaided eye and will 
		have dimensions (length, width, and depth). 
 
	b.	If the item to be decontaminated has tight places where explosives may remain 
		lodged following normal cleaning procedures, the item shall be subjected to final 
		decontamination techniques that may include partial disassembly.  

		(1)	Items undergoing final decontamination by thermal techniques shall be 
			subjected to sustained heating at a temperature at least 60°C higher than 
			required for decomposition of the most thermally stable explosive 
			substance present.  The item shall be kept at that temperature for a 
			sufficient period of time to ensure that all parts have reached the 
			temperature and all explosives material is decomposed.  Thermal 
			decomposition is usually accomplished by placing the items to be 
			decontaminated in a high-temperature sustained fire (see TB 700-4, 
			Decontamination of Facilities and Equipment).  This operation shall be 
			conducted remotely or with operator protection.  

		(2)	Final decontamination also may be accomplished by immersing the item 
			in a chemical cleaning agent.  The period of immersion shall be sufficient 
			to ensure that all explosive material is chemically decomposed.  The 
			chemical cleaning agent shall be one that the Department of the 
			Army TM 9-1300-214 (Military Explosives) has approved for use.  
			Chemical cleaning agents for decontamination or destruction of explosives 
			should not be used for more than about 1 oz. (or about 28 g) of explosives.  
			Reference U.S. Department of the Army TM 9-1300-214 for 
			decontaminating chemicals for explosives and for color tests for 
			identification of energetic materials.  

		(3)	Before subjecting an item to final decontamination by thermal or chemical 
			techniques, as much explosive as possible shall have been removed by 
			approved means (hot water, steam, and approved solvents in conjunction 
			with cloth or paper wipes and non-metallic brushes or scrapers).  

18.5	Inspection

	a.	After decontamination procedures are complete and before transfer to a 
		nonexplosive area, the item shall be inspected.  The degree of decontamination 
		shall be determined/documented and the item shall be labeled to indicate its 
		decontaminated state.  Representatives of at least two departments, such as 
		operations or safety, should accomplish the inspection.  

18.6	Identification and Control of Decontaminated Items

	a.	Decontaminated items shall be marked to indicate the degree of decontamination 
		and stored separately from non-contaminated items until final disposition is made.  
	b.	Degrees of decontamination shall be designated and all items shall be tagged 
		and/or marked with this designation.  

	c.	Guidelines for establishing a system to designation degrees of decontamination 
		are provided below.  

		(1)	X—A single X indicates that the facilities or equipment have been 
			partially decontaminated.  Additional decontamination processes are 
			required before facilities or equipment are moved or any 
			maintenance, repair, etc., is performed.  The X rating would apply to 
			facilities, rooms, bays, or equipment that have been subjected to 
			routine decontamination performed by an operator at the close of the 
			workday.  

		(2)	XXX—Three Xs indicate the equipment or facilities have been 
			examined and decontaminated by approved procedures; no 
			contamination can be detected by appropriate instrumentation, test 
			solutions, or by visual inspection on easily accessible surfaces or in 
			concealed housings, etc., and are considered safe for the intended use.  
			Items decontaminated to this degree cannot be furnished to qualified 
			DOE, DoD, or industry users or be in direct contact with an open flame 
			(cutting, welding, high temperature heating devices), or operations 
			which generate extreme heat, such as drilling and machining unless the 
			following two conditions are met:  

			(a)	It has been determined that decontamination to the XXXXX level 
				will destroy the item’s usefulness.  

			(b)	Decontamination to a degree less than XXXXX in combination 
				with administrative and technical safeguards will eliminate risk of 
				injury.  As a minimum, an approved SOP setting forth the specific 
				operational limitations, precautions, and monitoring necessary to 
				assure safety will be available and decontamination will be 
				performed under the direction of the inspectors who will certify 
				decontamination.  

		(3)	XXXXX—Five Xs indicate the equipment or facilities are completely 
			decontaminated, hazard-free, and may be released for general use or to the 
			general public.  

		(4)	0—A zero indicates the item, although located in a contaminated area, was 
			never directly exposed to contamination.  

	d.	Reference U.S. Department of the Army TB 700-4, “Decontamination of 
		Facilities and Equipment” for decontamination methods and marking.  

18.7	Decontamination of Real Estate

	a.	For decontamination of real estate reference DoD 6055.9-STD.  

18.8	Decontamination and Cleaning References

	a.	In addition to this Manual, the following are reference sources for 
		decontamination and cleaning.  

		(1)	DoD 6055.9-STD, “Department of Defense Ammunition and Explosives 
			Safety Standard,” Assistant Secretary of Defense (Force Management and 
			Personnel), Chairman Department of Defense Explosives Safety Board, 
			2461 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22331. 
 
		(2)	Department of the Army Technical Bulletin TB 700-4, “Decontamination 
			of Facilities and Equipment,” Army AG Publications Center, St. Louis, 
			MO.  

		(3)	Department of the Army Technical Manual TM 9-1300-214, “Military 
			Explosives,” Army AG Publications Center, St. Louis, MO.  

19.0	WASTE COLLECTION

19.1	General

	a.	Provision shall be made to remove explosives waste from areas where explosive 
		waste is generated.  Removal of explosives waste may be accomplished by 
		collecting dust/fines or chips in a wet or dry vacuum system or a slurry of water 
		or nonflammable solvent, or by collecting solid waste in receptacles (see also 
		Chapter II, sections 9.0, 10.0, and 11.0).  

	b.	Explosives waste shall be collected and maintained separately from conventional 
		waste.  

	c.	Mixing of incompatible explosive waste shall be avoided.  Receptacles shall be 
		clearly labeled to indicate the type of waste permissible.  

19.2	Solid Wastes

	a.	Areas where solid explosives wastes are not removed by vacuum or liquid 
		systems shall be equipped with a seamless or lined receptacle to collect explosives 
		wastes.  The receptacle should never be more than half full.  

	b.	Explosives waste shall be removed from the collection point on a regularly and 
		frequently enough to keep aggregate levels within explosive weight limits.  

	c.	Rubbish not contaminated by explosives or containing noncombustible materials 
		shall not be placed in an explosives waste receptacle.  

	d.	Explosives-contaminated rubbish shall be placed in separate waste containers and 
		segregated as combustibles and noncombustibles.  

	e.	Before being transported, explosives waste shall be packaged to prevent spills, 
		leaks, or exposure to initiation stimuli.  Incompatible materials shall not be 
		packaged together.  All packages of explosives waste shall be labeled clearly to 
		indicate the nature and approximate quantity of contents.  

19.3	Vacuum Collection of Explosives Dusts

	a.	Explosives dusts should be collected by a vacuum system, preferably the wet 
		type.  Dust in a wet vacuum should be maintained in wet form using a wetting 
		agent that is kept close to the point of origin and kept wet in the collection system 
		until removed for disposal.  Water-soluble explosives such as Explosive D should 
		be collected in a dry vacuum system.  

	b.	Storage compatibility Group A explosives may be collected by a wet vacuum 
		system, provided they are maintained in a wet form using a wetting agent that is 
		kept close to the point of intake.  Use of a vacuum system to collect these more 
		sensitive materials should be confined to operations involving small quantities of 
		explosives.  

	c.	Dry-type dust collection chambers, except portable units, should be located in the 
		open, outside operating buildings, or may be inside if adequate shielding is 
		provided.  The quantity of explosives collected shall not exceed the capacity of 
		the shielding to protect operating personnel.  The degree of barricading and the 
		appropriate intraline distance shall determine this limit.  

	d.	If dry dust collection outside a building is not practical, a separate room or 
		shielded area within the building shall be designated for this purpose.  This room 
		or shielded area shall not contain other operations or be used as a communicating 
		corridor or passageway between other operating locations within the building 
		when explosives are being collected.  

	e.	Stationary and portable wet-type collectors may be placed in the explosives 
		operating bays or cubicles if the quantity of explosives in the collectors does not 
		exceed 4.4 lbs (2 kg).  If placed in separate cubicles, the explosive weight limits 
		may be increased by an amount determined by the extent of the cubicle walls’ 
		capabilities to serve as operational shields.  

	f.	Collection systems and chambers shall be designed to prevent explosives from 
		being pinched between metal parts.  See sections 9.0 and 10.0 of this chapter for 
		additional design information.  

	g.	Two collection chambers shall be installed ahead of the pump or exhauster in 
		series to prevent explosives dust from entering the vacuum producer in dry 
		vacuum collection systems.  In addition, non-sparking fans and dust-tight motors 
		shall be used.  

	h.	Dry-type portable vacuum collectors shall not be located in bays or cubicles 
		where explosives are present or in enclosed ramps, but may be positioned outside 
		the building or in a separate cubicle.  The building or cubicle walls shall provide 
		adequate shielding for at least 4.4 lbs (2 kg) of explosives.  Shielding and 
		quantity-distance constraints shall define the explosives limits.  

	i.	Explosives dust shall be removed from the collection chamber periodically to 
		eliminate unnecessary and hazardous explosives concentrations.  The entire 
		system should be cleaned periodically, dismantling the parts if necessary.  A 
		cleaning schedule shall be established for the collection chamber and the entire 
		system using the operating hours as a basis.  

	j.	The entire explosives-dust collecting system shall be electrically bonded and 
		grounded with resistance-to-ground not exceeding 10 ohms.  The grounds shall be 
		tested periodically.  

19.4	Explosives Slurries

	a.	Machine tools shall be fitted with wet boxes to catch and direct water and 
		explosives fines to an explosives waste gutter system.  

	b.	Wastewater that might contain explosives materials shall be kept from 
		contaminating potable water or conventional wastewater systems.  

	c.	Settling tanks shall be inspected regularly to monitor the waste accumulation.  
		Records of waste removal shall be kept.  

	d.	When pumping settled explosives from a slurry-settling tank, the operation shall 
		be arranged to preclude exposure of the explosive material to pinching.  

	e.	Explosives materials in settling basins shall be kept wet until removed.  The 
		materials shall be maintained wet until spread out for disposal.  Explosives 
		materials containing powdered metals shall be kept sufficiently wet to prevent a 
		dangerous temperature rise resulting from a reaction of the metal with water.  The 
		possibility of hydrogen generation in this situation must be anticipated.  If an 
		explosive or flammable gas can be generated, then proper ventilation shall be 
		supplied to prevent an explosive or flammable mixture from accumulating.  

19.5	Metal Scrap

	a.	Metal scrap shall be inspected to detect explosives-contaminated items and a 
		qualified reviewer shall certify that the scrap is free of explosives before 
		disposition. 
 
	b.	When scrap is found to be contaminated with explosives, it shall be 
		decontaminated in accordance with final decontamination procedures (see 
		section 18.4 of this chapter).  

19.6	Explosives Recovery and Reuse

	a.	Salvaged explosives materials shall be thoroughly inspected by operating 
		supervisors and reused, screened, reprocessed, or destroyed as the situation 
		warrants.  

	b.	Salvaged explosives materials shall be classified as Storage Compatibility 
		Group L until they have been established to be compatible with the original 
		material.  

20.0	WASTE DISPOSAL

20.1	Preparation for Open Burning

	a.	Preparations to burn or place explosives waste on a pad or in a pit shall 
		not begin until 24 hours after the previous burn at the same burning 
		point.  The only exception is if the burning area has been thoroughly 
		soaked with water and inspected by qualified personnel to assure 
		personnel safety during subsequent burning operations.  In any case, the 
		burning point shall be inspected for residual embers or hot spots before 
		loading with explosives.  

	b.	Before beginning preparations, firing controls shall be disconnected power 
		sources and circuits shunted and grounded.  

	c.	Some explosives give off toxic vapors or fumes when destroyed by burning.  
		Proper respiratory protective equipment shall be worn when such hazards are 
		likely.  

	d.	Incompatible explosives materials shall not be in the same pit or on the same 
		pad at the same time. 
 
	e.	Personnel engaged in burning explosives should be provided with non-static 
		producing cotton clothing.  

	f.	Containers of explosives materials shall not be opened less than 10 ft (3 m) 
		from each other. 
 
	g.	Empty explosives waste containers that are to be reused shall be situated an 
		adequate distance from the burning point to prevent charring or damage 
		during the destruction operation.  

	h.	Based on past experience or analysis, a layer of excelsior or similar material 
		may need to be placed on the bottom of the pit or pad where the explosives 
		waste will be placed.

	i.	Powdered, granular, or slurry form explosives should be placed in a layer not 
		more than 8 cm thick.  Water-wet initiating explosives (storage compatibility 
		Group A) shall not be allowed to dry completely.  

	j.	Wood, heating oil, LPG, or natural gas is authorized to ensure complete 
		combustion of the explosives waste material.  

	k.	The ignition train should be set up to burn upwind, except that the ignition 
		train for burning IHE may be set to burn downwind.  

	l.	The firing circuit shall require a key for completion.  Only one copy of the 
		firing key shall exist, and it shall be in the lead operator’s possession.  

	m.	Radio transmitters and cellular phones in the control shelter and vehicles 
		at the burning site shall be turned off during setup and firing of low 
		energy electrical squibs to provide protection against radio frequency 
		currents.  

	n.	Precautions shall be taken to ensure that extraneous electrical currents from 
		any source will not unintentionally activate the firing system.  

	o.	The burn shall be primed after all other preparation work is complete and with 
		a minimum number of personnel present.  

	p.	Ignition shall be accomplished remotely.  

20.2	Destruction by Burning or Flashing

	a.	Open burning operations will comply with the requirements of applicable 
		Federal, State, and local air pollution, hazardous waste, and other 
		environmental regulations and permits.  

	b.	Explosives waste may be destroyed by remote burning if it can be done with 
		little chance of detonation.  Explosives-contaminated waste may be burned 
		remotely in a wire cage.  

	c.	An open furnace or burning area for explosives should be used to destroy 
		wet-machining cuttings and classified parts.  The same furnace or burning 
		area may also be used for flashing casings after washout of an explosive 
		charge.  

	d.	Explosives should not be burned in closed containers or casings, or in large 
		pieces likely to detonate.  Special attention should be given to the placement 
		and orientation of large items and those in closed containers or casings.  
		Approved incinerators may be used to destroy small devices such as 
		detonators, actuators, etc.  

	e.	Concurrent burning operations shall not be conducted within 150 ft (45 m) of 
		each other.  

	f.	When several pads are burned, the downwind pad shall be ignited first, 
		followed by the others in succession.  

20.3	Ignition System Malfunctions

	a.	If the ignition system fails to fire, check the circuit’s continuity.  If no open 
		circuits are detected, refire.  

	b.	If the squibs fire but fail to ignite the ignition train, remotely survey the area, 
		and wait at least 30 minutes.  When it appears safe to emerge from the 
		control shelter, disconnect, shunt, and ground the firing circuit, and inspect 
		the squibs, firing system, or ignition train.  

20.4	Post-burn Operations

	a.	No entry should be allowed into the disposal area until eight hours have 
		elapsed unless it can be determined visually that all explosives have been 
		destroyed.  

	b.	Squib firing lines shall be disconnected, shunted, and grounded before 
		personnel can enter the burn area.  

	c.	Unburned or partially burned explosives material remaining in the pit or pad 
		may be moved or repositioned for further burning.  The material shall not be 
		raked or otherwise insulted.  The burning operation shall be repeated to 
		destroy any remaining explosive waste.  

	d.	At least 24 hours shall elapse before ashes are collected and the pit is 
		prepared for another burn.  

20.5	Disposal Area

	a.	Explosives waste destruction operations shall be separated from 
		magazines, inhabited buildings, public traffic routes, and occupied 
		operating buildings to ensure that personnel and facilities are not exposed 
		to hazardous blast overpressure, fire brands, fragments, or projectiles from 
		burning or detonation of explosives.  The following separation distances 
		shall apply:  

		(1)	Destruction by open burning or flashing shall not be performed 
			within 2395 ft (730 m), unless carried out in pits or with other 
			aids for limiting the range of fragments and debris if an 
			accidental detonation occurs.  In no case may the pit be located 
			at less than 670 ft (204 m) for weights of 100 lbs (45 kg) or 
			less and 1250 ft (381 m) for weights exceeding 100 lbs (45 kg).  
			Sites should be located taking into account the direction of the 
			prevailing winds to prevent sparks from being blown toward 
			explosives locations.  

		(2)	The size of the danger zone for destruction by open detonation shall 
			be determined by the formula 

				D(ft) = 328 W1/3 [D(m) = 131 Q1/3]  

		(3)	The minimum separation distance shall be:  

			(a)	Non-fragmenting explosive materials		1250 ft (381 m)

			(b)	Fragmenting explosive materials			2500 ft (762 m)

			(c)	Bombs/projectiles with 5 in. caliber or greater	4000 ft (1220 m)

			(d)	If known, the maximum fragment (debris) throw distances with an 
				applicable safety factor may be used to replace the 2500 ft (762 m) 
				and 4000 ft (1220 m) minimum separation distances but not below 
				1250 ft (381 m).  

		(4)	Self-contained destruction facilities fully analyzed for the intended 
			NEW are exempt from the above requirements.  

	b.	The maximum quantity of explosives that may be destroyed at one time 
		shall be determined by starting with a small quantity, gradually increasing 
		until an optimum amount, consistent with safe and efficient operation, is 
		reached.  

	c.	Explosives waste and ordinary rubbish shall not be destroyed in the same 
		destruction area at the same time.  

	d.	During destruction operations, the area within 200 ft (60 m) of the destruction 
		point shall be kept clear of dry grass, leaves, and other extraneous combustible 
		material.  This clearance may be reduced to fire brand distance if aids to limit 
		the range of fragments and debris are provided for the destruction points used 
		within the disposal area.  

	e.	Explosive waste awaiting destruction shall be stored at least intraline distance 
		from the explosives being destroyed.  

	f.	Trucks transporting explosives to the burning disposal area shall meet the 
		requirements of Chapter II, section 16.0.  Upon arrival at the burning grounds, 
		explosives containers will be distributed to trays or other disposal locations.  
		Vehicles shall be moved to a safe location as soon as explosives items have 
		been removed.  Explosives containers shall not be opened until vehicles have 
		been withdrawn.  

	g.	Provisions for emergency fire fighting shall be readily available at the waste 
		disposal area. 
 
	h.	The burning grounds shall be serviced with telephones or two-way radio 
		communication.  

20.6	Destruction by Detonation

	a.	Cased explosives should be removed from cases and burned or the cased item 
		destroyed by detonation.  Detonators, primary explosives, and other explosives 
		that might detonate if burned should also be destroyed by detonation.  

	b.	A high-energy detonator (e.g., an EBW) should initiate the detonation.  

20.7	Use of Solvents

	a.	Solvent immersion may be used to prepare small quantities of explosives and 
		explosive detonators for destruction.  

	b.	Items to be destroyed shall be soaked in suitable, compatible solvents until all the 
		explosives material is dissolved.  Saturated solvent solutions shall not be reused.  

	c.	Solvent-explosives mixtures shall be destroyed by burning.  

21.0	LABORATORY OPERATIONS

21.1	General

	a.	Safety guidelines presented in this section are applicable to general laboratory 
		operations involving explosive materials.  Laboratory operations shall be 
		conducted in a manner that maintains employee exposures to hazardous chemicals 
		at or below the permissible exposure limits (PELs) and complies with the facility 
		chemical hygiene plan.  

	b.	Laboratory personnel shall conduct work involving explosives materials only in 
		accordance with the provisions of written operating procedures (see Chapter VII).  
		Laboratory operations shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 45, Fire 
		Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals.  

	c.	The quantity of explosives present in a laboratory shall be the minimum required 
		for the operations and should be at or below assigned limits.  Storage of material 
		not in process is allowed provided the material is secured when the laboratory is 
		unoccupied.  The material shall be configured to preclude exceeding the 
		maximum credible event (MCE).  

	d.	Open flames shall be prohibited in laboratories where explosives or flammable 
		solvent vapors are or may be present unless allowed by an approved hazards 
		assessment or procedure.  

	e.	Disposal of explosives through laboratory drains shall be forbidden unless the 
		drain plumbing has no traps and is designed to handle explosives (i.e., is provided 
		with a sump or other device for the collection of solids).  Even if a drain is 
		designed to handle explosives, deliberate disposal of explosives in these drains 
		should be avoided.  These drains should be used only to clean up explosives 
		spills.  Special care should be exercised to prevent entrance of compounds into 
		drains that may react with iron or rust to form sensitive salts (e.g., picrates and 
		picric acid).  

	f.	Solvents or other flammable substances shall be protected against electrical 
		sparks, heat, and open flames.  

	g.	Suitable guards shall be provided for all glass or fragile equipment that must 
		withstand reduced or elevated pressure.  

21.2	Safety Shields

	a.	If a laboratory operation involves an explosion hazard, personnel should be 
		protected by safety shields or the operation should be performed remotely.  
		Table II-5 lists shields that have been tested and found acceptable for the 
		indicated quantities of explosive.  

		NOTE:  Shields listed in Table II-5 were not tested for metal-fragment penetration 
		(unless specifically indicated) and thus may not offer effective protection 
		when the explosive is closely confined in a heavy-walled metal 
		container.  (“Heavy-walled” is defined here as wall thickness to diameter 
		ratio greater than 0.01.)

Table II-6.  Safety Shields for Explosive Laboratory Operations Shield

	b.	If an experiment poses a metal-fragment hazard (as opposed to a glass-fragment 
		hazard) and the experiment cannot be conducted remotely, the proposed shield 
		should be tested and approved under conditions simulating an explosion in the 
		experimental setup but with at least 125 percent of the anticipated explosive 
		content.  

	c.	The shield shall be anchored to the hood frame or bench top when it is being used 
		for protection against more than 0.16 oz (5 grams) of TNT equivalent.  

	d.	Other shields may be used after successfully passing a test of 125 percent of the 
		rated explosive charge and being approved.  

	e.	For confined areas, a blast vent having less strength than the shield should be 
		provided. 

	f.	When explosives operations require personnel to reach around a shield to 
		manipulate equipment, exposure shall be minimized.  

21.3	Heating Operations

	a.	During synthesis, formulation, or experimental work, heat may be applied to 
		initiate or maintain reaction, to increase solubility, etc., if the principles below are 
		followed:  

		(1)	Heat shall be applied indirectly using steam, a water bath, oil bath, or 
			an approved laboratory electrical heating device such as a mantle.  

		(2)	Utmost caution shall be exercised to ensure that reactive material 
			does not come in direct contact with the heating elements.  

		(3)	If an experiment must be conducted behind a shield, any heating 
			device shall be mounted so that temperature can be controlled from 
			the operator side of the shield.  The heating device should be 
			mounted so it can be separated quickly from the reaction vessel 
			without operator exposure.  Consideration should be given during 
			design of the experiment to providing emergency cooling for the 
			reaction vessel or its contents.
  
		(4)	Heating of explosives with devices without proper controls shall be 
			monitored at all times.  If the operator must leave for any reason, the 
			heating device should be turned off.  Heating systems that will be 
			operated unattended shall have dual controls, an override shutoff, or 
			some other protection against failure of the primary heating control.  
			Systems capable of totally containing the effects of an explosion may 
			be exempted from this requirement.  

	b.	Periodic checks should be made to ensure that an experiment is proceeding 
		satisfactorily and that the apparatus is not boiling dry, malfunctioning, etc.  
		In the case of remotely controlled operations, provisions shall be made for 
		observation, using mirrors, television monitors, etc.  

21.4	Laboratory Setups

	a.	Good workmanship and laboratory practice shall be exercised in making and 
		operating laboratory setups.  In particular, the following guidelines apply:
  
		(1)	Equipment and apparatus shall be clean, in good condition, and in 
			good working order.  

		(2)	All glassware and apparatus shall be inspected for cracks, defects, 
			etc., before use.  Defective or damaged equipment shall be removed 
			from service.  

		(3)	Setups shall be geometrically and structurally stable.  

		(4)	Work areas should be as neat and uncluttered as possible.  

21.5	Low Concentration of Explosives in Solution

	a.	After explosives are in dilute solution (less than 25 percent explosives by 
		weight), the primary hazard shall be considered as that associated with the 
		solvent and not the explosive.  Where supported by technical data and 
		approved by the Explosives Development Committee (EDC), a 
		solvent/explosives solution greater than 25 percent may also be similarly 
		classified.  

	b.	If the explosive recrystallizes or precipitates out of solution, safety 
		guidelines for pure explosives shall apply.

21.6	Explosives Sample Control

	a.	Samples shall be delivered to a laboratory only at specific designated 
		locations.  

	b.	Each sample shall be properly identified and labeled.  

	c.	Upon completion of required tests or analyses, the sample should be 
		removed from the laboratory.  

	d.	A safety information sheet should accompany all samples of new 
		experimental explosive material submitted to a laboratory for 
		analysis.  

22.0	EMERGENCY CONTROL

22.1	Placarding and Fire Symbols

	a.	Placards and fire symbols (as specified in DoD 6055.9-STD or the 
		NFPA 704 Standard) shall be displayed consistently on buildings and work 
		areas throughout an entire facility to warn of potential hazards from 
		explosives and to provide information for emergency situations.  

22.2	Explosives Emergency Control Plans

	a.	Each installation shall have a facility-specific written plan for the control of 
		emergencies involving explosives (The plan may be need to be broken down 
		for each operating area).  An explosives emergency control plan may be part 
		of the facility’s overall emergency control plan.  All facility personnel shall 
		be trained in the plan’s content applicable to their area.  The plan shall be 
		available to all personnel for ready reference.  

	b.	Emergency situations that should be covered include the following:  

		(1)	Fires and explosions.  

		(2)	Floods.  

		(3)	Extreme weather conditions.  

		(4)	Conditions resulting in environmental disturbances.  

		(5)	Civil disturbance. 
 
		(6)	Threats and bomb scares.  

		(7)	Enemy attack. 
 
		(8)	Other emergencies that require rapid mobilization of personnel and 
			equipment to minimize death and injury to personnel or to prevent 
			the spread of damage and destruction.  

	c.	The plan should address:  

		(1)	Reporting an emergency. 
 
		(2)	Criteria for activating the emergency plan.  

		(3)	Authority and responsibility for administration and execution of the plan.  

		(4)	Mobilization of personnel to respond to an emergency or disaster.  

		(5)	Roles of operating personnel in responding to an emergency.  

		(6)	Procedures for responding to an emergency or disaster.  

		(7)	Accounting for evacuation of personnel. 
 
		(8)	Plant and document security.



       		  CHAPTER III—EXPLOSIVES AND PERSONNEL LIMITS AND CONTROL

1.0	EXPLOSIVES LIMITS

	a.	The quantity of explosives at an operating location shall be the minimum 
		necessary to carry out the operation safely and efficiently.  When practical, this 
		quantity shall be subdivided and separated to prevent propagation of detonation.  
		Supplies exceeding this minimum quantity shall be removed from the operating 
		area.  

	b.	In no case shall the quantity of explosives permitted in an operating building 
		exceed the maximum permitted by quantity-distance criteria.  Quantity-distance 
		criteria and guidelines for application of these criteria are presented in Chapter VI 
		of this Manual.  

2.0	PERSONNEL LIMITS

	a.	The number of personnel at an operating location shall be the minimum consistent 
		with safe and efficient operation.  In establishing personnel limits, the following 
		principles shall be followed: 
 
		(1)	Only jobs not necessary to the performance of a hazardous explosives 
			operation should not be performed in the same location as the hazardous 
			operation.  Only personnel needed for the hazardous operations shall be 
			allowed in hazardous locations.  

		(2)	Personnel limits shall allow for necessary casuals. 
 
		(3)	Sufficient personnel shall be available to perform a hazardous operation 
			safely and to obtain help and aid the injured if an accident occurs. 
 
		(4)	No person shall perform explosives work with a high risk of serious injury 
			alone.  Prompt and easy communications with other employees shall be 
			provided.  Facility management shall specify explosives activities that 
			may be performed alone.  

3.0	LIMIT CONTROL

3.1	Posting and Recording

	a.	All rooms, bays, and buildings containing explosives shall have posted in a 
		conspicuous place a standardized placard stating the maximum amount of 
		explosives and the maximum number of workers and casuals permitted in the 
		control unit at any one time. 
 
	b.	Maximum explosives and personnel limits for all buildings and bays for each 
		explosives area shall be documented and maintained on file.  

3.2	Limit Review and Approvals

	a.	Management personnel with authority and jurisdiction over an operating bay or 
		building shall review explosives and personnel limits for each location 
		periodically and recommend changes as required.  When the use of a location 
		changes, personnel and explosives weight limits shall be reviewed and limits 
		reestablished as required.  

	b.	Changes in explosives and personnel limits shall be reviewed and approved in the 
		same manner as operating procedures (see Chapter VII).  A procedure shall be 
		established for the approval of temporary changes in explosives and personnel 
		limits for an operating location.  

3.3	Personnel Controls

	a.	A system shall be established to control the presence of personnel within 
		explosive operating areas.  The movement of transients in the vicinity of an 
		explosives operating area should be controlled when their presence creates a 
		congestion problem or other safety concern.  

3.4	Explosives Control

	a.	A verifiable system shall be established to control the amount of explosives 
		present in an explosives facility.  

4.0	INSENSITIVE HIGH EXPLOSIVE LIMITS

	a.	When no other explosives are present, IHE weight limitations shall be based on 
		separation distances for Hazard Class 1.6 explosives (see Chapter VI, section 3.1) 
		or equivalent protection provided by facility design features.  The quantity of IHE 
		at an operating location shall be the minimum necessary to carry out the operation 
		safely and efficiently.  

	b.	IHE limits for pressing, dry blending, dry milling, dry screening, and certain 
		machining operations (see Chapter II, section 12.4.2c), should be the same as 
		those established for HE operations.  



       		 CHAPTER IV—PERSONAL PROTECTIVE  CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT

1.0	CLOTHING AND PERSONAL EQUIPMENT

1.1	Clothing

	a.	Each operation shall be analyzed to determine when personnel working with 
		explosives and toxic materials must wear approved coveralls or laboratory coats 
		to prevent contact with these materials and prevent contaminating personal 
		apparel.  Flame-retardant coveralls may be desired for explosives operations with 
		the potential for flash fire.  These coveralls shall not have cuffs and should not 
		have metallic fasteners.  Written procedures shall include protective clothing and 
		equipment requirements.  

	b.	Cotton or other antistatic outer and undergarments, including socks, should be 
		worn where generation of static electricity would create a hazard.  

1.2	Footwear

	a.	Personnel working in areas where electrostatic-sensitive explosive powders or 
		materials are handled shall wear conductive, non-sparking footwear.  Exception:  
		personnel working on electrical or electronic equipment shall not wear conductive 
		footwear unless protected by insulated mats, ground fault circuit interrupters 
		(GFCI), etc.  Personnel working in other areas where explosives contamination 
		may be present shall wear non-sparking footwear or bootie shoe coverings.
  
1.3	Respirators

	a.	Approved respiratory protection shall be worn when exhaust ventilation is 
		unavailable or does not adequately control airborne particulate, gases, or vapors 
		released during explosives operations.  The employee shall have current approval 
		to wear respiratory protection (medical exam, respirator fitting, and training).  

1.4	Eye Protection

	a.	Personnel working in or visiting eye hazard areas shall wear suitable eye 
		protection devices, particularly when EEDs are handled.  Explosive operations 
		shall be evaluated for eye hazard risks.  Contact lenses shall not be considered 
		appropriate eye protection.  

1.5	Gloves

	a.	Skin contact with some explosives and associated materials can result in 
		dermatitis or absorption across the skin barrier.  Operations where these materials 
		are present must be evaluated for skin contact hazards and the need for the proper 
		gloves.  

2.0	MAINTENANCE AND TESTING

2.1	Equipment Maintenance and Inspection

	a.	Personal protective equipment shall be properly maintained.  The operator’s life 
		may depend on the equipment functioning properly.  An appropriate inspection 
		schedule shall be established.  

2.2	Conductivity Testing

	a.	When conductive footwear is worn, the conductivity shall be tested initially and 
		regularly thereafter to ensure continued conductivity from person to ground.  

2.3	Cleaning and Disinfecting

	a.	Provision shall be made to launder and disinfect protective garments and devices.  
		This is especially important for equipment worn about the face.  Because 
		laundering affects the flame-retardant properties of fabric, flame-retardant 
		coveralls should be tested to establish the maximum number of laundering cycles 
		permitted.  

2.4	Contaminated Clothing

	a.	Contaminated clothing should be wiped or dusted to remove as much 
		contamination as possible.  Compressed air shall not be used for this purpose.  If 
		obvious contamination remains, personnel shall change their clothing.  



       				  CHAPTER V—TRAINING

1.0	GENERAL

	a.	Personnel shall be properly trained before they are assigned to explosives 
		operations or operate any explosives-transport vehicle.  The training for 
		explosives work, which serves to assist in conducting work safely and developing 
		safety awareness, shall ensure that personnel:  

		(1)	Develop and maintain a safe attitude towards work with explosives.  

		(2)	Define and understand the potential hazards involved.  

		(3)	Learn correct skills to perform tasks safely.  

		(4)	Are prepared for unexpected hazardous conditions.  

		(5)	Read and understand the appropriate operating procedures.  

2.0	SUPERVISORY RESPONSIBILITY

	a.	The supervisor shall be responsible for:  

		(1)	Determining the required training for personnel.  

		(2)	Verifying that training has qualified the worker to perform assigned tasks 
			safely and efficiently.  

		(3)	Ensuring that the worker can perform required emergency duties.  

		(4)	Providing on-the-job training.  

		(5)	Continually updating worker training.  

3.0	TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION PROGRAMS

	a.	Each organization shall have a training and qualification program and shall 
		establish qualification requirements.  Paragraph 3.0b, below,  is an example.  

	b.	Completion of training should qualify the worker to perform a task for a specific 
		period of time.  The following items should govern maintenance of qualifications.  

		(1)	At the end of the initial qualification period, qualification may be extended 
			for subsequent specific time periods if:  

			(a)	The worker has successfully performed the task during the 
				preceding six months and has read and understands the current 
				operating procedures; or

			(b)	The worker has completed refresher training and is again found to 
				be qualified by his or her supervisor.  

		(2)	Retraining in areas of weakness should be required of workers who do not 
			demonstrate job proficiency or who subsequently violate safe practices.  

		(3)	When an operating procedure is modified, all personnel using that 
			procedure should be retrained in the modified procedure.  

		(4)	An employee should not be permitted to continue working with explosives 
			if the supervisor, with counsel from medical personnel, determines that he 
			or she is unable to perform the task safely.  Possible reasons include:  

			(a)	Physical injury or illness.  

			(b)	Disease.  

			(c)	Mental or emotional disturbances.  

		(5)	Training records should be maintained for each worker, with the following 
			information included:  

			(a)	Description and dates of training received. 
 
			(b)	Description and dates of refresher training.  

			(c)	A signed “statement of understanding” for operating procedures.  

			(d)	Attendance at safety meetings and participation on safety 
				committees. 
 
			(e)	Qualification review by supervisor.  

		(6)	The supervisor may temporarily authorize an employee who has not 
			completed the required training to perform a task under the following 
			conditions:  

			(a)	The supervisor determines that the employee has a working 
				knowledge adequate to perform the task safely.  

			(b)	A qualified person directly supervises the work.  

	c.	Hazardous materials information and training programs are required for personnel 
		who work with explosives and hazardous materials used in conjunction with 
		explosives operation.  Training should include:
  
		(1)	Information on physical and health hazards.  

		(2)	The purpose and proper use of engineering controls, work practice 
			controls and protective equipment.  

		(3)	Labeling systems and MSDS terms.  

		(4)	Methods to detect the presence or release of hazardous materials in the 
			work area.  

4.0	UNEXPLODED ORDNANCE (UXO) TRAINING

	a.	Personnel in charge of UXO removal or disposal should be US citizens and shall 
		have successfully completed training at a United States Military Explosives 
		Ordnance Disposal (EOD) school.  Personnel shall provide documentation of 
		completed training and have a minimum of 18 months operational EOD 
		experience.  All personnel engaged in operations shall be thoroughly trained in 
		applicable UXO recognition and explosives safety.  

	b.	Personnel performing UXO removal or disposal shall have completed training at a 
		US Military EOD school or have equivalent training or experience.  All other 
		personnel engaged in operations shall be trained thoroughly in applicable UXO 
		recognition and explosives safety.  

	c.	Personnel not involved in UXO operations, but requiring access to areas known or 
		suspected to contain UXOs shall be required to have completed UXO awareness 
		training and shall be escorted by personnel qualified under 4.0a or b above.  The 
		UXO HE Awareness video (EPL 122) is recommended for the awareness training.  

5.0	REFERENCES

	a.	OT-525, Personnel Qualifications, Commanding Officer, Naval Explosive 
		Ordnance Disposal Technology Division, 2008 Stump Neck Road, Indian Head, 
		MD 20640-5070

	b.	UXO High Explosives Awareness Video (EPL 122), Sandia National 
		Laboratories/New Mexico Environmental Restoration Program.  



      		   CHAPTER VI—QUANTITY-DISTANCE AND LEVEL-OF-PROTECTION CRITERIA  
				FOR EXPLOSIVES ACTIVITIES 

1.0	GENERAL

	a.	This chapter establishes quantity-distance and level-of-protection criteria for all 
		DOE operations involving explosives.  These criteria provide specific levels of 
		personnel and property protection from the effects of potential fires and 
		explosions within and outside of DOE installations.  

	b.	The cardinal principle to be observed at any location or in any operation involving 
		explosives, ammunition, severe fire hazards, or toxic materials is to limit, in a 
		manner consistent with safe and efficient operation, the exposure to a minimum 
		number of personnel, for a minimum time, and to a minimum amount of the 
		hazardous material.  

	c.	The Facility Management shall ensure that ammunition and explosives safety site 
		plans are submitted, as specified in sections 1.1 and 1.2 to DOE for review and 
		approval.  DOE review and approval will be conducted by the Authority Having 
		Jurisdiction for explosives safety within the Operations/Site Office. 
 
1.1	For New Explosives Facilities and Operations and Explosives Facilities 
	Undergoing Major Modifications:  

	a.	Preliminary Site Plan must be developed and submitted for DOE/NNSA approval 
		before CD-1 approval and the Final Site Plan submitted and approved before 
		CD-4 (See DOE O 413.3)

	b.	For a facility where the risk associated with the operation is increased, with an 
		increase in explosive weight or a major modification or level of protection, a new 
		site plan shall be required and approved prior to start of operations.  

1.2	For Existing Explosives Facilities and Operations:  

	a.	A Site Plan must be developed and submitted for review by DOE/NNSA local 
		authority as soon as possible but not later than two (2) years from approval of 
		DOE M 440.1-1A (Revision 9) of the DOE Explosives Safety Manual.  The Site 
		plan shall contain the following information:  

		(1)	A Quantity Distance (QD) Chart containing the following:  

			(a)	Each sited facility (PES) listing maximum Net Explosives 
				Weight for each applicable Hazard Division

			(b)	Actual and required distance to exposed sites (ES)

			(c)	QD criteria used for siting each PES – ES relationship

		(2)	Map showing each PES, its clear zone, and all ESs within the clear zone.  

		(3)	Personnel Limits for the explosives facility.
  
		(4)	Brief description of explosives and  nonexplosives operations within the 
			clear zone.  

		(5)	Statement that the current operation presents no significantly greater risk 
			than that assumed when the facility was originally constructed and

		(6)	If the facility does not meet current criteria for the operation being 
			conducted, provide a statement: 
 
			(a)	Why it is not feasible to bring the facility up to current standards 
				and

			(b)	That the current operation presents no significantly greater risk 
				than that assumed when the facility was originally constructed.  

	b.	A letter of transmittal shall accompany each site plan or group of site plans.  The 
		letter should contain the reason for submittal (preliminary or final siting of new 
		facility, site plan/plans for grandfathered facility/facilities, change in operation 
		with increased or decreased QD requirement) and a request for site plan approval.  
		For a grandfathered facility, note whether the facility meets current criteria for the 
		operation being conducted.  

	c.	If the siting has any unique characteristics explain what they are and what criteria 
		is being applied.  (Example:  If a facility is built to control blast effects and 
		fragments, QD to other facilities will not apply).

2.0	APPLICABILITY OF CRITERIA

2.1	Specific Applications

	a.	Criteria presented in this chapter shall be used to:  

		(1)	Establish maximum explosives limits for explosives facilities and 
			operations.  

		(2)	Plan explosives activities in existing facilities.  

		(3)	Design and site new facilities and operations.  

2.2	Explosives Limits

	a.	Explosives limits shall never exceed the minimum required for efficient, safe 
		operation (see Chapter III).  

2.3	Areas Where Criteria Are Not Applicable

	a.	The quantity-distance and level-of-protection criteria defined in section 4.0 of this 
		chapter are not applicable to portable buildings used at specified nuclear test shot 
		locations.  

3.0	QUANTITY-DISTANCE CRITERIA

	a.	Quantity-distance criteria must account for the types and severity of hazards each 
		explosive material presents, the construction and orientation of facilities to which 
		the criteria are applied, and the degree of protection desired for personnel and 
		facilities adjacent to the explosives operations.  

	b.	The hazard classification system recommended by the UN defines the types and 
		severities of explosives hazards.  The guidelines presented below specify 
		minimum degrees of protection for various facility categories and describe how 
		quantity-distance tables are to be applied to facilities of various construction and 
		orientation with respect to adjacent facilities.  

3.1	Hazard Classes and Class Division

	a.	Explosives shall be classified based on their reactions to specific initiating 
		influences.  Personnel shall use the UN recommended hazard classification 
		system for DOE explosives classification.  The UN system consists of nine 
		classes for dangerous goods, with explosives included in Class 1.  The 
		explosives hazard class is further subdivided into “divisions” based on the 
		character and predominance of the associated hazards and their potential for 
		causing personnel casualties or property damage.  Table VI-1 lists the six 
		divisions of Class 1.  

Table VI-1.  Divisions of Class 1 Hazard Class and Division Designators

	b.	When required to properly describe the hazard, a numerical figure in 
		parentheses shall be placed to the left of the division designators 1.1 through 
		1.3 [e.g., (18) 1.1, (08) 1.2, and (06) 1.3]; this number indicates the minimum 
		separation distance (in hundreds of feet) for specified levels of protection 
		from explosive items for inhabited buildings, public traffic routes, and 
		personnel in the open.  A minimum distance number shall be used for all 
		items in Class 1, Division 2, as shown in the applicable tables.  Figure IV-1 
		illustrates the use of the UN hazards classification system and lists the storage 
		compatibility group opposite each hazard class.  The listed compatibility 
		group is typical for the expected compatibility to hazard class relationships.  
		Note:  The two classification systems apply to different concerns.  

		(1)	Compatibility groupings define which explosives may be stored together 
			safely without increasing the risk of initiation.  

		(2)	Hazard classifications indicate the initiation effects of the various 
			explosives.  
 
Figure VI-1.  Application of Hazard Classification System
		
	c.	Classification tests (described by TB 700-2, Explosives Hazard 
		Classification Procedures) and additional tests (as desired), including 
		United Nations ST/SG/AC.10/1 and ST/SG/AC/10/11, shall be used to 
		assign energetic materials to the appropriate compatibility groups and 
		hazard divisions.  Supplemental tests may be used to characterize material 
		hazards more fully if material properties or anticipated material 
		environment are expected to significantly influence the explosives 
		classification.  

	d.	Although DOT Hazard classifications require the use of the Bureau of 
		Explosives’ (BOE) Impact Apparatus to determine impact sensitivity, other 
		impact apparatus may be used, providing:  

		(1)	Test results for at least two reference explosives are compared to 
			results for the reference explosives on the BOE Impact Apparatus; 
			and

		(2)	A minimum of 10 trials each is run for the reference explosives and 
			the explosives being classified.  

3.2	Establishing Quantity of Explosives and Distances

3.2.1	General

	a.	The principles and tables presented 

		in DoD 6055.9-STD, DoD Ammunition and Explosives Safety 
		Standards, shall be used to determine the following:  

		(1)	The total quantities of explosives in adjacent magazines, 
			operating buildings, or other explosives facilities that must 
			be applied to quantity distance tables.  

		(2)	When the levels of protection required by section 4.0 of this 
			chapter differ from the requirements of DoD 6055.9-STD, 
			section 4.0 shall take precedence.  

		(3)	The minimum separation distances required for the facilities 
			are based on the desired level of protection and total 
			quantities of explosives.  

		(4)	The total quantity of explosives is determined by defining and 
			examining the maximum credible event (MCE).  If an explosives 
			event occurs, the MCE is the largest credible amount of explosives 
			that could be involved (not necessarily the total quantity of 
			explosives present).  

3.2.2	Use of Metric System

	a.	Throughout DoD 6055.9-STD, the NEW is used to calculate distance 
		using the formula D=KW1/3, when D is the distance in feet, K is a factor 
		based on the risk assumed or permitted, and W is the NEW in pounds.  
	b.	When metric units are used, the symbol Q denotes net explosive quantity 
		(NEQ) expressed in kilograms.  In the formula D=KQ1/3, the distance D is 
		expressed in meters.  Thus, the respective units of K are ft/lb1/3 and 
		m/kg1/3 in the two systems.  The value of K in English units is 
		approximately 2.5 times its value in metric units [e.g., if D(m)=6Q1/3, then 
		D(ft)=15W1/3].  

3.2.3	Railcars and Transport Vehicles

	a.	Explosives-loaded railcars, motor vehicles, and other transport vehicles in 
		holding yards are considered aboveground magazines for 
		quantity-distance purposes.  They shall be kept in groups, and each group 
		shall be limited to a maximum of 250,000 lb (113,398 kg) of high 
		explosives.  

		(1)	When a railcar receiving yard or point is the site where explosives 
			will be interchanged between the common carrier and the facility 
			rail system, quantity-distance provisions do not apply provided that 
			the cars are moved expeditiously to a suitable location.  

		(2)	When inspection of a railcar of explosives indicates a hazardous or 
			potentially hazardous condition, the railcar should be moved at 
			once to a suspect car spur track or an isolated section of track.  
			This spur or section of track should be accessible directly from the 
			inspection point.  The distance between the spur or track and 
			facility boundaries, classification yards, inhabited buildings, 
			administration areas, operating buildings, magazines, inert storage 
			locations, and public traffic routes should be the inhabited-building 
			distance based on the maximum quantity of explosives that the 
			facility can receive in one railcar.  Only one car is permitted at this 
			location at any time. 
 
		(3)	Incoming motor vehicles carrying explosives shall be inspected at 
			a station remote from hazardous and populated areas.  

3.2.4	Utilities Installations

	a.	Permanent DOE-controlled underground utilities installations (excluding 
		building service lines) should be separated from explosives locations 
		containing Hazard Class/Division 1.1 materials (see Table VI-2).  

	b.	Privately owned or operated utilities installations (aboveground and 
		underground) shall be separated from explosives locations by at least 
		public traffic route distances.  Installations that include structures should 
		be separated from explosives facilities by inhabited-building distance.  

	c.	Certain auxiliary power facilities, transformer stations, etc., present fire 
		hazards to explosives facilities.  Transformers and associated electrical 
		switching apparatus serving one explosives facility or complex that do not 
		present a fire hazard to the facility (i.e., dry-type, “less flammable” 
		oil-insulated, etc.) shall be located as specified in NFPA 70 and FM Data 
		Sheet 5-4/14-18.  

	d.	Normal oil-insulated transformers shall be located at least 50 ft (15 m) 
		from an explosives facility or as specified in DoD 6055.9-STD.  

Table VI-2 .  Quantity-Distance Separation for Protection  

3.2.5	Petroleum Storage Tanks

	a.	Above ground tanks containing 500 gal or less of petroleum that serve 
		equipment (such as oil heaters or diesel generators) located in or near 
		explosives buildings shall be located a minimum of 50 ft (15 m) from 
		explosives locations and comply with NFPA 30.  Tanks located near 
		intentional detonation areas should be barricaded.  Similar underground 
		tanks complying with NFPA 30 do not require separation from explosives 
		facilities.  In both cases, the tanks shall be equipped with an anti-siphoning 
		device, unless siphoning is impossible.  

4.0	LEVEL-OF-PROTECTION CRITERIA

4.1	Hazard Classes

	a.	The level of protection required for an explosives activity shall be based on the 
		hazard class (accident potential) for the explosives activity involved.  These four 
		hazard classes are defined for explosives activities as follows:  

		(1)	Class I consists of those explosives activities with a high accident 
			potential.  Remote operations are required because any personnel exposure 
			is unacceptable for Class I activities.  

			(a)	In general, Class I includes activities where energies that may 
				interface with explosives are approaching the upper safety 
				limits, or the loss of control of the interfacing energy is likely to 
				exceed the safety limits for the explosives involved.  Class I 
				includes those research and development activities with safety 
				implications have not been fully characterized.
 
			(b)	Examples of Class I activities are screening, blending, pressing, 
				extrusion, drilling of holes, dry machining, machining 
				explosives and metal in combination, some environmental 
				testing, new explosives development and processes, explosives 
				disposal, and destructive testing.  

		(2)	Class II consists of explosives activities with moderate accident potential 
			because of the explosives type, condition of the explosives, or nature of 
			the operations involved.  Class II activities have an accident potential 
			greater than Class III activities, but personnel exposure in contact 
			operations is acceptable.  

			(a)	Class II includes activities where the energies that do or may 
				interface with the explosives are normally well within the safety 
				boundaries for the explosives involved, but where the loss of 
				control of these energies could approach the safety limits.  
			(b)	Examples of Class II activities are weighing, some wet 
				machining, assembly and disassembly, some environmental 
				testing, and some packaging operations.  

		(3)	Class III consists of explosives activities with low accident potential such 
			as activities during storage and operations incidental to storage or removal 
			from storage.  

		(4)	Class IV consists of those explosives activities with IHE or IHE 
			subassemblies.  Although mass detonating, this explosive type is so 
			insensitive that the probability of accidental initiation or transition from 
			burning to detonation is negligible.  If the containers are heated in a fire, 
			IHE reactions will be limited to pressure ruptures of the containers.  Most 
			processing and storage activities with IHE and IHE subassemblies are 
			Class IV.  However, the following examples of explosives activities with 
			IHE and IHE subassemblies remain Class I:  

			(a)	Pressing.  

			(b)	Some machining (see Chapter II, section 12.4.2c).  

			(c)	Dry blending.  

			(d)	Dry milling. 

			(e)	Dry screening.  

4.2	Required Level of Protection

	a.	Each bay (i.e., storage, handling, or processing building) that houses an 
		explosives activity shall have a protection level based on the hazard class 
		determined for the activity.  The level of protection may be provided by 
		equipment design, structural design, operation separation, or provision of 
		operational shields.  The levels of protection required for each hazard class 
		are as follows and shall be required for new facilities or redesign of any 
		existing facilities when changes in activities will result in a more hazardous 
		class.  

4.2.1	Explosives Bay

	a.	Class IV.  Bays for Class IV (negligible probability of accidental 
		initiation) activities shall provide protection from fire hazards effects.  
		This protection may be achieved by Hazard Class/Division 1.3 
		aboveground-magazine distance separation or by a design that 
		contains the effects of an accident.  Because accidental detonation is 
		not considered credible, Class IV bays shall be sited and designed as 
		acceptors rather than donors for the effects of blast overpressure, 
		structural collapse, and missiles (hazardous fragments).  

	b.	Class III.  Bays for Class III (low accident potential) activities shall 
		provide protection from explosion propagation from bay to bay within 
		buildings and between buildings that are located at intraline or magazine 
		distance.  If intermediate storage of explosives is within an operating 
		building containing Class II or Class I operations, the intermediate storage 
		or staging bay will require Class II level of protection.  Examples of 
		Class II activities include weighing, assembly and disassembly, some wet 
		machining, some environmental testing, and some packaging operations.  
		Minimum separation distances may be reduced when explosives bays are 
		designed to adequately contain the effects of an accident (blast pressures 
		and missiles).  

	c.	Class II.  Bays for Class II (moderate accident potential) activities shall 
		comply with the requirements for Class III bays, and in addition provide 
		protection to prevent fatalities and severe personnel injuries in all 
		occupied areas other than the bay of occurrence.  (For Class II, access 
		ramps and plant roads are not considered occupied areas).  Prevention of 
		fatalities and severe injuries is satisfied when personnel in occupied areas 
		other than the bay of occurrence will not be exposed to the following:  

		(1)	Overpressures greater than 100 kPa (15 psi) maximal effective 
			pressure.  

		(2)	Structural collapse resulting from overpressure or debris impact.  
			Structural collapse is a structural component’s failure as a direct 
			result of a facility losing structural integrity.  This collapse must 
			not result in explosives propagation, fatalities, or severe personal 
			injuries.  

		(3)	Missiles (hazardous fragments) generated in acceptor-occupied 
			areas.  Hazardous fragments that can cause fatalities and severe 
			injuries are defined as those having greater than 58 ft-lb impact 
			energy.  The threshold pressure for eardrum rupture is 34 kPa 
			(5 psi); one-half of the threshold pressure for lung damage is 
			100 kPa (15 psi).  (See Chapter I of TM 5-1300).  

	d.	Class I.  Bays for Class I (high accident potential) activities shall comply 
		with the requirements for Class II bays, and in addition provide protection 
		to prevent serious personal injuries, including personnel performing the 
		activity, personnel in other occupied areas, and transients.  This protection 
		can be achieved by controlling blast and debris through suppression, 
		containment, or establishing an exclusion area with positive access 
		control.  Serious injury prevention is satisfied when personnel will not be 
		exposed to:  

		(1)	Overpressures greater than 34 kPa (5 psi) maximal effective 
			pressure, which should not exceed 16 kPa (2.3 psi) peak 
			positive incident pressure.

		(2)	Structural collapse of a facility or building from overpressure or 
			debris impact.  Structural collapse a structural component’s 
			failure as a direct result of loss of structural integrity.  This 
			collapse must not result in explosion propagation, fatalities, or 
			severe personal injuries.  

		(3)	Missiles (hazardous fragments)—hazardous fragments that 
			can cause serious injuries are defined as those having greater 
			than 11 ft-lb impact energy.  

		(4)	Thermal fluxes greater than 0.3 cal/cm2/sec.  This value is 
			specified in DoD 6055.9-STD, Chapter 4, as required protection 
			for all personnel assigned to perform remote operations.

4.2.2	Bays for Joint Explosives-Plutonium Activities

	a.	Bays for joint explosives-plutonium activities shall comply with the 
		requirements of section 4.2.1 of this chapter for the class of explosives 
		activity involved and DOE DNA TP 20-7.  Because the plutonium has 
		contamination potential, the bays shall also comply with the following:  

		(1)	Bays for Uncased Explosives—Plutonium Activities.  Where it is 
			necessary to store, handle, or process uncased explosives 
			components and plutonium in the same bay, the enclosing structure 
			and its ventilation, electrical, fire protection, and utility systems 
			shall be designed to assure that, if all the explosives present should 
			detonate, radiation exposures shall comply with the current version 
			of DOE O 420.1B standards for hypothesized accidental releases.  
			The safety analysis report shall govern the quantity of plutonium 
			allowed in such a bay.  Activities may be performed in Class IV 
			bays if IHE, IHE subassemblies, or IHE weapons are present; 
			however, criticality considerations shall govern the quantity of 
			plutonium allowed.  

		(2)	Bays for Cased Explosives—Plutonium Activities.  When 
			handling or processing cased high-explosive components that 
			contain plutonium, the enclosing structure shall be designed as a 
			Class II explosives bay.  Storage shall conform to Class III 
			requirements.  The plutonium quantity shall be limited to 25 kg 
			per bay.  Plutonium limits for magazines are specified in DOE 
			DNA TP 20-7.  Activities may be performed in Class IV bays if 
			only IHE, IHE subassemblies, or IHE weapons are present; 
			however, criticality considerations shall govern the quantity of 
			plutonium allowed. 

5.0	FIRE PROTECTION

5.1	Vegetation Control

	a.	Vegetation around storage magazines and explosives operating facilities should 
		be controlled to minimize potential damage to the magazine or facility from 
		erosion or grass, brush, or forest fires.  A firebreak at least 50-ft (15-m) wide 
		and free from combustible material should be maintained around each 
		aboveground magazine or explosives operating facility.  If an aboveground 
		magazine or explosive facility exterior is fire resistant, the firebreak can have 
		vegetation, but the growth must be controlled to prevent rapid transmission of 
		fire to the magazine or facility.  Maintaining the firebreaks around 
		earth-covered magazines and cutting grass covering these structures is only 
		required around ventilators to prevent transmission of a fire into a structure.  

5.2	Fire Protection Criteria

	a.	The following fire protection criteria shall be required for all new facilities or 
		redesign of existing facilities where changes in activities will result in a higher 
		hazardous classification.  

		(1)	Automatic fire suppression systems shall be installed in all buildings 
			containing HE and plutonium, except storage magazines.  

		(2)	For buildings containing explosives, but no plutonium, facility 
			management shall determine the need for fire suppression systems 
			based on maximum fire loss criteria and program mission 
			interruptions and delays as outlined in the current versions of 
			DOE O 420.1B, Facility Safety; DOE O 430.1B, Real Property Asset 
			Management; and DOE O 440.1A, Worker Protection Management for 
			DOE Federal and Contractor Employees.  

		(3)	Where fire suppression is required, each explosives bay shall have an 
			individual feed with its controls protected outside the bay and located to 
			enable system operation if a detonation occurs in any bay.  

		(4)	Transmitted fire alarms shall distinguish between explosives and 
			nonexplosives areas through the use of annunciator panels at safe 
			locations; small non-HE areas do not need separately transmitted 
			alarms.  

6.0	EXPLOSIVES FACILITY SITING AND DESIGN CRITERIA REFERENCES

	a.	Permanent explosives facilities shall comply fully with TM 5-1300, “Structures to 
		Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions,” and DOE/TIC-11268, “A Manual 
		for the Prediction of Blast and Fragment Loading of Structures.”  Portable 
		magazines should be ventilated and resistant to water, fire, and theft.  Portable 
		magazines can be made of any material that meets these guidelines.  [Portable 
		facilities that comply with 27 CFR 55.206, “Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and 
		Firearms” (BATF) meet this criteria.]  Portable magazines shall be sited 
		per DoD 6055.9-STD as above ground magazines.  

	b.	Blast-resistant design for personnel and facility protection shall be based on the 
		TNT equivalency of the maximum quantity of explosives and propellants.  In 
		accordance with TM 5-1300, the TNT equivalency shall be increased by 
		20 percent for design purposes. 
 
	c.	For an unproven facility design, either a validated model or full-scale test is 
		required to ensure structural adequacy unless a high degree of confidence can be 
		provided by calculations or other means.  The contract administrator (Head of 
		Field Organization) with competent engineering review shall concur in any 
		determination regarding test requirements.  

	d.	The design of new facilities, or those with major modifications, shall conform to 
		the DOE explosives safety requirements.  For a tabular summary of the protective 
		design types established by these criteria, see Table VI-3.  Protective construction 
		design features are specified in TM 5-1300 and DOE/TIC-11268.  

	e.	Studies necessary to provide the technical basis for location, engineering, design, 
		and operation (under normal and potential design basis accident conditions) of 
		buildings shall follow the stricter of this Manual or DoD 6055.9-STD, DoD 
		Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards, for establishing explosives 
		quantity-distance separation.  

6.1	Site and General Construction Plans for Ammunition and Explosives Facilities

	a.	Site and general construction plans for ammunition and explosives facilities as 
		well as plans for changes in utilization of facilities or mission changes that 
		adversely affect the explosives Q-D requirements shall be submitted to the 
		Operations/Site Office for review and approval.  Plans shall be forwarded for:  

		(1)	New construction or major modifications of facilities for ammunition and 
			explosives activities.  Modifications or rehabilitation plans for existing 
			facilities do not require submission to the Operations/Site Office when the 
			plans do not introduce additional hazards or do not increase the net 
			explosives capacity or chemical agent hazard for which the facility was 
			designed or sited.  

		(2)	Facilities for activities not involving ammunition or explosives that are 
			in such proximity to ammunition and explosives as to be exposed to 
			hazards or for which a reasonable doubt may exit regarding possible 
			exposure to hazards.  

		(3)	Facilities for activities not involving ammunition and explosives that 
			become exposed to blast, fire, or fragment hazards; or potential toxic 
			chemical agent release due to change in facility mission or facilities 
			usage.  

	b.	When the review of site and general construction plans is required, the 
		Facility Management shall:  

		(1)	Indicate specifically in the letter of transmittal its approval of the 
			proposal, along with changes, modifications, or specific precautionary 
			measures considered necessary.  

		(2)	Comply with applicable requirements of DoD 6055.9-STD for site 
			plan submission.  

		(3)	A copy of the complete site plan and the final safety submission, 
			together with Operations/Site Office letter(s) of approval, must be 
			retained as a permanent record at the facility/site of origin.  The 
			information may be subject to review during the DOE surveys.  
			Facility maps shall be kept current with the latest site plan 
			approval and reconciled with the facility master planning 
			document.  

	c.	DoD 6055.9-STD requires that the minimum distance for protection from 
		hazardous fragments to facility boundaries, critical facility, and inhabited 
		structures shall be 1,250 ft for explosives quantities of 101 to 20,000 lb and 
		670 ft for 100 lbs or less of Hazard Class/Division 1.1 explosives, unless it 
		can be shown that there will be no hazardous fragments or debris at lesser 
		distances.  The methods of calculation presented in the Department of 
		Defense Explosives Safety Board (DDESB) Technical Paper No. 13 may be 
		used to establish a smaller fragment exclusion zone.  It is not intended that 
		these minimum fragment distances be applied to operating facilities or 
		dedicated support functions within an operating line.  For these exposures, 
		the DOE criteria presented in this Manual, for Class I, II, III, or IV activities 
		with appropriate quantity-distance separations are the required protection 
		levels.  

	d.	In addition to this Manual, the following are resource documents for the siting 
		and design of explosives facilities:  

		(1)	DOE O 420.1B, Facility Safety, (current version), U.S. Department of 
			Energy, Washington, D.C. 20545.  

		(2)	DOE O 430.1B, Real Property Asset Management, (current version), 
			Office of Project and Facilities Management, U.S. Department of 
			Energy, Washington, D.C. 20545.  

		(3)	10 CFR 830, Nuclear Safety Management.  

		(4)	TM 5-1300, NAVFAC P-397, AFM 88-22, Structures to Resist the 
			Effects of Accidental Explosions, Departments of the Army, the Navy, 
			and the Air Force, Chairman, Department of Defense Explosives Safety 
			Board, 2461 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22331.
  
		(5)	DOE/TIC-11268, A Manual for the Prediction of Blast and Fragment 
			Loading of Structures, U.S. Department of Energy, Albuquerque 
			Operations, Amarillo Area Office, Facilities and Maintenance Branch, 
			P.O. Box 30030, Amarillo, TX 79120.  

		(6)	DoD 6055.9-STD, Department of Defense Ammunition and Explosives 
			Safety Standards, Assistant Secretary of Defense (Manpower, 
			Installations, and Logistics), Chairman, Department of Defense 
			Explosives Safety Board, 2461 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 
			22331.  

		(7)	DDESB, Technical Paper No. 13, Prediction of Building Debris for 
			Quantity-Distance Siting, April 1991, Chairman, Department of 
			Defense Explosives Safety Board, 2461 Eisenhower Avenue, 
			Alexandria, VA 22331.  

		(8)	AMC-R-385-100, AMC Safety Manual, Headquarters, United States 
			Army Materiel Command, 5001 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 
			22333.  

		(9)	TR-828, Blast Environment from Fully and Partially Vented Explosions 
			in Cubicles, W.A. Keenan and J.E. Tancreto, Civil Engineering 
			Laboratory, Naval Construction Battalion Center, Port Hueneme, CA 
			93043.  

		(10)	AD 411445, Industrial Engineering Study to Establish Safety Design 
			Criteria for Use in Engineering of Explosives Facilities and Operations, 
			Process Engineering Branch, APMED Picatinny Arsenal, Dover, NJ; 
			Defense Technical Information Center, Defense Logistics Agency, 
			Cameron Station, Alexandria, VA 22314.  

		(11)	AFWL-TR-74-102, The Air Force Manual for Design and Analysis of 
			Hardened Structures, Air Force Weapons Laboratory, Air Force 
			Systems Command, Kirtland Air Force Base, NM 87117; AD B004152, 
			Defense Technical Information Center, Defense Logistics Agency, 
			Cameron Station, Alexandria, VA 22314. 
 
		(12)	HNDM-1110-01-2, Suppressive Shields, Structural Design and Analysis 
			Handbook, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Huntsville Division, 
			HNDED-CS, P.O. Box 1600, Huntsville, AL 35807.

Table VI-3.  Explosives Facilities:  Protective Design Requirements by Activity Type



        			 CHAPTER VII—OPERATING PROCEDURES
1.0	GENERAL

1.1	Requirements

	a.	This chapter establishes requirements for preparing and controlling procedures 
		used for operations involving explosives at DOE installations.  These 
		requirements minimize the probability of an incident resulting from operations 
		using outdated, inapplicable, or incomplete procedures, or from operations 
		performed in violation of established practices. 

	b.	This chapter also specifies that procedures must be generated for all explosives 
		operations because the step-by-step reasoning process that is used in developing 
		the procedure will identify many safety-related problem areas that might be 
		overlooked otherwise.  In addition, the approval system for new or revised 
		procedures also provides other viewpoints and knowledge that may not be 
		available to the originator and may need incorporation into the procedure.  

1.2	Types of Procedures

	a.	This chapter describes two general types of operating procedures:  

		(1)	Standard operating procedures (SOPs).  Standard operating procedures are 
			formalized documents prepared for performance of a task on a routine 
			basis.  Existing and applicable Department of Defense (DoD) ordnance 
			publications (see section 3.0 for references) will be reviewed for 
			application of unexploded ordnance (UXO) work.  Revisions to these 
			documents will invalidate the DoD procedures.  If the documents are not 
			appropriate for the situation, then changes may be made, subject to the 
			[DOE] review and approval process.  

		(2)	Nonstandard procedures, which include experimental and special 
			procedures.  Experimental and special procedures are documents prepared 
			for performance of a task on a limited basis.  For the purpose of this 
			Manual, special procedures are those written to correct a problem 
			encountered in an explosive operation.  

2.0	GUIDELINES

	a.	The following general guidelines should be used in creating operating procedures.  

2.1	Before Operation

	a.	Before starting any operation involving explosives, a hazard analysis shall be 
		undertaken to identify any abnormal problems that will require special training, 
		equipment, or procedures to safeguard personnel conducting the operation. 
 
	b.	A thorough review shall be conducted in accordance with Chapter II, section 1.7, 
		which will establish if the operation is safe to field.  A Safety Analysis Report 
		(SAR) is not required for UXO cleanups.  For nonstandard cleanups, such as 
		mass burial or radiation contamination, a Safety Assessment (SA) is required, 
		along with SOPs/special procedures that include the additional precautions to be 
		taken. 
 
	c.	General operating procedures shall be written and approved for each activity to 
		ensure consistency and safety of operations.  

2.2	Supervisory Responsibility

	a.	Supervisory personnel shall be responsible for enforcing the provisions of all 
		procedures used in their jurisdiction.  

2.3	Preparation

	a.	Responsible personnel with knowledge of the operations involved shall prepare 
		the procedures.  

	b.	All material called out in the procedure and operational steps shall be checked for 
		compliance with the guidance in this Manual and other DOE directives that may 
		be applicable per DOE O 440.1A.  

	c.	The specific types of equipment and building or area in which the operation is to 
		be conducted should be designated in the procedure, when applicable.  

	d.	If similar operations in the same area involve differences in equipment or process, 
		supplemental procedures or sections shall be written.  

2.4	Approval

	a.	New or revised operating procedures shall be reviewed and approved prior to use.  
		Each operating contractor should establish levels of approval required based on 
		inherent risk. As a minimum, review and approval requirements shall 
		include line and safety organizations.  

	b.	Work control processes shall be in place prior to any operational activities.  

2.5	Control

	a.	Distribution of procedures shall be controlled to ensure that each operating area 
		has the most current revision.  Superseded or inactive procedures shall be 
		removed from operating areas.  No operation shall be performed with superseded, 
		inactive, or unapproved procedures.  

	b.	Files of active procedures should be maintained.  

2.6	Audits

	a.	An audit system should be established that will routinely evaluate the 
		adequacy, availability, and currency of procedures.  Also, audits should 
		include an evaluation of operator knowledge and compliance with 
		procedures. 
 
	b.	Groups conducting the audits should include personnel from other than the 
		operating department or division using the procedure.  

2.7	Reviews

	a.	Appropriate departments should review active procedures at least annually. 
 
	b.	If a procedure is no longer completely applicable to an operation or if new safety 
		considerations (i.e., compatibility, toxicity, ignition sources, etc.) have been 
		identified, the procedure shall be revised.  

	c.	A procedure not expected to be used during the coming year may be placed in an 
		inactive procedure file.  

	d.	Before an inactive procedure can be reactivated, it shall be reviewed and 
		approved.  Minimum approval shall be the same as that required for a new or 
		revised procedure (see section 2.4 of this chapter).  

2.8	Content of Standard Operating Procedures

	a.	The following presentation is intended to specify content of procedures, not the 
		format or organization.  Each operating contractor should develop its own system for 
		preparing safety procedures.  

2.8.1	General Operating Procedures

	a.	Introduction.  The introduction to the procedure should include the 
		following:
  
		(1)	A statement of the scope, defining what facilities and equipment 
			are covered.  

		(2)	The name of the department and individual responsible for the 
			operation. 
 
		(3)	If the procedure serves as the basis for an exemption or waiver 
			from the requirements of this Manual, a statement to this effect and 
			a specific reference to the standard involved.  

	b.	Safety and Health.  The safety section of the procedure should present the 
		following information or reference a safety manual that specifies the 
		requirements:  

		(1)	General safety rules to be observed and techniques to be applied 
			that will ensure safety of operations, prevent personnel injury or 
			illness, and prevent equipment damage.  In particular, this SOP 
			section should describe the facility’s personnel control features that 
			protect personnel from exposure to hazardous operations, toxic 
			materials, or tests.  

		(2)	The number of personnel (workers and casuals) and explosives 
			weight limits.  

		(3)	Additional or specific emergency controls not addressed by the 
			facility emergency plan.  

	c.	Operations.  The operations section should consist of general directions 
		for operation of all major explosives-handling equipment.  Particular 
		emphasis should be placed on safety interlocks and controls, and their 
		proper use.  If operation of a particular item of equipment or of an area 
		requires that no other operation be performed simultaneously in the same 
		area, this requirement shall be stated clearly in the procedure.  

2.8.2	Unit Operating Procedures

	a.	Introduction.  The procedure introduction should include the following:  

		(1)	A statement of the nature of the operation and its objectives.  
		
		(2)	The name of the department responsible for the operation and the 
			procedure.  

		(3)	A description of the range of work the procedure authorizes.  

		(4)	If the procedure serves as the basis for an exemption or waiver 
			from the standards of this Manual, a statement to this effect and a 
			specific reference to the standard involved.  

	b.	Materials and Equipment.  The materials and equipment section should 
		present the following information:  

		(1)	All significant tools, supplies, chemicals, and equipment necessary 
			to perform the operation should be listed in the SOP or in a 
			separate required document.  

		(2)	Specifications for approved chemicals, supplies, tooling, and 
			equipment should be referenced where applicable.  

		(3)	An explanation of any specific hazard involved in the handling of 
			chemicals or explosives, or a reference to a document that 
			describes the hazards should be included.  

	c.	Safety.  The safety section should present the following information or 
		reference a safety manual that specifies the requirements:  

		(1)	Safety rules specific to the operation.  

		(2)	Protective equipment that must be used during the operation.  

		(3)	Emergency controls applicable to the operation not considered in 
			the general operating procedures.  

	d.	Operations.  The operations section should consist of sequential directions 
		written or pictured in clear, concise steps that describe how to perform a 
		particular operation.  If a particular operation requires that no other 
		operation be performed simultaneously in the same work area, this 
		requirement shall be stated clearly in the procedure.  

2.9	Content of Special or Experimental Procedures

	a.	In addition to the applicable requirements listed in section 2.8 of this chapter, the 
		following shall also be addressed: 
 
		(1)	Field operations remote to normally occupied areas shall include 
			procedures to ensure prompt response of both fire and medical emergency 
			services or those services shall be staged at the event site.  

		(2)	Personnel involved with the operation shall be briefed or trained on any 
			unique aspects of the operation and emergency procedures.  

	b.	When a special or experimental operation will be conducted a number of times, an 
		SOP should be written and approved.  

3.0	REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

	a.	The following documents set forth some of the non-DOE procedures to be used in 
		UXO operations.  

		(1)	60-Series Publications, Commanding Officer, Naval Explosive Ordnance 
			Disposal Technology Division, 2008 Stump Neck Road, Indian Head, MD  
			20640-5070

		(2)	OE CX Interim Guidance, US Army Corps of Engineers, Huntsville 
			Center, P.O. Box 1600, Huntsville, AL  35807-4301.  



         			CHAPTER VIII—FORMULATION SCALEUP

1.0	EXPLOSIVES DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM

1.1	Explosives Development Committee

	a.	A committee shall be established at each DOE facility engaged in explosives 
		development to be the approving authority for each phase of an explosives 
		development program.  This committee will be referred to in this Manual as the 
		Explosives Development Committee (EDC), but it may have a different name at 
		each DOE facility.  Individuals chosen to serve on the EDC should have 
		considerable experience in explosives handling, processing, chemistry, sensitivity, 
		and safety.  

1.2	Phase-by-Phase Approvals

	a.	The EDC shall review and approve data generated in each phase of a development 
		project that involves a new explosive or new explosive formulation before the 
		next phase begins.  

1.3	Modified Formulations

	a.	Compositional modifications to previously evaluated explosive formulations shall 
		be approved by the EDC.  However, the EDC may approve minor modifications 
		to the explosives formulation for a given phase of development without requiring 
		all of the developmental steps and tests.  

1.4	Sensitivity Data from Another Laboratory

	a.	If comparable sensitivity data for the subject material are available from another 
		laboratory, the EDC may waive some developmental phase tests.  

2.0	DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURES

2.1	General

	a.	All DOE explosives handling facilities shall establish an administrative 
		procedure that defines the basic steps for developing and evaluating new 
		explosives and explosive formulations.  The procedure shall require that each 
		development effort proceed in phases from small to large quantities.  The 
		quantities of materials that may be handled in each phase shall be limited.  
		The EDC shall be responsible for establishing criteria for acceptable explosive 
		behavior in each test of each phase of the explosives development procedure.  
		The development procedure should consist of three phases plus a synthesis 
		phase and compatibility testing, when required.  Guidelines for establishing 
		this procedure are proposed in the following sections.  Table VIII-1
		summarizes these guidelines.  

2.2	Synthesis Phase

	a.	Before mixing a new explosive with other materials, the sensitivity and 
		stability of the explosive should be determined and should comply with the 
		criteria set by the EDC.  Recommended tests include the following:  

		(1)	Drop-weight impact.
  
		(2)	Friction.  

		(3)	Spark.  

		(4) 	Thermal stability-these tests should include two or more of the 
			following:  

2.2.1.1	Differential thermal analysis or differential scanning calorimetry.  

2.2.1.2	Thermal gravimetric analysis.
  
2.2.1.3	Gas evolution rate at elevated temperature (chemical reactivity test, vacuum 
	stability, etc.).  

2.2.1.4	Time-to-explosion analysis.  

2.3	Compatibility Testing

	a.	If a proposed formulation contains new ingredients (explosive or nonexplosive), 
		the new ingredients should be tested for compatibility with the other ingredients 
		before preparing batches for Phase I testing.  Compatibility tests should include 
		any of the stability tests listed under section 2.2a(4) of this chapter.  

	b.	No more than 2 g of the new formulation should be prepared, handled, or stored 
		before compatibility testing. 
 
	c.	Formulations for compatibility testing should be processed remotely, whenever 
		possible.  

Table VIII-1.  Scaleup Procedure Guidelines for New Explosives and Formulations

2.4	Phase I—Preliminary Explosives Testing

	a.	The total quantity of material that may be processed, handled, or stored at any one 
		time in Phase I should not exceed 10 g.  Whenever possible, this material should 
		be processed remotely.  

	b.	The new explosive or formulation should be subjected to sensitivity and stability 
		tests.  As a minimum, drop-weight impact, friction, spark sensitivity, and thermal 
		stability tests should be run.  Thermal stability testing need not be performed here 
		if one or more of the compatibility tests listed under section 2.2a(4) of this 
		chapter have already been conducted on the new formulation.  

	c.	If the new explosive or formulation is acceptable in the above tests, it may be 
		scaled up to Phase II.  The EDC may impose handling or processing restrictions 
		or precautions on the material if its performance in any of the above tests is 
		questionable. 
 
	d.	After Phase I testing of a formulation is complete, the EDC should define, on the 
		basis of the test results, what variations in composition are permissible during 
		Phase II development without retesting.  

2.5	Phase II—Experimental Characterization and Development

	a.	The total quantity of materials that may be processed or handled at any one time 
		in Phase II should not exceed 16.075 oz (500 grams).  No limit exists on the 
		quantity that may be stored, other than the storage facility limits for Group L 
		explosives.  

	b.	Materials investigated in Phase II should be produced by techniques similar to 
		those that will be used to produce larger batches in a subsequent scaleup phase.  

	c.	A thermal characterization test and evaluation should be run before pressing the 
		new material at elevated temperature.  

	d.	The Phase I sensitivity and stability tests should be rerun in Phase II if the 
		following conditions apply:  

		(1)	The formulation to be scaled up to Phase III differs from that tested in 
			Phase I.  In this case, testing should be completed before Phase III scaleup.  

		(2)	The explosive or formulation prepared for Phase II development is 
			produced by techniques different than those used in Phase I.  Testing 
			should be completed before Phase III scaleup.  

		(3)	During Phase II, the composition of a formulation is modified to an extent 
			that the composition is no longer within the limits specified by the EDC 
			(see section 2.4d of this chapter).  Testing should be completed before 
			proceeding with Phase II.  

		(4)	The compatibility of explosives and formulations with materials 
			contacting the explosives in test and production devices shall be evaluated 
			before any such device is assembled.  If compatibility testing is required, 
			one or more of the tests listed under section 2.2a(4) of this chapter should 
			be recommended.  

2.6	Phase III – Full-Scale Testing and Production

	a.	The maximum quantity of materials that may be processed or handled in Phase III 
		should be defined in the EDC grant of authorization to proceed with Phase III.  
		No limit is imposed for the storage facilities except the limits imposed by the 
		quantity-distance tables.  

	b.	All additional testing necessary to define storage compatibility grouping should 
		be completed before committing bulk quantities of the material to storage, (see 
		Chapter II, section 17.4).  

	c.	During Phase III development, the composition of all formulations should be 
		fixed.  

	d.	Any new explosive material that is to be contact machined shall be subjected to a 
		machining overtest.  Reaction threshold should be determined if possible. 
 
	e.	If billets of 15.4 lb (7 kg) or greater are to be produced in Phase III, drop-skid 
		testing should be performed and EDC criteria for this test should be met.  

	f.	Section 2.5d of this chapter should also apply to Phase III development.  



         		CHAPTER IX—INSENSITIVE HIGH EXPLOSIVES QUALIFICATION

1.0	INSENSITIVE HIGH EXPLOSIVES (IHE)

	a.	Some explosive substances, although mass detonating, are so insensitive that the 
		probability of accidental initiation or transition from burning to detonation is 
		negligible.  Any explosive that is a candidate for classification as an IHE shall be 
		subjected to the DOE qualification tests listed in Table IX-1or Recommendations 
		on the Transport of Hazardous Goods-Tests and Criteria, Test Series 7.  Test 
		procedures, where not specified, are contained in MHSMP-84-22, IHE Material 
		Qualification Tests, Description and Criteria.  The DOE laboratory or contractor 
		shall submit test data for each explosive requested for this classification through 
		the appropriate Operations Office to the DOE Office of Facility Safety.  The DOE 
		Explosives Safety Committee will independently analyze the data and recommend 
		action on including the explosive in Table IX-2 as an approved IHE.  

Table IX-1.  DOE IHE Qualification Tests.

Table IX-2.  Approved IHEs

	b.	New candidate explosives formulations will not be classified by analogy 
		as IHE until reviewed by the DOE Explosives Safety Committee.  The 
		general guidelines for requesting and obtaining an IHE approval by 
		analogy are:  

		(1)	All requests, including rationale, must be submitted in writing to 
			the DOE Explosives Safety Committee for analysis and 
			recommended action.  

		(2)	Approved IHEs with complete test data must be used for baseline 
			comparison purposes.  

	c.	More specific guidelines will depend on circumstances surrounding the 
		specific analogy request.  

	d.	When a partial analogy can be drawn, only partial testing is needed 
		depending on the type and extent of change in the candidate IHE relative 
		to the baseline IHE and the potential effects of these changes on specific 
		initiation mechanisms (shock, thermal, mechanical, impact, electrostatic, 
		etc.).  A candidate IHE can be placed in one of the following categories to 
		define the tests required for approval:  

		(1)	CASE I (partial testing required).  The candidate IHE formulation 
			substitution of the inert binder component of the approved baseline 
			IHE with a new inert binder component.  Sufficient testing is 
			required to verify that no chemical incompatibilities have been 
			introduced that would de-stabilize the base IHE.  In this case, test 
			data normally generated by the requesting facility during their 
			explosive development scaleup phasing process may be submitted 
			for approval in lieu of the qualification tests of Table IX-1.  During 
			the development phase, the facility EDC may dictate restrictions 
			consistent with an IHE internal to their facility only.  Final 
			approval as an IHE must be obtained through the DOE Explosives 
			Safety Committee.  Tests 1, 2, 3, and 7 of Table IX-1or equivalent 
			are required as a minimum.  

		(2)	CASE II (all IHE tests of Table IX-1 required; analogy 
			inappropriate).  The candidate IHE involves the addition of an 
			untested (IHE tests) energetic component to the approved baseline 
			IHE.  

					OR

		(3)	The candidate IHE involves the same energetic and inert 
			components as the approved baseline IHE, the only change being a 
			volume- percent increase in the energetic component content.  

	e.	In deliberating the approval request, the DOE Explosives Safety Committee will 
		consider any data available over and above that required by Table IX-1.  

2.0	IHE SUBASSEMBLIES

	a.	IHE subassemblies are composed of IHE hemispheres or spheres with 
		booster charges, with or without detonators.  Successful completion of the 
		applicable DOE qualification tests listed in Table IX-3 is required for 
		classification as an IHE subassembly.  The DOE contractor shall submit a test 
		plan defining specific test procedures for candidates for this classification 
		through the appropriate Site Office to the DOE Explosives Safety 
		Committee for review.  On approval of the plan, tests shall be run and the 
		DOE Explosives Safety Committee shall independently analyze the data 
		and recommend approval or disapproval.  DOE Headquarters will then 
		issue a memorandum to appropriate Site Offices and DOE contractors 
		classifying those configurations meeting the required test criteria as IHE 
		subassemblies.  Approved IHE subassemblies are listed in Table IX-4.  
		Subassemblies will not be classified as IHE Subassemblies by analogy 
		until reviewed by the DOE Explosives Safety Committee.  When no other 
		explosives are present in the same location, these subassemblies are 
		classified as Class 1.6 explosives (see Table IX-5) for storage and 
		processing.  

Table IX-3.  DOE Qualification Tests for IHE Subassemblies*

Table IX-4.  Approved IHE Subassemblies

3.0	IHE WEAPONS

	a.	IHE weapons are those weapons listed in DOE DNA TP 20-7 that are exempt 
		from storage and transportation limits when stored or transported alone or in 
		combination with each other.  This classification is valid only if storage 
		containers provide adequate spacing between individual units.  TP 20-7 specifies 
		the spacing requirements for materials stored or transported out of containers.  
		These weapons are classified as Class 1.6 explosives for storage, processing and 
		transportation purposes.  

4.0	REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

	a.	The following documents set forth some of the non-DOE procedures to be used in 
		the IHE and IHE subassembly testing required by Table IX-1and Table IX-3:  

		(1)	TB 700-2, NAVSEA INST 8020.8A, TO 11A-1-47, DLAR 8220.1, 
			Department of Defense Explosives Hazard Classification Procedures, 
			Departments of the Army, the Navy, the Air Force, and the Defense 
			Logistics Agency, Washington, D.C.  

		(2)	Mason & Hanger-Silas Mason Publication 84-22 (MHSMP-84-22), IHE 
			Material Qualification Tests, Description and Criteria (Rev 1, July 1985), 
			National Technical Information Service, U.S. Department of Commerce, 
			5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.  

		(3)	Recommendations on the Transport of Hazardous Goods-Tests and 
			Criteria, Second Edition, ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.1, LABELMASTER, 
			Chicago, IL, 60646 USA. 

		(4)	Mason & Hanger-Silas Mason Publication (MHSMP-86-16), IHE 
			Subassembly Test Results for the B-83, B-61, 3/4/6/7/8, W80, W81, and 
			W85, June 1996, Robert S. Slape, National Technical Information Service, 
			U.S. Department of Commerce, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 
			22161.  



     		   CHAPTER X—ELECTRICAL STORMS  AND LIGHTING PROTECTION

1.0	ELECTRICAL STORM HAZARDS

	a.	The primary focus of this chapter is to provide protection to explosives in 
		event of an electrical storm, and to personnel working in explosives areas, and 
		personnel near those explosives areas from the consequences of an explosives 
		incident resulting from a lightning strike.  Lightning presents a hazard to 
		explosives in at least five ways:  

		(1) 	The electrical current produced by a voltage gradient resulting from a 
			lightning strike could initiate the explosives directly.  

		(2) 	The surface flashover or arcing of the generated electrical current 
			between conductive surfaces that are not at equilibrium could initiate 
			the explosives directly by the heat, sparks, and molten metal generated 
			by the arc.  

		(3) 	This same arcing could cause damage or fires in electrical fixtures and 
			equipment.  

		(4) 	The lightning could initiate a fire involving combustible materials in 
			the facility, including the containers around explosives.  

		(5)	The spalling generated by the heat of the current flowing through the 
			structural components of the facility could initiate, by impact, 
			unprotected explosives.  In addition, lightning could affect support 
			systems such as fire protection and security.  Lightning can reach a 
			structure not only by direct strike, but also indirectly by coupling to a 
			conductor that penetrates the structure. 
 
	b.	This chapter summarizes the minimum requirements for design, maintenance, 
		testing, and inspection of lightning protection systems and lightning detection 
		systems.  Only lightning protection systems described in this chapter shall be 
		used.  The DOE Explosives Safety Committee must specifically approve use 
		of non-conventional systems, such as streamer emission and charge 
		dissipation systems.  Protection from lightning induced hazards can best be 
		achieved by enclosing the explosives in an interconnected network of good 
		conductors, such that the exterior fields, currents, and voltages are reduced.  
		This method of protection is similar to a Faraday cage and is called a 
		“Faraday-like shield” LPS.  A second method or layer of protection is 
		achieved by providing a sufficiently large sideflash separation (standoff) 
		distance between the explosives and any electrical conductor within the 
		structure (including the walls and ceiling) to preclude the possibility of current 
		flowing onto the explosives or arcing to them.  (Note:  As part of the 
		Faraday-like shield LPS, a minimum sideflash separation distance is required 
		from the boundaries of the structure.)  A third method involves directing the 
		current away from the structure and directly to ground by use of air terminals, 
		masts or catenaries, and down conductors.  When none of the above methods 
		of lightning protection are provided, personnel can be protected by evacuating 
		them an appropriate distance as specified in section 6.0 of this chapter.
  
	c.	Facilities have five years from the issuance of DOE M 440.1-1A (Revision 9) 
		of this Manual to fully implement for existing structures those requirements 
		and recommendations of sections 2.0 through 4.0 that were not contained in 
		Revision 8 of this Manual or NFPA 780.  Neither waivers nor exemptions are 
		required for such items during the implementation period.  New structures and 
		conversion of an LPS to a Faraday cage-style shield shall comply with the 
		most current requirements.  

2.0	LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS

	a.	A properly designed and installed lightning protection system (LPS) meeting the 
		requirements below and maintained per section 3.0 is required for all explosives 
		structures except as identified in section 4.0.  

2.1	Lightning Protection System Basic Design

	a.	Lightning protection system design consists of the use of strike termination 
		means, low impedance paths to ground, and earth electrode systems, coupled with 
		bonding of all conductive penetrations into the protected area, surge suppression, 
		and sideflash protection.  Metallic elements of the structure meeting the material 
		requirements of NFPA 780 are allowed to serve as strike termination devices, 
		down conductors, or parts of the earth electrode system.  Facility Management, 
		the Authority Having Jurisdiction, and a person competent in lightning protection 
		system theory and design shall approve design variations from those specified 
		below.  

	b.	Design of lightning protection systems per NFPA 780 shall be based on a 100-ft 
		(30.5-m) striking distance (“Rolling Sphere”).  The zone of protection provided 
		by an LPS is the space beneath the LPS that is substantially immune to direct 
		lightning attachment.  The LPS design shall ensure that explosives facilities and 
		their associated components that require lightning protection are within the LPS 
		zone of protection.  Structural elements of the building meeting the material 
		requirements of NFPA 780 are authorized to serve as the LPS or parts of the LPS.  

	c.	Design parameters for a Faraday cage and Faraday shield-like LPS shall be based, 
		as a minimum, on a one percent threat level and include the following:  

		(1)	Return stroke amplitude = 200 kA

		(2)	Rise rate = 400 kA/?sec

		(3)	Number of strokes per flash = 26 max

		(4)	Striking Distance = 30.5 m (100 ft)

		(5)	Burn through of 0.19 in. (4.8 mm) for steel, 0.20 in. (5 mm) for copper, 
			and 0.28 in. (7 mm) for aluminum.  

		(6)	Action = 3x106 amps2-sec.  

2.2	Lightning Protection Subsystems

	a.	An approved LPS consists of the following subsystems:  

		(1)	A strike termination device to intercept the direct attachment of a lightning 
			flash and connects it to a path to ground.  A strike termination device may 
			include metal masts, air terminals, overhead wires (catenary) or permanent 
			metal parts of a building. 
 
		(2)	Down conductors to interconnect the strike termination devices and form 
			paths from each strike termination device to the earth electrode system 
			(e.g., heavy metallic cables, metallic building structural members).  

		(3)	An earth electrode system to transfer lightning current to the earth.  The 
			earth electrode system is connected to the down conductor and is in direct 
			contact with the earth.  Examples of earth electrode systems include 
			ground rods, a ground ring (counterpoise), buried metal plates, and an 
			Ufer ground or other similar devices. 
 
		(4)	Surge suppression devices (SSDs) to limit harmful energy due to lightning 
			or power line transients from entering a structure via power and metallic 
			signal lines and initiating an explosion or fire.  SSD attenuates, suppresses 
			or diverts lightning induced electrical energy to the earth electrode system.  
2.3	Approved Lightning Protection Systems

	a.	The approved types of LPS are Mast, Catenary, Integral Air Terminal, and 
		Faraday cage or Faraday-like shield systems.  Faraday cage or Faraday-like shield 
		systems are preferred for new structures where applicable.  The main features of 
		each type system are summarized below.  

2.3.1	Mast System

	a.	A Mast System consists of one or more poles with a strike termination device 
		connected to an earth electrode system by down conductors.  It provides a zone of 
		protection as shown in Figure X-1 for a single mast.  The principal design 
		parameters include:  

		(1)	The minimum mast separation distance from the structure is 6 ft (1.8 m) or 
			the formula as defined in NFPA 780 (2004), D = h/6, whichever is greater 
			where the h is the height of the mast of structure considered.  

		(2)	Non-metallic masts require a metal air terminal or metal cap installed at 
			the top that is connected to the earth electrode system by at least two down 
			conductors installed on opposite sides of the mast.  (Note:  Mast guy wires 
			are allowed to serve as down conductors, provided they are connected to 
			the earth electrode system.  

		(3)	Metallic masts serve as both air terminal and down conductors, and will be 
			connected to the earth electrode system with two independent main size 
			conductors attached approximately symmetrically to (i.e., opposite sides 
			of) the mast base.  

Figure X-1.  Single Mast Zone of Protection

2.3.2	Catenary System

	a.	The Catenary LPS consists of wires (cables) stretched between the 
		tops of two or more masts (see Figure X-2).  The main design 
		parameters include:  

		(1)	Each wire shall be an electrically continuous run of main size 
			conductor [i.e., copper-clad or galvanized steel cable with a 
			minimum diameter of 0.25 in. (6.4 mm)] bonded to all down 
			conductors.  

		(2)	Non-metallic masts require a metal air terminal or metal cap 
			installed at the top that is connected to the earth electrode system 
			by at least two down conductors installed on opposite sides of the 
			mast.  (Note:  Mast guy wires are allowed to serve as down 
			conductors, provided they are connected to the earth electrode 
			system.)

		(3)	Metallic masts serve as both air terminal and down conductors 
			themselves, and shall be connected to the earth electrode system by 
			two main size conductors attached approximately symmetrically to 
			(i.e., opposite sides of) the mast base.  

Figure X-2.  Example of Catenary System Zone of Protection

		(4)	The minimum vertical separation between an overhead wire and 
			the protected structure, including its projections, shall be the 
			greater of 6 ft (1.8 m) or as defined in NFPA 780 (2004), as 
			D = (L/6n).  

		Where:  

			D = 	Sideflash distance from a catenary
			L = 	Length of lightning protection conductor between its 
				grounded point and the point being calculated.  
			n = 	1.00 where there is a single overhead ground wire that 
				exceeds 200 ft (60 m) in horizontal length.  
			n = 	1.50 where there is a single overhead wire or more than one 
				wire interconnected above the structure to be protected, 
				such that only two down conductors are located greater 
				than 20 ft (6 m) and less than 100 ft (30 m) apart.  
			n =	2.25 where there are more than two dozen conductors 
				spaced more than 25 ft (7.6 m) apart within a 100-ft (30-m) 
				wide area that are interconnected above the structure being 
				protected.  
		(5)	Deflections of the wire resulting from wind, ice, or other weather 
			conditions shall be considered in determining the separation 
			distance.  The supporting mast will be at least 6 ft (1.8 m) from the 
			structure.  

2.3.3	Integral Air Terminal System

	a.	An integral LPS is one that has the strike termination devices mounted on 
		the structure to be protected.  These strike termination devices are 
		connected to the earth electrode system via down conductors.  Metallic 
		structural members can serve as parts of the LPS.  However, sideflash 
		protection is required.  (See bonding distance formula in NFPA 780).  An 
		example of this system is shown in Figure X-3.  The relevant design 
		parameters are:  

		(1)	The down conductors of integral systems shall be installed in as 
			nearly a vertical position as possible.  

		(2)	No bend of a conductor shall form an included angle of less than 
			90 degrees, nor shall it have a radius of bend less than 8 in. 
			(203 mm).  
		(3)	The number of conductors and configuration of the connections 
			between air terminals are as required by NFPA 780.  

		(4)	Air terminals height and location are as required by 
			NFPA 780.  

2.3.4	Faraday-Cage and Faraday-like Shield

	a.	The preferred method of protecting explosives operations from 
		lightning flashes, as well as from other external sources of 
		electromagnetic radiation, is to enclose the operations or facility inside 
		a Faraday cage.  A Faraday cage is an enclosure composed of a 
		continuous grid of conductors, such that the voltage between any two 
		points inside the enclosure is zero, when immersed in an electrostatic 
		field.  A Faraday cage or Faraday-like shield LPS is one where the 
		protected volume is enclosed by a heavy metal screen (i.e., similar to a 
		birdcage) or continuous metallic structure with all metallic 
		penetrations bonded.  The lightning current flows on the exterior of the 
		structure not through the interior.  A Faraday-like shield (which is not 
		an ideal Faraday cage) is formed by a continuous conductive matrix 
		that is properly bonded and grounded.  
 
Figure X-3.  Integral System Zone of Protection

		(1)	Examples of Faraday-like shields include:  

			(a)	Steel arch magazines where the steel arches and reinforcing 
				bars (rebar) of the concrete end-walls and floor are 
				electrically continuous and meet spacing requirements.  

			(b)	Earth covered magazines and operating buildings where the 
				reinforcing bars (rebar) of the concrete walls, floors, and 
				ceiling are electrically continuous and meet spacing 
				requirements.  

			(c)	Reinforced concrete buildings where the reinforcing bars 
				(rebar) of the concrete walls, ceiling, and floor of are 
				electrically continuous and meet spacing requirements.  

			(d)	The metal shell of prefabricated portable magazines and 
				metal buildings.  

		(2)	The main design parameters are:  

			(a)	The structural components of buildings shall be electrically 
				bonded together (i.e., walls, floor, roof, door and window 
				frames) via built in attachments such as rebar welded or 
				wired together, or by adding external bonding wires 
				between components.  The techniques commonly used and 
				approved in the construction industry are acceptable for this 
				purpose.  (If welds are used, a structural engineer should 
				verify that they do not adversely affect structural response).  

			(b)	The structural components should be electrically bonded at 
				intervals no greater than 3 ft unless testing shows 
				otherwise.  Bonding distances may vary based on building 
				design.  Use of greater than the nominal bonding distance 
				requires an electromagnetic characterization of the 
				building’s transfer impedance to determine the specific 
				bonding distances.  

			(c)	A freestanding structure that is determined by a competent 
				expert to be a Faraday cage or Faraday-like Shield may not 
				require strike termination devices, down conductors or 
				grounding systems.  Structures that satisfy the Faraday 
				cage/shield definition have suitable down conductors and 
				grounding components within the structure’s design.  
				However use of a strike termination device on these 
				structures provides a preferred point of attachment for 
				lightning and could prevent structural damage, such as 
				concrete spall, in the event of a direct lightning strike 
				attachment).  

2.4	Lightning Protection Subsystem Criteria

2.4.1	Components of Strike Termination System

	a.	Air Terminal:  An air terminal is the component of an LPS used to 
		intercept lightning strikes.  Air terminals include vertical spikes 
		attached to the structure (commonly referred to as Franklin Rods), 
		overhead wires (as used with catenary systems) or grids, and for earth 
		covered magazines only, overhead air vents.  

		(1)	When used as air terminals, air vents shall be (a) fabricated 
			from metal 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) thick or greater and be 
			electrically continuous with the steel reinforcing rod of the 
			magazine or (b) designed to trap any molten metal a strike 
			might produce.  In all cases air vents on earth covered 
			magazines shall be bonded to the structure as discussed in 
			section 2.4.3.  

		(2)	On structures modified to a verified Faraday-like shield LPS 
			where an NFPA 780 LPS system exists, it is recommended 
			that air terminals be maintained as they provide a preferred 
			point of attachment for lightning strikes.  If they are bonded to 
			the Faraday cage, conductive downlines need only be 
			maintained and visibly inspected to the point of juncture with 
			the grounding system (i.e., ground rods or counterpoises).  
			When Facility Management makes the determination that the 
			NFPA 780 system will be retained, a visible inspection shall 
			be performed on the same schedule as maintenance of the 
			Faraday-like shield LPS.  Electrical resistance and resistance 
			to earth testing will not be required.  

		(3)	Air terminals on an integral LPS shall consist of a cylindrical 
			rod or tube of material and size as specified in NFPA 780.  
			They can be pointed or blunt, but the optimal tip radius of 
			curvature for interception of lightning strikes is 3/16 in. 
			(4.8 mm) minimum to ½ in. (12.7 mm) maximum.  

	b.	Conductors:  Conductors provide low impedance paths from air 
		terminals to the earth electrode system.  

		(1)	Where wires are used as down conductors, they shall meet the 
			requirements of NFPA 780.  

		(2)	Lightning conductors should run vertical or horizontal.  If run 
			upwards, they must have a rise of no more than 1/4 pitch.  

		(3)	In a Faraday cage based LPS, the structural elements have a 
			higher current carrying capacity and lower impedance to 
			ground than wire down conductors.  Structures with such an 
			LPS do not require wire down conductors.  When a structure 
			with an existing air terminal LPS is modified to a verified 
			Faraday cage based LPS, it is recommended air terminals be 
			maintained as they provide a preferred point of attachment.  If 
			they are bonded to the Faraday cage, conductive downlines 
			need only be maintained and visibly inspected to the point of 
			juncture with the grounding system (i.e., ground rods or 
			counterpoises).  When Facility Management makes the 
			determination that the NFPA 780 system will be retained, a 
			visible inspection shall be performed on the same schedule as 
			maintenance on the Faraday-like shield LPS.  Electrical 
			resistance and resistance to earth testing will not be required.  

2.4.2	Grounding

	a.	Lightning protection systems, to include integral and catenary 
		systems, but with the exception of Faraday cage or Faraday-like 
		Shield systems, require an earth electrode (ground) system to 
		dissipate the electrical energy of a lightning strike to the earth.  The 
		use of an earth electrode systems with a Faraday-like shield lightning 
		protection system is not required as the floor of such a structure acts 
		as the earth (ground) electrode; however, electrical safety grounding 
		requirements do apply.  Examples of earth electrode systems include 
		ground rods, a ring electrode (counterpoise) system, buried metal 
		plates, or Ufer grounds.  

		(1)	The resistance of a lightning protection grounding system will 
			not exceed that specified in section 3.0 below.  

		(2)	When multiple ground rods are used as a grounding system, 
			the rods will be separated by a distance so that they do not 
			influence each other.  

		(3)	All other grounding systems, e.g., AC power, electronic 
			multi-point, electronic single-point, will be bonded to the 
			lightning protection grounding system.  

		(4)	In cases where some other installed system requires a lower 
			resistance to ground than specified in section 3.0 below, the 
			lower requirement will govern.  

		(5)	See the following documents for specific guidance:  

			(a)	National Electric Code, Article 250, Grounding

			(b)	IEEE 80, Guide for Safety in AC Substation 
				Grounding 

			(c)	NFPA 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning 
				Protection Systems
2.4.3	Bonding

	a.	Bonding provides a physical and electrical connection from all parts 
		of the LPS to the ground connection.  Bonding produces electrical 
		continuity between the LPS and metallic objects to minimize 
		potential differences.  Methods of bonding include mechanical, 
		compression and thermal connections.  

		(1)	NFPA 780 requirements for bonding to the LPS that 
			specifically need to be addressed include:  

			(a)	Metallic gates and fences if they cross or are within 
				sideflash distance of a LPS or are within 6 ft (1.8 m) of 
				an explosives structure.  

			(b)	Railroad tracks if they cross or come with in sideflash 
				distance or 6 ft of an explosives structure’s LPS or enter 
				an explosives structure.  If the tracks are used to carry 
				electrical signals, they should have insulated joints 
				immediately external to the bond of the LPS ground loop 
				conductor.  If the tracks enter an explosives structure, 
				they also should be bonded to the metal frame of the 
				structure or equivalent.  

			(c)	All shielded cabling, power cabling, communication 
				lines, data lines, and electrical conduit will be buried 
				underground in conduit for a minimum of 50 ft (15.2 m) 
				before entering the structure.  These and other metallic 
				utility lines and pipes will be electrically bonded to the 
				LPS or the structural steel of the building as close as 
				reasonably achievable, as determined by a competent 
				expert, to the point of entry.  

			(d)	Metallic penetrations within the zone of protection that 
				are within sideflash distance of a component of the LPS 
				or within sideflash distance of an item that is bonded to 
				the LPS.  

			(e)	Utilities (gas, water, power, signal) entering the structure 
				from exterior to the LPS.  (Apply NFPA cathodic 
				protection guidance to prevent excessive corrosion.)

			(f)	Potential presence of ground loops.  

	b.	All metallic penetrations into a Faraday cage or shield shall be bonded to 
		the nearest structural member or LPS component that is integrally bonded 
		to the earth (ground) electrode system.  Bonding connections shall be as 
		close to the point of entry as reasonably achievable.  More than one bond 
		may be required in some situations where a conductive penetration passes 
		a structural member inside the structure.  The bond resistance should be 
		less than that specified in section 3.3.  

	c.	Other metal masses that are integrated into the structure of the building 
		(e.g., ventilators, steel doors, metal doorframes, steel reinforcing bars, 
		etc.) shall be bonded to the nearest structural member or LPS component 
		that is integrally bonded to the earth (ground) electrode system.  Interior 
		metal masses (desks, cabinets, etc) should be bonded if required by the 
		competent expert.  

	d.	Lightning protection system bonds should be as short and as direct as 
		reasonably achievable to minimize inductance.  Route the bonds as 
		close to the rebar as reasonably achievable.  

	e.	To preclude confusion between LPS bonding and electrical safety 
		grounding, the following key differences should be understood:  

		(1)	Lightning bonds must be as specified in NFPA 780 Table 3.1 
			or equivalent.  

		(2)	Lightning clamps and fasteners must comply with UL-96 and 
			UL-96A, and be listed for use with LPS.  

	f.	Do not paint LPS bonds and conductors.  

	g.	Bond resistance shall be as specified in section 3.3.  

2.4.4	Surge Suppression for Incoming Conductors

	a.	Surge suppression devices shall be provided in accordance with 
		NFPA and the provisions of this Manual on each power line, signal 
		line, or communication line conductor entering the LPS protected 
		structure.  They shall be located between the respective conductor 
		and the structure ground and/or Faraday cage, as close as reasonably 
		achievable to the point where the conductor penetrates the LPS zone 
		of protection or the structure.  All cabling, power cabling, 
		communication lines, data lines, and electrical conduit shall be buried 
		underground in metallic conduit for a minimum of 50 ft (15.2 m) 
		before entering an explosives structure.  These and other metallic 
		utility lines and pipes shall be electrically bonded to the LPS or 
		structural steel of the building as close as reasonably achievable to 
		their entry point.  

	b.	Surge suppression designed for specific equipment does not 
		necessarily provide adequate protection for an explosives structure.  
		It is the responsibility of the Facility Management to provide 
		additional surge and/or transient protection for sensitive equipment 
		located in and about the structure.  This additional protection may or 
		may not be incorporated in a surge suppression device.  If it is 
		incorporated, the additional protection shall not decrease or 
		compromise the protection intended by this Manual.  

		(1)	All lightning protection systems shall include surge 
			suppression for all incoming metallic power, communications, 
			instrumentation lines, and other electrical conductors, 
			including low voltage lines or extensions, in addition to any 
			NEC requirements for surge suppression.  

		(2)	Conductors leading from the surge suppression devices shall 
			be kept separated from conductors leading to the surge 
			suppression device.  All leads will be as short as reasonably 
			achievable.  (Note:  Coupling mechanisms include inductive, 
			capacitive and breakdown.  Refer to IEEE 1100-1999, 
			Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding 
			Sensitive Electronic Equipment [Emerald Book] for location, 
			sizing requirements and installation details).  

		(3)	Surge suppression devices should be located as close as 
			reasonably achievable to the panel.  For new structures, the 
			panel shall be located as close as reasonably achievable to the 
			area being protected.  

2.4.5	Sideflash (Arcing) Protection

	a.	Sideflash is an electrical spark caused by differences of potential that 
		occurs between conductive metal bodies or between conductive metal 
		bodies and a component of the LPS or earth electrode system.  
		Sideflash presents direct and indirect hazards to explosives and 
		hazardous environments.  The direct hazard is the electrical energy 
		transferred from the structure or its LPS to the explosives.  Indirect 
		hazards are the heat and the electromagnetic fields generated by the 
		electrical energy.  The heat can cause concrete to spall or ignition of 
		combustible materials.  Electromagnetic fields could induce electrical 
		currents on or in the explosives.  To prevent unintentional initiation 
		of explosives by either the direct or the indirect effects of sideflash, 
		protection should be provided explosives unless analysis of 
		operations shows otherwise.  Separating the explosives from the LPS, 
		or the walls and conductive penetrations of the structures provides 
		protection against consequences of sideflash.  Appropriate separation 
		(standoff) distances shall be determined and applied for each 
		structure by Facility Management based on the following:  

		(1)	NFPA 780 shall be used to determine sideflash protection for 
			all structures other than those with a Faraday-like shield LPS.  

		(2)	For Faraday-like shield structures, in general, explosives and 
			dunnage should be in contact with no more than one interior 
			surface, and shall not be closer than the distance calculated 
			using transfer impedance analysis and a safety factor of two 
			from any other interior surface.  This contact surface is 
			normally the floor, shelf, or workbench. 

		(3)	Sideflash separation distance shall be applied as given below:  

			(a)	All sideflash separation distances shall be measured 
				from the outermost surface of the container, packing, 
				device or equipment holding the explosive that is 
				nearest the structural surface, penetration, or 
				penetration extension in question.  Measure from the 
				surface of the explosive itself only when the explosive is 
				bare.

			(b)	When sideflash separation distance from structural 
				elements and penetrations is maintained, wooden 
				boxes, fiberboard drums, and metal outer containers 
				provide adequate protection from effects of lightning 
				current flow.  Sideflash separation distances do not 
				apply to separation between containers of explosives.  
				Containers are authorized to be in direct contact with 
				each other.  

3.0	INSPECTION AND TESTING OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS

3.1	Initial Installation or Approval

3.1.1	Structures with Catenary, Integral, or Mast lightning Protection Systems. 
 
	a.	Structures shall be inspected to determine that:  

		(1)	The LPS complies with the current requirements of NFPA 780 
			Chapter 3, Chapter 6, Appendix B, and Appendix K.  

		(2)	All required bonds are in place and secure.  

		(3)	Surge suppression devices are installed and functional, as required 
			in section 2.4.4 of this chapter.  

	b.	The resistance of each required bond and the earth electrode system shall 
		be tested to ensure that they meet the requirements of section 3.3.1 of this 
		chapter.  

3.1.2	Structures with Faraday-like Shield Lightning Protection System

	a.	Proper bonding or electrical continuity of the structure’s walls, ceiling and 
		floor shall be validated by measuring the transfer impedance versus the 
		frequency using an appropriate test instrument approved per section 3.3.4 
		of this chapter.  

	b.	Proper bonding of all conductive penetrations as required in section 2.4.3 
		of this chapter shall be validated through inspection of building 
		documentation and specifications, inspection of the facility, and by the use 
		of resistance readings, as specified in section 3.3.2 of this chapter, or other 
		instrument approved by a competent expert and the Authority Having 
		Jurisdiction.  

	c.	Protection of all AC power lines, communication, and data lines that 
		penetrate the structure by surge suppressors, as required in section 2.4.4 of 
		this chapter, shall be validated by review of the building documentation 
		and specifications and by inspection of the lines.  

3.2	Periodic Inspections and Testing

3.2.1	Structures with Catenary, Integral, or Mast Lightning Protection Systems

	a.	Elements of the lightning protection system shall be visually inspected as 
		specified in NFPA 780 Appendix B and K.  The visual inspection of 
		lightning protection systems should be conducted every seven months and 
		shall be conducted at least annually.  Any evidence of corrosion, broken 
		wires or connections, or any other problem that would negate the system’s 
		usefulness will be noted and repaired.  

	b.	A visual inspection shall be performed of applicable surge suppression 
		devices and other LPS components after all lightning flash events where 
		there are visible indications on the structure of a lightning strike and any 
		time there is modification, maintenance or repair to the structure, or 
		penetration that could affect the SSD or LPS component.  

	c.	Resistance-to-earth testing of the earth electrode ground system should be 
		conducted every 14 months and shall be conducted at least every 
		47 months to afford testing during all seasons.  It shall also be tested any 
		time major modification, maintenance, or repair to the structure, or LPS 
		components require the bond or connection to be broken.  Tests shall be 
		performed as specified below and in section 3.3.1 of this chapter in 
		accordance with Facility Management developed procedures. 
 
	d.	Electrical resistance measurements of visible external bonds shall be 
		taken, as a minimum, every 14 months and shall be taken at least every 
		47 months to afford testing during all seasons.  Visible internal bonds shall 
		be tested at least every five years.  Such measurements are also required 
		when there are visible indications on the structure that an act of nature 
		such as an earthquake, tornado, flood, etc. or other act could have affected 
		the integrity of the bonds; and any time modification, maintenance, or 
		repair to the structure, penetration or LPS components require the bond or 
		connection to be broken.  

3.2.2	Structures with Faraday Cage or Faraday-like Shield Lightning Protection 
	System

	a.	Bonds (where feasible) and surge suppressors shall be visually inspected 
		as a minimum every two years to validate the installation and 
		serviceability. 
 
	b.	A visual inspection shall be performed of applicable surge suppression 
		devices and other LPS components after all lightning flash events where 
		there are visible indications on the structure of a lightning strike and any 
		time there is modification, maintenance, or repair to the structure, or 
		penetration that could affect the SSD or LPS component.  

	c.	Electrical resistance measurements of visible bonds shall be taken, as a 
		minimum, once every five years.  Such measurements are also required 
		when there are visible indications on the structure that a act of nature such 
		as an earthquake, tornado, flood, etc. or other act could have affected the 
		integrity of the bonds; and any time modification, maintenance, or repair 
		to the structure, penetration or LPS components require the bond or 
		connection to be broken.  

	d.	Transfer impedance measurements, as determined by Facility 
		Management, shall be taken, as a minimum, once every fifteen years.  
		Such measurements are also required when there are visible indications on 
		the structure that an act of nature such as an earthquake, tornado, flood, 
		etc. or other act could affect the integrity of the internal structure bonds; 
		and any time there is major modification, maintenance, or repair to the 
		structure.
  
3.3	Acceptable Electrical Test Measurements

3.3.1	Structures with Catenary, Integral, or Mast NFPA 780 Lightning Protection 
	Systems

	a.	Required earth electrode ground resistance-to-earth readings shall be 
		25 ohms or less.  Corrective action shall be initiated when the threshold 
		resistance (25 ohms.) is exceeded unless it is not feasible to meet the 
		threshold resistance criterion.  In that case, Facility Management is 
		authorized to establish alternative resistance standards without waiver or 
		exemption.  However, before taking this option reasonable means to 
		improve the grounding system must be considered.  Alternative standards 
		must include determination of a baseline system resistance and a testing 
		methodology with criteria to determine system serviceability.  Testing 
		shall be conducted only with instruments designed specifically for 
		resistance-to-earth testing.  

	b.	The resistance of required bonds shall not exceed 1 ohm.  Larger readings 
		require tightening or resecuring the bonds.  

3.3.2	Structures with Faraday Cage/Faraday-like Shield Lightning Protection System

	a.	The bond resistance should be less than 1.00 ohm.  Although a resistance 
		of 1.00-ohm or lower is preferred, a 1.5-ohm resistance is acceptable 
		where necessary for joining of existing structural elements by rebar 
		bonding.  Larger readings require tightening or resecuring the bonds.  

3.3.3	Test Instruments

	a.	Resistance measurement instruments shall be capable of measuring within 
		plus or minus 10 percent of the required reading.  

3.3.4	Alternative Testing

	a.	In lieu of taking resistance readings, other instruments capable of showing 
		the continuity of the bond are authorized for use when approved by a 
		competent expert and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.  The providers of 
		the equipment used must demonstrate the explosives and electro-magnetic 
		radiation (EMR) safety of the instruments and equipment.  The minimum 
		safe separation distance from all explosives and the test equipment during 
		testing also must be provided.  The scientific principles of the 
		measurement, the accuracy of the particular instrumentation system, and 
		mathematical algorithms employed must be peer reviewed by an 
		independent and dispassionate group of technical experts.  The instrument 
		must show that as a minimum, the bond drains 75 percent of the induced 
		current flow.  Complete test plans and procedures must be formulated.  

3.4	Procedures

	a.	Facility Management and the Authority Having Jurisdiction must approve all 
		testing procedures. 
 
3.5	Documentation and Trend Analysis

	a.	A record of all resistance or transfer impedance measurements at all required 
		points and of visual inspections should be maintained for the life of the facility 
		and shall be maintained for at least six inspection and testing cycles.  In addition, 
		those records specified in NFPA 780 Appendix B shall be maintained for an 
		equivalent time.  The records shall be reviewed for trend analysis.  A diagram of 
		the structure or room showing all points requiring measurements or visual 
		inspection and location of surge suppressors should be prepared.  

	b.	Trend analysis shall be conducted on resistance-to-earth test results to identify 
		significant increases in the resistance of the LPS.  Corrective action shall be 
		initiated before the threshold resistance is exceeded unless it is not feasible to 
		meet the threshold resistance criterion.  However, trend analysis shall continue 
		and all reasonable measures shall be implemented and documented to maintain 
		the lowest possible resistance.  

3.6	Training

	a.	Personnel responsible for maintenance, inspection, and testing of lightning 
		protection systems must be knowledgeable of and properly trained in the 
		fundamentals described in NFPA 780 and this Manual.  

4.0	LIGHTNING PROTECTION EXCEPTIONS

	a.	The requirements of sections 2.0 and 3.0 for lightning protection systems do not 
		apply in the following cases.  Neither a waiver nor an exemption is required:  

		(1)	A documented analysis approved by Facility Management and the 
			Authority Having Jurisdiction demonstrates that the cumulative annual 
			risk of a lightning strike to the structure in question or to any of the 
			metallic penetrations of that structure is low.  

		(2)	Explosives operations served by a local lightning warning system (LWS) 
			where
 
			(a)	Facility Management is willing to accept, in the event lightning 
				does strike the unprotected structure or the structure’s 
				penetrations, the potential injuries, the damage, the loss of use of 
				the structure, and the impact on other explosives operations at 
				the Facility; and

			(b)	Facility Management is willing to accept the impact of shutting 
				down all operations in other structures and the area within public 
				traffic route (remote) distance of the structure without an approved 
				LPS during a lightning threat; and

			(c)	The Facility has a local effective lightning warning system (LWS) 
				and lightning warning plan (LWP).  

		(3)	Totally, metal lined storage structures (such as magazettes) with metal 
			doors making metal-to-metal contact at least every linear foot and having 
			a metallic thickness of at least 3/16-in. (4.8-mm) steel or 9/32-in. (7-mm) 
			aluminum are the equivalent of a near perfect Faraday cage.  As such, they 
			are exempt from LPS requirements.  

		(4)	Facilities or operations where personnel are not expected to sustain injury 
			and the resulting economic loss of the structure, its contents or 
			surrounding structures is acceptable to Facility Management.  

5.0	LIGHTNING THREAT DETECTION

	a.	Facility Management shall ensure that a plan is established for (1) detecting when 
		lightning is in the near vicinity and when there is a potential for lightning and 
		(2) to notify appropriate personnel of these conditions.  Lightning Threat 
		Detection Systems (LTDS) are generally of three types—those that detect the 
		electrical gradient buildup, those that detect actual cloud to cloud or cloud to 
		ground electrical discharges, and an independent weather monitoring service, 
		such as the National Lightning Detection Network (NLDN) or NEXRAD Radar, 
		that notifies the Facility when lightning is in the vicinity.  The use of two or more 
		systems provides more reliable detection of lightning threats and is recommended.  
		A LTDS should be in use and serviceable when Facility Management chooses to 
		evacuate explosives areas.  

	b.	Facility Management shall establish a plan for maintenance and testing of the 
		LTDS.  This plan should incorporate the manufacturer’s recommendations and 
		should include, where applicable:
 
		(1)	Cross checking the cloud to ground detector with the National Lightning 
			Detection Network or a similar weather information source.  

		(2)	Calibration of electric field monitors.  

6.0	LIGHTNING THREAT ACTIONS

	a.	Facility Management shall evaluate their explosives operations to determine 
		the time required (1) to safely shut down explosive operations where required, 
		or (2) to evacuate personnel from the areas specified in section 6.0d below to 
		safe locations, or (3) to relocate explosives to a safe sideflash separation 
		(standoff) distance.  These times and local storm movement and tracking 
		history are fundamental to establishing the minimum lightning detection 
		bounding limits and the respective threat levels.  The use of two threat levels 
		allows initiation of a lightning threat alert (LTA) or similar threat identifier 
		when lightning or a potential for lightning is detected within the lower threat 
		level.  When lightning or a potential for lightning is detected within the higher 
		level threat parameters, a lightning threat warning (LTW) or similar threat 
		identifier can be initiated.  

	b.	When operations are required to continue in buildings without a LPS during a 
		lightning threat, before the start of further operations, explosives should be moved 
		and kept at least a distance established by Facility Management following review 
		by a competent expert from the walls, ceiling and penetrations of the structure.  
		(See UL 96A.)

	c.	Facility Management shall determine in advance of any lightning threat those 
		activities that shall be terminated and at what threat level the termination for each 
		identified activity shall begin.  

		(1)	For an LTA, Facility Management shall evaluate terminating the following 
			activities:  

			(a)	Activities involving AC powered electrical equipment in direct or 
				indirect contact with explosives regardless of the form of LPS 
				installed.  

			(b)	Explosives operations in an unprotected building or outside (some 
				activities may be safer to proceed to a planned detonation or to a 
				safe mode for the explosive).  

			(c)	Work with exposed electrostatic discharge sensitive (0.1 joule or 
				less) EEDs in structures not equipped with a Faraday-like shield 
				LPS.  

			(d)	Explosives work in structures not equipped with a Faraday-like 
				shield LPS and where any explosives are at a sideflash separation 
				(standoff) distance less than that specified above or by NFPA 780.  

		(2)	For an LTW, Facility Management shall evaluate stopping the following 
			activities in addition to those specified in Chapter X, section 6.0c(1).  

			(a)	Activities involving AC powered electrical equipment in direct or 
				indirect contact with explosives regardless of the form of LPS 
				installed.  

			(b)	Outside activities involving explosives.  

			(c)	Activities within “magazine areas” (area dedicated solely to 
				magazines).  See Chapter II, section 17.2o for other requirements.  

			(d)	Activities where extensions of penetrations, bonded or not, are in 
				direct or indirect contact with the explosives.  

			(e)	Positions of hoists, without non-conductive links, and other 
				movable conductive projections into a facility that can be moved or 
				retracted to a maximum distance from explosives or explosive 
				devices.  

			(f)	Explosives operations in structure not equipped with a LPS.  

			(g)	Positions of hoists, without non-conductive links, and other 
				movable conductive projections into a facility that can be moved or 
				retracted to a maximum distance from explosives or explosive 
				devices.  

	d.	Facility Management shall determine in advance of any lightning threat those 
		structures and areas that must be evacuated and at what threat level the evacuation 
		should begin.  Facility Management should evaluate evacuating the following 
		areas as a minimum:  

		(1)	Explosives structures without a LPS.  

		(2)	Magazine areas.  

		(3)	Structures not equipped with a Faraday-like shield LPSs and containing 
			exposed electrostatic discharge sensitive (0.1 joule or less) EEDs.  

		(4)	Structures not equipped with a Faraday-like shield LPS and containing 
			exposed electrostatic discharge sensitive (0.1 joule or less) explosives.  
		(5)	Parked explosives laden vehicles and rail cars. 
 
		(6)	All buildings and areas within public traffic route distance (based on a 
			2.3 psi and the applicable fragment distance as given in DoD 6055.9-STD) 
			of an explosive structure not equipped with a LPS.  

	e.	When Facility Management determines that evacuation of personnel from and 
		around explosives structures is required, the following shall apply:  

		(1)	DOE, NNSA, and DOE/NNSA contractor/subcontractor personnel in the 
			identified buildings and areas shall be evacuated to at least public traffic 
			route distance.  

		(2)	Non-DOE and Non-NNSA contractor/subcontractor personnel shall 
			evacuate to Inhabited Building distance.  

		(3)	The evacuation distances shall be based on the maximum operating 
			quantities and Class/Division of explosives approved for the structure and 
			on applicable psi and fragment distances as given in DoD 6055.9-STD.  

		(4)	In lieu of evacuation, DOE, NNSA, DOE/NNSA contractor/subcontractor, 
			and non-DOE/NNSA contractor personnel are authorized to take shelter in 
			a room or building that provides protection from overpressures in excess 
			of 15.8 kPa (2.3 psi), fragments, and structural collapse in event of an 
			explosion of any adjacent structure containing explosives and not 
			equipped with a LPS.  

		(5)	During evacuation periods, personnel are allowed, at Facility 
			Management’s discretion, to pass within the specified distance of 
			explosives structures not equipped with a LPS if required for evacuation 
			or to gain access to or leave other operating areas.  

7.0	SHUTDOWN OF OPERATIONS

	a.	When operations must be terminated during electrical storms, the following 
		should apply:  

		(1)	Process equipment containing explosives should be stopped as soon as 
			safety permits.  

		(2)	If a building or bay must be evacuated, the minimum number of personnel 
			needed to safely shut down operations that cannot be shut down 
			immediately is authorized to remain at the building.  As soon as shutdown 
			is completed, they shall evacuate.  

		(3)	Explosives testing can continue as long as personnel are not required to 
			leave the test shelter.  

8.0	LIGHTNING WARNING AND PROTECTION PLAN

	a.	Facility Management shall develop and implement a Lightning Warning and 
		Protection Plan (LWPP).  Based on the above requirements of this chapter, the 
		LWPP shall address as a minimum:  

8.1	Evaluation of Lightning Risk

	a.	A uniform site wide methodology should be applied to all the Facility’s structures 
		being evaluated to determine if lightning protection is required for a specific 
		structure.  

	b.	The level of risk that Facility Management is willing to accept for a structure not 
		to have lightning protection.  A uniform site wide risk criteria should be applied 
		to all the facility’s structures.  

8.2	Lightning Protection System Installation

	a.	Identification of the Facility’s site wide competent expert and reviewer on 
		lightning protection systems design, installation, and testing.  

	b.	Acceptable lightning protection systems.  

	c.	Facility’s policy on the installation, retention, and maintenance of air terminals 
		and wire down conductors when the Faraday-like style of lightning protection 
		system is installed.  

	d.	Techniques and procedures for initial installation of each approved lightning 
		protection system.  These, as a minimum, shall include specifications on 
		bonding, surge suppression, separation between bonds and type of conductors, 
		etc.  

	e.	Techniques and procedures for retrofitting structures to a Faraday-like cage form 
		of lightning protection, if a decision is made to retrofit the structure.  

8.3	LPS Inspection and Maintenance

	a.	Procedures for inspecting and validating that installed lightning protection 
		meets the requirements of this Manual and the LWPP.  This area shall include 
		acceptable test instruments, calibration requirements, and acceptable 
		measurement readings.  

	b.	Required visual inspection, electrical testing, and transfer impedance testing and 
		their frequency for the elements of the lightning protection system.
 
	c.	Procedures for documenting and maintaining documentation of required visual 
		inspection, electrical testing, and transfer impedance testing of all elements of 
		the lightning protection system.  

	d.	Required training and qualification of personnel maintaining, inspecting, and 
		testing the lightning protection systems.  

8.4	Sideflash Separation (Standoff) Distances

	a.	Acceptable sideflash separation (standoff) distances for each explosives 
		structure.  

	b.	Methodology for calculating the distances.  

8.5	Lightning Threat

	a.	Levels of threat.  

	b.	Bounding criteria for each threat level, (including safe shutdown, most 
		attainable safe mode of explosive, and evacuation time).  

	c.	Responsibilities for calling a threat.  

	d.	Actions required at each level of threat.  

	e.	Methods of notification of personnel to include those non-related personnel that 
		might be within Inhabited Building Distance of an explosives facility. 
 
	f.	Operations to be shut down during each level of the alert. 
 
	g.	Areas to be evacuated.  

	h.	Identification of safe or sheltered areas.  

	i.	Actions taken by personnel transporting explosives on site.  

	j.	Identification of safe parking areas for vehicles transporting explosives on site. 
 
	k.	When, by whom, how threat is canceled and resumption of activities.
  
	l.	Methods and requirements for testing and evaluating lightning detection 
		equipment.  

	m.	Required training of personnel maintaining, inspecting, and testing the 
		lightning detection systems.  

	n.	Required training of personnel making decisions regarding lightning threat 
		alerts.  

9.0	REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

	a.	The following documents set forth some of the non-DOE procedures to be used in 
		implementing the requirements and recommendations of this chapter.  

		(1)	IEEE 80, Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding.  

		(2)	IEEE 1100, Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding 
			Sensitive Electronic Equipment.  

		(3)	Lightning Protection System Electrical Characterization Results for 
			Pantex Cell 12-44.1, Kimball Merewether, Paris Holmes, James Selberg, 
			Sandia Technical Memorandum, Sandia National Laboratories, 
			Albuquerque, New Mexico, February, 2002.  

		(4)	Lightning Protection System for HE Facilities at LLNL – Certification 
			Template Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, Todd J, Clancy, 
			Mike M. Ong, Charlie G. Brown, Livermore, CA., December 2005.  

		(5)	Maximum Lightning Induced Voltages and Recommended Isolation 
			Distances in Nuclear Explosive Areas at Pantex, Kimball Merewether, 
			Sandia National Laboratories, Albuquerque, New Mexico, December, 
			1997.  

		(6)	Measured Response of Explosive Storage Structures M38, M41, 832B and 
			832D at Lawrence Livermore National Laboratories Site 300 to Direct 
			Flash Attachment of Lightning, Dr. Marvin E. Morris, September 22, 
			1998.  

		(7)	MIL-HDBK-419A, Grounding, Bonding, and Shielding for Electronic 
			Equipment and Facilities, Volumes 1 and 2, US Department of Defense.  
		(8)	NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.  

		(9)	NFPA 780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.  

		(10)	Pantex Lightning Protection Project Team Final Report, Scruggs, 
			Merewether, Ong, Yactor et al, Pantex Plant, Amarillo, Texas, April, 
			1999.  

		(11)	Rocket-Triggered Lightning Studies for the Protection of Critical Assets; 
			Marvin E. Morris, Richard J. Fisher, George H Schnetzer, Kimball O. 
			Merewether, and Roy E. Jorgenson; IEEE Transactions On Industry 
			Applications, Vol. 30, No. 3, May-June 1994.  

		(12)	RPT-MIS-273038, Pantex Lightning Protection Project Team Final 
			Report, Revision 1, April 1999.  

		(13)	UFC 3-570-01, Unified Facilities Criteria, Static and Lightning Protection 
			Systems.  

		(14)	UL 96, Standard for Safety, Lightning Protection Components.  

		(15)	UL 96A, Standard for Safety for Installation Requirements for Lightning 
			Protection Systems.  

APPENDIX A—REFERENCES

American Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists (ACHIH), ACHIH Ventilation 
Manual.  

American National Standards Institute (ANSI), National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI C2.  

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Standard Method for Rubber 
Property—Durometer Hardness, ASTM D-2240-86.  

Defense Logistics Agency, Industrial Engineering Study to Establish Safety Design Criteria for 
Use in Engineering of Explosives Facilities and Operations, AD, 411445, Process Engineering 
Branch, APMED Picatinny Arsenal, Dover, NJ; Defense Technical Information Center, Defense 
Logistics Agency, Cameron Station, Alexandria, VA 22314.  

Defense Logistics Agency, The Air Force Manual for Design and Analysis of Hardened 
Structures, AFWL-TR-74-102, Air Force Weapons Laboratory, Air Force Systems Command, 
Kirtland Air Force Base, NM 87117; ADB004152, Defense Technical Information Center, 
Defense Logistics Agency, Cameron Station, Alexandria, VA 22314.  

Departments of the Army, the Navy, and the Air Force; Structures to Resist the Effects of 
Accidental Explosions; TM 5-1300, NAVFAC P-397, AFM 88-22; Chairman, Department of 
Defense Explosives Safety Board, 2461 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22331.  

Departments of the Army, the Navy, the Air Force, and the Defense Logistics Agency, 
Department of Defense Ammunition and Explosives Hazard Classification 
Procedures, TB 700-2.  

Department of Commerce, IHE Material Qualification Tests, Description, and Criteria, Rev. 1, 
July 1985, National Technical Information Service, U.S. Department of Commerce, 5285 Port 
Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.  

Department of Defense (DoD) Department of Defense Ammunition and Explosives Safety 
Standards, DoD 6055.9-STD, Assistant Secretary of Defense.  (Force Management and 
Personnel), Chairman, Department of Defense Explosives Safety Board, 2461 Eisenhower 
Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22331.  

Department of Energy (DOE), DOE Hoisting and Rigging Standard, DOE-STD-1090 (current 
version).  

DOE, A Manual for the Prediction of Blast and Fragment Loading of Structures, 
DOE/TIC-11268, U.S. Department of Energy, Albuquerque Operations, Amarillo Area Office, 
Facilities and Maintenance Branch, P.O. Box 30030, Amarillo, TX 79120.  

DOE, Nuclear Safety Criteria (for Warhead Storage), DOE-DNA TP-20-7, Classified.  

Keenan, W.A. and J.E. Tancreto, Blast Environment from Fully and Partially Vented Explosions 
in Cubicles, TR-828, Civil Engineering Laboratory, Naval Construction Battalion Center, Port 
Hueneme, CA 93043.  

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 
(1000 Volts Maximum), NEMA Publication No. 250-1979, 2101 L Street N.W., Washington, 
D.C. 20037.  

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals, 
NFPA 45.  

NFPA, National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, ANSI C1.  

NFPA, Life Safety Code, NFPA 101.  

NFPA, Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, NFPA 496.  

NFPA, Powered Industrial Trucks, NFPA 505.  

NFPA, Identification of the Fire Hazards of Materials, NFPA 704.  

NFPA, Lightning Protection Code, NFPA 780.  

Title 49 CFR, Parts 171-177, Transportation, Hazardous Materials Regulations, and Parts 
300-399 (for Driver Selection and Training).  

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Suppressive Shields, Structural Design and Analysis Handbook, 
HNDM-1110-1-2, U.S. Army Corps of Engineering, Huntsville Division, HNDED-CS, P.O. Box 
1600, Huntsville, AL 35807.  

APPENDIX B—INDEX
		Available and usable in the PDF file